Digital PDFs

AA-NF47A-TE

December 1989

492 pages

Original

13MB

Document:	PosTScripT Translators Reference Manual
Order Number:	AA-NF47A-TE
Revision:
Pages:	492
Original Filename:	http://bitsavers.org/pdf/dec/vax/vms/layered_product/AA-NF47A-TE_PostScript_Translators_Reference_Manual_198903.pdf

OCR Text

PosTSCRIPT Translators Reference Manual
Order Number: AA-NF47A-TE

This book describes the ANSI Text, ReGIS, and Tektronix 4010/4014
translators.

Revision/Update Information:

This manual supersedes the Postscript
Translators Reference Manual, AA-JP25B-TK.

Operating System and Version: VAXNMS, Version 5.0
Software Version

digital equipment corporation
maynard, massachusetts

PrintServer, Version 3.0
LN03R ScriptPrinter, Version 2.0

First Printing, October 1986
Revised, June 1987
Updated, July 1987
Revised, November 1988
Revised, March 1989
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear
in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may be
used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment
that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its affiliated companies.

© Digital Equipment Corporation. 1986, 1987, 1988. All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
The READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this document requests the
user's critrcal evaluation to assist in preparing tuture documentation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

COMPACTape
DATATRIEVE
DEC
DEC/CMS
DEC/MMS
DECmate
DECnet
DECserver
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL
EduSystem
IAS

LNOl
LN03
LN03 PLUS
LN03R
LN03R ScriptPrinter
MASSBUS
PDP
PDT
P/OS
PrintServer
PrintServer 20
PrintServer 40
Professional
Rainbow
ReGis

RSTS
RSX
RT
ScriptPrinter
ULTRIX
ULTRIX-32
UNIBUS
VAX
VAXcluster

VMS
VT
VT240
Work Processor

PosTSCRIPT is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated, Mountain
View, California.
Tektronix is a trademark of Tektronix Inc., Beaverton, Oregon.
UNIX is a registered trademark of AT&T Information Systems.
ML-S1096

This document was prepared using VAX DOCUMENT, Version 1.1.

Contents
PREFACE

xvii

SUMMARY OF TECHNICAL CHANGES

xxi

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION TO PosTSCRIPT TRANSLATORS

1-1

CHAPTER 2

ANSI TEXT-TO-POSTSCRIPT TRANSLATOR

2-1

ANSI TEXT IMPLEMENTATION
Initial State
Setup Modules and Forms
Coded Characters
2.1.3.1
Printable Characters • 2-19
2.1.3.2
Control Characters • 2-20
2.1.3.3
Escape Sequences, Control Sequences, and
Control Strings • 2-22
2.1.3.4
Other ANSI Control Strings • 2-25
2.1.3.5
Control Characters in Sequences and Control
Strings • 2-26
2.1.4
Printing Graphics Characters
2.1.4.1
Character Sets, Fonts, and Font Files • 2-27
2.1.4.2
Font Attributes • 2-29
2.1.4.3
Selecting Graphic Character Sets • 2-30
2.1.4.4
Loading, Assigning, and Selecting
Fonts• 2-35
2.1.5
Spacing Functions
2.1.6
Page Print Area and Margins
2.1.6.1
Physical and Logical Page Size • 2-37
2.1.6.2
Page Print Area • 2-37
2.1.6.3
Limit Bounds • 2-39
2.1.6.4
Format Bounds • 2-39
2.1.7
Active Column and Line
2.1.8
Right Margin Flag

2-1
2-2
2-14
2-14

2.1

2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3

2-27

2-36
2-36

2-42
2-43

iii

Character Alignment - First Line on Page
Tab Stops
Selecting Character Attributes
Set/Reset Modes
Miscellaneous Escape and Control Functions

2-43
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-47

TROUBLESHOOTING
Helpful Hints, Problems and Solutions
2.2.1
2.2.1.1
Helpful Hints • 2-47
2.2.1.2
Problems and Solutions • 2-50
Error Handling
2.2.2
2.2.2.1
Control Characters • 2-51
2.2.2.2
Control Sequences • 2-51
Comparison of ANSl-to-Pos1ScR1Pr Translation and LN03
2.2.3
Functionality
2.2.4
Control Characters, Control Sequences, and Future
Devices

2-47
2-47

2.1.9
2.1.10
2.1.11
2.1.12
2.1.13
2.2

CHAPTER 3 ANSI TEXT FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS

3.1

CONTROL CHARACTERS
3.1.1
CO Control Characters
3.1.2
C1 Control Characters

3.2

ESCAPE SEQUENCES, CONTROL SEQUENCES, AND CONTROL
STRINGS
3.2.1
Source of Control Functions
3.2.2
Destination: Level 1, 2, or 3 Device
3.2.3
Control Function Translation
ASCEF - ANNOUNCE SUBSET OF CODE EXTENSION
FACILITIES
CRM - CONTROL REPRESENTATION MODE
CUU - CURSOR UP
DECASFC - AUTOMATIC SHEET FEEDER
CONTROUTRAY SE:LECT
DECATFF - ASSIGN TYPE FAMILY OR FONT
DECAUPSS - ASSIGN USER-PREFERENCE
SUPPLEMENTAL SET

2-51

2-53
2-55

3-1
3-1
3-1
3-6

3-10
3-10
3-11
3-13
3-14
3-16
3-18
3-19
3-21
3-24

DECAWM - AUTOWRAP MODE
DECCAHT - CLEAR ALL HORIZONTAL TABS
DECCAVT - CLEAR ALL VERTICAL TABS
DECCRNLM - CARRIAGE RETURN/NEW LINE MODE
DECDTFF - DELETE TYPE FAMILY OR FONT FILE
DECHTS - HORIZONTAL TAB SET
DECLFF - LOAD FONT FILE
DECOPM - ORIGIN PLACEMENT MODE
DECPSM - HORIZONTAL PITCH SELECT MODE
DECPSP - PROPORTIONAL SPACING
DECRVEC - DRAW RELATIVE VECTOR
DECSHORP - SET HORIZONTAL PITCH
DECSHTS - SET HORIZONTAL TAB STOP
DECSLPP - SET LINES PER PAGE
DECSLRM - SET LEFT AND RIGHT MARGINS
DECSTBM - SET TOP AND BOTTOM MARGINS
DECSTR - SOFT TERMINAL RESET
DECSVTS - SET VERTICAL TABULATION STOPS
DECVEC - DRAW VECTOR
DECVERP - SET VERTICAL PITCH
DECVPFS - VARIABLE PAGE FORMAT SELECT
DECVTS - VERTICAL TAB SET
GSM - GRAPHIC SIZE MODIFICATION
GSS- GRAPHIC SIZE SELECTION
HPA - HORIZONTAL POSITION ABSOLUTE
HPB - HORIZONTAL POSITION BACKWARD
HPR - HORIZONTAL POSITION RELATIVE
JFY - JUSTIFY
LNM - LINE FEED NEW LINE MODE
LS2- LOCKING SHIFT 2
LS3 - LOCKING SHIFT 3
LS1 R - LOCKING SHIFT 1 RIGHT
LS2R - LOCKING SHIFT 2 RIGHT
LS3R - LOCKING SHIFT 3 RIGHT
PFS - PAGE FORMAT SELECT
PUM - POSITIONING UNIT MODE
RIS _,_RESET TO INITIAL STATE
SCS- SELECT CHARACTER SET
SGR- SELECT GRAPHIC RENDITION
SHS - SELECT HORIZONTAL SPACING
SPI - SPACING PITCH INCREMENT
SSU - SELECT SIZE UNIT
SVS - SELECT VERTICAL (LINE) SPACING
TBC-TABULATION CLEAR

3-26
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-33
3-34
3-37
3-39
3-40
3-41
3-44
3-46
3-48
3-50
3-53
3-56
3-57
3-59
3-61
3-63
3-71
3-72
3-74
3-76
3-78
3-80
3-82
3-86
3-87
3-88
3-89
3-90
3-91
3-92
3-100
3-102
3-103
3-106
3-111
3-112
3-114
3-116
3-118

VPA - VERTICAL POSITION ABSOLUTE
VPB - VERTICAL POSITION BACKWARD
VPR - VERTICAL POSITION RELATIVE

SIXEL GRAPHICS

4-1

4.1

USING THE ANSI TEXT/SIXELS TRANSLATOR

4-1

4.2

TERMINOLOGY

4-1

4.3

CONVERTING TO SIXEL DATA

4-3

4.4

PRINTING GRAPHICS AND DRAWINGS

4-6

4.5

SELECTING SIXEL MODE
SIXEL_MODE

4-7
4-9

STRUCTURE OF THE PROTOCOL
Protocol Selector - Formatting Information
The Picture Definition
4.6.2.1
Sixel Data • 4-13
4.6.2.2
Control Codes • 4-17
DECGRA (") - SET RASTER ATTRIBUTES
DECGRI {!) - REPEAT INTRODUCER
DECGCR ($) - GRAPHICS CARRIAGE RETURN
DECGNL (-) - GRAPHICS NEXT LINE
DECGCI {#) - COLOR INTRODUCER

4-11
4-11
4-13

4.7

CHARACTER PROCESSING

4-26

4.8

SIXEL -

ANSI TEXT INTERACTl.ONS

4-27

4.9

COMPATIBILITY WITH EXISTING PRINT DEVICES

4-27

4.10

RESTRICTIONS

4-29

CHAPTER4

4.6

4.6.1
4.6.2

3-119
3-121
3-123

4-19
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-24

CHAPTERS REGIS-TO-POSTSCRIPT TRANSLATOR

5-1

5.1

USING THE REGIS TRANSLATOR

5-1

5.2

REGIS DEFINITION

5-1

REGIS DISPLAY STRUCTURE
[X,Y] Coordinate System
Pixel Vector (PV) System
5.3.2.1
Pixel Vector Multiplier • 5-5

5-2
5-2

REGIS COMMAND STRUCTURE
ReGIS Commands
ReGIS Command Arguments
5.4.2.1
Bracketed Extents • 5-10
Quoted Strings • 5-1 O
5.4.2.2
5.4.2.3
Commas • 5-11
5.4.2.4
Digit Strings • 5-11
5.4.2.5
Options • 5-11
5.4.3
Other Punctuation Significant to ReGIS Syntax
5.4.3.1
Commas and Spaces • 5-13
5.4.3.2
Semicolon • 5-13
5.4.4
Control Characters
5.4.5
ReGIS Default Values Summary
5.4.6
Conventions Used in ReGIS Commands
5.4.7
Conventions Used in ReGIS Examples

5-7
5-7
5-9

5.3

5.3.1
5.3.2

5.4

5.4.1
5.4.2

5.5

REGIS COMMANDS SUPPORTED BY THE TRANSLATOR
SCREEN CONTROL
5.5.1
Screen Control Command Summary
POSITION
Position Command Summary
5.5.2
WRITE CONTROL
5.5.3
Write Control Command Summary
VECTOR
5.5.4
Vector Command Summary
CURVE
5.5.5
Curve Command Summary
POLYGON FILL

5-4

5-13
5-14
5-15
5-17
5-17
5-18

5-19
5-24
5-25
5-32
5-33
5-64
5-66
5-77
5-78
5-95
5-97
vii

5.5.6

Polygon Fill Command Summary
TEXT

5.5.7

Text Command Summary

LOAD
5.5.8

Load Command Summary

MACROGRAPH(@)
5.5.9

Macrograph Command Summary

5.6

REGIS COMMANDS NOT SUPPORTED BY THE TRANSLATOR
5.6.1
Screen Control Command Options
5.6.2
Write Control Command Options
5.6.3
Text Command Options
5.6.4
Load Command Options
5.6.5
Report Command

5-140
5-140
5-140
5-141
5-141
5-141

5.7

TRANSLATOR ENVIRONMENT
5.7.1
Page Output
5.7.2
Fonts
5.7.3
Line Width
5.7.4
Lines
5.7.5
Color
5.7.6
Device Resolution

5-141
5-141
5-142
5-142
5-142
5-142
5-143

CHAPTER 6 TEKTRONIX 4010/4014-TO-PosrSCRIPT TRANSLATOR

viii

5-106
5-107
5-129
5-131
5-135
5-136
5-139

6-1

6.1

USING THE TEKTRONIX 4010/4014 TRANSLATOR

6-1

6.2

TEKTRONIX 4010/4014 IMPLEMENTATION
6.2.1
Operating Modes
6.2.2
Active Position Interaction
6.2.3
Physical Page Mapping
6.2.4
Addressing Limits
6.2.5
Strap Options
6.2.6
Communications
6.2.7
Control Characters

6-1
6-2
6-2

6-3
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-14

6.2.8

6.2.9
6.2.10
6.2.11

6.2.12

6.2.13
6.2.14

Escape Sequences
6.2.8.1
Set Bypass and Mode Sequences • 6-17
Select Character Size • 6-17
6.2.8.2
6.2.8.3
Select Vector Patterns • 6-18
Prevent Responses to CR and LF • 6-18
6.2.8.4
6.2.8.5
Set LCE Flag • 6-19
Delete Character • 6-19
6.2.8.6
Miscellaneous Escape Sequences • 6-19
6.2.8.7
Ignored Escape Sequences • 6-20
6.2.8.8
Changing Operating Modes
Bypass Condition
Alpha Mode
6.2.11.1
Margin Processing • 6-24
6.2.11.2
Alpha Mode Control Characters • 6-25
Graph Mode
Line Patterns • 6-26
6.2.12.1
Line Width • 6-27
6.2.12.2
6.2.12.3
Drawing Commands• 6-27
6.2.12.4
Encoding Coordinates • 6-28
The Extra Byte and High Resolution • 6-29
6.2.12.5
Point Plot Mode
Incremental Plot Mode

6-16

6-21
6-23
6-23

6-26

6-29
6-30

6.3

COMPATIBILITY WITH OTHER TEKTRONIX 4010/4014 DEVICES

6-31

6.4

RESTRICTIONS

6-34

LN03R SCRIPTPRINTER

7-1

7.1

SCRIPTPRINTER ENHANCEMENTS

7-1

7.2

DOWN-LINE LOADED FONT CAPACITY

7-1

7.3

SELECTING A TRANSLATOR

7-2

CHAPTER 7

7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3

ANSI TEXT/SIXEL TRANSLATOR
Resolution for Sixel Graphics
Hints, Problems and Solutions
Unsupported ANSI Translator Features

7-3
7-4
7-4
7-5

7.5

REGIS TRANSLATOR

7-6

7.6

TEKTRONIX 4010/4014 TRANSLATOR

7-6

7.4

CHAPTER 8 PRINTSERVERS

8.1

PRINTSERVER 40 ENHANCEMENTS

8-1

8.2

DOWN-LINE LOADED FONT CAPACITY

8-2

8.3

SELECTING A TRANSLATOR ON VMS

8-2

8.4

SELECTING A FILTER FOR TRANSLATION ON ULTRIX

8-3
8-4
8-6

8.5

8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3

ANSI TEXT/SIXEL TRANSLATOR
Resolution for Sixel Graphics
Hints, Problems and Solutions
ANSI Text Implementation

8-8

8.6

REGIS TRANSLATOR

8-8

8.7

TEKTRONIX 4010/4014 TRANSLATOR

8-9

CHARACTER SETS

A-1

APPENDIX A

8-1

8-7

APPENDIX B

ANSI TEXT TRANSLATOR BUILT-IN FONT IDENTIFICATION

B-1

B.1

BUILT-IN FONT FILE IDS

B-1

B.2

TYPE FAMILY NAMES

B-1

B.3

BUILT-IN TYPE FAMILY NAMES AND IDS, FONT IDS, AND FONT
FILE IDS

B-3

APPENDIX C PRINTABLE DOT PATTERNS FOR SIXEL MODE

GLOSSARY

C-1

Glossary-1

INDEX

lndex-1

FIGURES
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
4-1
4-2
4-3
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5

5-6

Standard· 8-Bit Code Table (Left Half)
Standard 8-Bit Code Table (Right Half)
7·Bit ASCII Code Table
Selecting and Invoking Character Sets
Page Printing Orientation
Margins and Form Length
Slxel Representation
Three Bytes of Buffer Data
Sixel Device Control String (DCS) Envelope
Pixel Vector (PV) Directions
Pixel Vector Multiplication Example
Effective Default Address Range
PV Direction Values
Bounded Sequence Example
Unbounded Sequence Example

2-16
2-17
2-18

2-33
2-38
2-41
4-3
4-4
4-8
5-4

5-6
5-20
5-28
5-29
5-31
xi

5-7
5-8
5-9

5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-34

5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-41
xii

Erase Writing with Negative Pattern Control
Erase Writing with Foreground Specification
Replace Writing Example
Overlay Writing Example
Standard Patterns Display
Standard Patterns
Examples of Binary Patterns
Pattern Multiplication
Negative Pattern Control
Shading Examples
Circle Shading Examples: Without Outlines
Circle Shading Examples: With Outlines
Shading Through the Graph Baseline
Shading· to the Graph Baseline
Circle Shading Example
Incorrect Shading Example
Correct Shading Example
Horizontal Shading Reference Line Examples
Vertical Shading Reference Line Examples
Vertical Shading Reference Line Example
Shading Character Select Argument Example
Incorrect Shading of Complex Graphic Object
Complex Graphic Shading Example
Bar Graph Using Vector Draw Line Arguments
PV Directions Graphic Image
Vector Command Bounded Sequence Example
Bounded Sequence Examples
Vector Command Unbounded Sequence Example
Temporary Write Control Option Example
Circle with Center at Current Position Example
Varying Circle Direction
Circle with Center at Specified Position Example
Effect of Signed Degree Values on Arc
Effect of Position Values on Arc
Effect of Signed Degree Values on Arc

5-36
5-37
5-38
5-39
5-42
5-43
5-44

5-46
5-48
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-53
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-56
5-56
5-58
5-59
5-60
5-62
5-63
5-69
5-70
5-71
5-72
5-74
5-76
5-79
5-81
5-82
5-84
5-85
5-86

5-42
5-43
5-44
5-45
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-56
5-57
5-58
5-59
5-60
5-61
5-62
5-63
5-64
5-65
5-66
5-67
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5

Effect of Specified Positions on Arc
Closed Curve Sequence with Null Position Argument
Closed Figure with and without Null Position Argument
Closed Curve Sequence without Null Position Argument
Open Curve Sequence without Null Position Arguments
Open Curve Sequence with Null Position Arguments
Temporary Write Control Option Example
Vector Option Example
Curve Option
Position Option Example
Temporary Write Control Option Example
Filling a Complex Polygon
Stored Character Format Examples
Character Positioning Argument Example
Display Cell and Unit Cell Size Options Example
Height Multiplier Option Example
Tilt Compass
Character Tilt Option Directions
String Tilt Directions
String/Character Tilt Option Directions
Italic Option· Slant Values
PV Spacing Argument Example
Temporary Option Example
Text Command Temporary Write Control Option Example
Load Character Cell Argument Example
Macrograph Example
Mapping of the Tektronix Drawing Area
7-Bit ASCII Codes
Mode Transition Diagram
Alpha Mode Margin Processing
7-Bit ASCII
British Character Set
DEC Dutch Character Set
DEC Finnish Character Set
French Character Set

5-87
5-89
5-90
5-91
5-92
5-93
5-94
5-98
5-99
5-100
5-1Jl2
5-104
5-108
5-111
5-115
5-116
5-118
5-119
5-121
5-123
5-124
5-126
5-127
5-128
5-134
5-138
6-4
6-6
6-22
6-25
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6

xiii

A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
A-16
A-17
A-18
A-19
A-20
C-1

DEC French-Canadian Character Set
German Character Set
ISO Italian Character Set
Japanese (JIS Roman) Character Set
DEC Norwegian/Danish Character Set
ISO Spanish Character Set
DEC Supplemental Character Set
ISO Latin-1 Character Set - Left Half
ISO Latin-1 Character Set - Right Half
DEC Swedish Character Set
DEC Swiss Character Set
DEC Technical Character Set
DEC Special Graphics Character Set
Norwegian/Danish Character Set
DEC Portuguese Character Set
Printable Dot Patterns for Sixels Mode

A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
A-16
A-17
A-18
A-19
A-20
A-21
C-2

Translator Initial State Values
Initial State Select Graphic Rendition (SGR) Numbers
Translator Initial State Values for A-Size Paper
Translator Initial State Values for A4-Size Paper
Translator Initial State Values for 8-Size Paper
Translator Initial State Values for Legal-Size Paper
Translator Initial State Values for Executive-Size Paper
Translator Initial State Values for 85-Size Paper
Translator Initial State Values for A5-Size Paper
Translator Initial State Values for 84-Size Paper
Translator Initial State Values for A3-Size Paper
Control Character Functions
Control Characters in Sequences and Control Strings
Control Characters in Device Control Strings
94-Character Set Selection
96-Character Set Selection
Character Set Identification

2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-21
2-26
2-27
2-31
2-31
2-32

TABLES
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
xiv

2-18
2-19
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-0
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12

Locking-Shift and Single-Shift Control Functions
Difference Between ANSI Text Translator and LN03 Control
Functions
Printer Levels
Units of Measurement
Initial State SGR Numbers
DECVPFS Selective Parameters
PFS Margins and Format for Executive-Size Paper
PFS Margins and Format for BS-Size Paper {182 x 257 mm)
PFS Margins and Format for AS-Size Paper {148 x 210 mm)
PFS Margins and Format for 84-Size Paper {250 x 353 mm)
PFS Margins and Format for A3·Size Paper {397 x 420 mm)
PFS Margins and Format for 8.5" x 11" Paper {Public)
PFS Margins and Format for 8.5" x 11" Paper {Private)
PFS Margins and Format for A4-Size Paper {Public)
PFS Margins and Format for A4-Size Paper {Private)
PFS Margins and Format for Legal-Size Paper
PFS Margins and Format for B·Size Paper
Character Set Codes
Macro Parameter Selections
Printable Dot Patterns for Sixel Mode
Sixel Graphics Private Control Characters
Graphics ANSI Control Characters
ReGIS Command Summary
ReGIS Default Values
Default Output Map Values
Screen Control Command Summary
Position Command Summary
Standard Pattern Memory Descriptions
Write Control Command Summary
Vector Command Summary
Curve Command Summary
Polygon Fill Command Summary
Standard Character Cell Size Values
Text Command Summary

2-34
2-54
3-12
3-12
3-23
3-64
3-66
3-67
3-68
3-69
3-70
3-95
3-96
3-97
3-97
3-98
3-99
3-104
4-12
4-15
4-17
4-26
5-8
5-15
5-23
5-24
5-32
5-41
5-64
5-77
5-95
5-106
5-113
5-129

5-13
5-14
5-15
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
A-1
B-1
B-2

xvi

Bit Patterns Associated with Hex Codes
Load Command Summary
Macrograph Operation Summary
Translator Supported Tektronix 4010/4014 Emulator Controls
Keys to Generate ASCII Control Characters
Vector Pattern Selection Sequences
Miscellaneous Escape Sequences
Ignored Escape Sequences
Character Sizes
Coordinate Encoding Byte Values
Rules for Sending Shortened Address
Character Set Source Standards
Font File ID Fields
Built-In Font File IDs

5-133
5-135
5-139
6-7
6-16
6-18
6-20
6-20
6-23
6-28
6-29
A-1
B-2
B-3

Preface
Intended Audience
The POSTSCRIPT Translators Reference Manual is for:
•
•

Users whose ANSI, sixel graphics, ReGIS, or Tektronix documents
need conversion to POSTSCRIPT for printing on a POSTSCRIPT printer
Programmers whose creator software produces output in ANSI,
sixel graphics, ReGIS, or Tektronix protocol

Document Structure
The following chapters, appendixes, and a glossary compose the
POSTSCRIPT Translators Reference Manual.

•
•

•
•
•

Chapter 1 presents an overview of POSTSCRIPT translators and the
translator user environment.
Chapter 2 describes ANSI Text implementation, provides troubleshooting information for ANSI-to-POSTSCRIPT translation, and
compares ANSI translation functionality to LN03 functionality.
Chapter 3 describes the ANSI translator-supported control characters, escape sequences, and functions.
Chapter 4 describes in detail the sixel graphics part of the ANSi
Text translator.
Chapters 5 and 6 explain the ReGIS and Tektronix 4010/4014
translators, respectively, in the same manner that Chapters 2 and
3 describe the ANSI Text translator.

xvii

•
•
•
•
•
•

Chapter 7 provides information for ANSI Text (including sixels), ReGIS, and Tektronix 4010/4014 translation specific to the
ScriptPrinters.
Chapter 8 provides information for ANSI Text (including sixels), ReGIS, and Tektronix 4010/4014 translation specific to the
PrintServer print systems.
Appendix A identifies the character sets that the ANSI Text translator supports.
Appendix B explains the· values used in the font file IDs supported
by the ANSI Text translator.
Appendix C shows sixel mode printable dot patterns.
The glossary defines terms associated with ANSl/Sixel, ReGIS,
and Tektronix 4010/4014 translations for printing on POSTSCRIPT
printers.

Associated Documents
Other books associated with POSTSCRIPT and POSTSCRIPT printers are
as follows:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

xviii

POSTSCRIPT Language Tutorial and Cookbook
POSTSCRIPT Language Reference Manual
POSTSCRIPT Language Program Design
Management/User's Guide: VAX PrintServer Client
Installation Guide: VAX PrintServer Client
Management Guide: VAX PrintServer Supporting Host
Installation Guide: VAX PrintServer Supporting Host
VAX/VMS Software Installation Guide: ScriptPrinters
User's Guide: PrintServer DECnet Client for ULTRIX
Installation Guide: PrintServer DECnet Client for ULTRIX
User's Guide: PrintServer TCP I IP Client for ULTRIX
Installation Guide: PrintServer TCP I IP Client for ULTRIX
VAX/VMS Management/User's Guide: ScriptPrinters
Programmer's Supplement: POSTSCRIPT Printers
Font File Format User's Manual

For more information on ReGIS graphics protocol, you may find the
following useful:

•

VT240 Programmer Reference Manual

Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this document:
Convention

Meaning

Uppercase
notation

Type the word or letter exactly as shown.

Lowercase
notation

Substitute a word or value of your choice.

[ ]

Indicates that the enclosed item is optional. Given several
options, you can only select one.

{}

Encloses lists from which one alternative must be chosen.
The choices are listed vertically or separated by a vertical
bar ( I).
Indicates that the preceding item(s) can be repeated one or
more times.

lCTRUxj

Indicates that you should press the key labeled CTRL while
you simultaneously press another key, for example, CTRUZ,
CTRUC, CTRUO.

IRETI

Indicates that you should press the RETURN key.
Used for emphasis. For example, a special word, clotheslining, used for the first time would be italicized and defined
in the glossary. Format for sequences and characters and
parameters from sequences are also italicized.

Italics

Designates a space as part of the format of a sequence.
Spaces appear between characters in sequences for clarity;
they are not part of the format.

xix

Summary of Technical Changes
The ANSI Text translator, Version 3.1, supports the following new
features:
•

•

New control functions
Variable Page Format Select (DECVPFS) control sequence
- Draw Relative Vector (DECRVEC) control sequence
- Control Representation Mode (CRM) control sequence
New parameters for existing control functions
Assign Type Family or Font (DECATFF) device control string
Select Graphic Rendition (SGR) control sequence
Select Size Unit (SSU) control sequence
Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) control sequence
Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP) control sequence
New paper sizes
Executive sizes: 7.5 x 10.5 in. (191 x 267 mm)
Metric, ISO A3: 11.69 x 16.54 in. (297 x 420 mm)
Metric, JIS B4: 10.12 x 14.33 in. (250 x 353 mm)
Metric, JIS B5: 7.17 x 10.12 in. (176 x 250 mm)
Metric, ISO A5: 5.83 x 8.27 in. (148 x 210 mm)

xxi

Chapter 1

Introduction to PosTSCRIPT
Translators
All jobs printed on a DIGITAL POSTSCRIPT printer1 must be encoded
in Adobe's POSTSCRIPT page description language. Translator software
converts a data syntax into POSTSCRIPT. Translators for POSTSCRIPT
conversion discussed in this manual include the following:
•
•
•

ANSI Text (including sixels)
ReGIS
Tektronix 4010/4014
NOTE

The ANSI Text translator processes ANSI and sixel
graphicstogethe~

Each translator converts a single data syntax into POSTSCRIPT, enabling you to use DIGITAL POSTSCRIPT printers.
This manual describes each data syntax and its translation to
POSTSCRIPT. Additional chapters explain translation specific to
DIGITAL's serial line and network POSTSCRIPT printers.
The POSTSCRIPT Translators Reference Manual serves both the user
whose ANSl/sixels, ReGIS, or Tektronix 4010/4014 files require conversion to POSTSCRIPT. for printing and the programmer whose application
software produces output in these data syntaxes.

1 PosTSCRIPI' printer in this text refers to a DIGITAL PoSTSCRIPI' printer.

Introduction to PosTScR1PT Translators

1-1

Software on your system, for example, a text editor or graphics application, generates files in ANSI, ReGIS, or Tektronix 4010/4014. Before
printing, the files require translation to POSTSCRIPT.
You select the proper translator -ANSI Text and Sixels, ReGIS, or
Tektronix 4010/4014 - by using the appropriate qualifier to the print
command specific to your destination printer. Refer to the chapter in
this manual that describes your POSTSCRIPT printer.

1-2 Introduction to PosrScRIPT Translators

ANSI Text

Insert tabbed
divider here.
Then discard
this sheet.

Chapter 2

ANSI Text-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator
The ANSI Text (including sixels) translator converts functions of the
ANSI protocol into POSTSCRIPT. This chapter describes the translatorrecognized ANSI and ISO standard and DIGITAL private control
functions that select character sets and fonts; set tabs, margins, and
spacing; and implement special attributes, such as underlining and
italicizing.
The chapter also contains troubleshooting information for ANSI-toPOSTSCRIPT translation. Other sections compare the operation of
ANSI-translated features for the POSTSCRIPT printer to those of the
LN03 printer. The last section describes the compatibility of the ANSI
translator with existing print devices.
1

NOTE

Not all DIGITAL POSTSCRIPT printers make use of every
feature available in the ANSI Text translator. For example,
not all DIGITAL printers support the same paper sizes. See
the chapter for your printer for specific information.

2.1 ANSI Text Implementation
This section describes the ANSI-to-POSTSCRIPT translation of graphic
characters, control characters, escape sequences, and control strings.

ANSI Text-to-PosrScR1PT Translator 2-1

2.1.1

Initial State
Several initial state values in the ANSI Text translator change; depending on the paper size and orientation parameter you select with
the PRINT command:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

A-size paper, portrait orientation (see Table 2-3)
A-size paper, landscape orientation (see Table 2-3)
A4-size paper, portrait orientation (see Table 2-4)
A4-size paper, landscape orientation (see Table 2-4)
B-size paper, portrait orientation (see Table 2-5)
B-size paper, landscape orientation (see Table 2-5)
Legal-size paper, portrait orientation (see Table 2-6)
Legal-size paper, landscape orientation (see Table 2-6)
Executive-size paper, portrait orientation (see Table 2-7)
Executive-size paper, landscape orientation (see Table 2-7)
B5-size paper, portrait orientation (see Table 2-8)
B5-size paper, landscape orientation (see Table 2-8)
A5-size paper, portrait orientation (see Table 2-9)
A5-size paper, landscape orientation (see Table 2-9)
B4-size paper, portrait orientation (see Table 2-10)
B4-size paper, landscape orientation (see Table 2-10)
A3-size paper, portrait orientation (see Table 2-11)
A3-size paper, landscape orientation (see Table 2-11)

Tables 2-1 and 2-2 list initial state values that remain unchanged
when you select paper size and orientation, using parameters to the
PRINT command. In the ANSI text translator, Version 3.0 and 3.1,
you can use setup modules and forms that include setup modules. The
setup modules can change paper size and orientation, and can override
the initial state values.
Tables 2-3 to 2-11 list initial state values for each paper-size/orientation
parameter. To select the bounds 1 for the paper (media) sizes described
in Tables 2-3 to 2-6, use the PFS value indicated in the table or the
1 Bounds include left, right, top, and bottom margins; line home and line end positions; page home and

page end lines; and width and length of the format area.

2-2 ANSI Text-to-PosTScn1PT Translator

Variable Page Format Select (DECVPFS) control sequence. To select
the bounds for the paper (media) sizes from Tables 2-7 to 2-11, use
the Variable Page Format Select (DECVPFS) control sequence (refer to
Chapter 3).
Table 2-1: Translator Initial State Values
Initial Value
Variables
Origin (DECOPM)

Reset (1/4" down and in from upper left corner)

Position Unit Mode

Reset - character mode

Size Unit

Decipoints - no effect with Position Unit Mode
(PUM) in character mode

Active position

Origin

Lines on a page

Horizontal tabs

Every eight columns (9, 17, 25, and so on)

Autowrap

Set

Linefeed/Newline

Reset

CR/New Line Mode

Reset

Pitch Select Mode

Reset

Proportional Spacing

Reset

Justify

Disabled

SGR attributes

Disabled: bold, underline, italics, strike through

Vertical tabs

Every line on page

ASCII

User preference

DEC Supplemental

ANSI Text-to-PosrScR1PT Translator 2-3

Table 2-2: Initial State Select Graphic Rendition (SGR) Numbers
Font or Type Family
SGR Assignment ID
10

Type family

DBULTNl

DEC built-in-1 family

Type family

Courier family

Type family

RCOURIR
RELITEO

Font

RCOURIRJ02SKOOGG

Courier 10 point, 10 pitch

Font

RELITEOL02SKOOGG

Elite 10 point, 12 pitch

Font

RCOURIR101VKOOGG

Courier 6. 7 point, 13.6 pitch

Font

RCOURIR202SKOOGG

Courier 10 point, 10.3 pitch

Type family

DBULTNl

Type family

DBULTNl

DEC built-in-1 family
DEC built~in-1 family

Type family

DBULTNl

DEC built-in-1 family

2-4 ANSI Text-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

Elite family

Table 2-3 lists the remaining initial values when the default settings
are portrait and landscape orientation for A-size paper, which is
8.5 in x 11 in (216 mm x 279 mm).
Table 2-3: Translator Initial State Values for A-Size Paper
Initial Value for Default Setting
Variables

Portrait

Landscape

SGR

Horizontal pitch

10.00 char/inch;
80.00 char/line

13.60 char/inch;
132.00 char/line

Vertical spacing

6.25 lines/inch

8.33 lines/inch

Left margin

0.00"

0.44"

Right margin

8.00"

10.12"

Top margin

0.00"

Bottom margin

10.56"

7.92"

Line home position

0.00"

0.44"

Line end position

8.00"

10.12"

Page home line

0.00"

Page end line

10.56"

7.92"

Length of format area

10.56"

7.92"

PFS selective parameter

?20

?21

ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 2-5

Table 2-4 lists the remaining initial values when the default settings
are portrait and landscape orientation for A4-size paper, which is
8.27 in x 11.67 in (210 mm x 297 mm).
Table 2-4: Translator Initial State Values for A4-Size Paper
Initial Value for Default Setting
Variables

Portrait

Landscape

SGR

Horizontal pitch

10 .30 char/inch;
80.00 char/line

13.60 char/inch;
132.00 char/line

Vertical spacing

6.25 lines/inch

8.33 lines/inch

Left margin

0.00"

0.73"

Right margin

7.73"

10.41"

Top margin

0.00"

Bottom margin

10.88"

7.92"

Line home position

0.00"

0.73"

Line end position

7.73"

10.41"

Page home line

0.00"

Page end line

10.88"

7.92"

Length of format area

10.88"

7.92"

PFS selective parameter

?22

?23

2-6 ANSI Text-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

Table 2-5 lists the remaining initial values when the default settings
are portrait and landscape orientation for B-size paper, which is
11 in x 17 in (279 mm x 432 mm).
Table 2-5: Translator Initial State Values for B-Size Paper
Initial Value for Default Setting
Variables

Portrait

Landscape

SGR

Horizontal pitch

10.00 char/inch;
105.00 char/line

13.60 char/inch;
224.00 char/line

Vertical spacing

6.25 lines/inch

8.33 lines/inch

Left margin

0.00"

Right margin

10.50"

16.50"

Top margin

0.00"

Bottom margin

16.50"

10.50"

Line home position

0.00"

Line end position

10.50"

16.50"

Page home line

0.00"

Page end line

16.50"

10.50"

Length of form.at area

16.50"

10.50"

PFS selective parameter

?26

?27

ANSI Text-to-PosTScRtPT Translator 2-7

Table 2-6 lists the remaining initial values when the default settings
are portrait and landscape orientation for legal-size paper, which is
8.5 in x 14 in (216 mm x 356 mm).
Table 2-6: Translator Initial State Values for Legal-Size Paper
Initial Value for Default Setting
Variables

Portrait

Landscape

SGR

Horizontal pitch

10.00 char/inch;
80.00 char/line

13.60 char/inch;
172.00 char/line

Vertical spacing

6.25 lines/inch

8.33 lines/inch

Left margin

0.00"

0.44"

Right margin

8.00"

13.12"

'lbp margin

0.00"

Bottom margin

13.56"

0.00"
7.92"

Line home position

0.00"

0.44"

Line end position

8.00"

13.12"

Page home line

0.00"

Page end line

13.56"

7.92"

Length of format area

13.56"

7.92"

PFS selective parameter

?24

?25

2-8 ANSI Text-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

Table 2-7 lists the remaining initial values when the default settings
are portrait and landscape orientation for executive-size paper, which is
7.5 in x 10.5 in (191 mm x 267 mm).
Table 2-7:

Translator Initial State Values for Executive-Size Paper
Initial Value for Default Setting

Variables

Portrait

Landscape

SGR

Horizontal pitch

10.00 char/inch;
70.00 char/line

13.60 char/inch;
95.00 char/line

Vertical spacing

6.25 lines/inch

8.33 lines/inch

Left margin

0.00"

Right margin

7.00"

10.00"

1bp margin

0.00"

Bottom margin

10.00"

7.00"

Line home position

0.00"

Line end position

7.00"

10.00"

Page home line

0.00"

Page end line

10.00"

7.00"

Length of format area

10.00"

7.00"

ANSI Text-to-PosTScRIPT Translator 2-9

Table 2-8 lists the remaining initial values when the default settings
are portrait and landscape orientation for B5-size paper, which is
7.17 in x 10.12 in (182 mm x 257 mm).
Table 2-8: Translator Initial State Values for 85-Size Paper
Initial Value for Default Setting
Variables

Portrait

Landscape

SGR

Horizontal pitch

10.00 char/inch;
64.00 char/line

13.60 char/inch;
89.00 char/line

Vertical spacing

6.25 lines/inch

Left margin

0.00"

8.33 lines/inch
0.00"

Right margin

6.67"

9.62"

Top margin

0.00"

Bottom margin

9.62"

6.67"

Line home position

0.00"

Line end position

6.67"

9.62"

Page home line

0.00"

Page end line

9.62"

6.67"

Length of format area

9.62"

6.67"

2-10 ANSI Text-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

Table 2-9 lists the remaining initial values when the default settings
are portrait and landscape orientation for A5-size paper, which is
5.83 in x 8.27 in (148 mm x 210 mm).
Table 2-9:

Translator Initial State Values for A5-Size Paper
Initial Value for Default Setting

Variables

Portrait

Landscape

SGR

Horizontal pitch

10.30 char/inch;
54.00 char/line

13.60 char/inch;
105.00 char/line

Vertical spacing

6.25 lines/inch

8.33 lines/inch

Left margin

0.00"

Right margin

5.33"

0.00"
7.77"

Top margin

0.00"

Bottom margin

7.77"

5.33"

Line home position

0.00"

Line end position

5.33"

7.77"

Page home line

0.00"

Page end line

7.77"

5.33"

Length of format area

7.77"

5.33"

ANSI Text-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 2-11

Table 2-10 lists the remaining initial values when the default settings
are portrait and landscape orientation for B4-size paper, which is
10.12 in x 14.33 in (250 mm x 353 mm).
Table·2-10: Translator Initial State Values for 84-Size Paper
Initial Value for Default Setting
Landscape

Variables

Portrait

SGR

10.00 char/inch;
96.00 char/line

13.60 char/inch;
188.00 char/line

Horizontal pitch
Vertical spacing

6.25 lines/inch

8.33 lines/inch

Left margin

0.00"

Right margin

9.62"

13.83"

Top margin

0.00"

Bottom margin

13.83"

9.62"

Line home position

0.00"

Line end position

9.62"

13.83"

Page home line

0.00"

Page end line

13.83"

9.62"

Length of format area

13.83"

9.62"

2-12 ANSI Text-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

Table 2-11 lists the remaining initial values when the default settings
are portrait and landscape orientation for A3-size paper, which is
11.69 in x 16.54 in (297 mm x 420 mm).
Table 2-11 : Translator Initial State Values for A3-Size Paper
Initial Value for Default Setting
Variables

Landscape

Portrait

SGR

Horizontal pitch

10.30 char/inch;
115.00 char/line

13.60 char/inch;
218.00 char/line

Vertical spacing

6.25 lines/inch

8.33 lines/inch

Left margin

0.00"

Right margin

11.19"

16.04

'lbp margin

0.00"

Bottom margin

16.04"

11.19"

Line home position

0.00"

Line end position
Page home line

11.19"

0.00"
16.04"

Page end line

16.04"

0.00"
11.19"

Length of form.at area

16.04"

11.19"

0.00"

The following terminal-management sequences reset translator state
variables to their initial values.
Abbreviation

Function Name

DECSTR

Soft terminal reset

RIS

Reset to initial state (use DECSTR)

ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 2-13

2.1.2 Setup Modules and Forms
The ANSI translator, Versions 3.0 and 3.1, support the use of setup
modules to produce an initial state for a print job. Use any valid
ANSI control function to create a setup module and store the setup
file in a device control library. For example, you have several jobs to
be printed with margins other .than the default margins. Rather than
updating each file with control functions to change the margins, you
can include the control functions once in a setup module. You can also
use setup modules to define down-loaded fonts or select a default font.
Then, use the /SETUP qualifier on the PRINT command or on queue
initialization, and the print symbiont sends the setup module before
each job.
If you use /SETUP on the print line as a global qualifier, the translator
receives the setup module before each job.
$ PRINT/SETUP=setup_module/QUEUE=print_queue fileA,fileB,fileC

The symbiont sends the setup module before each file, therefore creating the same initial state for each file - fileA, fileB, and fileC.
In the following example, the translator only gets the setup module
before the processing of fileB. The translator does a normal reset prior
to fileA and fileC.
$ PRINT/QUEUE=print_queue A.TXT,B.TXT/SETUP=setup_module,C.TXT

The ANSI translator supports forms, as an LN03 or line printer does,
only if they are defined in a setup module and the setup module
contains only ANSI syntax.

2.1.3

Coded Characters
The translator processes characters according to the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard X3.4-1986 and the
International Organization for Standards (ISO) Standard ISO 20221984. Determined by their position in the Standard 8-Bit code table,
coded characters divide into the following categories:
•
•

Printable (graphic) characters
Control characters

2-14 ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

ANSI and international standards organizations use a column/row
notation to describe character positions. Column/row notation is convenient, as it closely follows the general practice of classifying bit
combinations in groups of 16 (columns), based on the ASCII table
from X3.4-1977. For example, the ASCII-coded character A is 4/ 1 in
column/row notation. This manual uses the column/row notation.
Most previous DIGITAL printers used 7 data bits. The translator
operates in an 8-bit environment. An 8-bit coded character set has the
following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•

A set of 32 control characters called the CO control set (0/0-1/15
inclusive).
A character Space (SP) in position 2/0 used as either a control
character or a graphic character.
A set of 94 (2/1-7/14 inclusive) or 96 (2/0-7/15 inclusive) graphic
characters called the GL (graphics left) graphics set.
A control character Delete (DEL) in position 7/15.
A set of 32 control characters called the Cl control set {8/0-9/15
inclusive).
A set of 94 or 96 graphic characters called the GR (graphics right)
graphics set.
With 94 characters, 10/1-15/14 are printable, 10/0 translates as
an error, and 15/15 is blank.
With 96 characters, 10/0-15/15 are printable.
NOTE

With a 94-character graphics set in GL, 2/0 and 7/15 are not
included in the GL set; with a 96-character graphics set in
GL, 2/0 and 7/15 are included in the GL set.
With a 94-character graphics set in GR, 10/0 and 15/15 are
not included in the GR set; with a 96-character graphics set
in GR, 10/0 and 15/15 are included in the GR set.
Refer to Figures 2-1 and 2-2 for the standard 8-bit code table and to
Figure 2-3 for the 7-bit ASCII code table.

ANSI Text-to-PostSCRIPT Translator 2-15

Figure 2-1: Standard 8-Bit Code Table (Left Half)

0
0

BITS

.--84 83 B281
0

SOH

STX

1
1

1
1
1

OLE

20
16

DC1
(XONI

3
40
32
20

60
48
30

5
120
80
50

121
81
51

100
64
40

101
65
41

7
140

160
112
70

141
97
61

161
113
71

142

162
114
72

96
60

21
17
11

41
33
21

61
49
31

42
34
22

62
50
32

102
66
42

122
82
52

123

143
99
63

163
115
73

3
3
3

DC3
!XOFFI

23
19
13

43
35
23

63
51
33

103

ETX

EOT

4
4
4

DC4

24
20
14

44
36
:?4

64
52
34

104
68
44

124
84
54

144
100
64

164
116
74

ENO

NAK

25
21
1S

65
S3
3S

105
69
4S

125
8S
5S

145
101
6S

165
117
7S

66
S4
36

106
70
46

126
86
S6

146
102
66

166
118
76

27
23
17

47
39
27

67
5S
37

107
71
47

127
87
S7

147
103
67

167
119

70
56
38

110
72
48

130
88
S8

lSO
104
68

170
120
78

1S1
10S
69

171
121
79

1S2
106
6A

172

{

173
123
78

174
124
7C

}

175
125
70

ACK
BEL

1
1

18
12

DC2

2
2

1
0
0
0

0
NUL

0
0

COLUMN

ROW

s
s
6
6
6
7
7
7

SYN

22
16

ETB

30
24
18

(

11
9
9

31
2S
19

)

Sl
41
29

71
S7
39

111
73
49

131
89
S9

12
10
A

SUB

32
26
1A

S2
42
2A

72
58
3A

112
74
4A

132
90
SA

13
11
8

ESC

33
27
18

34
28
1C

lS
13
0

JS
29
10

16
14
E

36
30
1E

17
15
F

37
31
1F

so.

CAN

14
12

38
26

83
53

10
8
8

37
2S

67
43

40
28

SJ
43
28

;

73
S9
38

113

S4
44
2C

74
60
JC

S5
45

7S
61
30

20
56

46
2E

ASCII CONTROL
SET

57
47
2F

98
62

[

133
91
58

1S3
107
68

114
76
4C

134
92
SC

11 S
77
40

]

13S
93
50

1S4
108
6C
155
109
60

76
62
3E

116
78
4E

136
94
5E

77
63
3F

117
79
4F

7S
48

137
95
5F

n
0

156
110
6E
157
111
6F

DEL

122
7A

176
126
7E
177
127
7F

ASCII GRAPHIC CHARACTER SET

KEY
ASCII CHARACTER

ESC

1 /11

COLUMN/ROW

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

2-16 ANSI Text-to-PosTScR1PT Translator

Mlo--001373

Figure 2-2:

Standard 8-Bit Code Table (Right Half)

1
0

*
*
*
*
IND

SSA
ESA

201
129
81
202
130

DCS
PU1
PU2

82
203
131
83
204
132
20S
133
BS
206
134
86
207
135
B7

HTS

210
136
BB

HTJ

211
137
89

VTS
PLO
PLU
RI
SS2
SS3

STS

212
138
BA
213
139
BB
214
140
BC
21S
141
SD
216
142
BE
217
143
BF

220
144
90
221
14S
91
222
146
92
223
147
93

CCH

224
148

94
22S
149

I~
i
¢

**
¥

SPA

226
150

EPA

96
227
151

*
*
*
CSI

osc
PM
APC

97
230
152
98
231
153
99
232
154
9A
233
155
9B
234
156

9C
235
157
9D
236
lSB
9E
237
1S9
9F

ADD'L CONTROL
SET

**
§
)::{

((

**
**
**
**

1
1

9
200
128
80

NEL

1
0

A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
24S
16S
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
2SO
16B
AS
2Sl
169
A9
252
170
AA
2S3
171
AB
254
172
AC
2SS
173
AD
2S6
174
AE
2S7
175
AF

±
2

12
260
176
BO
261
177
Bl
262
178
B2

263
179
BJ

264
180
B4

µ
~

•

**
1
Q

»
1/4

**
;_

11
240
160
AO
241
161
Al
242
162

1
0

26S
181
BS
266
182
B6
267
183
B7
270
1B4
BS
271
HIS
B9
272
186
BA
273
1B7
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

A
A
A

A
A.
~

e
E
•E•

co
301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
19S
CJ
304
196
C4
30S
197

cs
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200

a
0
0

209
Dl
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
325
213
D5
326
214'
. D6

327
215
D7

330
216
DB

u
u

331
217
D9
332
218
DA

313
203
CB
314

333
219
DB

204

ca
311
201
C9
312
202
CA

31S
205
CD

1
y

316
206
CE
317
207
CF

14
320
208
DO
321

192

1
1

334
220
DC
335
221
DD

336
22?
DE
337

223
DF

13
300

1
0

a
a

15
340
224
EO
341
22S
El

342
226
E2

343
227
E3

a·

a
ae
Cf

e
e
e
e
.....
I
/

·,·

"
0
0

344
228
E4
34S
229
ES
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
EB
351
233
E9
352
234
l:A
353
235
EB

0
0
"o"
<B

1IJ

u
u

354
236
EC
355
237

ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

v
**

360
240
FO
361
241
F1
362
242
F2
363
243
FJ
364
244
F4
36S
245
FS
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
24B
FB
371
249
F9
372
2SO
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
2S4

FE
377
2SS
FF

DEC SUPPLEMENTAL GRAPHIC SET

*C1 - Reserved for future extension.
**Printables - reserved for future extension. Print as a
reversed question mark.

MLQ-001374

ANSI Text-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator 2-17

Figure 2-3:

7-Bit ASCII Code Table

BB
B7

0
B6

0
0

BITS,.---0

NUL

OLE

DC1

100
64
40

120
80
50

160
112
70

42
34
22

62
50
32

102
66
42

122
82
52

142
98
62

162
114
72

23
19
13

43
35
23

63
51
33

103

123
83
53

143
99
63

163
115
73

24
20
14

64
52
34

104

124
84
54

144
100
64

164
116
74

NAK

25
21
15

45
37
25

65
53
35

105
69
45

125
85
55

145
101
65

165
117
75

6
6
6

SYN

26
22
16

46
38
26

66
54
36

126

146
102
66

166
118
76

7
7
7

ETB

27
23
17

47
39
27

67
55
37

106
70
46
107
71
47

ETX

3
3
3

, 0 0

EQT

4
4
4
5
5

DC3
IXOFFI
DC4

36
24

67
43

68
44

86
56

127
87
57

147
103
67

167
119

77
170
120
78

10
8
8

CAN

30
24
18

(

50
40
28

70
56
38

110
72
48

130
88
58

150
104
68
151
105
69

0 ·O

11
9
9

31
25
19

)

51
41
29

71
57
39

111
73
49

131
89
59

32
26
lA

52
42
2A

SUB

112
74
4A

132
90
SA

53
43
28

;

73
59
3B

113

[

133
91
58

54
44
2C

74
60
3C

114
76
4C

55
45
20

75
61
30

115
77
40

]

134
92
5C
135
93
50

56
46
2E

76
62
3E

116
78
4E

57
47
2F

77
63
3F

117
79
4F

10
A

13
11
8

ESC

33
27
18

14
12

34
28
lC

15
13
0

35
29
10

16
14
E

36
30
lE

17
15
F

37
31
lF

c
I

7
140
96
60

22
18
12

BEL

4
60
48

DC2

16
10

161
113
71

ACK

3
40
32
20

ENO

141
97
61

2
2
2

STX

121
Bl
51

101
65
41

0
0

61
49
31

1
1
1

41
33
21

SOH

1
1

21
17
11

IXONI

1
0
0
0

COLUMN

B4 B3 82 Bl ROW

58
3A

75
4B

136
94
5E
137
95
5F

171
121
79
172

152
106
6A

153
107
6B

{

173
123
78

154
108
6C
155
109
60

174
124
7C

}

175
125
70

m
n
0

156
110
6E
157
111
6F

DEL

122
7A

176
126
7E
177
127
7F

KEV
ASCII CHARACTER

ESC

1 /11

COLUMN/ROW

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

2-18 ANSI Text-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

MLQ--001372

If your application only supports 7-bit characters, you can access
the GR printable characters (10/1-15/14) by mapping the character
set directly into GL. Refer to Section 2.1.4.3. Access the Cl control
characters by using the equivalent 7-bit ESC Fe escape sequences. See
Section 2.1.3.2.
2.1.3.1

Printable Characters

Characters from position 2/0 through position 7/14 in 7-bit character
sets and from position 2/0 through position 7/14 and position 10/0
through position 15/15 in 8-bit character sets usually interpret as
printable characters. Actual characters translated depend on the
character set used. Section 2.1.4.3 explains how to select different
character sets. Appendix A shows the character sets the translator
supports.
Translation of characters occurs at the active position on the current
line. The active position consists of an active column (active horizontal
position) and an active line (active vertical position). After translating
a character, the translator increments the active column. After translating a line, the translator increments the active line. The size of the
increments depends on the font or control functions you send before the
printable characters.
When the translator reaches the right margin, the autowrap feature
determines what happens to the next printable character:
•
•

If autowrap is set, an automatic carriage return/line feed executes.
If autowrap is reset (disabled), the translator ignores incoming
characters until the active position returns within the format
bounds due to a carriage return or an absolute positioning command.

Space characters (SP) act as printable characters.
If a character prints past the last line on a page, the character forces
a Form Feed. A Form Feed (FF) sets the first character :flag and
clotheslining occurs.
Clotheslining is a condition where the translator modifies the active
position to align the tops of characters on a line with the top of the
first character of the line. The translator accomplishes clotheslining
by adjusting the active position downward a distance equal to the
difference between the top of the first character and its baseline.
Characters of different sizes aligned this way resemble clothes hanging
on a line. Clotheslining occurs when the first character :flag is set.
ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 2-19

Vertical positioning commands, such as Vertical Tab (VT) and Form
Feed (FF), set the first character flag. When the translator is in
character mode, selected by the PUM sequence, Vertical Position
Absolute (VPA) sets the first character flag.
Using Position Unit Mode (PUM), you select either character mode or
unit mode. Character mode exists for compatibility with older devices.
Unit mode selects pixels, centipoints, or decipoints, according to the
setting of Select Size Unit (SSU) sequence.
2.1.3.2

Control Characters

A control character is a single-character control function that starts,
modifies, or stops a control function. Control characters do not print,
but they establish conditions for printing and processing characters. In
the 8-bit translator environment, control characters form two groups:
•
•

CO (columns 0 and 1 in all character sets)
Cl (columns 8 and 9 in 8-bit character sets)

Table 2-12 lists the control characters supported by the translator.
Control characters in columns 8 and 9 of the Standard 8-Bit Character
chart (Figure 2-2) contain the Cl control characters. You can only use
Cl codes in an 8-bit environment. In 7-bit mode, those characters use
a 2-character escape sequence of the form:

ESCFe
where:

ESC

is escape sequence introducer, 1111

is character from columns 4 and 5 from Figure 2-3

Column 4 of Table 2-12 shows equivalent 7-bit escape sequences.

2-20 ANSI Text-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

Table 2-12:

Name

Control Character Functions
8-Bit
Abbreviation Character

7-Bit
Sequence

Application Program
Command

APC

9/15

ESC _ (1111 5/15)

Backspace

0/8

Cancel

CAN

118

Carriage Return

0/13

Control String
Introducer

CSI

9/11

118
0/13
ESC [ (l/11 5/11)

Device Control String

DCS

9/0

ESC P (1/11 5/0)

Escape

ESC

1111

Form Feed

0/12

Horizontal Tab

0/9

Horizontal Tab Set

HTS

8/8

0/9
ESC H (l/11 4/8)

Index
Line Feed

IND

8/4

ESC D (1111 4/4)

0/10

Next Line

NEL

8/5

0/10
ESC E (l/114/5)

Operating System
Command
Partial Line Down

osc

9/13

ESC ] (1/11 5/13)

PLD

8/11

ESC K (l/11 4/11)

Partial Line Up

PLU

8/12

ESC L (l/11 4/12)

Privacy Mode

9/14

ESC " (1/11 5/14)

Reverse Index
Shift In

8/13

ESC M (1/11 4/13)

0/15

Shift Out

0/14

Single Shift 2

SS2

8/14

0/14
ESC N (l/11 4/14)

Single Shift 3

SS3
ST

8/15
9/12

ESG 0 (l/11 4/15)
ESC \ (1/11 5/12)

String Terminator
Substitute

SUB

1110

Vertical Tab

0/11

Vertical Tab Set

VTS

8/10

0/11
ESC J (1/11 4/10)

ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 2-21

NOTE

In 7-bit mode, you cannot access the GR set (graphics right);
therefore, you must invoke the desired character set into GL
(graphics left). You do not convert the printable characters in
columns 10 through 15 of 8-bit character sets.
2.1.3.3

Escape Sequences, Control Sequences, and Control Strings
Escape sequences, control sequences, and control strings provide control
functions not provided by the control characters of the character set.
The translator interprets control functions according to ANSI X3.64 and
ISO 6429. These sequences and strings use two or more bytes to define
a function. Each format includes an introducer character, optional
intermediate characters, and a final character. Control sequence and
control string formats have parameters preceding the intermediate
characters.

Spaces appear between characters for clarity; they are not part
of the format. The letters "SP" (2/0) designate a space as part of the
format of a sequence, as in the following example:
CSI

The format for an escape sequence is as follows:
ESC intermediate final
where:

ESC
intermediate

is the escape sequence introducer, 1111
is a list of intermediate characters (0 or more), 2/0-2/15

final

is a final character, 3/0-7/14
NOTE

To make the manual more readable, ASCII characters are
used to illustrate the sequences. Only the codes indicated
{l/11 or 2/0--7/14) are an accurate representation of the
sequence. The ASCII characters may not be in the selected
keyboard set or may have a different coding.

2-22 ANSI Text-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

The format for a control sequence is as follows:

CS! param intermediate final
where:
CSI
param

is the control sequence introducer, 9/11
is a list of parameters (0 or more), 3/0-3/15

intermediate
final

is a list of intermediate characters (0 or more), 2/0-2/15
is a final character, 4/0-7/14

The control sequence introducer is the Cl control character CSI (9/11).
You can also use the equivalent 7-bit sequence, ESC (1/11) [ (5/11).
Control sequence parameters are unsigned positive decimal integers,
with the most significant digit sent first. If you use a decimal point
(2/14) in a parameter, the translator ignores the command. Any parameter greater than 232 - 1 is set to 232 - 1. If you do not specify a
value, the translator assumes a 0 value. A 0 value or omitted parameter selects the translator's default value for the sequence. For most
sequences, the default value is 1.
Parameter strings in control sequences are of two types: numeric and
selective. Numeric parameters pass numeric values to the translator
and are represented by the symbols Pn, Pnl, Pn2, and so forth. Ps, Psl,
Ps2, and so forth, identify selective parameters. Selective parameters
take an entry from a list, specified with the control sequence. Both
types of parameters have the same form. A single sequence may use up
to 16 parameters, separated by semicolons.
If the first character in a parameter string is a question mark (3/15), it
indicates that DIGITAL private parameters follow.

ANSI Text-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 2-23

The format for a device control string is as follows:

DCS P. ..P,1...1,F string ST
where:
DCS

is the device control string introducer, 9/0

P. •. P,I...l,F

is the protocol selector

P. ..P

is a list of protocol selector parameters (0 or more groups),
3/0-3/15
is protocol selector intermediate characters (0 or more), 2/02/15

I...I
F

is the protocol selector final character, 4/0-7/14

string

is data

is the string terminator, 9/12

The device control string introducer (DCS) is equivalent to the 7-bit
sequence, ESC (1/11) P (510). The format of the protocol selector and of
a control sequence is similar - except for the introducer character (CSI
or DCS).
Following the protocol selector is the data. See the particular sequence
for more details on the data format.
ST (9/12) signals the end of a device control string. You can also use
the equivalent 7-bit sequence, ESC (1/11) \ (5/12). Once in DCS mode,
the translator remains in DCS mode until it recognizes a ST or until
one of the following errors occurs:
•
•
•

ESC
CAN
Cl control character

Depending on the control string, SUB causes an exit from DCS mode.
See Table 2--14.
·
If the translator receives a known ·protocol selector while translating
the control string, it processes data according to that protocol. If the
translator does not recognize the protocol selector, it ignores the invalid
data and returns to default string processing until the end of the string.

2-24 ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Device Control Strings supported by the translator include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.1.3.4

Sixel graphics - DCS Psl; Ps2; Pn3 q picture_definition ST
Assign font (DECATFF) - DCS Psl ; Ps2 } id_string ST
Assign user-preference supplemental set (DECAUPSS) - DCS Ps !
u designation-data ST
Delete font (DECDTFF) - DCS Ps - id_string ST
Load font file (DECLFF) - DCS Psl ; Ps2 ; Ps3 y font_record(s)
comment_record ST
The translator ignores any other device control strings

Other ANSI Control Strings
The ANSI Text translator supports one of four types of control stringsthe Device Control String (DCS), which is discussed in the previous
section. The other three control strings receive support at some level
(application program, operating system, terminal driver). The translator recognizes the other three introducer characters and enters its
ignore mode until receipt of the string terminator. The four types and
their formats are as follows:

•
•
•
•

Application Program Command - APC (9/15) D... D ST (9/12)
Device Control Strings - DCS (9/0) D... D ST (9/12)
Operating System Command - OSC (9/13) D... D ST (9/12)
Privacy Message - PM (9/14) D... D ST (9/12)

Each control string has its own introducer character: APC, DCS, OSC,
PM. 7-Bit equivalents are ESC _ (1/11, 5/15), ESC P (1/11, 5/10), ESC]
(1/11, 5/13), and ESC A (1/11, 5/14), respectively. The command string,
D...D, is unique for each control, but contains characters in the range
0/8-0/13 and 2/0-7/14, inclusive. All control strings end with the String
Terminator (ST) control character. ESC \ (1/11, 5/12) is the 7-bit
equivalent.

ANSI Text-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 2-25

2.1.3.5

Control Characters in Sequences and Control Strings
Tables 2-13 and 2-14 illustrate how control characters interact with
escape sequences, control sequences, and device control strings. Table
2-14 shows how control characters operate in specific device control
strings.
Table 2-13: Control Characters in Sequences and Control Strings
Control Character Action
Control
Escape
Character Sequence

Control
Sequence

ANSI
Control String

ESC

Same

Depends on protocol,
see Table 2-14

Same

Depends on protocol

Same

CAN
SUB
Other
cos
Cls

Ends sequence, starts
new escape sequence
Ends sequence, returns
to text mode
Ends sequence, returns
to text mode
Processed in text mode
as if received before
sequence
Ends sequence, performs
normal function

2-26 ANSI Text-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator

Table 2-14: Control Characters in Device Control Strings
Handling of Control Characters
ControlString

Supports

SUB

Ignores

Sixel

BEL, SI, SO

Treats as a?

Other COs

DECATFF

Terminates mode

Other COs

DECAUPSS

Terminates mode

Other COs

DECDTFF

Terminates mode

Other COs

DECLFF

Terminates mode

Other COs

Others

Other COs

Terminates mode

2.1.4 Printing Graphics Characters
POSTSCRIPT printers use character sets and fonts to create printed
characters. You can use the character sets and fonts that come with
your printer or you can add others. ANSI translation supports the
font files on your printer that correspond to the LN03-base fonts and
down-line loaded font files from the host computer in DIGITAL Font
File Format.
The following sections explain how to select character sets and fonts.
However, before you use these procedures, you should understand how
your printer uses character sets and fonts. The next section describes
relevant terms.
2.1.4.1

Character Sets, Fonts, and Font Files

To print a document, using the translator, you select a character set
and determine the appearance of your printed characters as to style,
size, and attributes. To do this, you select a combination of an Assign
Type Family or Font (DECATFF) selective parameter and control
functions that select a single attribute. Functions that select these
attributes include:
•
•
•
•

Graphic Size Selection (GSS) parameter for size
Graphic Size Modification (GSM) parameter for proportion
Select Graphic Rendition (SGR) parameters for style and weight
Select Character Set (SCS) parameter for a character set

ANSI Text-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 2-27

Graphic character sets are ordered groups of 94 or 96 characters. Each
character is coded in the code table for that graphic character set. See
Appendix B for the built-in graphic character sets that the ANSI Text
translator supports.
Fonts determine the size and style of printed characters. For example,
a Courier 10-point font describes the type family (Courier) and size (10
point) of the character.
Fonts and character sets are· independent of each other. You need
both a font and a character set to print characters. The character set
specifies what character (for example, a capital letter A) to translate,
and the font specifies how that character prints (size, style, type
design).
Your printer gets the data for character sets and fonts from font files.
Each font file contains the data for a unique combination of one font
(type family and size) and one character set. An exception exists.
Rather than using font files for all National Replacement Character
(NRC) sets, the translator recognizes a pair of matching ASCII and
DEC Supplemental font files and creates the NRC font file from them.
For example, the translator selects the ASCII Courier 10-point font file
and DEC Supplemental Courier 10-point font file to create a French
Courier 10-point font file. See Appendix A for the NRCs supported by
the ANSI translator.
To describe the printed material for your document, select one of the
following:
•

•

Type family mode (7 characters):
DECATFF selective parameter Ps1=2 to select the type family. Use
dedicated control functions to select the other six attributes and the
character set.
Font file mode (12-characters):
Default DECATFF selective parameter Psl=l (0 or omitted) to
select the type family, spacing, point size, and scaling. Use dedicated control sequences to select the other three attributes and the
character set.
Font file mode (16-characters):
DECATFF selective parameter Ps1=3 to select the type family,
spacing, point size, scaling, style, weight, and proportion. Use a
dedicated control function to select the character set.

Use either the type family mode or the font file mode. Using both
modes in the same file can be confusing.
2-28 ANSI Text-to-PosTScRIPT Translator

2.1.4.2

Font Attributes
Each font has attributes that define the appearance of characters. The
parentheses below contain examples of each attribute. The attributes
are as follows:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Type family (Courier, Elite)
Spacing (proportional or fixed)
Type size (10 point; 1 point = 1/72 inch)
Scale factor (1:1, vertical to horizontal comparison to a standard
height-width ratio)
Type style (normal, italic)
Character weight (normal, bold)
Character proportion (normal, expanded, condensed)

One of the standard fonts used in your printer is Courier 10 pitch,
monospaced, 10 point, with 1:1 scaling, and normal type style, character weight, and character proportion.
A type family identifies a group of fonts related in design, but differing
in the remaining six attributes: spacing, type. size, scale factor, type
style, character weight, and character proportion. For example, two
standard type families. used in print devices are Courier and Elite.
Spacing is either monospaced or proportional spaced but not both.
A type family can contain both monospaced and proportional spaced
fonts. You use the device control string DECPSP (Proportional Spacing)
to enable or disable proportional spaced printing for proportional
spaced fonts.
Type size· measures the distance between base lines when fonts are
set solid. That is, a 10-point type size, as in Courier 10 point implies
a 10-point font character size on a 12-point field (distance between
the top of characters printed one above the other. You determine font
height and width with the Graphic Size Selection (GSS) sequence.
Width is proportional to the selected height. For example, the width of
a 10-point font is 10 pitch. A point being 1/72" and pitch is the number
of characters/inch. Ten point = 10 1/72".

The scale factor of a font is a ratio compared to a font height-width
standard. To change the height-width ratio of a font, you use the
Graphic Size Modification (GSM) sequence.

ANSI Text-to-POSTScn1PT Translator 2-29

Type style refers to italicized or vertical printing options. Specifying
italicized characters uses the Select Graphic Rendition (SGR) sequence.
Character weight also uses the Select Graphic Rendition (SGR)
sequence for its implementation. Choose normal, faint, or bold for the
darkness of the font.
Character proportion defines character aspect ratio and spacing.
Select condensed, regular, or expanded characters, using the GSM
sequence.
2.1.4.3

Selecting Graphic Character Sets

Graphic character sets reside in your printer or can be down-line
loaded, using the DECLFF control string. ASCII, DEC Supplemental,
DEC Technical, and VTlOO Line Drawing are examples of character
sets residing in your printer. You select a character set for printing as
follows:
1. Designate the set as GO, G 1, G2, or G3.
2. Map the designated set into the graphic left (GL) or graphic right
(GR) set.

You do not have to select a character set every time you use the
ANSI text translator. Use the default character sets. When you call
the translator, using the DATA_TYPE parameter with the PRINT
command, the following sets are in GO, Gl, G2, and G3:
•
•
•
•
•

GO= ASCII
Gl =ASCII
G2 = User Preference
G3 = User Preference
User Preference= DEC Supplemental

You can designate only a default character set or a character set from
a down-line loaded font file. You can designate any of the standard
character sets by using the following escape sequence:
ESC Ji 1213 F

The first intermediate character (1 1 ) selects either the 94-character
or 96-character repertory along with its destination - GO, G 1, G2, or
G3. 12, 13, and the final character (F) names the character set in the
specified repertory. The translator supports up to a 3-character name.
For example, ESC (
1, ESC ( 1, and ESC ( 1 are valid.
11 11

2-30 ANSI Text-to-PosrScRIPT Translator

To select a 94-character set for GO, G1, G2, or G3, choose one of the
following from Table 2-15 as the intermediate character (11) in the
escape sequence:
Table 2-15:
Character

94-Character Set Selection
Set Selection
Code

Left parenthesis (( )

2/8

GO (initial setting for GL)

Right parenthesis ( ))

2/9

Asterisk(*)

2/10

G2 (initial setting for GR)

Plus sign (+)

2/11

To select a 96-character set for G1, G2, or G3, choose one of the following from Table 2-16 as the intermediate character (1 1 ) in the escape
sequence:
Table 2-16:
Character

96-Character Set Selection
Set Selection
Code

Hyphen(-)

2/13

Period(.)

2/14

Slash(/)

2/15

You cannot designate a 96-character set into GO.
To select a character set, choose one of the character set identifiers
from Table 2-17 as the final character (F) 1 in the escape sequence.

1 In the case of DEC Supplemental (%5) and DEC Portuguese (%6), you select the intermediate (!2) and

final (F) characters in the escape sequence.

ANSI Text-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 2-31

Table 2-17: Character Set Identification
Character Set
Character Set
Repertory
Identifier

Code

British

4/1

ASCII

B (initial setting
for Gland GO)

4/2

DEC Dutch

3/4

DEC Finnish

3/5

French

5/2

DEC French-Canadian

3/9

German

9
K

4/11
5/9

ISO Italian

JIS Roman
DEC Norwegian/Danish

5/10

3/6

ISO Spanish

5/10

DEC Swedish

317

DEC Swiss

3/13

Norwegian/Danish

6/0

DEC Supplemental

94
94

2/5, 3/5

DEC Technical

3/14

DEC Special Graphics

3/0

ISO Latin-1 Supplemental 96

4/1

DEC Portuguese

2/5, 3/6

User Preference
Supplemental

< (initial setting
for G2 and G3)

3/12t

tBy default, User Preference Supplemental is DEC Supplemental to ensure compatibility
with the LN03.

2-32 ANSI Text-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

Figure 2-4 shows the process of selecting and invoking character sets.
Figure 2-4:

Selecting and Invoking Character Sets

OR
ANNOUNCER
SEQUENCES

....,

r- -

INVOKING

"INVOKING"
SEQUENCES
(LOCKSHIFT &
SINGLE SHIFT)
/ANNOUNCERS

:a
L

G)Lso
@LS1

G)ss2
OR LS2

0LS1R
©ss3

OR LS3

@LS2R

CZ)LS3R

"DESIGNATING"
SEQUENCES
(SCS)
/ANNOUNCERS

SELECTING

DECAUPSS

ML0-001375

ANSI Text-to-PosTScRIPT Translator 2-33

Using the Assign User-Preference Supplemental Set (DECAUPSS)
device control string, you can select the supplemental character set to
be designated by the Select User-Preference Supplemental Set (SCS)
sequence. The format for DECAUPSS is as follows:
DCS

9/0

3/0-3/15

2/1

D ••• D

7/5

ST
9/12

Ps selects a 94-character or 96-character set and D ...D designates the
specific supplemental character set.

You can assign DEC Supplemental or ISO Latin-1 Supplemental to
User Preference Supplemental; select User Preference Supplemental as
GO, Gl, G2, or G3, and then map GO, Gl, G2, or G3 to GL or GR.
See Chapter 3 for more information on DECAUPSS.
You can lock (map) the GO, Gl, G2, or G3 character set into GL or GR
memory by using the locking-shift (LS) control functions in Table 2-18.
The character set remains until you lock another set into GL or GR.
Table 2-18: Locking-Shift and Single-Shift Control Functions
Abbreviation

Control Name

Coding

Function

LSO
LSl

Lock Shift GO
Lock Shift G1

Invoke G1 into GL

LSlR

Lock Shift Gl,
Right

SI
so
Esc . . .

LS2

Lock Shift G2

ESCn

Invoke G2 into GL

LS2R

Lock Shift G2,
Right

ESC}

Invoke G2 into GR

LS3
LS3R

Lock Shift G3
Lock Shift G3,
Right

ESCo
ESC I

Invoke G3 into GL
Invoke G3 into GR

SS2

Single Shift 2

ESCN

Invoke G2 into GL for one
character

SS3

Single Shift 3

ESCO

Invoke G3 into GL for one
character

Invoke GO into GL
Invoke G 1 into GR

No way to lock GO into GR

2-34 ANSI Text-to-PosTScR1PT Translator

You can select a single character from the G2 or G3 character set by
using the single-shift (SS) control functions from Table 2-18. The SS
functions temporarily store the G2 or G3 set in GL. After translating
the single character, the translator returns to the set locked in GL.
The Announce Subset of Code Extension Facilities (ASCEF) escape
sequence (announcer) indicates which subset of code extension facilities
or what level of the 8-bit ASCII code to use for following information
interchanges. Announcers are macros that incorporate the effects of
Select Character Set (SCS) and locking-shift (LS) sequences. Levels 1
(ESC SP L) and 2 (ESC SP M) indicate the following:
•
•

ASCII is designated into the GO set and invoked into GL.
ISO Latin-1 Supplemental is designated into Gland invoked into
GR.

Level 3 (ESC SP N) indicates:
•

ASCII is designated into the GO set an~ invoked into GL.

The level selected remains in effect until the translator receives another
Announce Subset of Code Extension Facilities sequence or a reset
sequence.
2.1.4.4

Loading, Assigning, and Selecting Fonts

Your printer supports fonts permanently resident in the translator and
down-line loaded fonts in DIGITAL Common Font File Format. Written
in ANSI protocol, down-line loaded font files require translation into
POSTSCRIPT. Up to 32 fonts are available for down-line loading to your
POSTSCRIPT printer when you use the ANSI translator, Version 3.0 or
3.1.
If printer memory allotted to down-line loaded fonts is full, the translator caches fonts in the printer memory. Printing of your file is slower if
the translator needs to cache fonts. Memory size allotted to down-line
loaded fonts varies with the particular printer.
NOTE

The ANSI Text translator does not support PrintServer 40
built-in fonts that are not also LN03 built-in fonts.

ANSI Text-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 2-35

The translator supports the following functions associated with fonts:
Abbreviation

Function Name

DECATFF
DECLFF

Assign Type Family or Font

DECDTFF
GSM
GSS

SGR

Load Font File
Delete Family Type or Font File
Graphic Size Modification
Graphic Size Selection
Select Graphic Rendition

2.1.5 Spacing Functions
Horizontal and vertical pitch parameters determine the spacing of lines
and characters on a page. The following sequences modify spacing
parameters:
Abbreviation

Function Name

DECSHORP

Set Horizontal Pitch

DECVERP

Set Vertical Pitch
Select Character (Horizontal) Spacing

SHS

svs
SPI

Select Vertical Spacing
Spacing Increment

The ANSI translator supports spacing functions that allow the printing
of a font at a pitch other than the one for which it was designed.

2.1.6

Page Print Area and Margins
This section describes the following features of a page: physical versus
logical page size, print area, and margins.

2-36 ANSI Text-to-PostSCRIPT Translator

2.1.6.1

Physical and Logical Page Size
Each page has a logical and a physical page size associated with it.
The physical size consists of the physical dimensions of the paper. You
specify the physical size with a size switch on a printer or with the
SHEET_SIZE parameter on the PRINT command.

The logical size is the page size that you specify to the translator with
the Page Format· Select (PFS), Variable Page Format (DECVPFS)1
control sequences, or with the PAGE_SIZE parameter on the PRINT
command. Printable area and margins of the page are in part dependent on the logical size.
To translate and print a page correctly, make certain that the logical
and physical page sizes are the same. Selecting a paper size with a
switch on a printer does not produce translator output for that paper,
unless the proper control function is associated with the file being
translated.
NOTE

The ANSI translator supports paper sizes that may not be
available on your printer. Selecting an unsupported paper
size will yield improper results. For example, you format
a file to print on legal-size paper, then send the file to an
LN03R, which does not support legal-size paper. The LN03R
prints the file, formatted for legal-size output, on an A-size
sheet of paper.
2.1.6.2

Page Print Area

Two factors define the size of your printed page: your printer's scanning
limitations and the page margins. Initial values produce the following
page areas for resident fonts:
Landscape Font

Portrait Font

66 lines/page

132 characters/line

80 characters/line

Refer to Figure 2-5 for a diagram showing landscape and portrait page
printing orientations.
1 Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support DECVPFS.

ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 2-37

Figure 2-5:

Page Printing Orientation

ORIGIN ___. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
....-~~~~~~~~~~---y
-- HORIZONTAL
DIRECTION
LANDSCAPE ORIENTATION

•x

(8.5 in. X 11.0 in. STANDARD)
(8.26 in. X 11.7 in.-A4)

VERTICAL
DIRECTION

ORIGIN ___. . . - - - - - - - - - - - .

....------x
-- HORIZONTAL
DIRECTION

PORTRAIT
ORIENTATION
(8.5 in. X 11.0 in.
STANDARD)
(8.26 in. X 11. 7 in.-A4)

y
VERTICAL
DIRECTION
.___ _ _ _ _ _ _ __. ..__ BOTTOM EDGE
ML0·001376

Settings of the lines/page and settings of the left and right and top
and bottom margins determine the print area. Select these settings by
using the Set Lines Per Physical Page sequence (DECSLPP), the Set
Top and Bottom Margin sequence (DECSTBM), and the Set Left and
Right Margin sequence (DECSLRM). As an alternative, use either the
Page Format Select (PFS) sequence or the Variable Page Format Select
(DECVPFS) sequence, which allows you to set your page format with
one command. DECVPFS1 specifies values for nonstandard sizes of
paper (refer to Chapter 3 for more information).

1 Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support DECVPFS.

2-38 ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

2.1.6.3

Limit Bounds

Characters only print within the limit bounds - top, bottom, left, and
right margins collectively. The limit bounds either contain or lie inside
the origin.
To set the limit bounds, use the following sequences:
•
•
•
•

PFS - CSI Ps SP J
DECVPFS - CSI Pnl ; ... Pnll SP z2
DECSLRM - CSI Pnl ; Pn2 s
DECSTBM - CSI Pnl ; Pn2 r

When you use the following sequences, the limit bounds change:
•
•
•
•

RIS-ESC c
DECSTR - CSI ! p
DECSLPP - CSI Pn t
DECSHORP - CSI Ps w

The following sequences use the limit bounds:
•
•
2.1.6.4

HPA - CSI Pn '
VPA - CSI Pn d

Format Bounds

Page home line, page end line, line home position, and line end position
collectively form the format bounds. The format bounds lie inside or
are equal to the limit bounds. Page home line is typically the same as
the top margin. A form feed (FF) moves the active position to the page
home line. Page end line is the last line where characters print before
causing a form feed. This line typically equals the bottom margin.
A carriage return (CR) moves the active horizontal position to the
line home position, typically the same as the left margin. Line end
position is the right edge of the printed page, usually equal to the right
margin. For variations, refer to the descriptions of PFS and DECVPFS
in Chapter 3.

2 Use DECVPFS to select values for nonstandard paper sizes. Versions of the ANSI translator prior to

Version 3.1 do not support DECVPFS.

ANSI Text-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 2-39

To set the format bounds, use one of the following sequences:
•
•

Page Format Select (PFS)
Variable Page Format Select (DECVPFS)

When you use the following sequences, the format bounds change:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Set Left and Right Margins (DECSLRM)
Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM)
Reset to Initial State CRIS)
Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR)
Set Lines Per Page (DECSLPP)
Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP)

The following controls and sequences use the format bounds:
•
•
•
•

Carriage Return (CR)
Form Feed (FF)
Justify (JFY)
Autowrap Mode (DECAWM)

Margin-control sequences supported by the translator include the
following:
Abbreviation

Function Name

DECSLPP
DECSLRM
DECSTBM
DECVPFS1
PFS

Set Lines/Physical Page
Set Left and Right Margins
Set Top and Bottom Margins
Variable Page Format Select
Page Format Select

1Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support DECVPFS.

Figure 2-6 shows the relative positions of the page margins and format
boundaries.

2-40 ANSI Text-to-PosTScRtPT Translator

Figure 2-6:

Margins and Form Length

NOTE
WHEN PAGE FORMAT SELECT IS ACTIVE, THESE HOME POSITIONS ARE
SET AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM MARGINS FOR AN EXTENDED FORMAT.
THEY ARE SET INSIDE THE MARGINS FOR A NORMAL FORMAT.
RIGHT
MARGIN

LEFT
MARGIN

r -----1

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

"""-"
HORIZONTAL
TABS

- -,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

L-------...J
ML0-002061

ANSI Text-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 2-41

2.1.7

Active Column and Line
The active column and active line represent the position on the paper
where the next character prints. Control functions and characters in
the following lists modify the active position.
The following sequences and characters set the active column position:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA)
Horizontal Position Relative (HPR)
Horizontal Position Backward (HPB)
Backspace (BS)
Carriage Return (CR)
Horizontal Tab (HT)
Line Feed (LF) if LNM mode selected
Printable characters

The following sequences and characters set the active line position:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

Vertical Position Absolute (VPA)
Vertical Position Relative (VPR)
Vertical Position Backward (VPB)
Carriage Return (CR) if DECCRNLM mode selected
Cursor Up (CUU)
Form Feed (FF)
Vertical Tab (VT)
Printable characters
Next Line (NEL)
Reverse Index (RI)
Index (IND)
Partial Line Up (PLU)
Partial Line Down (PLD)
NOTE

PLU and PLD sequences set half-line increments for superscripting and subscripting, respectively.

2-42 ANSI Text-to-PosTScRIPT Translator

2.1.8

Right Margin Flag
Attempting to move the active position outside the right margin sets
the right margin flag.
Recovery from this error condition depends on the setting of the autowrap mode as follows:
•
•

If autowrap is set, the next printable character causes an automatic
carriage return/line feed, which clears the flag.
If autowrap is reset, the translator waits for a Horizontal Position
Absolute (HPA) or Carriage Return (CR) command to return the
active position within the format bounds before clearing the flag.

Receipt of a Next Line (NEL) character clears the right margin flag.
Depending on the setting of Line Feed New Line Mode (LNM), LF also
may clear the flag.

2.1.9

Character Alignment -

First Line on Page

At the new page of a document, the translator places the active position
at the page home line. The translator moves down an amount equal
to the distance from the top of the first character cell to its base
line before positioning the first graphic character or space. That is,
the top of the character cell aligns with the page home line for the
first character printed on a page. This is called clotheslining, since
characters appear to be hanging by the top of their character cells,
similar to clothes on a line.
Clotheslining occurs when a first charae,ter flag is set. The following
control functions and activities set the first character flag:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Vertical Position Absolute (VPA) with PUM reset to character mode
Vertical Tab (VT), regardless of the PUM setting
Form Feed (FF), regardless of the PUM setting
Reset to Initial State (RIS)
Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR)
Wrapping at the end of a page
Beginning of a new file
Automatic Sheet Feeder Control!I'ray Select (DECASFC) sequence

ANSI Text-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator 2-43

Printable characters "clear" the first character flag. Characters then
"baseline" at the new active position. In baselining, the translator
aligns the base line of the character cell with the reference line.

2.1.10 Tab Stops
A tab stop is a point to which the active position moves when you
send a tab control character. The next character prints at the tab
stop. You can set horizontal and vertical tabs with the Horizontal
Tabulation Stop (DECSHTS) sequence and the Vertical Tabulation
Stop (DECSVTS) sequence. The translator sets tabs relative to the
origin point for printing. You can clear tabs with the Tab Clear (TBC)
sequence.
Sequences that control tabulation in the translator are as follows:
Abbreviation

Function Name

DECCAHT
DECCAVT

Clear Horizontal Tabs
Clear Vertical Tabs

DECHTS
DECSHTS

Horizontal Tab Set
Set Horizontal Tab Stops

DECSVTS
DECVTS
HTS
VTS

Set Vertical Tab Stops
Vertical Tab Set
Horizontal Tab Set
Vertical Tab Set

TBC

Tab Clear

2-44 ANSI Text-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

2.1.11

Selecting Character Attributes
You can select character· attributes by using Select Graphic Rendition
(SGR) sequences. Character attributes let you highlight your printed
text. The ANSI Text translator supports the following character attributes:
•
•
•
•
•

Underlining, double underlining, and overlining
Bold (dark printing)
Italic printing
Strike through
Superscripts and subscripts

The character attribute sequences and the select font sequence use the
same basic SGR control sequence.
CS!

Character attribute sequences are either ANSI Standard or DIGITAL
Private control sequences. You must add a question mark (?, 3/15) to
the control sequence to select a DIGITAL Private character attribute.
CS!

You can select one or more attributes in the same sequence by including
several Ps values separated by semicolons:
CSI

[?)

;

However, send only parameters of the same type in a single sequence.
For example, underlining and a superscript cannot be sent in the same
sequence: underlining is an ANSI sequence, and a superscript is a
DIGITAL Private sequence.
The translator uses a selected attribute until you turn off the attribute
or reset the printer.
A Ps value of 0 turns off all attributes: underlining, overlining, bold
printing, italic printing, strike through, superscripts, and subscripts.

ANSI Text-to-PosTScn1PT Translator 2-45

2.1.12 Set/Reset Modes
Set/reset functions control printing features, such as wrapping text at
the end of a line. The sequences use the same two final characters: a
lowercase ''h" (6/8) for set, and a lowercase "I" (6/12) for reset.
Use one sequence to turn on or off several modes at the same time.
Send the Control Sequence Introducer; the list of parameters for each
mode, separated by semicolons; and the appropriate final character, "h"
for set or "l" for reset.
Set/reset modes are of two types: ANSI and DIGITAL Private. You
must add a question mark(?, 3/15) to the sequence to select a DIGITAL
Private mode.
CSI

; ... ;

h (set mode)

CSI

; . . . ;

1 (reset mode)

Send only parameters of the same type in a single sequence. For
example, PUM and autowrap cannot be set in the same sequence:
PUM is an ANSI mode, and DECAWM (autowrap) is a DIGITAL
Private mode.
The translator supports the following set/reset sequences:
Abbreviation

Function Name

CRM1
DECAWM
DECCRNLM
DECO PM
DECPSM
DECPSP

Control Representation Mode
Autowrap Mode
Carriage Return/New Line Mode

LNM
PUM

Origin Placement Mode
Horizontal Pitch Select Mode
Proportional Spacing
Line Feed/New Line Mode
Positioning Unit Mode

1Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support CRM.

2-46 ANSI Text-to-PosTScR1PT Translator

2.1.13 Miscellaneous Escape and Control Functions
Abbreviation

Function Name

DECASFC
DECRVEC 1
DECVEC

Automatic Sheet Feeder Controlfrray Select

JFY

Justify

Draw Relative Vector
Draw Vector

1Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support DECRVEC.

2.2 Troubleshooting
This section contains troubleshooting information for the ANSI Text
(including sixels) translator: helpful hints, problems and solutions,
error handling, and differences between ANSI-to-POSTSCRIPT and LN03
functions.

2.2.1

Helpful Hints, Problems and Solutions
This section has two parts. The first part provides hints to ensure the
best performance of the ANSI Text translator. The second lists typical
problems and suggested solutions.

2.2.1.1

Helpful Hints

General
•
•

Parameters in control sequences and device control strings must be
unsigned, positive decimal integers. Do not use decimal points in
parameter values.
Equivalent measurements
1 point= 1/72" (approximately)
1 decipoint = 11720"
1 pixel= 1/300" (on the translator)
For example, 10-point type size equals approximately 10" x 1/72".
ANSI Text-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 2-47

Page Format
•

•

Use the page format select sequence (PFS) or the specific application command to select the printing orientation, either portrait
or landscape. When you call the translator, it defaults to portrait
orientation, unless the system manager or user modifies the switch.
Select the upper-left corner of the printable area rather than the
upper-left corner of the physical page as the starting point for
printing a page. Most printers do not start printing until 114" in
from the edge of the paper.
To select the upper-left corner of the printable area, reset (disable)
the origin placement mode (DECOPM). With DECOPM set, the
translator places the origin at the upper-left corner of the· physical
page.
Before you set new tabs or margins, clear tabs or margins you
do not want. Also, make sure you select the correct unit of measurement: decipoints, pixels, or character cells. Otherwise, the
translator may not set your tabs or margins in the desired location.

Paper
•

The translator supports these paper (media) sizes:
Paper

Size

A (letter)

8.50" x 11.00" (216 x 279 mm)

B (ledger)

11.00" x 17 .00" (279 x 432 mm)

A3 (JI8/I80)

11.69" x 16.54" (297 x 420 mm)

A4 (JI8/I80)

8.27" x 11.69" (210 x 297 mm)

B4 (Jl8)

10.12" x 14.33" (250 x 353 mm)

A5 (JI8/I80)

5.83" x 8.27" (148 x 210 mm)

B5 (Jl8)

7.17" x 10.12" (182 x 257 mm)

Legal

8.50" x 14.00" (216 x 356 mm)

Executive

7.50" x 10.50" (191 x 267 mm)
NOTE

All sizes may not be applicable to your application or
printer.

2-48 ANSI Text-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

Font Files
•
•
•
•

The translator only recognizes font files in the DIGITAL font file
format. You cannot use LNOl font files in the translator.
For font files with the same font ID or type family ID but with different character sets, you must designate the appropriate character
set.
Assign font files with the 7-character type family ID or the 16character font ID. Use only uppercase letters for both IDs. Do not
assign font files with the 31-character font file ID.
Do not use font files with a character set-id field of 010 - formerly
identified DEC Supplemental and is now used for user preference.
For compatibility, the translator allows 010 and treats it as DEC
Supplemental.

Fonts and Character Sets
•
•
•

To use proportional spacing, you must use a proportional font and
select proportional spacing with the DECPSP sequence.
Do not use the DEC Special Graphics alphabetical characters (A-Z)
with other character sets. Otherwise, your document may print
with alphabetical characters of different styles.
You cannot scale character sizes. However, you can use GSM to
select available sizes. GSM selects from the available fonts in the
type family. If font files are assigned by type family ID, you can use
GSM to select from the available point sizes in that family.
Suppose you are using a 10-point font from the DBULTNl family
and you want to use a smaller point size:
If you send a GSM with a parameter of 70 percent for height,
the translator selects the 6. 7-point DBULTNl font - the closest
smaller available size.
If you send a GSM with a parameter of 50 percent for height,
the translator does not find any DBULTNl font smaller than
the desired size. The translator then uses the smallest available size.

Graphics
•

The graphics you translate and print on your printer will probably be smaller than the same graphics displayed on your video
terminal.

ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 2-49

2.2.1.2

Problems and Solutions

I get a blank page for each line of my source document.
The current margins may specify a page that is smaller than a line
height or width. Check your PUM and SSU settings. You may be using
the wrong unit of measure.

I cannot load my LNOl font files in the translator.
The translator does not support LNOl font files. The font files you use
with the translator must be in the DIGITAL font file format.

I cannot print landscape pages.
Use the command supplied with your application or printer.
Or send a PFS sequence to select the landscape format (ESC [? 21 SP
J) before you send the text. Do not send an RIS or DECSTR sequence

after PFS, as the format returns to the page orientation selected by the
print co:rp.mand or the system manager.

The printer does not set tabs and margins where I want them.
The translator may have other tabs and margins already stored. Clear
all tabs and margins before you set new ones.
Also, check the unit of measure (pixels, decipoints, or character cells)
you are using. The translator stores tabs and margins at centipoint
locations.
Remember that Vertical Tab (VT) and Vertical Tab Set (DECVTS)
position at the top of the character cell while Set Vertical Tabulation
Stops (DECSVTS) uses the character cell baseline.

2-50 ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

2.2.2

Error Handling
This section describes how the ANSI Text translator responds to error
conditions. Other devices do not necessarily react in the same way to
the same errors.

2.2.2.1

Control Characters

Horizontal Tab (HT)
If you send a horizontal tab control character when no tabs exist to
the right of the active column inside the right margin, the translator
moves the active position to the right margin and sets right margin
flag. Further action depends on the autowrap setting:
•

•

If autowrap is set, an automatic carriage return/line feed executes

when the translator receives the next character.
If autowrap is reset (disabled), the translator waits for. a command,
such as HPA or CR, to bring the active position inside the format bounds. Then the translator can respond to commands and
characters.

Vertical Tab (VT)
If you send a vertical tab control character when no vertical tabs exist
between the active line and the bottom margin, the translator moves
the active position to the bottom margin. A form feed executes when
you send a printable character or line feed.
2.2.2.2

Control Sequences

Set Horizontal Tab Stops (DECSHTS)
If you send more than the maximum of 16 tab stops, the translator sets

16 tab stops and ignores the rest.
If you send the sequence with no tab stops,· the translator ignores the
sequence.
If you send the same tab stop twice, the translator sets the tab stop

once.

ANSI Text-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 2-51

Set Vertical Tab Stops (DECSVTS)
If you send more than 16 vertical tab stops, the translator uses the first
16 tab stops and ignores the rest.
If you send the sequence with no tab stops, the translator ignores the
sequence.
If you send the same tab stop twice, the translator sets the tab stop
once.

Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA)
If you attempt to move beyond the right margin, the translator moves
the active position to the right margin and sets the right margin flag.
What h~ppens to the next printable character depends on the autowrap
setting:

•
•

With autowrap set, the next character executes an automatic
carriage return/line feed.
With autowrap reset (disabled), the translator waits for a command,
such as CR, to return the active position inside the format bounds.

Set Lines Per Page (DECSLPP)
If you send no parameter, a parameter of zero, or a parameter greater
than the maximum size for the paper, the translator sets the form
length to the maximum size for the paper and origin.
Set Left and Right Margins (DECSLRM)
If you send too many parameters, the translator uses the first two and
ignores the rest.

If your first parameter is greater than the second - an attempt to
place the left margin to the right of the right margin, the translator
ignores the sequence.
Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM)
If you send too many parameters, the translator uses the first two and
ignores the rest.
,
If your first parameter is greater than the second - an attempt to
place the top margin below the bottom margin, the translator ignores
the sequence.

2-52 ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Graphic Size Modification (GSM)
If you neglect to send one of the parameters, the translator sets the

missing Pl and P2 parameters to 100.
Graphic Size Select (GSS)
If you neglect to send a parameter, the translator selects the default of
zero, which is 100 decipoints.
Select Size Unit (SSU)
If you send parameter values other than 2, 7, or ?1 the translator
ignores the parameter.
If you send too many parameters, the translator uses the last, if 2, 7,

or ?l, and ignores the rest.
Draw Vector (DECVEC)
If you neglect to include· a parameter, the translator interprets the

missing parameter as a zero.
If you send too many parameters, the translator uses the first five and
ignores the rest.

2.2.3 Comparison of ANSl-to-PosTSCRIPT Translation and LN03
Functionality
The control functions act the same for the ANSI Text Translator and
the LN03 printer, except for those in Table 2-19.

ANSI Text-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 2-53

Table 2-19:
Control
DECAWM

Difference Between ANSI Text Translator and LN03 Control Functions
Function
Name
LN03
ANSI Translator
Autowrap
Mode
Font Status
Report

'I\vo default settings, depending
on SP2-4 switchsetting

One default setting, enabled

Reports status of requested font

Not supported

DECRFS

Request Font
Status

Not supported

DECSHORP

Set
Horizontal
Pitch

Requests status report of fonts
or memory bits for down-loaded
fonts or both
Does not clear the right margin
flag when right margin moves
farther right

DECSLPP

Set Lines
Per Page

DECSLRM

Set Left
and Right
Margins

Depends on setting of paper
size switch, origin and page
orientation
Does not clear right margin flag
when right margin moves farther
right

Depends on origin, page
orientation, and symbiont
switches
Clears right margin flag

PFS

Page Format
Select

Active position does not reset

Returns active position to
Form Feed corner

SGR

Select
Graphic
Rendition
Set Vertical
Spacing

Underlines if italics not available
from font
Determines, using an approximation of pixels/line

Algorithmic italicization if
italics not available from
font
Determines, using actual
pixels/line

Tab Clear

Executes one parameter at a
time

Executes up to 16 parameters at a time

DECFSR

svs
TBC

2-54 ANSI Text-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

Clears the right margin flag

Other differences between LN03 functions and the ANSI-to-POSTSCRIPT
functions include:
•

•

2.2.4

In addition to not supporting Request Font Status (DECRFS) and
Font Status Report (DECFSR), the translator does not support
Device Status Report (DSR), Device Attributes (DA), selectable
parity, or Cl transmit enable/disable.
The LN03 stores variables as pixels, converts 1 decipoint (1/720")
to 0 pixels (a pixel is 1/300"), and stores 0 pixels. The translator
stores variables in centipoints. A centipoint is 117200 of an inch.
Therefore, the translator converts 1 decipoint to 1017200, or 10
centipoints, and stores 10 centipoints. This means the translator
positions more accurately than the LN03.
Font-defaulting management in the translator differs from that in
the LN03. When a font with the required characteristics cannot
be found, the translator and the LN03 may select different default
fonts.

Control Characters, Control Sequences, and Future Devices
Future devices may not implement the following control characters
and sequences: CUU, DECSTBM, DECHTS, RIS, DECVTS. Use the
following list of replacement functions:
•
•
•
•
•

Vertical Position Backward (VPB) in place of Cursor Up (CUU)
Page Format Select (DECPFS) in place of Set Top and Bottom
Margins (DECSTBM)
Set Horizontal Tab Stops (DECSHTS) instead of Horizontal Tab Set
(DECHTS)
Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR) in place of Reset to Initial State
CRIS)
Set Vertical Tab Stops (DECSVTS) in place of Vertical Tab Set
(DECVTS)

ANSI Text-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 2-55

Chapter 3

ANSI Text Function Descriptions
Section 3.1 describes the ANSI-to-POSTSCRIPT translation of control
characters. Section 3.2 describes escape sequences, control sequences,
and control strings. Each section presents the descriptions in alphabetical order.

3.1 Control Characters
Control characters do not print but cause the translator to perform
some action. Control characters form two groups: CO (control 0) and
Cl (control 1) codes. CO codes represent 7-bit ASCII control characters.
Cl codes represent 8-bit control characters. Table 2-12 provides the
7-bit equivalents of the 8-bit Cl codes. The next sections describe the
CO and Cl control characters.

3.1.1

CO Control Characters
With the exception of Escape (ESC), Cancel (CAN), and Substitute
(SUB), CO control characters do not affect escape sequences, control
sequences, or control strings.
ACK (016)

The ANSI translator ignores Acknowledge (ACK).
BEL (On)

The ANSI translator ignores BELL (BEL).

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-1

BS (018)

Backspace (BS) moves the active horizontal position back one space
character, unless the position is at the line home position or the right
margin flag is set. In both cases, the translator ignores the BS character.
CAN (118)

Cancel (CAN) received in an escape or control sequence ends the
sequence in progress. Otherwise, the translator ignores the CAN
character. Characters following Cancel interpret normally.
CR (0113)

Carriage Return (CR) returns the active horizontal position to the
line home position, which is typically the left margin. If the carriage
return/new line mode (DECCRNLM) is set, CR also moves down one
vertical line (a LF executes).
With justification enabled, CR determines the end of the line and
signals the end of the justified line.
DC1 (111) (XON)

The ANSI translator ignores Dev.ice Control I (DCl).
DC2 (112)

The ANSI translator ignores Device Control 2 (DC2).
DC3 (113) (XOFF)

The ANSI translator ignores Device Control 3 (DC3).
DC4 (114)

The ANSI translator ignores Device Control 4 (DC4).
DEL (7115)

The ANSI translator ignores the Delete (DEL) character unless a
96-character set resides in GL. In this case DEL is considered to be
a printable character. (96-character sets are designed only to be used
from GR.)
OLE (110)

The ANSI translator ignores Data Link Escape (DLE).
EM (119)

The ANSI translator ignores End of Medium (EM).

3-2 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

ENQ (015)

The ANSI translator ignores Enquiry (ENQ).
EOT(0/4)

The ANSI translator ignores End of Transmission (EOT).
ESC (1111)

Escape (ESC) introduces an escape or control sequence. An ESC
received in an escape or control sequence terminates the sequence, and
a new sequence begins with the ESC character.
ETB (117)
The ANSI translator ignores End of Transmission Block (ETB).
ETX (013)

The ANSI translator ignores End of Text (ETX.).
FF (0112)

Form Feed (FF) moves the active vertical position to the top of the
next page. The position stops at the page home line, which is not
necessarily the top margin. FF does not reset the active horizontal
position to the line home position.
FF sets the first character flag and the character after a FF moves one
character height down before printing (clotheslining).
FS (1112)

The ANSI translator ignores File Separator (FS).
GS (1113)

The ANSI translator ignores Group Separator (GS).
HT(0/9)

A Horizontal Tab (HT) is a point on a line to which the active position
moves. A tab stop must exist to the right of the active horizontal
position and within the right margin. Although the translator supports
200 default tab stops, other devices may allow only 32 default tab stops;
one every eight columns (assuming a 10 character/inch monowidth
font). The first tab stop occurs at column 9, followed by columns 17, 25,
and so forth.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-3

If no tab stop exists, HT moves to the right margin and sets the

right margin flag. At the next printable character, other than an SP,
autowrap performs one of the following actions:
•
•

If autowrap is set, an automatic carriage return/line feed executes

when the translator receives the next character.
If autowrap is reset (disabled), the translator waits for a command,
such as HPA or CR, that brings the. active position inside the
format bounds. Then the translator can respond to commands or
characters.

Changing horizontal pitch with the DECSHORP sequence changes
horizontal tab positions to maintain the same number of columns
between tab stops.
Margin changes have no effect on tab stops. Tab stops are relative to
the origin. You may not have the same number of tab stops on different
paper sizes, but the tab stops will be in the same place relative to the
edge of the paper.
If you send a HT to the translator within justified text, the HT and text

to the left of the HT are output without justification. The remainder of
the line is justified.
LF (0110)

Line Feed (LF) moves down the active position one line. If the line
feed/new line mode is enabled, the position moves to the line home
position, usually at the left margin.
If a line feed occurs at the end of a page, a form feed executes.
If justification is enabled, LF determines the end of the line and signals
the end of justified text.
NAK(115)

The ANSI translator ignores Negative Acknowledge (NAK).
NUL (010)

The translator ignores the Null (NUL) character.
RS (1114)

The ANSI translator ignores Record Separator (RS).
SI (0115)

Shift In (SI) or LSO selects character set GO as the GL character set.
3-4 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

so (0114)
Shift Out (SO) or LSl selects character set Glas the GL character
set.
SOH (011)

The ANSI translator ignores Start of Heading (SOH).
SP (210)

The ANSI translator treats the Space (SP) character as a printable
character. The only differences between SP and a regular printable
character occur during justification.
•
•

The translator stretches or shrinks spaces to perform right justification.
The translator deletes trailing spaces before justifying a line of text.

STX (012)

The ANSI translator ignores Start of Text (STX).
SYN (116)

The ANSI translator ignores Synchronous Idle (SYN).
SUB (1110)

Substitute (SUB) in an escape or control sequence ends the sequence
in progress. A SUB in printable text causes an error character to
print - reverse question mark prints in text mode, a blank column in
graphics.
SUB also causes an abnormal end to Operating System Command
(OSC), Privacy Message (PM), and Application Program Command
(APC) control strings.
Characters following SUB interpret normally.

us (1115)
The ANSI translator ignores Unit Separator (US).
VT (0111)

Vertical Tab (VT) advances the position to the next vertical tab stop
on the page, between the active line and the bottom margin. The
translator can be in line mode or size unit mode, and the next tab stop
does not need to be on the grid. The translator does not "round to the
nearest line." VT also sets the first character flag. The next printable
character causes the active vertical position to clothesline down an
ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-5

amount equal to the height of that character above its baseline before
it prints.
You may use VT to position characters past page end line without
causing a form feed.
If vertical pitch changes, the vertical tab stops change accordingly.
Default tab stops occur at every line on the page. The vertical tab table
holds a maximum of 67 tab stops.
If no tab stop exists, the active vertical position sets to the bottom

margin. A form feed executes at the next printable character (excluding
SP) or form feed (FF).
If you send a vertical tab in justified text, the translator does not justify
the first part of the line and the vertical tab. The remainder of the line
may be justified.

3.1.2 C1 Control Characters
This section describes the Cl control characters. Cl control characters
terminate escape sequences, control sequences, and control strings.

\
APC (9115)

Upon receipt of the Application Program Command control character, the translator enters string ignore mode.
CCH (9114)

Cancel Character (CCH) ends any escape sequence, control sequence,
or control string in progress. The ANSI translator then enters text
mode.
CS/ (9111)

Control Sequence Introducer (CSI) introduces one or more bytes
that together define a control sequence.
DCS(910)

Device Control String (DCS) introduces a device control string.
EPA (917)

End of Protected Area (EPA) ends any escape sequence, control
sequence, or control string in progress. The ANSI translator then
enters text mode.
3-6 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

ESA (Sn)

End of Selected Area ends any escape sequence, control sequence, or
control string in progress. The ANSI translator then enters text mode.
HTJ (819)

Horizontal Tab with Justification (HTJ) ends any escape sequence,
control sequence, or control string in progress. The ANSI translator
then enters text mode.
HTS (818)

Horizontal Tab Set (HTS) sets the current horizontal position into
the tab table as a new tab stop.
No change occurs if the current horizontal position is in the tab table.
If the horizontal tab table is already full, each new tab bumps the
highest tab stop from the table. The translator supports a tab table of
200 tab stops. However, a maximum of 32 tab stops fill the tab table in
some device.
IND (814)

Index (IND) moves the active position down to the same position in
the next line. If the active position is at the end of the page (typically
the bottom margin), IND causes a form feed. IND executes like a LF
character, except the Line Feed/New Line Mode (LNM) does not effect
IND.
If justification is enabled, IND determines the end of the line and
signals the end of justified text. The translator generates a CR under
these conditions.
MW(915)

Message Waiting (MW) ends any escape sequence, control sequence,
or control string in progress. The ANSI translator then enters text
mode.
NEL (815)

Next Line (NEL) moves the active position to the line home position
(typically the left margin) on the next line, thus performing a carriage
return/line feed. If a NEL occurs at the end of a page, a form feed
executes. NEL clears the right margin flag.
If justification is enabled, NEL determines the end of the line and
signals the end of justified text.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-7

osc (9113)
Upon receipt of the Operating System Command (OSC) control
character, the translator enters string ignore mode.
PLO (8111)

Partial Line Down (PLD) moves down the active position one half a
vertical increment. The vertical increment size depends on the selected
font. For built-in fonts, this distance is 1112.5".
If the active position is less than one line from the bottom margin and
the margin is not at the edge of the page, the subscripted character
exceeds the bottom margin. The character prints, as long as it fits in
the clipping region (area the printer physically images). Once PLD
exceeds the bottom margin, the translator ignores subsequent PLD
requests and the active vertical position remains constant.

When you send PLD as part of justified text, the translator takes PLD
as relative to the adjusted position during the setting of the line. It
does not terminate justification.
PLU (8112)

Partial Line Up (PLU) moves up the active position one half a vertical
increment. The vertical increment size depends on the selected font.
For built-in fonts, this distance is 1/12.5".
If the active position is less than one line from the top margin and the
margin is not the top edge of the page, the superscripted character
exceeds the top margin. However, the character prints, as long as it
fits in the clipping region. The translator ignores subsequent PLU
requests, and the active vertical position remains constant.

When you send PLU as part of justified text, the translator takes PLU
as relative to the adjusted position during the setting of the line. It
does not terminate justification.
PM (9114)

Privacy Message (PM) ends any escape sequence, control sequence,
or control string in progress. Then the translator enters string ignore
mode.
PU1 (911)

Private Use 1 (PUl) ends any escape sequence, control sequence, or
control string in progress. The ANSI translator then enters text mode.

3-8 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

PU2(9/2)

Private Use 2 (PU2) ends any escape sequence, control sequence, or
control string in progress. The ANSI translator then enters text mode.
RI (8113)

Reverse Index (RI) moves up the active position to the same position
in the preceding line. The translator ignores the RI character if the
active position is at the top line of the page.
If justification is enabled, RI determines the end of the line and signals

the end of justified text. The translator generates a CR under these
conditions.
Use RI to position above the page home line, as RI is limit bound and
not format bound. Top, bottom, left, and right margins define the limit
bounds. Printing occurs only inside this area. The format bounds lie
inside or are equal to the limit bounds.
SPA (916)

Start of Protected Area (SPA) ends any escape sequence, control
sequence, or control string in progress. The ANSI translator then
enters text mode.
SSA (816)

Start of Selected Area (SSA) ends any escape sequence, control
sequence, or control string in progress. The ANSI translator then
enters text mode.
SS2 (8114)

Single Shift 2 (SS2) moves character set G2 into GL or GR to print
one character, after ending any escape sequence, control sequence, or
control string in progress.
SS3 (8115)

Single Shift 3 (SS3) moves character set G3 into GL or GR to print
one character, after ending any escape sequence, control sequence, or
control string in progress.
ST (9112)

String Terminator (ST) indicates the end of a device control string.
The translator returns to text mode.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-9

STS (913)

Set Transmit State (STS) ends any escape sequence, control sequence,
or control string in progress. The ANSI translator then enters text
mode.
VTS (8110)

Vertical Tab Set (VTS) sets a vertical tab stop in the tab table at the
current vertical position. The translator can be in line mode or size
unit mode, and the current vertical position does not need to be on the
grid. Even in line mode, the translator does not round to the nearest
line.
No change occurs if the current vertical position is already a tab stop.
When the vertical tab table is full, each new tab stop bumps the highest
tab stop from the table. The translator supports up to 200 tab stops,
however, other devices hold a maximum of 67 tab stops.
If the first character flag is set when the translator receives a VTS, the
tab stop sets at the current vertical position. If the first character flag
is not set, VTS sets at the active vertical position minus the character
cell height.
810, 811, 812, 813, 918, 919, and 9110
These positions in the 8-bit code table are reserved for future use. They
end any escape sequence or any ANSI string in progress. The ANSI
translator then enters text mode.

3.2 Escape Sequences, Control Sequences, and Control
Strings
This section provides a description of the sources of control functions, the types of printers that use the functions, and their ANSI-toPOSTSCRIPT translation.

3.2.1

Source of Control Functions
Each control function supported by the ANSI translator is designed for
one of the following kinds of software:
•
•

Application
Symbiont

3-10 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

Each control function in this manual is labeled either Symbiont
or Application depending on which source should send the control
function to the translator. You are free to use control functions in
any style you want, but DIGITAL recommends that you follow the
specifications shown in the manual.
Application Software

Most control functi9ns fit logically in files that you can send to the
translator and then to a printer. These ~ontrol functions do things such
as modify text size, change fonts, and set line spacing.
Symbiont Software

There are other control functions that are generally not found in
a file that you send to a translator. They are more often used in
software that communicates with the translator ·and sets its values.
Large installations of printers often have a symbiont that drives the
translators and printers. A symbiont keeps track of the physical
configuration and memory allocation of a printer. A programmer can
modify a symbiont that selects a paper tray or increases the amount
of font memory. To do this, the programmer would program translator
control functions into the symbiont.

3.2.2

Destination: Level 1, 2, or 3 Device
The ANSI translator is designed to be compatible with software written
for existing DIGITAL printers.
Each printer, and the commands particular to it, belong to a level.
Each level contains a set of functions that includes the functionality
of all lower numbered levels. For example, a Level 2 device contains
a superset of the functionality contained in a Level 1 device. A Level
3 device contains a superset of the functionality of a Level 2 device.
Table 3-1 summarizes the differences among Level 1, Level 2, and
Level 3 printers.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-11

Table 3-1: Printer Levels
Printer
Level Definition

Basic Character Cell Printer - Supports monospaced fonts and is not
capable of backward vertical movement. May also support different
horizontal pitches.
Example: LA50

Advanced Character Cell Printer - Supports different monospaced
horizontal pitches and fonts. Also supports some backward vertical
movement.
Example: LAlOO, LA75
Proportional Spaced and Character Cell Printer - Supports proportionally spaced fonts. Page can be addressed in any vertical or
horizontal order.
Example: LN03

In general, you address Level 1 and Level 2 printers in terms of
columns and lines, and advance across and down the page in these
units. Level 3 printers provide you with greater flexibility in addressing the printable area on each page.
To assure compatibility with files formatted for Level 1 and Level 2
printers, you can address Level 3 printers in terms of columns and
lines. However, to use the advanced features of Level 3 printers, you
should address each page in smaller units: decipoints, centipoints, and
pixels. Table 3-2 shows the comparative sizes of these units.
Table 3-2: Units of Measurement
Unit

Length (in inches)

Centipoint
Decipoint

1/7200

Pixel

1/300

1/720

One pixel equals 24 centipoints, if you need to convert a measurement
in pixels to a measurement in centipoints.
Each command that the ANSI translator supports can be considered a
Level 1, .Level 2, or Level 3 command. Commands in this manual are
labeled according to their level.

3-12 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

If you want the ANSI translator to work as. a Level 1 or Level 2 device,
use only the Level 1 or Level 2 control functions. Software that uses
only these functions works on Level 1 or Level 2 devices, although
you should also consult the appropriate manual for the specific device.
Software using the advanced features of the ANSI translator should
only use control functions labeled for Level 3. Do not mix control
functions labeled only Level 1 or Level 2 with software that uses the
advanced Level 3 control functions.

3.2.3 Control Function Translation
This section describes the ANSI-to-POSTSCRIPT translation of escape
sequences, control sequences, and control strings in alphabetical order
by mnemonic.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-13

ASCEF - Announce Subset of Code Extension Facilities

ASCEF -Announce Subset of Code Extension
Facilities
Indicate which subset of code extension facilities or what level of the 8bit ASCII code to use for subsequent information exchanges. Announce
Subset of Code Extension Facilities (announcers) are macros that
incorporate the effects of Select Character Set (SCS) and Locking-Shift
(LS) sequences.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3

ESC SPF*
ESC, 1111

Escape sequence introducer character
SP {space character, 210)

Escape sequence intermediate character

Parameter
F*, escape sequence final character

where:
L (4/ 12)

is level 1.

M (4/13)

is level 2.

N (4/14)

is level 3.

3-14 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

ASCEF -

Announce Subset of Code Extension Facilities

Description
Level 1 and Level 2 assumptions:
•
•

ASCII designated into GO and invoked into GL
ISO Latin Nr 1 Supplemental designated into G1 and invoked into
GR

Level 3 assumption:
•

ASCII designated into GO and invoked into GL

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-15

CRM - Control Representation Mode

CRM - Control Representation Mode
Help debug software by translating a graphic token for each byte. In
this mode, the translator does not act upon control characters but sends
them through to the printer. The printer reports the control characters
on paper. 1
Source: Application or Symbiont

Format

Destination: Exception - use at
any level for debugging software

CS/ 3h-(SET)
CS/ 31-(RESET)
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
3, 313

Control sequence selective parameter character specifying CRM
h, 618
Control sequence final character - set mode selected by parameter
I, 6112

Control sequence final character - reset mode selected by parameter

Description
In Control Representation Mode, the translator translates and does not
act on characters in the file with the following exceptions:
•
•
•
•
•

Line Feed (LF) executes a Carriage Return/Line Feed (CRLF) in
additon to printing <LF>.
Form Feed (FF) prints first then executes.
Control Representation Mode sequence prints before executing.
Reset to Initial State (RIS) prints an <ESC> c, then resets CRM.
Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR) prints first then executes.

1 Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support CRM.

3-16 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

CRM - Control Representation Mode
Autowrap Mode is in effect during CRM.
When in Control Representation Mode, the translator translates printable characters from GL and GR, normally, and translates control
characters in bold, using a two- or three-letter acronym in angle
brackets (<l'F>).

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-17

CUU - Cursor Up

CUU - Cursor Up
Execution of CUU is the same as Vertical Position Backwards (VPB).
Use VPB instead of CUU. Future devices may not implement CUU.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Level 2

CS/ PnA
CS/, 9111
Control sequence introducer character

A, 411
Control sequence final character

Parameter
Pn, numeric parameter

where:
0

is default value of 1.

is numeric value interpreted according to SSU sequence and PUM
setting.

Description
CUU exists for compatibility reasons.

3-18 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECASFC - Automatic Sheet Feeder Control/Tray Select

DECASFC-Automatic Sheet Feeder Control/Tray
Select
Select the appropriate paper tray on a multiple tray printer.
Source: Symbiont

Format

CS/

Destination: Level 3 (Extension)

Ps Iv

CSI, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
! (exclamation mark, 211)
Control sequence intermediate character

v, 716
Control sequence final character

Parameter
Ps, selective parameter

where:
0

is eject current page.

is eject current page and select the top paper tray.

is eject current page and select the middle paper tray.

is eject current page and select the large capacity paper tray.

Description
If your system manager has not changed the default value for the
input tray, the DECASFC parameter value is Ps = 3, which selects the
large capacity tray. You can override this default by using the INPUT_
TRAY=tray-name parameter to the DCL PRINT command, where trayname is TOP, MIDDLE, BOTTOM, or LCIT (large capacity input tray).
DECASFC in your file overrides the PRINT command and parameters.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-19

DECASFC - Automatic Sheet Feeder Control/Tray Select
Errors
If your printer does not have multiple trays, the current page is ejected
upon receipt of the sequence.

3-20 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECATFF -Assign Type Family or Font

DECATFF -Assign Type Family or Font
Associate either a type-family ID or a font ID 1 with a Select Graphic
Rendition (SGR) number. Font IDs correspond to printer-resident fonts
or down-line loaded fonts.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Level 3

DCS Ps1; Ps2} id_string ST

ocs, 910
Device control string introducer
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating parameters Pl and P2
} (right curly brace, 7113)

DCS :final protocol selector character
ST, 9112
String terminator character

Parameters
Ps1, selective parameter

where:
0, l, or
omitted

is assign a 12-character font ID to SGR number (default).
This parameter selects type family, spacing, type size, and
scaling. Use separate control functions to select the other three
attributes (print style, weight, and character proportion) and
the character set.
is assign type family ID (7 characters) to SGR number. This
parameter only selects the type family. Use separate control
functions to select the other six font attributes (spacing, type
size, scaling, print style, weight, and character proportion) and
the character set.

1 Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support selective parameter Psl=3.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

3-21

DECATFF - Assign Type Family or Font
3

is assign a 16-character font ID to SGR number. This parameter selects the seven font attributes. Use a separate control
function to select the character set.

Ps2, selective parameter
where:
10

is the primary font.

is the first alternative.

is the second alternative.

is the ninth alternative. -

id_string
Name (ID) associated with font/family type number

Description
Psl selects which assignment to perform: font ID or type family ID to
SGRnumber.
Type family is a collection of fonts related in design but differing in the
remaining six font attributes - spacing, type size, scale factor, type
style, character weight, and character proportion. The font includes
type family and size.

Ps2 selects the SGR number to assign to the type family or font ID.
Table 3-3 indicates the SGR number assignment at call-up.
'fYpe family ID or font ID string identifies which font file to assign to
the SGR number (Ps2). Use only uppercase letters in the id_string
assignment.
You can assign up to 10 fonts, one at a time. Font assignments can
occur anywhere in the data stream. You can send an unlimited number
of assign font number sequences to the translator.
If you assign an SGR number that already has an ID assigned, the new

assignment replaces the old one.

3-22 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECATFF - Assign Type Family or Font
Table 3-3: Initial State SGR Numbers
SGR Assignment ID
10

Type family

Font or Type Family
DEC built-in-1 family

DBULTNl

Type family

RCOURIR

Courier family

Type family

RE LITEO

Elite family

Font

RCOURIRJ02SKOOGG

Courier 10 point, 10 pitch

Font

RELITEOL02SKOOGG

Elite 10 point, 12 pitch

Font

RCOURIR101VKOOGG

Courier 6. 7 point, 13.6 pitch

Font

RCOURIR202SKOOGG

Courier 10 point, 10.3 pitch

Type family

DBULTNl

DEC built-in-1 family

Type family

DBULTNl

DEC built-in-1 family

Type family

DBULTNl

DEC built-in-1 family

NOTE

When you select Elite, the translator takes the actual glyphs
from Courier 12.

Errors
The translator accepts an ID for a font file not currently stored.
However, if you try to print a character from the missing font file,
the translator prints a reverse question mark instead.
DECATFF is ignored in the following instances:
•
•

Ps2 is not a selection from 10-19.
id_string does not have enough characters for the type of assignment.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-23

DECAUPSS - Assign User-Preference Supplemental Set

DECAUPSS-Assign User-Preference
Supplemental Set
Assign the character set identified by the parameter and data of the
DECAUPSS sequence to the User Preference Supplemental set. This
character set becomes the character set designated by the Select User
Preference Supplemental Character Set (SCS) sequence.
Source: Symbiont

Format

Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3

OCS Ps I u 0 ... 0 ST
OCS, 910

Device control string introducer
! (exclamation mark, 211)
Protocol selector intermediate character

u, 715
Protocol selector final character
0 ...0
Device control string data
ST, 9112

String terminator character

Parameter
Ps, selective parameter

where:
0 or omitted
1

is a 94-character set.
is a 96-character set.

3-24 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECAUPSS - Assign User-Preference Supplemental Set
Description
Ps indicates whether the user-preference supplemental set is a 94character or a 96-character coded character set. If this parameter is
omitted, the translator selects a 94-character coded character set.

Select as the data (D ... D) for DECAUPSS, the intermediate and final
characters of the designating sequence used to explicitly select the
supplemental character set. Valid supplemental character sets include:
•
•

DEC Supplemental
ISO Latin-1 Supplemental

To assign DEC Supplemental as the user-preference set, you set Ps = 0
and choose %5 (2/5, 3/5) as the D... D string data:
DCS 0 ! u %5 ST

You assign ISO Latin-1 Supplemental as the supplemental character
set with Ps = 1 and A (4/1) as the D... D string data:
DCS 1 ! u A ST

Errors
If the character set designator that you select does not match a character set supported by the translator, the translator prints reverse
question marks.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-25

DECAWM -Autowrap Mode

DECAWM-Autowrap Mode
Instruct translator to execute an automatic carriage return/line feed
when the active position exceeds the right margin. At the right margin with autowrap reset (disabled), the translator ignores incoming
characters until a command returns the active position to the format
bounds.
Source: Application

Format

CS/
CS/

Destination: Levels 1, 2

? lh-(SET)
? 71- (RESET)

CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character

? (question mark, 3115)
Control sequence parameter character indicating DIGITAL private
control sequence
7, 3n
Control sequence selective parameter character specifying Autowrap
Mode
h, 618

Control sequence final character - set mode selected by parameter
I, 6112

Control sequence final character - reset mode selected by parameter

3-26 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECAWM - Autowrap Mode
Description
Initial state of DECAWM in the translator is set.
The translator never autowraps text during justification. See JFY for
more information.
When autowrap is set and the translator exceeds the right margin on
the last line of the page, the automatic line feed causes a page eject.
NOTE

This is an example of a setlreset private mode sequence.
Re(er to Section 2.1.12 for more information.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

3-27

DECCAHT -

Clear All Horizontal Tabs

DECCAHT - Clear All Horizontal Tabs
Clear horizontal tab stops.
Use Tabulation Clear (TBC) instead of DECCAHT.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Levels 1, 2

ESC 2
ESC, 1111

Escape sequence introducer character
2, 312

Escape sequence final character

Errors
If the translator receives tabs with a cleared tab table, the current
horizontal position moves to the right margin and sets the right margin
flag. The autowrap setting determines future actions.

3-28

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECCAVT - Clear All Vertical Tabs

DECCAVT -Clear All Vertical Tabs
Clear vertical tab stops.
Use Tabulation Clear (TBC) instead of DECCAVT.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Level 2

ESC 4
ESC, 1111
Escape sequence introducer character
4, 314

Escape sequence final character

Errors
If the translator receives tabs with a cleared tab table, the active
horizontal position sets to the bottom margin and a form feed executes
at the next character.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-29

DECCRNLM - Carriage Return/New Line Mode

DECCRNLM - Carriage Return/New Line Mode
Instruct the translator to perform New Line Set upon receipt of a CR.
The active· position moves to the line home position on the next line
down. When this mode is reset (disabled), the CR control character
moves the active position to the line home position on the same line.
Source: Application

Format

CS/
CS/

Destination: Level 3

? 40 h - (SET)
? 40 I - (RESET)

CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character

? (question mark, 3115)
Control sequence parameter character indicating DIGITAL private
control string
40 (314, 310)
Control sequence selective parameter characters specifying DECCRNLM
h, 618

Control sequence final character - set mode selected by parameter
I, 6112

Control sequence final character - reset mode selected by parameter

Description
Initial state of DECCRNLM in the translator is reset (disabled).
NOTE

DECCRNLM is a DIGITAL private mode set/reset sequence.
Refer to Section 2.1.12 for more information.

3-30 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECDTFF - Delete Type Family or Font File

DECDTFF -

Delete Type Family or Font File

Delete host-loaded fonts that are identified by either·type-family ID or
font ID. DECDTFF enables the host to control font memory storage.
Source: Symbiont

Format

DCS

Destination: Level 3

Ps - id_string ST

DCS, 9111

Device control string introducer
- (tilde, 7114)
DCS protocol selector final character
ST, 9112

String terminator character

Parameters
Ps, selective parameter
where:
0

is the id_string for a type family ID.

is the id_string for a font file ID.

id_string
Identifies font/family type for deletion.

Description
The id_string identifies the type-family or font file to delete. Typefamily IDs are 7 characters long, and font file IDs are 31 characters
long.
DECDTFF does not affect type family or font assignments made by
Assign Type Family or Font (DECATFF). These assignments remain
whether a corresponding font file exists or not.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-31

DECDTFF - Delete Type Family or Font File
Errors
Ps identifies the id_stri.ng as a type-family ID or font file ID. The
translator ignores this sequence if you use values other than 0 or 1.

If you delete a font in the middle of a page on which it was used,
the translator continues printing on the same page. Other devices,
however, may eject the page when this error occurs.

3-32 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECHTS -

Horizontal Tab Set

DECHTS- Horizontal Tab Set
Set current horizontal position into the horizontal tab table as a new
tab stop.
Use Horizontal Tab Set (HTS) instead of the DECHTS control character.
Source: Application

Format

ESC

Destination: Levels 1, 2

ESC, 1111
Escape sequence introducer
1, 311
Escape sequence final character

Description
DECHTS is only supported for compatibility reasons.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-33

DECLFF - Load Font File

DECLFF - Load Font File
Load font files into the memory of the translator.
Source: Symbiont

Format

Destination: Level 3

DCS Ps1; Ps2; Ps3 y fonLrecord, fonLrecord;
comment_record ST
DCS, 910

Device control string introducer character
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating parameters
y, 719

Protocol selector final character for DECLFF
ST, 9112

String terminator character

Parameters
Ps1, selective parameter

0 is DIGITAL font file format.
Ps2, selective parameter

where:
0

is print summary sheet (not supported).

is do not print summary sheet.

Ps3, selective parameter

where:
0
1

is replace all font files.
is replace loaded font files with same ID.

3-34 ANSI Text Fur1ction Descriptions

DECLFF - Load Font File
font_record, font_record - 0 or more separated by commas
Data for font set.
comment_record
Optional user-supplied text, ignored by translator.

Description
After you load font files into memory, they remain for translation and
printing until one of the following events occurs:
•
•

New fonts load with a Ps3 value of 0.
The same font loads again.

You can only use font files that are in DIGITAL font file format, indicated by a Psl equal to 0. Otherwise, the translator ignores DECLFF.
Ps2 specifies whether to print a summary sheet. The translator ignores
this parameter, as the translator does not print reports.
Ps3 lets you select which font files to delete before the translator loads
new font files. Font files loaded from the host replace previously loaded
font files with the same font file ID. Font :files loaded from the host also
override but do not delete the built-in font files of the same font file ID.

DECLFF does not affect current Select Graphic Rendition (SGR)
assignments, SGR attribute settings, or other state variables.
Data between the final y (7 I 9) character and the string terminator
represents the font command string. The font record in DIGITAL font
file format contains data on one or more font :files. Usually, each font
file contains the character images for a particular character set in a
particular font. DCS Psl ; Ps2 ; Ps3 y indicates the beginning of the
font record, and ST indicates the end of the font record.
The comment record, a list of user text, is an optional parameter
ignored by the printer. Use a semicolon (3/11) to separate the comment
record from the font record.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

3-35

DECLFF -

Load Font File

Errors
If an error occurs, the translator loads those fonts received and makes
them available for assignment and selection. The translator ignores
incomplete or partially loaded fonts.
You can load font files in the middle of the page. However, software
should not delete a font file in the middle of a page. An error occurs if
one or more characters already imaged on the page need the deleted
font file. This error does not affect the translator, which continues
printing on the same page. Other devices, however, may eject the
current page.
If you use a value other than 0 for the Psl parameter, the translator
ignores the DECLFF control string. If you use a value other than 0 or
1 for the Ps3 parameter, the translator assumes a value of 1.

3-36 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECOPM -

Origin Placement Mode

DECO PM - Origin Placement Mode
Instruct 'translator to designate the origin of the page coordinates. The
origin defines the starting point for printing on a page. You can select
either the comer of the printable area or the comer of the physical
page. With DECOPM set, the origin occurs at the upper left comer
of the physical page. When DECOPM is reset, the translator sets the
origin, both horizontally and vertically, 1/4" from the upper left comer
of the physical page.
Source: Application

Format

CS/
CS/

Destination: Level 3

? 52 h - (SET)
? 521- (RESET)

CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character

? (question mark, 3115)
Control sequence parameter character indicating DIGITAL private
mode
52 (315, 312)

Control sequence selective parameter characters specifying DECOPM
h, 618
Control sequence final character - set mode selected by parameter
I, 6112

Control sequence final character - reset mode selected by parameter

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-37

DECOPM - Origin Placement Mode
Description
Margins and tabs move when the origin moves. The active position also
moves with the origin.
·
The initial state of DECOPM in the translator is reset; that is, the
origin occurs 1/4" from the upper left corner of the physical page.
NOTE

DECOPM is an example of a set/reset private mode sequence.
Refer to Section 2.1.12 for more information.

Errors
With DECOPM set, you can place the left margin at the extreme
left end of the paper. With the right margin set at the right-most
printable limit, 83 characters (at 10 characters/inch) fit on a line of
text. However, characters positioned at the. left margin outside the
printable limits do not print.
Changing DECOPM in the middle of the data stream yields unpredictable results.

3-38

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECPSM - Horizontal Pitch Select Mode

DECPSM - Horizontal Pitch Select Mode
Ignore the value sent by Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP). Use
the font pitch instead. With DESPSM reset, the translator uses the
horizontal pitch selected by DECSHORP.
Destination: Level 2

Source: Application

Format

CS/ ? 29h-(SET)
CS/ ? 291- (RESET)
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
? (quesrion mark, 3115)
Control sequence parameter character indicating DIGITAL private
mode

29 (312, 319)

Control sequence selective parameter characters specifying DECPSM
h, 618

Control sequence final character - set mode selected by parameter
I, 6112

Control sequence final character - reset mode selected by parameter

Description
The initial state of DECPSM in the translator is set (enabled).
Changes in either DECPSM or DECSHORP affect print positions set
by tab characters.
NOTE

DECPSM is an example of a set/reset private mode sequence.
Refer to Section 2.1.12 for more information.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-39

DECPSP - Proportional Spacing

DECPSP - Proportional Spacing
Enable font-dependent proportional spacing of characters. Select
monospaced printing with DECPSP reset.
Destination: Level 3

Source: Application

Format

CS/
CS/

? 27 h - (SET)
? 271- (RESET)

CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
? (question mark, 3115)
Control sequence parameter character indicating DIGITAL private
mode
21 (312, 3nJ
Control sequence selective parameter characters specifying DECPSP
h, 618
Control sequence final character - set mode selected by parameter
I, 6112

Control sequence final character - reset mode selected by parameter

Description
DECPSP has no effect on tab settings.
The initial state of DECPSP in the translator is reset (disabled).
NOTE

DECPSP is an example of a set/reset private mode. Refer to
Section 2.1.12 for more information.

3-40 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECRVEC -

Draw Relative Vector

DECRVEC- Draw Relative Vector
Draw a vector starting at some point relative to the current active
position. 1
Destination: Level 3 (Extension)

Source: Application

Format

CS/ Ps1 ;Pn2;Pn3;SP /
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating parameters
SP (space character, 210)

Control sequence intermediate character
/ (vertical bar, 7112)

Control sequence final character

Parameters
Ps1, selective parameter

where:

is draw an x line to the right.
is draw a y line down.
is draw an x line to the left.

is draw a y line up.

0
1

Pn2, numeric parameter

Line length; default value is 0.
Pn3, numeric parameter

Line width; default value is 0.

Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support DECRVEC.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-41

DECRVEC -

Draw Relative Vector

Description
DECRVEC draws lines without changing the translator's active position.
Using DECRVEC, you specify the length, width, and direction of a line.
The starting point of the line is relative to the current position. The
active position may first be adjusted vertically, exactly as if a character
were being imaged from the currently selected font.
As a vector has length and width, you can consider the vector as a filled
rectangle rather than a line. This rectangle has its upper-left comer as
the starting point.

The translator interprets the line length and width as pixels, decipoints, or centipoints. You select the unit by using the Select Size Unit
(SSU) sequence. The Position Unit Mode (PUM) setting does not affect
the unit selected.
The translator draws x lines horizontal with respect to the intended
reading page orientation and y lines vertical with respect to the intended reading page orientation.
Drawing vectors does not move the active position. You cannot use
DECRVEC to draw two relative vectors in succession. That is, you
cannot use the endpoint of one relative vector as the starting point
of a second relative vector. You must move the active position before
creating a second vector, unless both vectors use the same starting
point.
Relative vectors may extend beyond the limit bounds (left, right, top,
and bottom margins).

3-42

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECRVEC -

Draw Relative Vector

Errors
If a line extends beyond the physical limits of the page, the translator

only generates the part of the line that is within the page limits.
If the requested length is less than 1 pixel long (after conversion to
pixel units), the translator draws a line 1 pixel long. If the requested
line is less than 1 pixel wide, the translator draws a line 1 pixel wide.
Missing parameters are interpreted as Os. If a DECRVEC sequence
contains more than three parameters, the translator uses the first
three and ignores the rest.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-43

DECSHORP - Set Horizontal Pitch

DECSHORP- Set Horizontal Pitch
Select character spacing for fixed-width (monospaced) fonts.
DECSHORP1 determines the number of characters/inch (pitch) that
print when Pitch Select Mode (DECPSM) is reset. If DECPSM is set,
the translator saves the DECSHORP parameter.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Levels 1,.2, 3

CS/ Psw
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character

w, 1n
DECSHORP Control sequence final character

Parameter
Ps, selective parameter
where:

is default, pitch (average width of characters) of current font.

is 10 (characters/inch).

is 12.

is 13.2.

is 16.5.

is 5.

is 6.

is 6.6.

is 8.25.

is 15.

Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support selective parameters Ps=lO through
Ps=15.

3-44 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECSHORP - Set Horizontal Pitch
10

is 12.77.

is 17.1.

is 8.55.

13
14
15

is 18.
is 9.
is 10.3.

Description
DECSHORP generates an appropriate Graphic Size Modification
(GSM) along with the spacing change. This means that the translator
attempts a best match with the fonts that are available. DECSHORP
only affects horizontal character size; selected point size remains the
same.
Execution of DECSHORP produces the following results:
•
•
•
•

Clears left and right margins
Sets the line home position equal to the left margin
Adjusts horizontal tab stops to keep the number of character widths
(columns) between tab stops constant
Clears the right margin flag if the right margin moves to the right

Changes in either DECSHORP or DECPSM affect print positions set
by tab characters.
The default pitch in the translator is 10 characters/inch.

Errors
If you send a -DECSHORP during justification, the translator does not
justify the first part of the text. To change character size within justified text use Graphic Size Selection (GSS), Graphic Size Modification
(GSM), and Spacing Pitch Increment (SPI) instead of DECSHORP.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-45

DECSHTS -

Set Horizontal Tab Stop

DECSHTS - Set Horizontal Tab Stop
Set up to 16 horizontal tabs at one time. A horizontal tab stop is a
selected point on a line. When the translator receives a horizontal tab
(HT) control character,, the active position moves to the next horizontal
tab stop stored in the tab table.
Source: Application

Format

CS/

Destination: Levels 1, 2

Pn ; ... ; Pn u

CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating Pn parameters (tab stops)

u, 715
Control sequence final character

Parameter
Pn, numeric parameter

Numeric value according to SSU sequence and PUM setting.

Description
Each Pn parameter is a selected horizontal tab stop. Select up to 16
tab stops in one sequence. Send Pn values in any order.
Units of measurement are columns, decipoints, centipoints, or pixels.
Select units by using the Position Unit Mode (PUM) and Select Size
Unit (SSU) sequences, as follows:
•
•

If PUM is set, tabs interpret as numbers of pixels, decipoints, or
centipoints, on SSU.
If PUM is reset, tabs interpret as numbers of columns.

3-46 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECSHTS -

Set Horizontal Tab Stop

The translator sets tab stops relative to the page origin and not to the
left margin. Changing the left margin does not change the position of
tab stops. Changing the pitch with Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP)
or Pitch Select Mode (DECPSM), however, modifies tab positions to
keep the number of columns between tab stops constant.
Default horizontal tab stops are set at every eighth column in the
translator (at columns 9, 17, 25, and so forth).

Errors
If the translator receives more than 16 tab stops, it sets the first 16
and ignores the rest. If you send the same tab stop more than once,
the translator sets the tab stop once. The translator ignores a sequence
sent without tab stop parameters.
When the number of new tab settings exceeds the maximum of 32, the
translator discards the tab stop with the highest value.
You can set tab stops outside the current margins. The translator, however, does not use tab stops beyond the right margin. If the translator
receives a HT with the next tab stop in the table outside the right margin, the active column moves to the right margin and the right margin
:flag sets. At this point, autowrap determines the action:
•
•

With autowrap set, the next character causes an automatic carriage
return/line feed.
With autowrap reset, the translator waits for a command, such as
CR or HPA, to return the active column to the format bounds.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-47

DECSLPP ~ Set Lines Per Page

DECSLPP- Set Lines Per Page
Define form length in character cells, decipoints, centipoints, or pixels.
Form length is the vertical size of the printed area on a page. Select
the unit by using the Position Unit Mode (PUM) and Select Size Unit
(SSU) sequences. Maximum form length depends on the current origin,
the page orientation and the paper size.
Use PFS instead ofDECSLPP.
Source: Application

Format

CS/

Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3

Pn t

CSI, 9111

Control sequence introducer character

t, 714
Control sequence final character

Parameter
Pn, numeric parameter

Form length-setting numeric value in selected unit.

Description
If the origin is the upper left comer of the paper, the maximum form
length is the length of the physical paper, 3300 pixels for 8.5" x 11"
paper. (DECOPM is set.)
If the origin is 1/4" down and in from the upper left comer, the maximum form length is 75 pixels less than the length of the physical paper,
3225 pixels for 8.5" x 11" paper. (DECOPM is reset.)

DECSLPP resets the top margin to 1 and the bottom margin to the
form length. DECSLPP resets the format bounds to the margins. In
general, the form length limits the range of possible settings for the set
top and bottom margins (DECSTBM) sequence.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECSLPP -

Set Lines Per Page

For the default form length for your paper size, refer to the appropriate
table in Section 2.1.1.

Errors
If the Pn parameter is 0, not specified, or greater than the maximum

size for the paper and origin, then the translator sets the form length
to the maximum size for the paper and origin.
If you send a DECSLPP within justified text and DECSLPP causes the
active position to move, the translator does not justify the preceding
text. Only use DECSLPP on a new page.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-49

DECSLRM - Set Left and Right Margins

DECSLRM - Set Left and Right Margins
Set the left and right margins. The left ·margin runs down the left side
of the first character box on a line. The right margin runs down the
right side of the last character box. DECSLRM sets line home position
equal to the left margin. The line end position always equals the right
margin.
Source: Application

Format

CS/ Pn1; Pn2 s
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating Pl and P2

s, 713
Control sequence :final character

Parameters
Pn1, numeric parameter

Left margin-setting numeric value.
Pn2, numeric parameter

Right margin-setting numeric value.

3-50 ANS I Text Function Descriptions

Destination: Levels 2, 3

DECSLRM -

Set Left and Right Margins

Description
Initial values of the parameters are as follows:
Pnl is 1

Pn2 is 80
You select the unit of measurement by using the Position Unit Mode
(PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences. With PUM set, the
translator interprets parameters as numbers of pixels, centipoints,
or decipoints, according to the setting of SSU. With PUM reset, the
translator interprets parameters as numbers of columns.
The translator places data only within the left and right margins, with
two exceptions:
•
•

DECVEC (Draw Vector) and DECRVEC (Draw Relative Vector)
allow you to draw lines outside the margins.
During justification, if the spacing between words is less than the
specified minimum width of the space character, the text prints
unjustified. Text may exceed the right margin.

The translator sets margins relative to the page origin. Changing the
page origin causes the margins to move. Paper origin changes with
paper size changes and with the Origin Placement Mode (DECOPM)
sequence. Changing right and left margins ·does not affect horizontal
tab stops.
Margin settings take effect as received. The translator sets margins
where specified, with the following exceptions:
•
•

If Pnl is 0 or omitted, the left margin is unchanged.
If Pn2 is 0 or omitted, the right margin is unchanged.

If the horizontal position is less than the left margin, the translator

sets the ·active horizontal position to the left margin. If the horizontal
position is outside the right margin, the translator sets it to the right
margin. What happens to the next printable character, in this case,
depends on the autowrap setting:
•
•

With autowrap set, the next printable character prints on· the next
line.
With autowrap reset, succeeding. characters truncate until you
execute a carriage return (CR) or HPA.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-51

DECSLRM -

Set Left and Right Margins

Moving the right margin further to the right clears the right margin
flag. Moving the right margin to the left:
•
•

Leaves the right margin flag unaffected if the right margin remains
greater than the active horizontal position
Sets. the right margin flag if the right margin is less than or equal
to the active horizontal position

After receiving a Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) sequence, the
translator:
•
•
•

Sets the left margin at the origin
Sets the right margin to the right printable limit
Clears the right margin flag

Default left and right margins in the translator occur at the printable
limits.

Errors
If Pn2 sets a right margin greater than the printable width, the translator sets the right margin to the right printable limit.
If the sequence tries to set the left margin equal to or greater than the
right margin, the translator ignores the sequence.
If you send too many parameters, the translator uses the first two and
ignores the rest.
With Origin Placement Mode (DECOPM) set (origin at upper left corner
of the physical page), a Pnl setting of 1 puts the left margin at the left
edge of the physical page. Characters that precede the left printable
limit do not print.
If you send DECSLRM within justified text and the margin change
causes the active position to change, the translator does not justify the
first part of the text.

3-52 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECSTBM -

Set Top and Bottom Margins

DECSTBM - Set Top and Bottom Margins
Set top and bottom margins. The top margin specifies the top line
on a page. The bottom margin specifies the bottom line on a page.
DECSTBM sets page home line to the top margin and page end line to
the bottom margin.
Use Page Format Select (PFS) instead of DECSTBM. Future devices
may not implement DECSTBM.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Levels 2, 3

CS/ Pn1; Pn2 r
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating Pl and P2

r, 712
Control sequence final character

Parameters
Pn1, numeric parameter

Top margin-setting numeric value.
Pn2, numeric parameter

Bottom margin-setting numeric value.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-53

DECSTBM - Set Top and Bottom Margins
Description
Printing occurs within the top and bottom margins, with the following
exceptions:
•
•
•

DECVEC (Draw Vector) and DECRVEC (Draw Relative Vector)
allow you to draw outside the margins
PLD (Partial Line Down) may print part of a character below the
bottom margin
PLU (Partial Line Up) may print part of a character above the top
margin

Select the unit of measurement by using the Position Unit Mode (PUM)
and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences:
•

If PUM is set, margin parameters interpret in pixels, centipoints,

•

or decipoints, according to the SSU setting.
If PUM is reset, parameters interpret as numbers of lines.

The translator sets margins relative to the page origin. Changing the
page origin causes the margins to move. Changing the top and bottom
margins does not affect vertical tab stops.
Margin settings take effect as received. The printer sets margins where
specified, with the following exceptions:
•
•

If Pnl is 0 or omitted, the top margin remains unchanged.
If Pn2 is 0 or omitted, the bottom margin remains unchanged.

If the current vertical position is above the new top margin, the trans-

lator sets the active vertical position to the new top margin. This sets
the first character fiag. If the current vertical position is below the new
bottom margin, the next printable character causes a form feed.
Setting the form length with DECSLPP does the following:
•
•

Sets the top margin to 1
Sets the bottom margin to form length

Default top and bottom margins in the translator occur at the printable
limits.

3-54 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECSTBM -

Set Top and Bottom Margins

Errors
If the bottom margin Pn2 is greater than the form length, the translator sets the bottom margin to form length.
If DECSTBM tries to set the top margin below the bottom margin, the
translator ignores the command.
If you send too many parameters, the translator uses the first two and
ignores the rest.
If you send DECSTBM within justified text and the sequence causes
the active position to move, the translator does not justify the first part
of the text. Only use DECSTBM on a new page.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-55

DECSTR -

Soft Terminal Reset

DECSTR - Soft Terminal Reset
Reset translator state variables to their initial values, based on parameters to the PRINT command.
Source: Application, Symbiont

Format

CS/

Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3

CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
I (exclamation mark, 211)
Control sequence intermediate character

p, 710
Control sequence final character

Description
Refer to Section 2.1.1 for the translator initial state values and for the
effect of different PRINT command parameters (paper size and page
orientation) on the initial state values. PRINT command parameters
change the following values: horizontal pitch, vertical spacing, left and
right margins, top and bottom margins, page home line and page end
line, and line home position.
If the translator has processed any printable character, vector, or sixel
on the current page, DECSTR causes a form feed.

DECSTR does not delete down-line loaded (DLL) fonts.

Errors
If you send DECSTR while the translator is processing justified text,
the translator processes the text unjustified before performing the
reset.

3-56 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECSVTS - Set Vertical Tabulation Stops

DECSVTS - Set Vertical Tabulation Stops
Set up to 16 vertical tabs at one time.
Source: Application

Format

CS/

Destination: Level 2

Pn ; ... ; Pn v

CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating Pn parameters (tab stops)

v, 716
Control sequence final character

Parameter
Pn, numeric parameter

Numeric value according to SSU sequence and PUM setting.

Description
Each Pn value is a selected vertical tab stop. Select up to 16 tab stops
in one sequence. The translator receives these values in any order and
sorts and places them in the tab table.
Units of measurement can be lines, decipoints, or pixels. Select units
by using the Position Unit Mode (PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU)
sequences, as follows:
•
•

If PUM is set, tabs interpret as numbers of pixels, centipoints, or
decipoints, based on the SSU setting.
If PUM is reset, tabs interpret as numbers of lines.

The page origin, not the top margin, determines tab stop positions.
Changing the top margin does not change the position of vertical tab
stops. Changing the position of the origin with DECOPM or PFS moves
the tab stop relative to the edge of the paper.
ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-57

DECSVTS - Set Vertical Tabulation Stops
If the first character flag is clear, the translator sets the new tab stop
at the active position. With the first character flag set, the translator
sets the new tab stop at the baseline, assuming that a character from
the current font has the top of its character cell at the active position.
The translator sets default vertical tab stops at every line, based on an
11-inch form with 6 lines/inch.

Errors
If the translator receives more than 16 tabs in one sequence, the
translator sets the first 16 and ignores the rest. If you send the same
tab stop more than once, it sets once.
If the vertical tab table is full when the translator receives a new tab
stop, the translator bumps the highest tab stop from the table.

Tab stops can be set outside the margins. The translator, however, does
not use tab stops below the bottom margin. If you send a VT (Vertical
Tab) and the next tab stop in the table is below the bottom margin,
the translator sets the active vertical position to the bottom margin. A
printable character or a line feed at the bottom margin causes a form
feed, and the active position resets to page home line.

3-58 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECVEC - Draw Vector

DECVEC- Draw Vector
Generate a line. The translator draws only horizontal and vertical lines
with DECVEC.
Destination: Level 3 (Extension)

Source: Application

Format

CS/ Ps1; Pn2; Pn3; Pn4; Pn5! /
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating DECVEC parameters
! (exclamation mark, 211)
Control sequence intermediate character
/ (vertical bar, 7112)

Control sequence final character

Parameters
Ps1, selective parameter

where:
0

is draw x (horizontal) line; default.
is draw y (vertical) line.

Other is perform no action.

Pn2, numeric parameter

x (horizontal line) start position; default value is 0.
Pn3, numeric parameter

y (vertical line) start position; default value is 0.
Pn4, numeric parameter

Line length; default value is 0.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-59

DECVEC -

Draw Vector
Pn5, numeric parameter
Line width; default value is 0.

Description
DECVEC draws lines without modifying the translator's active position.
Using the Pn parameters, the translator determines length, width,
and direction of the line. SSU (Select Size Unit)· determines the unit
of measurement, pixels, centipoints, or decipoints, for parameters Pn2
through Pn5, regardless of the setting of PUM.
Since a vector has length and width, you can consider it as a filled
rectangle rather than a line. The starting point for drawing this
rectangle is the upper left-hand corner.
For an x line, Pn4 specifies horizontal length and Pn5 specifies vertical
width. For a y line, Pn4 specifies vertical length and Pn5 specifies
horizontal width.

Errors
Missing parameters interpret as 0. Receiving a DECVEC sequence
with too many parameters, the translator uses the first five and ignores
the rest.
If the requested line is less than 1 pixel long, the translator draws a
line 1 pixel long. If the requested line is less than 1 pixel wide, the
translator draws a line 1 pixel wide.
Margin settings do not affect line drawing. DECVEC may draw lines
that extends beyond the margins, but not out of the printable area.

3-60 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECVERP - Set Vertical Pitch

DECVERP - Set Vertical Pitch
Select number of lines printed for each inch on a page. 1 Changing the
vertical pitch changes the white space between lines and not the size
of the character. If you increase the number of lines/inch, you decrease
the amount of white space between the lines.
Destination: Levels 1, 2

Source: Application

Format

CS/

Psz

CS/, 9111
Control sequence introducer character

z, 7110
Control sequence final character

Parameter
Ps, selective parameter

where:
0

is determined by current font (default).

is 6.

is 8.

is 12.

is 2.

is 3.

is 4.

is the font default, compressed if necessary.

is initial vertical pitch - 66 lines on 8" x 10.5" printable area.
(DECSLPP and page size do not affect this setting.)

1 Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support selective parameters Ps=lO, and

Ps=12 through Ps=16.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-61

DECVERP -

Set Vertical Pitch

is 8.38.

is 12.57.

is 2.10.

is 3.14.
is 4.19.

Description
Selective parameters Psll to Ps16 correspond to parameters Pnl to
Pn6 in that they provide the same number of lines/page on a printable
area that is 0.5 inches smaller. For example, Psl is 6 lines/inch or 66
lines/page for a printable area of 8.5" x 11". Psll is 66 lines/page for a
printable area of 8" x 10.5". Ps2 is 8 lines/inch or 88 lines/page for a
printable area of 8.5" x 11". Ps12 is 88 lines/page for a printable area
of 8" x 10.5".
DECVERP does not change top and bottom margins. Vertical tab stops
adjust, however, to keep an equal number of lines between vertical
tabs. For example, if you set a vertical tab stop at 12. lines with a
vertical pitch of 6 lines/inch, the stored tab stop is 2 inches from the
top margin. If a DECVERP changes the pitch to 12 lines/inch, the tab
moves to 1 inch from the top margin to retain 12 lines between the
margin and the tab stop. Print lines set by vertical tabs move up or
down with .changes of DECVERP.
Settings of PSM do not affect DECVERP.
Initial value of Ps is 0.

3-62 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECVPFS - Variable Page Format Select

DECVPFS - Variable Page Format Select
Specify a page format for special sizes of paper, by entering numeric
values for the page width and length. 1 DECVPFS also specifies the
margins, page home line, page end line, line home position, line end
position, and orientation. A page format selected by DECVPFS remains in effect until the next Page Format Select (PFS) or DECVPFS
sequence, or until control functions or user actions change the variables
DECVPFS affects.
Source: Application

Format

CS/

Destination: Level 3 (Extension)

Ps1; Pn2; ... Pn11 SP z

CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating parameters
SP {space character, 210)

Control sequence intermediate character

z, 7110
Control sequence final character

Parameters
Ps1, selective parameter

where:

0, 1, or
omitted
2

is landscape orientation.

other

is portrait orientation.

Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support DECVPFS.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-63

DECVPFS -

Variable Page Format Select

Pn2 to Pn11, numeric parameters

Table 3-4 lists the remaining parameters of DECVPFS. Parameter
values are with respect to the current origin. Length and width of
paper (Pn2 and Pn3) are with respect to the page orientation.
Table 3-4:

DECVPFS Selective Parameters

Parameter

Meaning

If 0 or omitted

Pn2

Length of paper

Default

Pn3

Width of paper

Default

Pn4

Top margin

Pn5

Bottom margin

Bound of printable area

Pn6

Left margin

Pn7

Right margin

Bound of printable area

Pn8

Page home line

Top margin

Pn9

Page end line

Bottom margin

PnlO

Line home position

Left margin

Line end position

Right margin

Pnll

Description
Use the DECVPFS sequence to set the page size and origin for a
nonstandard size of paper. Use the Page Format Select (PFS) sequence
for standard paper sizes. DECVPFS works like PFS, except you specify
the page dimensions.
The translator interprets the Pn values as a number of decipoints,
centipoints, or pixels. Select the unit by using the Select Size Unit
(SSU) sequence. The Position Unit Mode (PUM) sequence does not
affect the unit selected.
In general, you only have to send parameters that are changing. If any
one of the margin parameters are missing or 0, the missing margin is
set at the edge of the printable area (0.25 inches from the edge of the
paper). If any one of the format bounds are missing or 0, the missing
parameter is set to the corresponding margin.
·
When you use DECVPFS, the active position is always set to the upper
left-hand corner of the printable area. The origin is reset .25" from the
edge of the paper when the printer receives a PFS or DECVPFS.
3-64 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECVPFS -

Variable Page Format Select

Errors
If you use DECVPFS within justified text, the preceding text is unjustified. For this reason, you should use DECVPFS only on a new page of
output.
If you set the right margin (Pn5) smaller than the left margin (Pn4),
the translator ignores the sequence. If the right or bottom margins are
closer than .25" to the paper length or width, the translator sets them
to .25" from the paper length or width.
If you set a page size smaller than .5" horizontally and vertically, the
translator sets the page size to .5".
If you set the paper length or paper width greater than the physical
paper size in use, the translator clips the image at the edge of the
printable area.

If you choose a value for the page end line below the bottom margin,
the translator sets it to the bottom margin. Ifthe value for the line end
position is to the right of the right margin, the translator sets it to the
right margin.

Examples
Tables 3-5 through 3-9 provide the DECVPFS values that create
differently sized pages. Each of the values is in pixels (1/300"). When
you use these tables to select a logical page size, be certain that it
matches the physical page size of the paper in the tray.
Executive-Size Paper

Table 3-5 shows the format for executive-size paper, which is 7.5" by
10.5". Executive paper has a physical size of 2250 pixels by 3150 pixels.
It has an inherent printable area of 2100 by 3000 pixels.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-65

DECVPFS - Variable Page Format Select
Table 3-5: PFS Margins and Format for Executive-Size Paper
Paper Width
7.5<1'
7.5<1'
Psl - Orientation
Pn2 - Paper length
Pn3 - Paper width

1
3150
2250

2
2250
3150

Pn4 - 1bp margin
Pn5 - Bottom margin

75
3075

75
2175

Pn7 - Right margin

75
2175

75
3075

Pn8 - Page home

150

Pn9 - Page end
PnlO - Line home

3000

2100
150

Pn6 - Left margin

Pnll - Line end

150
2100

3000

For example, to use the DECVPFS command to create a landscape page
format for paper that is 10.5" by 7.5", you can use the following control
function:
CSI 2; 2250; 3150; 75; 2175; 75; 3075; 150; 2100; 150; 3000

SP z

This control function specifies that all the margins be set .25" from the
edge of the paper. It also specifies a line home position .5" from the left
edge of the paper and a line end position .5" from the right edge of the
paper.

3-66 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECVPFS - Variable Page Format Select
85-Slze Paper

B5-size paper has a physical size of 2150 pixels by 3036 pixels. It has
an inherent printable area of 2000 pixels by 2886 pixels. Table 3-6
shows the dimensions and other values for B5 paper.
Table 3-6:

PFS Margins and Format for 85-Size Paper (182 x 257
mm)
Parameter
Portrait
Landscape
Psl - Orientation

1
3036

2
2150

Pn3 - Paper width
Pn4 - Top margin
Pn5 - Bottom margin

2150

3036

75
2961

75
2075

Pn6 - Left margin

75
2075

75
2961

150
2886

150
2000

150
2886

Pn2 - Paper length

Pn7 - Right margin
Pn8 - Page home
Pn9 - Page end
PnlO - Line home
Pnll - Line end

For example, to use the DECVPFS command to create a landscape page
format for B5-size paper, you can use the following control function:
CSI 2; 2150; 3036; 75; 2075; 75; 2961; 150; 2000; 150; 2886 SP z

The control function sets right and left margins .25" from the edge of
the paper.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-67

DECVPFS - Variable Page Format Select
AS-Size Paper

European half-letter paper (A5) paper has a physical size of 1750 pixels
by 2480 pixels. It has an inherent printable area of 1600 by 2330
pixels. Table 3-7 shows the dimensions and other values for A5 paper.
PFS Margins and Format for AS-Size Paper (148 x 210
mm)
Parameter
Landscape
Portrait

Table 3-7:

Psl - Orientation
Pn2 - Paper length

1
2480

2
1750

Pn3 - Paper width

1750

2480

Pn4 - 1bp margin

Pn5 - Bottom margin

2405

1675

Pn6 - Left margin

Pn7 - Right margin

1675

2405

Pn8 - Page home

150

Pn9 - Page end

2330

1600

PnlO - Line home

150

Pnll - Line end

1600

2330

For example, to use the DECVPFS command to create a portrait page
format for A5-size paper, you can use the following control function:
CSI 1; 2480; 1750; 75; 2405; 75; 1675; 150; 2330; 150; 1600 SP z

3-68 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECVPFS - Variable Page Format Select
84-Size Paper

B4-size paper has a physical size of 3036 pixels by 4299 pixels. It has
an inherent printable area of 2886 by 4149 pixels. Table 3-8 shows the
dimensions and other values for B4 paper.
Table 3-8:

PFS Margins and Format for 84-Size Paper (250 x 353
mm)
Landscape
Parameter
Portrait
Psl - Orientation
Pn2 - Paper length

1
4299

2
3036

Pn3 - Paper width

3036

4299

Pn4 - Top margin

Pn5 - Bottom margin

4224

2961

Pn6 - Left margin

Pn7 - Right margin

2961

4224

Pn8 - Page home

150

Pn9 - Page end

4149

2886

PnlO - Line home

150

Pnll - Line end

2886

4149

For example, to use the DECVPFS command to create a portrait page
format for B4-size paper, you can use the following control function:
CSI 1; 4299; 3036;

75;

4224; 75; 2961; 150; 4149; 150; 2886 SP z

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-69

DECVPFS - Variable Page Format Select
A3-Size Paper

A3-size paper has a physical size of 3507 pixels by 4962 pixels. It has
an inherent printable area of 3432 by 4812 pixels. Table 3-9 shows the
dimensions and other values for A3 paper.
Table 3-9:

PFS Margins and Format for A3-Size Paper (397 x 420
mm)
Parameter
Portrait
Landscape
Psl - Orientation
Pn2 - Paper length

1
4962

2
3507

Pn3 - Paper width
Pn4 - 'lbp margin

3507

4962

75
4887

75
3432

Pn7 - Right margin

3432

4887

Pn8 - Page home

150
4812

150
3357

150
4812

Pn5 - Bottom margin
Pn6 - Left margin

Pn9 - Page end
PnlO - Line home
Pnll - Line end

For example, to use the DECVPFS command to create a portrait page
format for A3-size paper, you can use the following control function:
CSI 1; 4962; 3507; 75; 4887; 300; 3207; 150; 4812; 150; 3357 SP z

3-70 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

DECVTS - Vertical Tab Set

DECVTS- Vertical Tab Set
Enter current vertical position into the tab table as a new tab stop.
Use Set Vertical Tabulation Stops (DECSVTS) or Vertical Tab Stop
(VTS) instead of DECVTS.
Source: Application

Format

l)estination: Levels 1, 2

ESC 3
ESC, 1111
Escape sequence introducer character
3, 313
Escape sequence final character

Description
DECVTS is only supported for compatibility reasons.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-71

GSM - Graphic Size Modification

GSM - Graphic Size Modification
Modify the height and/or width, established by the Graphic Size
Modification (GSS) sequence, of all designated primary and alternative fonts. The modification remains in effect until the next GSM or
GSS occurs in the data stream.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Level 3

CS/ Pn1; Pn2 SP B
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating parameters Pnl and Pn2
SP {space character, 210)

Control sequence intermediate character
B, 412

Control sequence final character

Parameters
Pn1, numeric parameter

where:
100

is initial value.

Decimal
value

is the percentage of the height set by GSS.

Pn2, numeric parameter

where:
100

is initial value.

Decimal
value

is the percentage of the width set by GSS.

3-72 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

GSM - Graphic Size Modification
Description
Pnl is a decimal value that specifies the height of the character as
a percentage of the height selected by the GSS sequence. Pn2 is a
decimal value that specifies the width as a percentage of the width set
by the GSS sequence.
Default values used by the translator when you omit one or both
parameters are 100%.
IMPORTANT

GSM does not affect line spacing, unless the last Set Vertical
Pitch (DECVERP) function selected the pitch of the current
font (Ps=O). Therefore, you should use the Select Vertical
Spacing (SVS) function to change line spacing. Otherwise,
the line spacing may be incorrect and characters may overlap
the margins or each other.

Errors
You can use GSM in the middle of a line, and the baseline is not
affected. In other words, characters of different sizes line up correctly.
If you switch to taller characters, make sure the vertical spacing allows
for the new character height.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

3-73

GSS - Graphic Size Selection

GSS- Graphic Size Selection
Establish height and width of primary and alternative fonts. GSS
remains until the next occurrence of GSS or Graphic Size Modification
(GSM) in the data stream. The height of a font implicitly defines the
width.
Source: Application

Format

CS/

Destination: Level 3

PnSPC

CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
SP (space character, 210)

Control sequence intermediate character
C, 413

Control sequence final character

Parameter
Pn, numeric parameter

where:
100

is initial value.

Decimal
value

is the font height set by SSU sequence.

Description
Default value of GSS is 0, which results in a setting of 100 decipoints.
GSS does not affect horizontal or vertical tab settings. Also, GSS does
not affect line spacing, unless the last Set Vertical Pitch CDECVERP)
command selected the pitch of the current font (Ps = 0). Therefore,
when you use GSS, you should use the Select Vertical Spacing (SVS)
function to select line spacing. Otherwise, characters on adjacent lines
may overlap.

3-74 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

GSS - Graphic Size Selection
Initial value of GSS in the translator is 100 decipoints.

Errors
You can use GSS in the middle of a line, and the baseline is not
affected. In other words, characters of different sizes line up correctly.
If you switch to taller characters, make sure the vertical spacing allows
for the new character height.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-75

HPA -

Horizontal Position Absolute

HPA- Horizontal Position Absolute
Move the active position to the horizontal position specified by Pn.
Motion occurs either to the right or to the left.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Levels 2, 3

CS/ Pn'
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
' (grave accent, 610)

Control sequence final character

Parameter
Pn, numeric parameter

where:
0

is default value (1).

is numeric value per SSU sequence and PUM setting.

Description
Units of measurement depend on the settings of the Position Unit Mode
(PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences. With PUM set, units are
pixels, centipoints, or decipoints, based on SSU. If PUM is reset, the
parameter interprets in terms of characters.
HPA can place the active horizontal position to the left of the line home
position.
With attributes invoked by Select Graphic Rendition (SGR), HPA
underlines, double-underlines, overlines, or strikes-through text from
the current position to the target position.

3-76 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

HPA- Horizontal Position Absolute
Default value of the parameter is 1.
NOTE

The LN03 interprets 1 decipoint as 0 pixels, due to rounding.
One decipoint stores as 1 decipoint in the translator, as the
translator does not round.

Errors
If you attempt to move the horizontal position outside the left margin,

the translator sets the horizontal position to the left margin.
If you attempt to move beyond the right margin, the translator sets the

horizontal position equal to the right margin and sets the right margin
flag. What happens to the next printable character depends on the
setting of autowrap:
•
•

With autowrap set, the next character executes an automatic
carriage return/line feed.
With autowrap reset, the translator waits for a command, such as
CR, to return the active position inside the format bounds.

A HPA in justified text causes unjustified output of the preceding text.
The remainder of the line may be justified.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-77

HPB - Horizontal Position Backward

HPB - Horizontal Position Backward
Move the horizontal position backward a specified amount of spaces
(pixels, centipoints, or decipoints).
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Level 3

CS/ Pnj
CS/, 9111
Control sequence introducer character

j, 6110

Control sequence final character

Parameter
Pn, numeric parameter
where:
0

is the default value (1).

is the numeric value according to SSU sequence and PUM setting.

Description
Units of measurement depend on the settings of the Position Unit Mode
(PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences, as follows:
•

If PUM is set, units are pixels, centipoints, or decipoints, based on

•

If PUM is reset, the parameter interprets in terms of characters.

ssu.

HPB can place the active horizontal position to the left of the line home
position.
With the right margin flag set, the translator ignores receiving an HPB
sequence.

3-78 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

HPB - Horizontal Position Backward
With attributes invoked by Select Graphic Rendition (SGR), HPB
underlines, double-underlines, overlines, or strikes-through text from
the current position to the target position.
The translator takes HPB in justified text as relative to the adjusted
position during the setting of the line. Characters separated by relative
positioning commands (HPB, HPR, VPB, VPR) move as a group with
Justify invoked. Use these commands for multilevel formulas.
The default value of the parameter is 1.
NOTE

The LN03 interprets 1 decipoint as 0 pixels, due to rounding.
One decipoint stores as 1 decipoint in the translator, as the
translator does not round.

Errors
If you attempt to move the horizontal position outside the left margin,
the translator sets the horizontal position equal to the left margin.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-79

HPR -

Horizontal Position Relative

HPR - Horizontal Position Relative
Move the horizontal position to the right a specified amount of spaces
(pixels, centipoints, or decipoints).
Source: Application

Format

CS/

Destination: Level 3

Pna

CS/, 9111
Control sequence introducer character

a, 611
Control sequence final character

Parameter
Pn, numeric parameter
where:
0

is the default value (1).

is the numeric value specified by the SSU sequence and PUM setting.

Description
Units of measurement depend on the settings of the Position Unit Mode
(PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences, as follows:
•

If PUM is set, units are pixels, centipoints, or decipoints, based on

•

If PUM is reset, the parameter interprets in terms of characters.

ssu.

With attributes invoked by Select Graphic Rendition (SGR), HPR
underlines, double-underlines, overlines, or strikes-through text from
the current position to the target position.
The tr~slator takes HPR in justified text as relative to the adjusted
position during the setting of the line. Characters separated by relative
positioning commands (HPB, HPR, VPB, VPR) move as a group with
Justify (JFY) invoked. Use for multilevel formulas.
3-80 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

HPR -

Horizontal Position Relative

Default value of the parameter is 1.
NOTE

The LN03 interprets 1 decipoint as 0 pixels, due to rounding.
One decipoint stores as 1 decipoint in the translator, as the
translator does not round.

Errors
If you try to move the horizontal position outside the right margin,

the translator sets the horizontal position equal to the right margin
and sets the right margin flag. With the right margin flag set, the
translator ignores receiving an HPR sequence.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-81

JFY -

Justify

JFY-Justify
Align printed text at the right margin. The translator justifies text
by changing the spacing between words. Justified lines have the first
character of the first word at the line home position (left margin) or a
position defined by Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA) or a Horizontal
Tab (HT) or the JFY start, whichever occurred last. The last character
of the last word is at the line end position (the right margin).

Source: Application

Format

Destination: Level 3

CS/ PsSPF
CS/, 1111

Control sequence introducer character
SP, 210
Control sequence intermediate character
F, 416
Control sequence final character

Parameter
Ps, selective parameter

where:
2

is stop justification (default).
is justify with limits.

is justify without limits.

Description
The translator spaces words evenly on each justified line. Using the
selective parameter Ps, you can limit the size of interword spaces on a
justified line. SP represents a word space to the translator.

3-82 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

JFY -

Justify

Turn on JFY. The translator justifies text until you turn off justify.
Line end position serves as the right anchor for the sequence. The left
margin, the last Horizontal Tab (HT), Horizontal Position Absolute
(HPA), or Vertical Position Absolute (VPA), whichever occurred last,
acts as the left anchor.
If you select justification with limits, the translator shrinks or expands
SP within the limits of the current font. Usually these limits fall
between 50 and 200 percent. Selecting justification without limits
allows the translator to shrink SP to 0 or expand to any size.
Avoid Backspace (BS) when using a proportional font. The translator does not adjust BS as it does SP during justification. BS moves
backwards by the nominal width of a space.
Regardless of whether autowrap is set, the translator does not autowrap text during justification.
The translator does not recognize end-of-line or hyphenation symbols.
The following control characters and escape sequences determine line
end and signal the end of the justified line:
•
•
•
•
•

Carriage Return (CR)
Line Feed (LF)
Next Line (NEL)
Forward Index (IND)
Reverse Index (RI)

Any sequence that changes, specifies, or requires an absolute position
causes unjustified output of the preceding text on that line. The
remainder of the line justifies. These following commands act in this
manner:

•
•
•
•

•
•

Form Feed (FF)
Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA)
Horizontal Tab (HT)
Vertical Position Absolute (VPA)
Vertical Tab (VT)
Page Format Select (PFS)
Entering sixel mode (DCS)
Origin placement mode (DECOPM)

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-83

JFY -

Justify
Reset to Initial State (RIS) and Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR) also
create unjustified text.
When margins change, affecting the active position, unjustified text
results. Unjustified text prior to the change results from the following
margin changes:
•
•
•

Top margin moves down so that the vertical position lies above the
new margin.
Bottom margin moves up so that the active position is below the
new margin.
Left margin moves right so that the horizontal position is left of the
new margin.

After these changes, the horizontal position is the new left anchor.
Justification does not alter relative motion sequences to allow for
subscript and superscript characters (Partial Line Down (PLD) and
Partial Line Up (PLU)) and overstrike characters (using Horizontal
Position Backward (HPB)). These sequences include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Backspace (BS)
Cursor Up (CUU)
Horizontal Position Backward (HPB)
Horizontal Position Relative (HPR)
Partial Line Down (PLD)
Partial Line Up (PLU)
Vertical Position Backward (VPB)
Vertical Position Relative (VPR)

The default value for JFY in the translator is 0 (no justify).

3-84 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

JFY - Justify
Errors
Sending another justify sequence when justify is enabled does not affect
the translator.
If you send an unimplemented justify parameter, the translator ignores
the sequence; it does not tum off justification.
Using justification with limits, the translator sets spaces at a nominal
size for lines that are too short to reach from line home position to
line end position and truncates text exceeding the right margin. Auto
wrapping does not occur during justification.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-85

LNM - Line Feed New Line Mode

LNM - Line Feed New Line Mode
Instruct the translator to move to the line home position on the next
line upon receipt of LF. When this mode is reset (disabled), the LF
character advances the vertical position one line without moving the
horizontal position to the left margin.
Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3

Source: Application

Format

CS/ 20 h - (SET)
CS/ 20 I - (RESET)
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
20 (312, 310)

Control sequence selective parameter characters specifying LNM
h, 618

Control sequence final character - set mode selected by parameter
I, 6112

Control sequence final character - reset mode selected by parameter

Description
Initial state of LNM in the translator is reset.
NOTE

LNM is an example of a set/reset ANSI mode sequence.
Several ANSI modes can be turned on or off in a single
sequence. CSI 20 ; 11 h enables both LNM and PUM. For
more information, refer to Section 2.1.12.

3-86 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

LS2 -

Locking Shift 2

LS2 - Locking Shift 2
Invoke character set G2 into GL.
Source: Application

Format

ESC

Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3

ESC, 1111

Escape sequence introducer character

n, 6114
Final escape sequence character

Description
Character set G2 remains until you lock another character set into GL
or GR.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-87

LS3 -

Locking Shift 3

LS3- Locking Shift 3
Invoke character set G3 into GL.
Source: Application

Format

ESC

Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3

ESC, 1111

Escape sequence introducer character

o, 6115
Final escape sequence character

Description
Character set G3 remains until you lock another character set into GL
or GR.

3-88 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

LS1 R - Locking Shift 1 Right

LS1 R - Locking Shift 1 Right
Invoke character set G1 into GR.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3

ESC
ESC, 1111
Escape sequence introducer character
- (tilde, 7114)
Final escape sequence character

Description
Character set G1 remains until you lock another character set into GL
or GR.
NOTE

LSOR does not exist.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-89

'LS2R -

LS2R -

Locking Shift 2 Right

Locking Shift 2 Right
Invoke character set G2 into GR.
Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3

Source: Application

Format

ESC }
ESC, 1111

Escape sequence introducer character
} (Right brace, 7113)

Final escape sequence character

Description
Character set G2 remains until you lock another character set into GL
or GR.
NOTE

LSOR does not exist.

3-90 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

LS3R - Locking Shift 3 Right

LS3R- Locking Shift 3 Right
Invoke character set G3 into GR.
Destination: Levels l, 2, 3

Source: Application

Format

ESC

ESC, 1111
Escape sequence introducer character
/ (Vertical bar, 7112)
Final escape sequence character

Description
Character set G3 remains until you lock another character set into GL
or GR.
NOTE

LSOR does not exist.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-91

PFS -

Page Format Select

PFS- Page Format Select
Select page format from a list of standard formats that specify character size, characters/line, and lines/page. PFS sets the origin, top,
bottom, left, and right margins; line home position; page home line; and
page end line; print orientation; and form length - variables that determine the printable portion of the page. The selected format remains
until the next occurrence of PFS or until parameters are changed by
other control sequences.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Level 3

CS/ PsSPJ
CS/ ? Ps SP J-(Private)
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
? (question mark, 3115)
Nonnumeric parameter that selects a DIGITAL Private parameter
SP, 210
Control sequence intermediate character

J, 4110
Control sequence final character

3-92 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

PFS -

Page Format Select

Parameter
Ps, selective parameter
where:
0

is ?20

is landscape normal text.
is portrait normal A4.

2
3
4

is landscape normal A4.
is portrait normal North American letter.
is landscape normal North American letter.

is portrait extended A4.
is landscape extended A4.
is portrait extended legal.

is landscape extended legal.

?20

is portrait extended North American private.

?21

is landscape extended North American private.

?22
?23

is portrait extended A4 private.
is landscape extended A4 private.

?24

is portrait extended legal private.

?25
?26

is landscape extended legal private.
is portrait extended B private.

?27

is landscape extended B private.

Description
When you use the PFS sequence to select a page format, the Origin
Placement Mode (DECOPM) is always reset. That is, the origin occurs
1/4" both horizontally and vertically from the upper left corner of the
page.
PFS sets the active horizontal position to the line home position and
the active vertical position to page home line. Which page format you
select determines the location of line home position and page home line,
as follows:

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-93

PFS - Page Format Select
•
•

•
•

A Ps· preceded by a question mark (?) (DIGITAL Private parameter) sets the line home position to the left margin.
A Ps without a question mark (?) (ANSI parameter) sets the line
home position 1/2" to the right of the left margin.
An extended format sets the page home line at the top margin and
page end line at the bottom margin.
A normal format sets the page home line 1/2" below the top margin
and page end line 5/6" above the bottom margin.

Select an even-numbered parameter for portrait orientation or an
odd-numbered parameter for landscape orientation.
NOTE
The printable area in text format is 3/10" (90 pixels) narrower than the printable area in North American letter
format.
PFS parameters in a file override paper selection commands on the
print line, such as those in the /PARAMETERS=INPUT_TRAY=tray_
select qualifier. One exception exists. A PRINT/PARAMETERS=LAYUP_
DEFINITION=layup_definition_filename command that creates a job
that prints multiple pages on a sheet overrides PFS commands in the
file.
Tables 3-10 through 3-15 provide measurements for the standard PFS
formats.
Positions given are distances from the origin. Widths and lengths are
actual measurements in 1/300 of an inch.
A-size paper (8.5" x 11 ") has a physical size of 2550 pixels by 3300
pixels. It has an inherent printable area of 2400 pixels by 3150 pixels.
If you use PFS to format the printable area, the margins may limit the
area further.

3-94 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

PFS Table 3-10:

Page Format Select

PFS Margins and Format for 8.5" x 11" Paper (Public)

Parameter

Ps=O

Ps= 1

Ps=4

Ps=5

Orientation

Port

Land

Port

Land

Left margin
Right margin

0
2309
150
2309
2160

0
3149
150
3149
3000

0
2399
150
2399
2250

0
3149
150
3149
3000

0
3149
150
2899
2750

0
2299
150
2049
1900

0
3149
150
2899
2750

0
2349
150
2099
1950

Line home
Line end
Width of
format area
1bp margin
Bottom margin
Page home
Page end
Length of
format area

NOTE

You can use parameters 0 and 1 with either A- or A4-size
paper.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-95

PFS -

Page Format Select
Table 3-11:
Parameter

PFS Margins and Format for 8.5" x 11" Paper (Private)

=?20

Ps =?21

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

Left margin
Right margin

0
2399
0
2399
2400

132
3035
132
3035
2904

0
3167
0
3167
3168

0
2375
0
2375
2376

Line home
Line end
Width of·
format area
'Ibp margin
Bottom margin
Page home
Page end
Length of
format area

A4-size paper (8.26" x 11.69") has a physical size of 2478 pixels by 3150
pixels. It has an inherent printable area of 2328 pixels by 3000 pixels.
Using PFS to select format may further limit the printable area.

3-96 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

PFS - Page Format Select
Table 3-12:

PFS Margins and Format for A4-Size Paper (Public)

Parameter

Ps=2

Ps =3

Ps=6

Ps = 7

Orientation
Left margin
Right margin

Port

Land

Port

Land

0
2309
150
2309
2160

0
3299
150
3299
3150

0
2309
150
2309
2160

0
3299
150
3299
3150

0
3349
150
3099
2950

0
3299
0
3299
3300

0
2199
0
2199
2200

Line home
Line end
Width of
format area
'lbp margin
Bottom margin
Page home
Page end
Length of
form.at area

Table 3-13:

2299
150
2049
1900

PFS Margins and Format for A4-Size Paper (Private)

Parameter

Ps = ?22

Ps = ?23

Orientation
Left margin
Right margin
Line home

Portrait

Landscape

0
2319
0
2319
2320

0
3123
220
3123
2904

0
3263
0
3263
3264

0
2375
0
2375
2376

Line end
Width of
format area
'lbp margin
Bottom margin
Page home
Page end
Length of
format area

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-97

PFS - Page Format Select
Legal-size paper (8.5" x 14") has a physical size of 2550 pixels by 4200
pixels. It has an inherent printable area of 2400 pixels by 4050 pixels.
Using PFS to format may further limit the printable area.
Table 3-14: PFS Margins and Format for Legal-Size Paper
Parameter

Ps=8

Ps =9

Ps = ?24

Ps = ?25

Orientation
Left margin
Right margin
Line home
Line end
Width of
form.at area
'lbp margin
Bottom margin
Page home
Page end
Length of
form.at area

Port
0
2399
150
2399
2249

Land
0
4049
150
4049
3900

Port
0
2399
0
2399
2400

Land
132
3935
132
3935
3804

0
4049
150
3800
3651

0
2348
150
2099
1950

0
4067
0
4067
4068

0
2375
0
2375
2376

3-98 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

PFS - Page Format Select
B-size paper (11" x 17") has a physical size of 3300 pixels by 5100
pixels. It has an inherent printable area of 3150 pixels by 4950 pixels.
Using PFS to format may further limit the printable area.
Table 3-15:
Parameter

PFS Margins and Format for B-Size Paper
Ps ?27
Ps ?26

Orientation

Portrait

Landscape

Left margin

0
3167
0
3167
3168

0
4949
0
4949
4950

0
3167
0
3167
3168

Right margin
Line home
Line end
Width of
form.at area
'lbp margin
Bottom margin
Page home
Page end
Length of
form.at area

Errors
If PFS occurs within justified text, the preceding test is output unjustified. Use PFS only on a new page.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-99

PUM - Positioning Unit Mode

PUM - Positioning Unit Mode
Establish unit in which the numeric parameters of the escape sequence
interpret. When PUM is set, the setting of Select Size Unit (SSU)
determines units: decipoint, centipoint, or pixels. PUM reset selects
units as characters in horizontal spacing sequences or lines in vertical
spacing sequences. Current font determines character widths and line
heights.
Source: Application

Format

CS/
CS/

Destination: Level 3

11 h-(SET)
1 1 / - (RESET)

CS/, 9111
Control sequence introducer character
11, 311 311

Control sequence parameter characters specifying PUM
h, 618
Control sequence final character - set mode selected by parameter
I, 6112

Control sequence final character - reset mode selected by parameter

3-100 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

PUM -

Positioning Unit Mode

Description
PUM establishes the unit for the numeric parameters of the following
sequences: HPA, HPB, HPR, VPA, VPB, VPR, DECSHTS, DECSVTS,
DECSLPP, DECSTBM, DECSLRM.
Default state of PUM in the translator is reset.
NOTE

PUM is an example of a set/reset ANSI mode sequence.
Several ANSI modes can be turned on or off in a sequence.
The control string, CSI 20 ; 11 h, enables both Line Feed
New Line Mode (LNM) and PUM. Refer to Section 2.1.12 for
more information.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-101

RIS - Reset to Initial State

RIS- Reset to Initial State
Reset translator state variables to their initial values. RIS has the
same effect as Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR).
Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3

Source: Symbiont

Format

ESC

ESC, 1111

Escape sequence introducer

c, 613
Escape sequence final character

Description
See DECSTR control sequence for details.
NOTE

Conforming software should not use RIS. Use DECSTR
instead.

3-102 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

SCS - Select Character Set

SCS- Select Character Set
Select a character set for printing. You can designate any of the
standard character sets by using the escape sequence that follows.
Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3

Source: Application

Format
ESC, 1111

Escape sequence introducer character

Parameters

Intermediate character selected from the following:
11 Character

94-Character Sets
(
Left parenthesis
Right parenthesis
Asterisk
*
Plus sign
+
96-Character Sets1
Hyphen
Period
Slash
I

Code

Set Selection

218
2/9
2/10
2/11

GO (initial setting for GL)
Gl
G2 (initial setting for GR)

2/13

2/14

2/15

1You cannot designate a 96-character set into GO.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-103

SCS - Select Character Set
/2···/n F
Escape sequence designation parameter characters

Select any of the following character sets, using the identifier as the
designation parameter character in the SCS sequence, or select a downline loaded font (Load Font File (DECLFF)) with its character set,
using the intermediate and final identifiers provided with the down-line
loaded (DLL) font.
Table 3-16:

Character Set Codes

12...In F
Characters

Code

British

4/1

ASCII

B (initial setting for
Gland GO)

4/2

DEC Dutch
DEC Finnish

3/4

3/5

French
DEC French Canadian

R
9

5/2
3/9

German
ISO Italian

K
y

4/11
5/9

JIS Roman
DEC Norwegian/Danish

5/10
3/6

ISO Spanish

5/10

DEC Swedish
DEC Swiss
Norwegian/Danish
DEC Supplemental

317
3/13
6/0
2/5, 3/5

DEC Technical
DEC Special Graphics

>
0

3/14
3/0

DEC Portuguese

2/5, 3/6

Character Set
94-Character Sets

User Preference Supplemental < (initial setting for
G2 and G3)

3/12t

!By default, User Preference Supplemental is DEC Supplemental to ensure compatibility
with the LN03.

3-104 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

SCS - Select Character Set
Table 3-16 (Cont.):

Character Set Codes

Character Set

12...In F
Characters

Code

4/1

96-Character Sets
ISO Latin-1 Supplemental

Description
The first intermediate character (1 1) selects the target (GO-G3) and the
source repertory (94-96). The second, and third if necessary, intermediate characters and the final character select the character set from the
repertory.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-105

SGR - Select Graphic Rendition

SGR - Select Graphic Rendition
Select a font for printing or select a character attribute. 1 Combine
several SGR sequences by separating Ps values with semicolons.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Level 3

CS/ Ps; Ps; Ps m - (Public)
CS/ ? Ps; Ps; Ps m-(Private)
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
? (question mark, 3115)
Nonnumeric parameter that selects a DIGITAL Private parameter
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating Ps parameters

m, 6113
Control sequence final character

Parameter
Ps, 0 or more; Public selective parameters

where:
0

1
2

3
4
9

is all attributes off.
is bold, attribute.
is faint, attribute.
is italic, attribute.
is underline, attribute.
is strike through, attribute.

Versions of the ANSI translator prior to Version 3.1 do not support public selective parameter Ps=21
and private selective parameters Ps=4, 5, 6, 24, and 26.

3-106 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

SGR 10

use as defined by DECATFF.

use as defined by DECATFF.
is double underline, attribute.

21
22

24
29

Select Graphic Rendition

is turn off bold and faint printing.
is turn off italics.
is turn off underlining.
is turn off strike through.

Ps, O or more; selective DIGITAL Private parameters

where:
4

is superscript on, subscript off; attribute.

is subscript on, superscript off; attribute.

is overline, attribute.

is turn off superscript and subscript.
is turn off overline.

Description
Using SGR to Select a Font
Ps values 10 through 19 select font or type family for printing.
Selecting a type family gives you options. You can choose the default
values for the remaining six font attributes or use a control sequence to
change one or more of these attributes. Selecting a specific font selects
seven predefined attributes: type family, spacing, type size, scale factor,
type style, character weight, and character proportion.
Some type families include both proportionally spaced and monospaced
fonts. If you select a type family for proportional spacing, you must set
the proportional spacing mode. Default is monospacing.
Use the select font sequence anywhere in the data stream. The selected
font remains in effect until the translator receives another select font
sequence or a reset to initial state (DECSTR/RIS) sequence. After a
power-up or DECSTR/RIS sequence, the translator uses SGR number
10 (Built-in Family type).
ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-107

SGR - Select Graphic Rendition
If you send an assign type family or font (DECATFF) sequence for the

SGR number, the sequence takes effect immediately. You do not have
to reselect the SGR number.

Using SGR to Select Character Attributes
Select underlining, overlining, bold printing, italics, superscript, subscript, and strike-through printing attributes with the SGR sequence.
When selecting more than one Ps value, separate the parameters with
semicolons. Send public Ps values and DIGITAL private Ps values
in separate SGR control sequences. The translator uses the selected
attribute until:
•
•

You turn off the attribute.
You send a RIS or DECSTR sequence.

A Ps value of 0 turns off all attributes, Public and Private.
When you turn on underlining or overlining, the translator underlines or overlines printable characters, including spaces, Horizontal
Position Relative, Horizontal Position Backward, and Horizontal
Position Absolute in the data stream until you tum off the attribute.
Underline or overline remains in effect across page and line boundaries.
The thickness of the underline or overline and the distance below the
baseline depend on the font you use.
The parameters for the underline and overline sequences are as follows:
4

Underline on

Double underline on

24
(?)6

Underline off
Overline on

(?)26

Overline off

3-108 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

SGR - Select Graphic Rendition
NOTE

Partial Line Up (PLU)/Partial Line Down (PLD) does not
modify the underline or overline position. Underline or
overline continues at the position of the last SGR, or Line
Feed (LF), Vertical Tab (VT), Vertical Position Absolute
(VPA), Next Line (NEL), or Index (IND). To underline at a
position up or down half a line, send the sequences in the
following order:
•
•

PLU SGR text
PLD SGR text

This behavior may not be compatible with other DIGITAL
printers.
When you request a superscript, the translator generates a Partial Line
Up (PLU) and a Graphic Size Modification (GSM) of 50%. A subscript
generates a Graphic Size Modification (GSM) of 50%. Depending on
what fonts are available in the printer, superscript/subscript may or
may not result in size reduction. In each case, the printer looks for
a half-height character and selects the best match (right type family,
character set, size). With the built-in fonts, the printer uses a 6. 7-point
character.
The relative vertical movement depends on the font used.
The parameters for the DIGITAL Private superscript/subscript se,.
quence are as follows:
4

superscript on, subscript off

subscript on, superscript off

superscript and subscript off
NOTE

Selecting superscript cancels subscript. Selecting subscript
cancels superscript.
When you select bold printing, your printer either uses a bold (darker)
font from the current type family or uses shadow printing to produce
darker characters. Your printer performs shadow printing by imaging
each character three times. The second· image is offset horizontally
from the first by two or more pixels.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-109

SGR - Select Graphic Rendition
The parameters for the bold printing are as follows:
1

Bold printing on

Bold printing off

When you tum on italic printing, your printer uses italic characters
from the font, if available. Otherwise the translator algorithmically
italicizes the printable characters.
The parameters for the italic printing are as follows:
3
23

Italics on
Italics off

Strike through lets you mark characters that you want to delete. The
translator draws a line (similar to underlining) through the marked
characters, including Horizontal Position Relative, Horizontal Position
Backward, and Horizontal Position Absolute.
The parameters for strike-through printing are as follows:
9

Strike-through on

Strike-through off

Legal documents often use the strike-through attribute to indicate
words deleted from a previous version of the document.

3-110 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

SHS -

Select Horizontal Spacing

SHS - Select Horizontal Spacing
Select character spacing for monowidth fonts. SHS determines the
character spacing and horizontal character position unit, according to
the value of Ps you select. If the Proportional Spacing (DECPSP) is set,
SHS has no effect.
Source: Application

Format

CS/

Destination: Level 3

PsSPK

CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
SP, 210
Control sequence intermediate character
K, 4111

Control sequence final character

Parameter
Ps, selective parameter

where:
0

is 10 char/inch; 1/10 inch.

is 12 char/inch; 1/12 inch.

is 15 char/inch; 1/15 inch.

is 6 char/inch; 116 inch.

Description
Horizontal character pitch is measured in characters/inch. Inches mark
the horizontal character position unit.
SHS does not affect character size or horizontal tab stops.
SHS is similar to Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP), but is ANSI
standardized.
ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-111

SPI - Spacing Pitch Increment

SPI - Spacing Pitch Increment
Set vertical and horizontal spacing increments. Set one or both increments with one SPI sequence. SPI gives you maximum flexibility in
adjusting character and line spacing. SPI does not affect proportional
mode printing.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Level 3

CS/ Pv;PhSPG
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating Pv from Ph
SP, 210
Control sequence intermediate character
G,4n
Control sequence final character

Parameters
Pv, vertical numeric parameter

where:
0

is determined by current font.

is the vertical spacing increment-numeric value in centipoint, decipoint,
or pixel units, according to SSU sequence.

Ph, horizontal numeric parameter

where:
0

is determined by current font.

is the horizontal spacing increment-numeric value in centipoint, decipoint, or pixel units, according to SSU sequence.

3-112 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

SPI -

Spacing Pitch Increment

Description
SPI uses decipoints, centipoints, or pixels for a unit of measurement.
You select the unit with the Select Size Unit (SSU) sequence. The
Position Unit Mode (PUM) sequence does not affect SPI settings.
With DECPSP reset, the SPI setting for horizontal spacing remains the
same until receipt of one of the following sequences:
•
•
•

Another SPI sequence
A Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) sequence
A Set Horizontal Space (SHS) sequence

The SPI setting for vertical spacing remains the same until receipt of
one of the following sequences:
•
•
•

Another SPI sequence
A Set Vertical Spacing (SVS) sequence
A Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP) sequence

Use SPI to set pitch. If Pv or Ph is 0 or omitted, the translator uses
the default vertical and horizontal spacing. For monospaced fonts,
horizontal spacing is the same for all characters. For proportional
fonts, horizontal spacing depends on the widths of the characters.
When using SPI in landscape mode, ''vertical" means parallel to the
short edge of the paper.
Initial values of Pv and Ph are 0.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-113

SSU -

Select Size Unit

SSU - Select Size Unit
Select with the Position Unit Mode (PUM) sequence a unit of measurement for spacing parameters. When PUM is set, SSU selects
decipoints, centipoints, or pixels for a unit. If the translator receives
an SSU while PUM is reset, the selected unit takes effect when PUM
is set. The unit remains in effect until the translator receives another
SSU or a reset sequence in the data stream.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Level 3

CS/ PsSPI
CS/ ? Ps SP I - (Private)
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character

? (question mark, 3115)
Nonnumeric parameter that selects a DIGITAL Private parameter
SP, 210
Control sequence intermediate character
I, 419

Control sequence final character

Parameter
Ps, selective parameter

where:
2

is decipoint, 1/720".

is pixel, 1/300".

is centipoint, 117200".

3-114 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

SSU - Select Size Unit
Description
The size unit selected takes effect immediately even if PUM is reset.
Draw Vector (DECVEC) is one sequence that uses the SSU parameter
regardless of the PUM setting.
SSU selects the unit for the numeric parameters of the following
sequences when PUM is set: GSS, HPA, HPB, HPR, VPA, VPB,
VPR, SPI, DECSHTS, DECSVTS, DECSLPP, DECSTBM, DECSLRM,
DECRVEC, and DECVEC.
SSU affects only sequences that follow it in the data stream. The
translator does not recalculate stored parameters.
The default setting of SSU in the translator is decipoints.

Errors
Numeric parameters other than 2, 7, and ?1 cause the translator to
ignore the sequence.
If the translator receives too many parameters, it uses the last valid

parameter and ignores the rest.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

3-115

SVS - Select Vertical (Line) Spacing

SVS - Select Vertical (Line) Spacing
Select line spacing (vertical pitch). SVS determines the line spacing
and vertical advance increment, according to the selected value of Ps.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Level 3

CS/ PsSPL
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character

SP
Control sequence intermediate character (2/0)
L, 4112

Control sequence final character

Parameter
Ps, selective parameter

where:
0

is 6 lines/inch, 1/6 inch; default.

is 4 lines/inch, 1/4 inch.

is 3 lines/inch, 1/3 inch.

is 12 lines/inch, 1/12 inch.

4
5

is 8 lines/inch, 1/8 inch.
is 6 lines/30 mm, 5 mm.

is 4 lines/30 mm, 7.5 mm.

is 3 lines/30 mm, 10 mm.

is 12 lines/30 mm, 2.5 mm.

is 2 lines/inch, 112 inch.

3-116 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

SVS -

Select Vertical {Line) Spacing

Description
SVS does not affect character size or vertical tab stops. SVS supersedes
Spacing Pitch Increment (SPI).
Default vertical spacing in the translator is 6 lines/inch.
The following table shows pixels/line that the translator uses to achieve
the vertical spacings in millimeters:
Parameter

VAi*

Pixels/Line

5.0mm

7.5mm

10.0mm

119

2.5mm

*VAI is vertical advance increment.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

3-117

TBC -

Tabulation Clear

TBC - Tabulation Clear
Clear one or all horizontal or vertical tab stops.
Source: Application

Format

Destination: Levels 1, 2

Ps ; ... ; Ps g

CS/

CSI, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating Ps parameters
g, 6n
Control sequence final character

Parameter
Ps, selective parameter

where:
0
1

is clear one horizontal tab stop at active column.
is clear one vertical tab stop at active line.

is clear all vertical tab stops.
is clear all horizontal tab stops.

is clear all horizontal tab stops.

Description
Selecting the parameter Ps = 1 clears the vertical tab stop at the current position, regardless of line mode or size unit mode and regardless
of whether the tab stop is on the grid.
Send up to 16 parameters with this sequence.
See Horizontal Tab (HT) and Vertical Tab (VT) for what happens when
the translator receives tabs with a cleared tab table.

3--118

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

VPA -

Vertical Position Absolute

VPA- Vertical Position Absolute
Move the active position vertically but not horizontally.
Source: Application

Format

CS/

Destination: Level 2, 3

Pnd

CSI, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
d, 614

Control sequence final character

Parameter
Pn, numeric parameter

where:
0

is initial and default value of 1.

is the numeric value, according to SSU sequence and PUM setting.

Description
Units of measurement of the parameter depend on the Position Unit
Mode (PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences as follows:
•

If PUM is set, units are pixels, decipoints, or centipoints, based on

•

If PUM is reset, the parameter interprets in terms of characters.

ssu.

If PUM selects character mode (reset), VPA puts the active position

at the top of the character cell designated by Pn and sets the first
character flag. VPA moves the active position up or down.
VPA can move the active position past page end line (to print footnotes,
for example).

VPA in justified text causes unjustified output of preceding text.
Remaining text may be justified.
ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-119

VPA- Vertical Position Absolute
Default value of the VPA parameter is 1.
NOTE

The LN03 interprets 1 decipoint as 0 pixels, due to rounding.
One decipoint stores as 1 decipoint in the translator, as the
translator does not round.

Errors
If you try to move below the bottom margin, the translator sets the

vertical position equal to the bottom margin. A form feed executes with
the next printable character.

3-120 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

VPB - Vertical Position Backward

VPB - Vertical Position Backward
Move up the active position by the specified number of lines (pixels,
centipoints, or decipoints). The horizontal position does not change.
Destination: Level 3

Source: Application

Format

CS/ Pnk
CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character
k, 6111

Control sequence final character

Parameter
Pn, numeric parameter

where:
0
n

is the initial and default value of 1.
is the numeric value, according to SSU sequence and PUM setting.

Description
Units of measurement of the parameter depend on the Position Unit
Mode (PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences, as follows:
•

If PUM is set, units are either pixels, decipoints, or centipoints,

•

based on SSU.
If PUM is reset, the parameter interprets in terms of lines.

VPB can position above the page home line.
VPB leaves the first character flag unchanged.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions

3-121

VPB - Vertical Position Backward
The translator takes VPB in justified text as relative to the adjusted
position during the setting of the line. VPB does not affect justified
output except for vertical position. Characters separated by relative
positioning commands (HPB, HPR, VPB, VPR) move as a group with
Justify (JFY) invoked. Use these commands for multilevel formulas.
Default value of the VPB parameter is 1.
NOTE

The LN03 interprets 1 decipoint as 0 pixels, due to rounding.
One decipoint stores as 1 decipoint in the translator, as the
translator does not round.

Errors
If you try to move the active vertical position above the top margin, the
active vertical position sets to the top margin.

3-122 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

VPR -

Vertical Position Relative

VPR - Vertical Position Relative
Move down the active position by the specified number of lines (pixels,
decipoints, or centipoints). The horizontal position does not change.
Destination: Level 3

Source: Application

Format

CS/

Pne

CS/, 9111

Control sequence introducer character

e, 615
Control s.equence final character

Parameter
Pn, numeric parameter

where:
0
n

is the initial and default value of 1.
is the numeric value, according to the SSU sequence and PUM setting.

Description
Units of measurement of the parameter depend on the Position Unit
Mode (PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) sequences, as follows:
•
•

If PUM is set, units are either pixels, decipoints, or centipoints,
based on SSU.
·
If PUM is reset, the parameter interprets in terms of lines.

VPR can move the active position past the page end line.
VPR leaves the first character flag unchanged.

ANSI Text Function Descriptions 3-123

VPR - Vertical Position RelativeThe translator takes VPR in justified text as relative to the adjusted
position during the setting of the line. VPR does not affect justified
output except for vertical position. Characters separated by relative
positioning commands (HPB, HPR, VPB, VPR) move as a group with
Justify (JFY) invoked. Use these commands for multilevel formulas.
The default value of the parameter is 1.
NOTE

The LN03 interprets 1 decipoint as 0 pixels, due to rounding.
One decipoint stores as 1 decipoint in the translator, as the
translator does not round.

Errors
If you attempt to move below the bottom margin, the translator sets
the vertical position equal to the bottom margin. A form feed executes
with the next printable character.

3-124 ANSI Text Function Descriptions

Chapter 4

Sixel Graphics
This chapter describes the sixel protocol and its translation to
POSTSCRIPT by the ANSI Text translator. Video and hard-copy devices use sixel graphics. Sixels allow devices to receive and print black
and white (or color) bitmap data at various sizes over a stream-oriented
communications line to create a graphic image. Six bits of each 7or 8-bit character code represent the bitmap data. Remaining values
control the context of the communications line and fit the sixels to the
ANSI Text syntax.

4.1

Using the ANSI Text/Sixels Translator
To print your ANSI Text or sixel file on a POSTSCRIPT printer, send
your file to a print queue that uses this translator by default, or use
the PRINT command supported by the destination printer. Refer to the
chapter describing your printer.

4.2 Terminology
This section defines terms relating to the translation and printing of
the sixel protocol.

Dot - Smallest displayable unit, a light dot on a screen, an ink dot on
the paper. Dots can be round, oval, square, rectangular, and small or
large.
Dot/pixel/pixel-spot relationship - Imaging devices use several
dots to represent a single pixel through a pixel-spot. Multiple dots can
be used to cover an area larger than a dot size or to produce darkness
or scaling.
Sixel Graphics

4-1

Grid - Positions on the page where the translator places pixel-spots.
Dimensionless points represent these positions. Pixel-spot size can
exceed the grid size. A horizontal grid-size parameter defines the
horizontal distance between two positions. The horizontal grid-size
parameter and the aspect ratio parameter define vertical distance
between two positions.
Pixel-spot size can be larger or smaller than the distance between
two positions. This relationship of pixel-spot and grid size varies from
device to device and from one set of parameters to the next on the same
device.
Grid sizes on the device may not match the grid-size specification. In
that case, the device selects a grid that best represents the specified
grid. This "best fit" grid often becomes the "actual grid" or "actual grid
size." Most imaging operations use the actual grid and not the exact
specified grid.

Overlap - Percentage of pixel-spot that is larger than the grid.
Picture definition - Data describing the image, including colors,
size, pixel aspect ratio, and encoded rasters. The picture definition
does not include formatting information, such as position or actual
presentation size.
Pixel - Logical rectangular image area (smallest piece of an image)
defined by each bit of sixel data, as intended by the generation software. An aspect ratio defines the shape of a pixel. The pixel has no
size (see Figure 4-1).
Pixel aspect ratio - Shape of the pixel as a ratio of the vertical side
of the rectangle and the horizontal side. For example, a square pixel
has an aspect ratio of 1to1(or10 to 10), and a pixel twice as high and
wide has an aspect ratio of 2 to 1 (or 20 to 10).
Pixel-spot - Area imaged (printed) for each pixel. Pixel-spots have
shape (round, oval, square, ... ) and size. The shape and size are device
dependent and do not necessarily relate to the grid size.
Raster - All pixels defining a single image. For purposes of this book,
a raster contains pixels defined in a single sixel control string.
Raster aspect ratio - Relative size of horizontal pixels to vertical
pixels in a raster. No direct relationship exists between the raster
aspect ratio and the pixel aspect ratio.
Raster size - Resultant size of the raster after printing, based on the
grid size.
4-2 Sixel Graphics

When using the context of pixels not yet printed, raster size is the
number of horizontal and vertical pixels of the raster.
Sixel -. Group of six vertical pixels represented by 6 bits in a character
code of seven or eight bits.
Sixel active position - Position where the next sixel translates.
Sixels translate with a vertical offset of 70 decipoints (.0972"). This
offset allows compatibility between devices that position, using the
baseline of a character in ANSI Text mode and those that position,
based on the ascender height of the character.
Sixel control codes - Codes in the picture definition that provide
additional information beyond the encoded raster, such as color, line
breaking, and so forth.
Sixel data - This term includes only the encoded raster portion of the
picture definitions.
Sixel mode - Entered by using a device control string. In this mode,
the translator interprets ASCII characters as sixel data.
Figure 4-1:

Sixel Representation

.+-DOT

D
D
PIXELS DEFINED BY SIXEL

VPIXEL
I~ _

_ _

{ee}
: :
: :
•

•

THIS EXAMPLE HAS
12 DOTS PER PIXEL
ML0-001378

4.3 Converting to Sixel Data
Sixels are coded as 8-bit bytes. Each byte is an ASCII character
code. When you select sixel mode, the printer interprets the ASCII
Sixel Graphics

4-3

character codes as sixel data. The printer processes sixel data as bits
of information. A bit value of 1 means print the pixel. A bit value of 0
means do not print the pixel (leave a space).
To create a sixel, you take a 6-bit data packet and add 3F hexadecimal
to form an 8-bit byte. The byte you form represents an ASCII character
between 3F and 7E hexadecimal.

The host computer creates the sixel by adding 3F hexadecimal to the
binary bit map data. The translator decodes the sixel by subtracting
3F hexadecimal to reform the binary data. The following paragraphs
describe the procedure for encoding binary data into sixels.
Data bits are arranged in the data stream in a specific order.
Essentially, the order is from the most significant bit (MSB) to
the least significant bit (LSB). For example, assume the host is
sending a buffer with 3 bytes of data, and a pointer is pointing to the
first byte in the buffer. Figure 4-2 shows the three bytes of data, which
the host sends.
Figure 4-2:

Three Bytes of Buffer Data

MSB

BYTE 0

BIT

LSB

ML0-001379

The host sends 6 bits at a time, in the following order.
1.
2.
3.
4.

From byte 0, bits 7 through 2
From byte 0, bits 1 and 0 and from byte 1, bits 7 through 4
From byte 1, bits 3 through 0, and from byte 2, bits 7 and 6
From byte 2, bits 5 through 0

In this example, the host sends 3 bytes of data as 4 characters.

4-4 Sixel Graphics

If the data buffer does not contain an even multiple of 6-bit groups, the
host must send extra bits. For example, to send 2 bytes of data, the
host. must convert 16 bits. The host converts two 6-bit groups to sixels,
leaving 4 bits. The host converts these 4 bits by adding 2 extra bits
that have values of 0. When the translator detects the end of record,
the extra bits are discarded.
The following example shows step by step how the host would remove 3
bytes from the data buffer and convert them to sixels.
1. Removes bits 7 through 2 of byte 0 from the buffer.
000110(2) = 006(hex)

2. Adds 3F hexadecimal. The sum equals the ASCII character code
used for the sixel-in this case, an uppercase E.
006(hex)
+03F(hex)
45(hex) = E

3. Places the ASCII character code for the sixel in a buffer that will
be sent to the printer.
E

045

4. Removes bits 1and0 of byte 0, and bits 7 through 4 of byte 1 from
the buffer.
000101(2) = 005(hex)

5. Adds 3F hexadecimal. The sum is the ASCII character code used
for the second sixel-an uppercase D.
005(hex)
+03F(hex)
44(hex) = D

6. Places the second sixel in the buffer that will be sent to the printer.
E

045 044

7. Removes bits 3 through 0 of byte 1, and bits 7 and 6 of byte 2 from
the buffer.
010100(2) = 014(hex)

Sixel Graphics 4-5

8. Adds 3F hexadecimal. The sum is the ASCII character code used
for the third sixel-an uppercase S.
014(hex)
+03F(hex)
53(hex)

9. Places the third sixel in the buffer that will be sent to the printer.
E
D
S
045 044 053

10. Removes bits 5 through 0 of byte 2 from the buffer.
000000(2)

= OOO(hex)

11. Adds 3F hexadecimal. The sum is the ASCII character code for the
fourth sixel - a question mark (?).
OOO(hex)
+03F(hex)
03F(hex)

= ?

12. Places the fourth sixel in the buffer and sends the characters to the
printer.
E
D S
?
045 044 123 03F (hex)

4.4 Printing Graphics and Drawings
Sixel printing consists of setting context and attributes for the pixels and then printing each sixel in received order on adjacent grid
positions.
Send sixel data to the translator after placing the translator in sixel
mode. When you select sixel mode, the translator interprets the ASCII
character codes as sixel data to print a graphic image. Select sixel
mode by using the device control string (DCS Psl ; P2 ; Pn3 q picture_
definition ST) described in the next section.
Upon entering sixel mode, the translator determines the sixel position
from the ANSI Text position. This position becomes· the graphic left
margin.

4-6 Sixel Graphics

Translation of each sixel advances the sixel active position to the next
horizontal grid position. The distance between sixels is equal to the
horizontal grid size selected by parameters of the device control string.
Positioning is relative to the active position. A graphic carriage return
or a next line command moves the active position to left margin. See
Table 4-3.
Horizontal and vertical directions follow ANSI Text horizontal and
vertical axes when you enter sixel mode. Sixel drawing proceeds from
left to right, top to bottom.
The string terminator (ST) causes the translator to exit sixel mode
and return to text mode. Other characters causing the same transfer
include:
•
•

ANSI control characters ESC and CAN
Cl control codes

ESC and the Cl control codes perform their normal function after
returning to text mode.

4.5 Selecting Sixel Mode
An ANSI-defined Device Control String (DCS) envelope contains the
sixel protocol. Initiate this envelope by using the string introducer
(DCS) control code and terminate the envelope with the string terminator (ST) control code. The following components make up the Device
Control String for the sixel protocol:

•
•
•
•

String introducer
Protocol selector
Picture definition
String terminator

Sixel Graphics 4-7

Figure 4-3 shows the format of the control string.
Figure 4-3:

Sixel Device Control String (DCS) Envelope

,L f _JJ
1

DCS

Ps1

;

Ps2

;

Pn3 ... Pn

PROTOCOL
SELECTOR

STRING
INTRODUCER

f
PICTURE
DEFINITION

STRING
TERMINATOR
ML0·001380

4-8 Sixel Graphics

SIXEL_MODE

SIXEL MODE
You can enter sixel mode while in text mode by sending the translator
the Device Control String. Include your picture definition and formatting information. The protocol selector contains formatting information.
This is the only method to enter sixel mode.

Format

DCS Ps1; Ps2; Pn3 q picture_definition ST
DCS, 910

Device Control String introducer character in 8-bit mode or ESC P
(1/11, 5/0) in 7-bit mode
; (semicolon, 3111)

Delimiter separating parameters

q, 711
Protocol .selector final character indicating sixel data follows
ST, 9112
String terminator character

Parameters
Ps1, selective parameter

Macro parameter
Ps2, selective parameter

Background select
Pn3, numeric parameter

Horizontal grid size
plcture_definition

Sixel data and sixel control codes describing image

Sixel Graphics 4-9

SIXEL_MODE
Description
ST is the ANSI Cl control (9/12) in 8-bit mode or ESC \ (1111, 5/12)
in 7-bit mode. ST terminates the sixel DCS, and the translator leaves
sixel mode, returning to translate in text mode.
Psl; Ps2; Pn3 q is the protocol selector. The "q" indicates that sixel
data follows. Any other code indicates the remaining data is not sixel
data.

4-10 Sixel Graphics

4.6 Structure of the Protocol
The structure of the protocol supports a layered system approach,
where several independent processes define or interpret portions of
the total data. That allows describing the size of an image that is
independent of the actual image definition.
The data and commands separate into three primary fields:

•

4.6.1

Picture definition - Used by creation software, editing software, imaging devices. This is the body of the protocol. Picturegenerating devices create files that contain the image definition but
no formatting information (or default formatting information).
Formatting information - Added to the picture definition by
the page-composition software to define the size of the picture data.
Including size in the protocol selector allows you to add parameters
without affecting the picture definition data.
Positioning data - Used by page composition software. The
ANSI Text current position determines the first pixel position upon
entering sixel mode. Other pixel positions are relative to the first,
based on the grid size and aspect ratio.

Protocol Selector -

Formatting Information

Page composition software adds formatting information to the sixel
protocol selector. The DCS introducer and the protocol selector place
the translator in sixel mode. The protocol does not have an initial
state. Following is the format of the protocol selector:

Psl ; Ps2 ; Pn3 q
Psl selects the horizontal grid size, vertical grid size, and pixel aspect
ratio. The grid size defines the size of the area where you can place
a single pixel. You select the Psl value that most closely matches the
device developing the sixel data.
Psl exists only for compatibility with older devices (LA12, LA34, LA50,
LAlOO, or LA210). With new software, set the macro-parameters for
the older devices, then override them with explicit parameters to get
best results from a new machine. Unle~s you require compatibility
with older devices, do not use macro-parameters. Set Psl (macro
parameters) to zero in new software that does not require compatibility

Sixel Graphics

4-11

and use Pn3 and the Set Raster Attributes command (DECGRA) to
define the three parameters.
Table 4-1 lists the Psl parameter macro values. You can override the
Psl value with the Pn3 parameter.
Table 4-1: Macro Parameter Selections
Psi
Horizontal
Aspect Ratio

Vertical

0 (default)

.0075"

200:100

;0150"

.0075"

200:100

.0150"

.003"

450:100

.0142"

.0045"

300:100

.0150"

.006"

250:100

.01425"

.0075"

183:100

.0150"

.009"

150:100

.0150"

.0105"

130:100

.0144"

.0120"

112:100

.0144"

.0135"

100:100

.0150"

Ps2 selects a background color. The translator ignores this parameter.
Default is white.

Select a horizontal grid size other than the standard sizes for Psl,
using Pn3. Any Pn3 value other than 0 overrides the Psl value. The
Pn3 value is in decipoints or pixels, selected by the ANSI Text Select
Size Unit (SSU) sequence. The maximum horizontal grid size is 99
current units - pixels or decipoints.
The pixel aspect ratio defines the pixel as a ratio of the vertical side
of a rectangle and the horizontal side. A square pixel has an aspect
ratio of 1to1(or100 to 100). A pixel twice as high and wide has an
aspect ratio of 2 to 1(or200 to 100). Together, the Pn3 value and the
pixel aspect ratio define the grid size (including the vertical grid size).
Vertical grid size equals the horizontal grid size times the pixel aspect
ratio.

4-12 Sixel Graphics

4.6.2 The Picture Definition
Sixel data and sixel control codes, including the aspect ratio, form
the picture definition. Sixel data includes the encoded graphic image
raster. Sixel control codes tell how to interpret the raster or pixels
defining the image.
4.6.2.1

Sixel Data

Codes in the range 3/15 through 7/14 interpret as sixel data. The
translator uses the following process to determine which of the 6 pixels
to image:
1. Subtracts the offset (3F hexadecimal) from the received code.
2. Assigns each of the low-order .6 bits to a grid position. The 6 pixels
arrange vertically, as follows:
Top pixel

Bit 0 (LSB)
Bit 1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4

Bottom pixel

Bit 5 CMSB)

Sixel Graphics 4-13

For example, if the translator receives the character code 43 hexadecimal (01000011 binary), it subtracts the offset value (3F hexadecimal)
from the code value. The resulting value of 4 maps into the horizontal
scan, as follows:
MSB

LSB

Data Bits:

Scan:
1

o (top)

o (bottom)

The "x" indicates that the pixel spot prints, and "o" indicates that the
pixel spot does not print.
Table 4--2 shows the printable dot patterns for selected character codes
in the 3/15 (3F hexadecimal) through 7/14 (7E hexadecimal) range. The
translator subtracts 3F from the hexadecimal value of the received code
to create the dot pattern. For the rest of the printable dot patterns,
refer to Appendix C.

4-14 Sixel Graphics

Table 4-2: Printable Dot Patterns for Slxel Mode
Hexadecimal Dot
Action
Character Value
Pattern
?

Advance by a sixel space

0
0

0
0
0

Print only top pixel

0
0
0
0
0

Print second from top pixel

x
0
0
0
0

Print second from top pixel and
bottom three pixels

x
x
x

Sixel Graphics 4-15

Table 4-2 (Cont.):

Printable Dot Patterns for Sixel Mode

Hexadecimal Dot
Character Value
Pattern
7E

x
x
x
x
x

Action
Print one full column

The translator processes 8-bit codes in the 11115 to 15/14 range by
converting the eighth bit to a 0, then processing the data as 7-bit codes.
Because the column codes are restricted to the 3/15 (hexadecimal 3F)
through 7/14 (hexadecimal 7E) range, the host computer adds an offset
of hexadecimal 3F to each sixel column code.
Two types of software are typically used on the host computer to create
text and graphic data. The first is the creation software, used to draw
the picture. The second is the page composition software, used to
integrate the picture with the text into a formatted page.
Creation software produces the picture data (everything after. the q in
the string). Page composition software determines the protocol selector
parameters.

4-16 Sixel Graphics

4.6.2.2

Control Codes

Descriptions of specific control codes (commands) and parameters,
which make up the remainder of the piCture definition data, follow.
Table 4-3 summarizes these commands.
Table 4-3:
Name

Sixel Graphics Private Control Characters
Abbreviation Code Function

Raster
Attributes

DECGRA

Graphics
Repeat
Introducer

DECGRI

!
2/1

Graphics
Carriage
Return
Graphics
New Line
Graphics
Color
Introducer

DECGCR

Parameter
Separator

2/2

2/4

Returns active position to
graphics left margin

2/13

Returns active position to graphics left
margin and increments to next line

DECGNL
DECGCI

Set raster attributes
1st parameter - pixel aspect ratio
numerator
2nd parameter - pixel aspect ratio
denominator
Begins repeat sequence
Maximum value is 65,536

2/3

'
3/11

Specifies color
1st parameter - color number (others
optional)
2nd parameter - color coordinate
system
Parameters 3-5 - specify colors
Separates parameters

Sixel Graphics 4-17

NOTE

Codes in the 2/0 to 3/15 range are reserved for future use:
(space)

2/0

2/12

2/5

2/14

216

2/7
218

2/9

2/10

2/11

2/15
3/10
3/12
3/13

3/14

These codes will abort any DECGRI or DECGRA sequence in
progress. Software should not use these codes.

4-18 Sixel Graphics

DECGRA (") - Set Raster Attributes

DECGRA {")-Set Raster Attributes
The Set Raster Attributes command defines raster attributes that affect
the display of sixel data. This command must precede picture-definition
information requiring an aspect ratio: sixel printable characters (sixel
data) and the Graphic New Line (DECGNL) command.

Format

Pn1; Pn2; Pn3; Pn4

Command Parameters
II

Pn1
Pn2
Pn3
Pn4

Description
Command control character
Pixel aspect ratio numerator
Parameter delimiter
Pixel aspect denominator
Horizontal extent
Vertical extent

Command Code and Parameters
"
The character " is the Set Raster Attributes control character
(DECGRA).
Pn1; Pn2
Pnl and Pn2 set the pixel aspect ratio, which defines the shape of the
pixels needed to reproduce the picture without distortion. This ratio is
defined by two numbers:

•
•

A numerator (Pnl), which is the number of vertical pixels for the
distance unit
A denominator (Pn2), which is the number of horizontal pixels for
the same distance unit

If a pixel were to be half as wide as tall, the pixel aspect ratio would be
2:1or100:50 as it is for the VT240 terminal.
The pixel aspect ratio times the horizontal grid size (the third parameter of the sixel DCS) yields the vertical grid size.

Sixel Graphics 4-19

DECGRA (")-Set Raster Attributes
Pn3, Pn4

Pn3 and Pn4 define the horizontal and vertical extent, respectively.
The imaging device ignores these parameters.

4-20 Sixel Graphics

DECGRI (!) - Repeat Introducer

DECGRI (!) - Repeat Introducer
The Repeat Introducer code followed by a numeric value repeats the
next pixel the specified number of times. A repeat count of 0 implies a
repeat count of 1. The maximum value for the repeat count is 65,536.
If no sixel data character follows the repeat count, the repeat count is
ignored.

Format

Pn sixeLdata_character
Command Parameters
!
Pn

sixel_data_character

Description
Command control character
Character string representing a decimal
number
Repeated sixels dot pattern

Command Code and Parameters
!
The character! is the Repeat Introducer control character (DECGRI).

Pn
Pn is a string of characters evaluating to a decimal number (positions
3/0 to 3/9 in the Standard 8-Bit Character Set).
sixe/_data_character

sixel_data_character is a repeated dot pattern. See Table 4-2.
The following examples illustrate repeat sequences:
•
•

! 1 0 ? - repeats 10 graphic spaces
! 6 @ - repeats six patterns of top dot

Sixel Graphics 4-21

DECGCR ($) - Graphics Carriage Return

DECGCR ($)-Graphics Carriage Return
The Graphics Carriage Return command moves the active position to
the graphic left margin. This control code is the only code that allows
rewriting of a sixel position.

Format

$
Command Parameters

Description

Command control character

Command Code
$
The character $ is the Graphics Carriage Return control character
(DECGCR).

4-22 Sixel Graphics

DECGNL (-)-Graphics Next Line

DECGNL {-)-Graphics Next Line
The Graphics Next Line command moves the active position to the left
margin and down one row of sixels (six actual grid units).

Format
Command Parameters

Description
Command control character

Command Code
The character(-) is the Graphics Next Line control character
(DECGNL).

Sixel Graphics 4-23

DECGCI {#) -

Color Introducer

DECGCI (#)-Color Introducer
The ColOr Introducer command starts a color selection sequence.
Follow the pound sign(#) with a color number selected from the
color map or use a universal color coordinate system to select a new
definition for the coior number.

Format

Re · Pu · Px · Py · Pz
'
'
'
'

Command Parameters
#
Pc
Pu

Px
Py

Description
Command control character
Color number parameter
Universal coordinate system selector
System color coordinate
System color coordinate
System color coordinate

Command Code and Parameters
#
The character # is the Color Introducer control character (DECGCI).
Pc
Pc selects the color number for the following sixel data.
Pu (optional}
Pu names the universal color coordinate system as follows:

•
•
•

4-24 Sixel Graphics

0 -illegal
1 - HLS (hue/lightness/saturation)
2 - RGB (red/green/blue)

DECGCI (#) - Color Introducer
Px ; Py ; Pz (optional)
Px, Py, and Pz select the color coordinates in the specified system:
Parameters

HLS

RGB

Hue angle, 0-360

Red, 0-100

Lightness, 0-100

Green, 0-100

Saturation, 0-100

Blue, 0-100

NOTE

The ANSI Text translator, Version 1.2, maps all colors to
black.
Table 4-3 summarizes sixel control codes and functions. Specific sixel
control codes (commands) consist of a code in the 2/0 through 3/14
range, except parameters and parameter separators, followed by zero
or more parameters. Separate parameters with a semicolon. Terminate
sixel commands by using any nonparameter character, that is, not 0-9
or a semicolon (;).

Sixel Graphics 4-25

4.7 Character Processing
This section describes how the translator acts on groups of codes in the
picture definition.
Table 4-4 describes the translator's sixel mode response to selected CO
control characters. Other codes in the range of 0/0 through 1115 do not
affect the translator. The translator considers them errors and ignores
them.
Table 4-4:
Name

Graphics ANSI Control Characters
Abbreviation Function

Bell

BEL

Same action as in text mode - ignored

Cancel

CAN

Causes exit from sixel graphics mode

Enquire

ENQ

Same action as in ANSI text mode

Escape

ESC

Causes exit from sixel graphics mode;
Processed as the start of a new sequence

Substitute

SUB

Processed as a blank sixel - 3/15 or ?

GL Codes form two groups: the control codes and the sixel column
codes.

•
•
•
•

Control codes in the range 2/0 through 3/14 define commands and
parameters.
Codes 3/0 through 3/9 are for parameters. Consecutive digits form
a single decimal numeric parameter~
Code 3/11 is a parameter separator for commands with more than
one parameter.
Codes 3/15 to 7/14 translate as sixel data.

Other codes in this group specify commands.. Ignore undefined control
codes.
Cl control codes (8\ 0 through 9\ 15) transfer code from sixel graphics
mode to ANSI text mode for processing.

Codes 10/0 through 15/15 (GR codes) are errors.

4-26 Sixel Graphics

4.8 Sixel - ANSI Text Interactions
Interactions between the sixel protocol and the ANSI Text portion of
the translator occur mainly in the area of active position, although
some interactions involve margins.
Entering sixel mode, the sixel active position is set to the ANSI Text
active position. The vertical position is offset upwards by 70 decipoints
(.0972") from the character baseline for compatibility with devices that
use cell positioning. The translator treats sixel mode horizontal and
vertical axes the same as the ANSI horizontal and vertical axes.
In sixel mode, sixels print relative to the active position, placing the
top pixel at the current horizontal position and seven grid vertical sizes
above the current vertical position.
Sixels defined to print beyond the right margin are ignored.
If the sixel active position is. above the top margin, then part of the
sixel prints above the top margin.
Advancing the sixel position past the bottom margin results in a page
feed, and the active position sets to the top margin of the next page,
plus seven grid sizes.
Exiting sixel mode, the translator returns to the last ANSI Text active
horizontal position.

4.9 Compatibility with Existing Print Devices
Color
•
•
•

ANSI-Sixel translator: Colors, except white, map to black.
LN03: Same as translator.
LN03 PLUS: Same as translator.

Extent Parameter
•
•
•

ANSI-Sixel translator: Translator ignores this parameter.
LN03: Same as the translator.
LN03 PLUS: Same as the translator.

Sixel Graphics 4-27

Background Select Parameter
•
•
•

ANSI-Sixel translator: Translator ignores this parameter.
LN03: Same as the translator.
LN03 PLUS: Same as the translator.

Repeat Function
•
•

ANSI-Sixel translator: 32K (32768) limit implemented (32K + X =
32K).
LN03: 32K limit implemented. Wraps if number larger (32K + X =
X).

•

LN03 PLUS: Same as the translator.

Macro Parameters
•
•
•

ANSI-Sixel translator: Same as LN03 PLUS. (Table 4-1)
LN03: Macro parameters take different values than the translator.1
LN03 PLUS: Same as the translator.

Grid Size Parameter
•
•

ANSI-Sixel translator: 99 units for maximum horizontal grid size;
99,000 units for maximum vertical grid size.
LN03 PLUS: At least 99 units for maximum horizontal grid size;
maximum vertical grid size equals maximum horizontal grid size
multiplied by the maximum aspect ratio.

Aspect Ratio
•
•

ANSI-Sixel translator: Unknown numerators or denominators
default to 1. Supports values 0 through lOOO(decimal) accurately.
LN03 PLUS: Unknown numerators or denominators default to 1.
Supports values 0 through lOOO(decimal) accurately.

LN03 macro parameters are listed in the LN03 Programmer Reference Manual, 2nd Edition, page 128.

4-28 Sixel Graphics

Positioning

•
•

ANSI-Sixel translator: Rounds to the nearest pixel at imaging time,
keeping distances in centipoints. Accurate to 0.5 pixel. Exception:
Values between 0 and 24 centipoints round to 1 pixel.
LN03 PLUS: Rounds to the nearest pixel at imaging time, keeping
distances in decipoints. Exception: 1 decipoint rounds to 1 pixel.

4.1 O Restrictions
Restrictions of ANSI-Sixel to POSTSCRIPT translation include the
following:
•
•
•
•
•

Colors, except white, map to black. This causes most color pictures
to come out dark and not very clear.
Sixel translation ignores extent parameters.
Sixel translation ignores the background select parameter (Ps2 of
the sixel device control string). The translator assumes a white
background.
Maximum value for the horizontal grid size is 99 current units.
Maximum value for the vertical grid size is 99,000 current units.

Sixel Graphics

4-29

ReGIS

Insert tabbed
divider here.
Then discard
this sheet.

Chapter 5

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator
ReGIS (Remote Graphics Instruction Set) is a DIGITAL-developed
graphics protocol. This chapter describes the ReGIS display structure
and command structure, as well as the ReGIS commands supported by
the ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT translator. The chapter also lists the ReGIS
commands not supported by the translator and gives information about
the translator environment.
NOTE

This translator is based on VT240 ReGIS. For complete
information about VT240 ReGIS, see the VT240 Programmer
Reference Manual.

5.1

Using the ReGIS Translator
To use the ReGIS translator, you can send your file to a print queue
that uses this translator by default, or use the PRINT command
supported by your printer. Refer to the appendix that describes your
printer.

5.2 ReGIS Definition
ReGIS is a symbol system that describes the parts of an image. It
works by treating an image as a group of graphic objects. Each of these
graphic objects is a standard geometric form: dots, lines, curves, circles,
and arcs. ReGIS lets you describe each form with a few commands.
ReGIS also allows you to create text.

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 5-1

ReGIS commands are encoded as ASCII character strings. The ReGIS
interpreter processes the ReGIS data serially, which allows the commands to be transmitted across serial communications lines. In general, a ReGIS string consists of a command keyletter followed by
arguments.
ReGIS is a graphics descriptor protocol rather than a programming
language. It has no algorithmic structure or arithmetic functions.
However, high-level programming languages can use ReGIS strings to
generate graphic images. Languages such as BASIC, FORTRAN, and
Pascal can use ReGIS strings in PRINT or WRITE statements.

5.3 ReGIS Display Structure
The default ReGIS logical coordinate system is 800 horizontal by
480 vertical pixels. If you change the default coordinate system, the
mapping of logical pixels to physical pixels becomes unpredictable.
For example, several logical coordinates may map to one physical
pixel. Conversely, two adjacent logical coordinates may map to two
nonadjacent physical pixels.
Coordinate units in ReGIS commands refer to the logical coordinate
system. Most ReGIS commands use X/Y coordinates to specify where
to move or where to draw an image. Some commands can use pixel
vectors, an alternative way of specifying a position in the image.

5.3.1

[X, VJ Coordinate System
The ReGIS coordinate system lets you access each logical pixel by
using an XJY coordinate value for the specific pixel. The X coordinate
specifies the horizontal position value. The Y coordinate specifies the
vertical position value. The pixel is located at the intersection of the X
and Y values.
The upper-left corner of the image, known as the origin, is location
[0,0]. The ReGIS current position is initially [0,0]. The default X
coordinates range from 0 (the left edge) to 799 (the right edge). Default
Y coordinates range from 0 (the top) to 479.
Coordinates in ReGIS commands must be enclosed in brackets. The X
coordinate must be first. X and Y coordinates must be separated by a
comma.

5-2 ReGIS-to-PosTScRtPT Translator

You do not have to specify X and Y values in all cases. You only have
to specify an X or Y value when that value is different from the current
value:
•
•

If you want to change only the X value, you specify only the new X
value. ReGIS recognizes [X] as meaning the Y value is unchanged.
If you want to change only the Y value, use a comma before the new
Y value in the brackets. ReGIS recognizes [,Y] as meaning the X
value is unchanged. (The comma identifies the numeric coordinate
value as a Y value; no comma identifies a single numeric value as
an X coordinate.)

You specify coordinate values by using the numeric values assigned to
the display addressing, whether that addressing is done at the default
value or in embedded decimal or exponential values. (See the section
on the display addressing option to the screen command.)
Coordinate values can be absolute, which refers to a numerically
specific point; relative, which refers to a point as it relates to the
current position; or a combination of the two. You can also use a null
position, []or [+0,+0], which does not change the current position. The
following list shows some examples of coordinate values.
Coordinate

Meaning

[10,86]

Absolute values for X and Y

[52]

Absolute value for X with Y unchanged

[,121]

Absolute value for Y with X unchanged

[+10,100]

Relative value for X, absolute value for Y

[+15,-10]

Relative values for X and Y

[100,-25]

Absolute value for X, relative value for Y

[6.25,10.4]

Absolute embedded decimal values for X and Y

[.1E3,1000E-11]

Absolute exponential values for X and Y

[]or [+0,+0]

Current values for X and Y unchanged

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-3

5.3.2

Pixel Vector (PV) System
Several ReGIS commands can use pixel vectors (PVs). The PV system
provides for relative positioning or movement from one logical pixel to
another.
The size of each logical pixel is determined by the screen addressing
command S(A), which determines the extent of the image area. The
default values are S(A[0,0][799,479]); this makes each logical pixel
1/800 of the image width. If, for example, the screen addressing range
were changed to S(A[0,0][499,499]), each logical pixel would be 11500 of
the image height or width.
As Figure 5-1 shows, PV movement can occur in eight different directions, each direction at 45-degree intervals. Each direction has an
assigned number. If you specify the number associated with the direction desired, drawing or moving occurs in that direction in proportion
to the number of times the PV value is specified.
Figure 5-1:

Pixel Vector (PV) Directions

7
ML0-001381

5-4 ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

5.3.2.1

Plxel Vector Multiplier

In some PV applications, entering all of the PV values required is
tedious. In such cases, you can use a PV multiplier command to
simplify the task.
The PV multiplier command lets you specify a multiplication value
for each PV entered in a command. For example, if you specify a
multiplication value of 10, then each PV entered in later commands
will cause moving or drawing for 10 logical pixels, not just 1.
Figure 5-2 shows an image drawn using PV multiplication. In this
figure, a write command (W) sets a PV multiplication factor of 100
(MlOO). The image is then drawn by vector commands (V), with each
specified PV value multiplied by 100, providing the vector commands
for drawing the figure.

ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator 5-5

Figure 5-2:

100

Pixel Vector Multiplication Example

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
COMMANDS
W(M100)
V642446064600206

NOTE
THE CURRENT POSITION AT THE
START OF THE COMMAND WAS
(400, 100); THE CURRENT
POSITION AT THE END OF THE
COMMAND IS (400,400).
ML0·001382

5-6 ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

5.4 ReGIS Command Structure
The ReGIS data stream consists of standard ASCII characters, including letters, numbers 0 through 9, the at character(@), the space, and
the following punctuation characters: semicolon ( ; ); quotation marks,
both single ( ' ) and double ( " ); parentheses ( ( ) ); brackets ( [ ] ); and
commas ( , ). In quoted strings, ReGIS also accepts the following control
characters: carriage return, backspace, linefeed, and horizontal tab.
Because the ReGIS interpreter processes the ReGIS data serially,
the order of the characters and the punctuation required to properly
identify arguments, options, and suboptions are vital to accurate ReGIS
processing. Except in quoted strings, ReGIS treats uppercase and
lowercase letters the same. In general, a ReGIS string consists of a
command keyletter followed by arguments.
ReGIS ignores inappropriate ReGIS commands and punctuation. The
ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT translator also ignores ReGIS commands that it
does not support, as well as escape sequences, control sequences, device
control sequence introducers, and unrecognized control characters. See
Section 5.6 for a list of ReGIS commands and command options not
supported by the translator.

5.4.1

ReGIS Commands
ReGIS has nine command types, which are represented by command
keyletters. In addition, the macrograph (@)and resynchronization(;)
characters affect the processing in a manner similar to the command
keyletters. The macrograph character temporarily passes control from
the current command to a macrograph. The semicolon terminates the
current command. Table 5--1 briefly describes the command types, the
macrograph, and the resynchronization character.

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 5-7

Table 5-1: ReGIS Command Summary
Command
Key Letter
ReGIS Command Description

Screen Control

Position

Write Control

Specifies writing controls, such as writing patterns.

Vector

Curve

Polygon Fill

Text

Draws vectors (straight lines) between
specified coordinate locations.
Draws circles, arcs, and curves, using
coordinate locations specified in the
command.
Fills in single closed figures, such as
circles and squares.
Controls display of graphics text strings
and lets you specify characters to display.

Load

Controls definition and loading of alternative characters that you can display
using the text command.

Report

Reports information, such as active
position and error codes. This command
is not supported by the translator.

Macrograph

Defines a command string as a macrograph. You use macrographs to store
and recall other ReGIS command
strings. Macrographs let you store a
complex figure that you may use more
than once in a graphic image and select
that figure with a single command.
The semicolon serves as a resynchronization character for ReGIS command
strings.

Resynchronizatfon

5-8

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator

Specifies screen controls, such as erasing
the image.
Positions the graphics cursor without
performing any writing.

ReGIS command keyletters require no punctuation. When the ReGIS
interpreter encounters a command keyletter, it assumes that all subsequent data is an argument to the command. The interpreter continues
to process all data relative to the command currently in effect until it
encounters one of the following:
•
•
•

A new command keyletter
A semicolon, which is the resynchronization character that terminates the current command whether completed or not
A macrograph character(@), which initiates processing of a macrograph
ReGIS processes macrographs independently from the current
command. However, if the macrograph, when it is called, contains
a new command keyletter, the new keyletter remains the current
command after the macrograph has executed. If the macrograph
string does not contain a new command keyletter, control returns to
the command in effect before the macrograph executed.

5.4.2

ReGIS Command Arguments
ReGIS commands can have four types of arguments, as follows:
•
•
•
•

Bracketed extents
Quoted strings
Digit strings
Options

Not all argument types apply to each command. Each argument type
has punctuation that identifies it in the ReGIS stream. Using the
proper punctuation is vital to accurate processing. The following sections describe each argument type and its accompanying punctuation.

ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 5-9

5.4.2.1

Bracketed Extents

A bracketed extent is numeric data enclosed in brackets ( [] ). In
ReGIS, brackets enclose the following types of numeric values:
•
•

Coordinate position values
Height and width values

Coordinate position values serve as arguments to commands, options,
and suboptions. The values can represent an absolute value, a relative
value, or a combination of the two.
Height and width values are arguments to only text and load commands and represent relative displacement values for text options.
5.4.2.2

Quoted Strings

Quoted strings can be any series of ASCII characters enclosed in
quotation marks. ReGIS treats all characters in quoted strings as
literals, including punctuation that normally functions as part of
ReGIS syntax (semicolon and brackets, for example). Quoted strings
can be any of the following:
•
•
•
•

Text characters to process for display on the screen during text
command activity
A printable character to use for shading
A name given to a character set selected by a load command
A single ASCII character used as a call letter for load command
load cell arguments

In all cases, you can use double quotes ( " ) or single quotes ( ' ).
However, you must use matched pairs. The first quotation mark
defines the start of the argument, while the second defines the end. If
you begin a text string with a double quote, ReGIS does not recognize
a single quote as the end of the argument but continues processing all
data as a quoted string until it encounters a double quote.

5-10 ReGIS-to-POSTScR1PT Translator

If you need to use quotes inside a quoted string, use the type not
currently used as the delimiter. For example, ReGIS recognizes single
quotes as a literal when they occur in a quoted string delimited by
double quotes. To include a literal that is the same type of quote as the
delimiter, you can enter the character twice with no intervening spaces.
The following examples clarify how ReGIS interprets quotes.
"A"

"'"

'a'' C'

''''

"A' "B"
11

1111

5.4.2.3

or ' '

refers to the string A
refers to the string "
refers to the string '
refers to the string a'C
refers to the string '
refers to the string A' 11 B
refers to the empty string

Commas

While commas do not have explicit meaning in ReGIS syntax, they
determine how arguments are interpreted. For example, ReGIS interprets consecutive string arguments 'ABC 1 'DEF' as a single text string
ABC DEF. However, ReGIS interprets 'ABC DEF as ABCDEF.
1

5.4.2.4

Digit Strings

Numeric values not enclosed in brackets or quotes are digit strings.
Most often these are pixel vectors, explained in Section 5.3.2. Digit
strings that are not pixel vectors represent numeric values that may be
signed. Most of these are forced to the nearest integer before use.
5.4.2.5

Options

Options are arguments that modify the action of the command key
letter. Parentheses define the boundaries of options and suboptions.
The left parenthesis "(" defines the beginning of the option, suboption,
or argument; the right parenthesis ")" defines the end.
ReGIS considers any letter not enclosed by parentheses, quotation
marks, or brackets to be a command keyletter. Parentheses define the
enclosed information as an option. ReGIS processes options in much
the same way as it processes. command keyletters. ·Once an option is
introduced by a parenthesis, ReGIS processes all subsequent data as
arguments to that option until ReGIS receives a closing parenthesis.

ReG IS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator 5-11

Therefore, you must enclose suboptions with additional sets of parentheses. Otherwise, ReGIS assumes that the suboption is an option and
tries to process it as such.
The following examples show ReGIS commands that use parentheses:
•
•
•

•

S(E) - Erase option to the Screen Control command.
W(IO,P3) - Foreground intensity and pattern select options to the
Write Control command. The 0 and 3 are arguments to the options,
which are separated by a comma.
P(W(MlOO)) - Pixel vector (PV) multiplication temporary write option to the Position command. It uses the Write Control command
as an option and the PV multiplication option of the Write Control
command as a suboption.
V(W(l(R))) - Temporary write option affecting the value of the
foreground intensity to be used by a Vector command. It uses the
Write Control Command as an option. The foreground intensity
option to the Write Control command is a suboption to the Vector
command. The (R) argument to the I suboption is enclosed in a
third set of parentheses, since this argument is a letter value.

As these examples show, you must use matching parentheses to con-

trol the levels of nesting of options and suboptions. The command
V(W(l(R))) demonstrates this:
•
•
•
•
•
•

The first parenthesis defines the start of option values.
The second parenthesis defines the start of suboption values.
The third parenthesis defines the start of sub-suboption values.
The fourth parenthesis defines the end of sub-suboption values.
The fifth parenthesis defines the end of suboption values.
The sixth parenthesis defines the end of option values.

5-12 ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

5.4.3

Other Punctuation Significant to ReGIS Syntax
The following sections discuss the use of commas, spaces, and semicolons in the ReGIS command syntax.

5.4.3.1

Commas and Spaces
Commas separate position values in bracketed extents; commas and
spaces separate option values in ReGIS commands. In most other
cases, commas and spaces merely increase readability. However,
in two cases besides bracketed extents, commas are necessary for
correct processing. As explained in Section 5.4.2.2, you need commas to
separate two or more quoted strings, as ReGIS interprets consecutive
quotes as a literal.

Another case involves any command identified by an E (such as a
screen erase). If the E follows a numeric value, ReGIS interprets it as
an exponential value, unless you insert a comma between the numeric
value and the E command letter.
Commas and spaces are not part of a graphic image, unless specified in
a quoted string.
5.4.3.2

Semicolon

ReGIS recognizes a semicolon ( ; ) as a command for resynchronization. A semicolon in a command string causes ReGIS instructions to
resynchronize to the top-level command state. For example, you would
use the semicolon between command strings when transmission errors
may be occurring. The semicolon cannot :fix a garbled message, but
may reduce the effect of a single transmission error. You may want to
include a semicolon at selected intervals. You should use a semicolon
at the end of a load command. The semicolon is not· recognized as a
resynchronization character when included in a quoted text string or
when used as part of the macrograph command syntax.

ReGIS-to-PostScR1PT Translator 5-13

5.4.4 Control Characters
ReGIS recognizes four control characters: carriage return (CR), linefeed
(LF), backspace (BS), and horizontal tabs (HT). ReGIS recognizes these
characters only when used in a quoted string.
Because ReGIS ignores all control characters not in a quoted string,
you can use linefeeds and carriage returns to define how command
strings are displayed or printed. This makes your command strings
easier to read without affecting the image.

5-14 ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

5.4.5 ReGIS Default Values Summary
ReGIS commands have default values that apply when you invoke the
translator. When you change these values, the new values remain in
effect until you redefine them or exit from the translator. Table 5-2
summarizes ReGIS default values.
NOTE

The translator maps Lightness in reverse order. Lightness
100% is printed as black. Lightness 0% is printed as white.
Table 5-2: ReGIS Default Values
Default
Type
Command
Default Description
Screen
Control

S(A[0,0]
[799,479])

Defines the screen as having coordinate values of
[0,0] for upper left corner and [799,4 79] for lower
right corner.

Screen
Control
Screen
Control

S(MO(LO)l(L33)
2(L66)3(L100))
S(l(LO))

Output map values are white for MO, light gray
for Ml, dark gray for M2, and black for M3.
Output map location 0 is used for background
intensity value, with white background (default
value for MO).

Write
Control
Write
Control
Write
Control
Write
Control
Write
Control

W(Pl)

Solid line selected for writing pattern.

W(P(M2))

Pattern multiplication factor of 2.

W(Ml)

Pixel vector (PV) multiplication of 1.

W(NO)

Negative pattern control disabled.

W(l(LlOO))

Output map location 3 selected for write tasks.
This results in black, since this is the default
translator value for M3.
Overlay writing in effect.

Write
Control

W(V)

ReG IS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-15

Table 5-2 (Cont.):

ReGIS Default Values

Default

5-16

Type

Command

Default Description

Write
Control
Text

W(SO)

Shading disabled.

T(AO)

Character set containing standard ASCII characters is selected for text processing.

Text

T(Sl)

Standard character cell size 1 is selected for text
processing.

Text

T(S[9,20])

Display cell size associated with standard character cell size 1.

Text

T(U[S,20])

Unit cell size associated with standard character
cell size 1.

Text

T[+9,+0]

Text

T(H2)

Character escapement associated with standard
character cell size 1.
Height multiplication factor of 2.

Text

String and character tilt disabled.

Text

T(DO Sl DO)
T(IO)

Load

L(Al)

Selects alphabet 1 for loading.

ReGIS-to-PoSTScRtPT Translator

Italics disabled.

5.4.6

Conventions Used in ReGIS Commands
The following conventions apply to the explanations of ReGIS commands:
•

•

5.4. 7

Angle brackets ( <>) indicate that you can select different values.
The <Values> in the angles define the type of information you can
use, but the angles are not part of ReGIS syntax.
[X,Y] indicates you can select coordinate position values. The
brackets are part of the ReGIS syntax. The X and Y are variables
for a coordinate position. This position can have both X and Y
values, just an X value, or just the Y value. (See Section 5.3.1.)
This manual uses uppercase letters for clarity. However, you can
use either uppercase or lowercase letters with ReGIS commands.
Except in quoted strings, ReGIS treats both cases the same.

Conventions Used in ReGIS Examples
The following conventions apply to the examples in this chapter:
•

•
•

Examples of the Vector and Curve commands show the position
of the cursor. This is for informational purposes only; the cursor
does not appear when the example is translated from ReGIS to
POSTSCRIPT and printed.
Examples that show text use Courier, the font used when text is
translated from ReGIS to POSTSCRIPT and printed.
Examples of shaded figures show the shading used when the examples are translated from ReGIS to POSTSCRIPT and printed. This is
the reverse of how figures are shaded when they are displayed on
the screen.

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 5-17

5.5 ReGIS Commands Supported by the Translator
The ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT translator supports the following commands
and options described in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Screen Control
Position
Write Control
Vector
Curve
Polygon Fill
Text
Load
Macrograph

See Section 5.6 for commands the ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT translator does
not support.

5-18

ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

Screen Control

Screen Control
Screen Control command (S) arguments either set parameters and
attributes for the whole image or execute actions affecting the whole
image. The ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT translator supports five of the nine
Screen Control command arguments:

•
•
•

Format

•
•

Display addressing
Output mapping
Background intensity
Screen erase
Page eject

option

Command Arguments
(A[X, Y][X, Y])
(1( ... )) or (kn>)
(M<n>( ...))
(E)
(F)

Description
Screen addressing
Background intensity select
Output mapping
Erase (used with I to set background)
Page eject option

Command Arguments
(A[X, Y][X, Y])

The display address option defines the addressable extent of the image
area. This lets you run ReGIS code written for ReGIS devices with
different address ranges, without having to convert the coordinates.
The first pair of bracketed extents indicates the coordinate values for
the upper left comer. The second pair indicates the coordinate values
for the lower right comer. If either position specifier is missing, ReGIS
ignores the command.
The default coordinate system is [0,0] for the upper left comer and
[799,479] for the lower right.

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-19

Screen Control
You can use exponential numbers, as well as decimal numbering. The
ratio of the defined area should be as close as possible to the aspect
ratio of the presentation area.
In mapping a specified display addressing into the image area, ReGIS
maintains the picture aspect ratio. Squares are always square, and
angles are correctly drawn, regardless of the addressing parameters.
Figure 5-3 shows the effective address range (when default values
are in place). Although negative addresses are valid, they may not be
addressed directly. You cannot specify an absolute negative address.
However, you can specify a relative value that results in a negative
address; the negative address is valid, as long as it does not exceed the
address range. If it does exceed the address range, then wraparound
may occur.
Figure 5-3:

Effective Default Address Range

-800,-480

-800,-1
-800,0

-1,-480 0,-480

799,-480 800,-480

1599,-480

-1 ,-1 0,-1
-1,0 0,0

799,-1 800,-1
799,0 800,0

1599,-1
1599,0

(ACTUAL IMAGE AREA)

-800,479
-800,480

-1,479 0,479
-1,480 0,480

799,479 800,479
799,480 800,480

1599,479
1599,480

-800,959

-1,959 0,959

799,959 800,959

1599,959
ML0·001383

5-20 ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

Screen Control
There is no restriction on the relative values of the left, right, top, and
bottom margins. If the right margin value is less than the left margin
value, then the X coordinate increases to the left instead of to the right
(as it would in the default coordinate value system). If the bottom
margin value is less than the top margin value, then the Y coordinate
increases upward instead of downward.
NOTE

Pixel vector (PV) magnitude values are dependent on the
screen addressing values and the PV multiplier. PV directions, however, are independent of addressing orientation.
For example, 0 is always to the right.
(l<n>)

(l(RGB))
(l(H<n>L<n>S<n>))

This option lets you select the shade of the background writing color.
Used alone, this command does not change the appearance of the
image. It sets up the color to be used in (1) screen erase and (2) replace
and erase writing modes. You can use two methods for this selection:
•
•

Provide an RGB or HLS specifier value.
Provide the output map location number (0 to 15), which selects the
shade stored in that location.

The first method explicitly selects a color. Use this method when
portability to other ReGIS devices is a consideration.
The second method selects the intensity stored in a specific output map
location. This method is provided for compatibility for devices with
limited output maps.
The RGB (red/green/blue) specifier system uses a single letter to specify
any one of eight different colors. The translator associates each color
with a shade of gray. The letters, the colors they specify, and the
gray shades associated with them are listed here. Dark and Light are
inverted; Dark is printed as white, and Light is printed as black.

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 5-21

Screen Control
Associated
Gray Shade
(Lightness)

RGB
Specifier

Color

Dark (black)

100%

Blue

89%

Red

70%

Magenta (a secondary color made from an
equal mixture of red and blue)

59%

Green
Cyan (a secondary color made from an equal
mixture of blue and green)

41%

30%

Yellow (a secondary color made from an equal
mixture of red and green)

11%

White

The HLS (hue/lightness/saturation) specifier system provides more
colors. It uses different values of hue (H), lightness (L), and saturation
(S). However, for colors specified using the HLS system, the translator
uses only the Lightness component to determine the gray shade. (For
information about colors in the HLS specifier system, see the VT240
Programmer Reference Manual.)
(M<n>(L<n>))
(M<n>(<RGB>))
(M<n>(H<n>L<n>S<n>))

The output mapping option lets you change the values in the entries
of the output map. The output map for this translator has 16 entries.
Each entry stores a monochrome value. This option is provided for
compatibility with devices that provide an output map.
Output map locations are numbered 0 through 15. The default values
for the 16 monochrome entries are listed in Table 5-3.

5-22

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator

Screen Control
Table 5-3: Default Output Map Values
Output
Map
Default
Entry
Translator Value

Entry

Default
Translator Value

White

Light gray
Dark gray

Light gray

Dark gray

Dark

White

Light gray

Dark gray

Dark

14
15

Output

Map

Dark

Command Structure for Changing Value

Follow these steps to change the value of an output map location:
1. Specify the output map location: 0 to 15
2. Specify a new lightness value between 0 and 100. For the translator, the value 0 indicates white; the value 100 indicates black.
NOTE

When you are using the translator, changes made to the color
map with the S(M) command are not retroactive.
The following example shows the command syntax to change an output
map's value:
S(Ml(L25)2(L99)3(L50))

(E)

The screen erase option lets you erase the screen by setting the whole
screen to the display background color. This option does not change
either the current position or the values in the output map.
To change the background color, combine the screen erase command
with the background intensity option.
The translator does not interpret the screen erase command to mean
that a page should be printed.

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 5-23

Screen Control
(F)

The page eject option prints the current image. An implied S(E)
command occurs after each S(F) command.
The end of a file implies an S(F) command; however, an S(F) command
at the end of a file does not produce a blank page. Successive S(F)
commands do not eject blank pages.

5.5.1

Screen Control Command Summary
Table 5-4 summarizes the Screen Control command arguments supported by the translator, including default values associated with the
arguments.
Table 5-4:
Argument

Screen Control Command Summary
Default
Description

(A[X,Y][X,Y])

[0,0][799,479]

(l(RGB))

(l(D))

(l(HLS))

(l(LO))

(l<n>)

(IO)

(M<n>( <Lvalue>)) O(LO)
l(L33)
2(L66)
3(L100)

5-24

(E)

None

(F)

None

ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

Display addressing. Lets you define addressing at a different size or orientation
from the default.
One of three background intensity select
options.
One of three background intensity select
options.
One of three background intensity select
options.
Output mapping option for changing
monochrome values. You can change any
or all values in a given option. Defines the
monochrome value to store in selected <n>
output map location.
Screen erase option. Rewrites the whole
image at current background intensity.
Page eject option. Prints the current image.

Position

Position
Position commands (P) let you select a new current position without
writing. The three basic command arguments are as follows:
•
•
•

Format

Move arguments
Sequence of coordinates options
Temporary write control option

P argument
Command Arguments
[X,Y]
<PV>
(B)
(S)
(E)
(W(M<n>))

Description
Position argument
Position argument, using PV values
Begin bounded sequence option
Begin unbounded sequence option
End of sequence option
Temporary write control option

Command Arguments
[X,Y]
<PV>
These arguments let you select a current position before performing
other ReGIS functions. You can use four types of positioning:

•
•
•
•

Absolute
Relative
Absolute/relative
PV offset

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-25

Position
Absolute positioning uses absolute X and Y coordinate values to define
a new current position. You can specify absolute positioning in three
ways:
•
•
•

Specify new X and Y coordinates
Specify only a new X coordinate (with the Y coordinate unchanged)
Specify only a new Y coordinate (with the X coordinate unchanged)

The three formats for the absolute positioning argument are as follows:
P[X,Y]
p [X]
p [, Y]

NOTE

Position commands do not cause drawing. The lines in the
diagrams only represent the movement that occurs.
Relative positioning uses negative and positive values to define a new
current position relative to its current position. You can specify relative
positioning in three ways:
•
•
•

Specify relative positioning on both X and Y axes
Specify relative positioning on the X axis only
Specify relative position on the Y axis only

Relative position values always start with a plus (+) or minus (-) sign.
A positive value is added to the value of the current position coordinate
to be affected; the resulting value becomes the absolute value of the
new location. A negative value is subtracted to arrive at the new
absolute value. The direction of change, however, depends on the
screen addressing orientation.

5-26 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Position
The relative positioning argument can take the following eight forms:
P[+X,+Y]
P[+X,-Y]
P[-X,+Y]
P[-X,-Y]
P[+X]
P[-X]
p [,+Y]

P[,-Y]

You can define a new current position with a combination of absolute
and relative X and Y coordinate values. This combination of Position
comm.and values can take two basic forms:
•
•

An absolute x value with a relative Y value
A relative X value with an absolute Y value

The pixel vector (PV) positioning form of the Position command uses
PV values to define a new current position. PV moves are relative to
the old current position.
PV moves use the current PV multiplication factor. If you want a
different multiplication factor, you can use a Write Control command to
change the current PV multiplication or a PV multiplication temporary
write control option. The value defined by the temporary write control
option is only in effect until you use a new key letter (including a new
P command key letter) or another temporary write control option.
The format for the PV positioning argument is as follows:
P<pv value>

The format for the PV multiplication temporary write control option is
as follows:
P(W(Mrnultiplication value))<pv value>

Figure 5-4 shows the directions associated with each of the PV offset
numeric values (0 through 7).

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 5-27

Position
Figure 5-4:

PV Direction Values
+135°
-225°

+90°
-270°

+45°
-31 ff

+225°
-135°

+270°
-90°

+315°
-45°
ML0-001384

(8)
Both bounded and unbounded sequences let you group sets of position
specifiers into position blocks that are processed as units. Both consist
of either a start (S) or begin (B) option and an end {E) option. Usually
other commands, such as Vector (V) or Curve (C) commands, are
embedded between the sequence start and stop options. As such, these
sequences are useful for such ReGIS tasks as polygon definition and
shading. The format for a bounded sequence is as follows:
P(B)<embedded options>(E)

A bounded sequence returns the current position to a specific starting
point at the end of the sequence.
A bounded sequence consists of a minimum of one begin (B) option
and one end (E) option. You should repeat the Position command
keyletter before the final (E) option, because the embedded options
usually contain other command keyletters. If you do not repeat P, the
last command keyletter in the embedded options sequence becomes the
current command. You can save up to 16 positions. For each (B) option,
there must be an (E) option. If you use five (B) options in a graphic
image, then you need five (E) options to return the active position to
the original saved position.
5-28 ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

Position
NOTE

Position values are also saved during Position command unbounded sequences, as well as Vector command bounded and
unbounded sequence options. The limit on the number of unended, saved position values (including all save commands)
is 16. However, for transportability, use a maximum of eight.
Figure 5--5 shows an example of how to build a simple graphic image
with a Position command bounded sequence. The example includes
Vector (V) and Curve (C) commands.
Figure 5-5:

100

Bounded Sequence Example

200

300

400

500

600

700

or
100
200

®m®
<V

(300, 150)

300

@
400

799

(500, 150)

COMMANDS
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

P[400,250]
(B)
[+100,-100]
V[,+200]
[-200]
[,-200]
[+200)
P(E)
C[+100]

(300,350)

479 ~~--------------------------------'J
NOTE
ONCE A COMMAND LETTER IS SPECIFIED,
IT DOES NOT NEED TO BE RESPECIFIED,
UNLESS ANOTHER TYPE OF COMMAND
COMES BETWEEN THE COMMAND OPTION
VALUES.
ML0-001385

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-29

Position
(S)

The difference between the bounded and unbounded sequences is the
start option. In bounded sequences, the (B) option tells ReGIS to save
the current position and return to that position after a corresponding
(E) option. In the unbounded sequence, the (8) option tells ReGIS
to save a dummy, or nonexistent position. When ReGIS comes to
a corresponding (E) option, the position does not change from the
last specified current position. The unbounded sequence is provided
primarily for symmetry with other command types (such as Curve
commands) that can use bounded and unbounded sequences.
The format for an unbounded sequence is as follows:
P(S)<embedded options>(E)

With an unbounded sequence, you should repeat the P command
keyletter before the final (E) option to ensure that the command
keyletter remains P. Figure 5-6 shows an unbounded sequence with
the same Vector and Curve commands used in the bounded sequence
in Figure 5-5. Comparing these figures shows the different results
obtained by using bounded and unbounded sequences.

5-30

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

Position
Figure 5-6:

100

Unbounded Sequence Example

200

300

400

500

600

700

0
100

COMMANDS
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

®
(300, 150)

200

300

®
400

799

P[400,250]
(S)
[+100,-100]
V[,+200]
[-200]
[,-200]
[+200)
P(E)
C[+100]

(500,350)

(300,350)

479

NOTE
ONCE A COMMAND LETTER IS SPECIFIED,
IT DOES NOT NEED TO BE RESPECIFIED,
UNLESS ANOTHER TYPE OF COMMAND
COMES BETWEEN THE COMMAND OPTION
VALUES.
ML0·001386

(E)
This is the end of sequence option, used to end both bounded and
unbounded sequences. This option refers back to the last stored (B) or
(S) option value. If the last value was stored by a (B) option, the active
position is defined by the stored value. If the last value was stored by
an (8) option, the active position remains at its current location.
For both bounded and unbounded sequences, you should repeat the
P command keyletter before the final (E) option to ensure that the
command keyletter remains P.
(W(M<n>))

This is the temporary write control option, which defines the multiplication factor for PV values. It defines the number of coordinates
affected by PV values specified by a PV move argument.

ReGIS-to-PosTScRIPT Translator 5-31

Position
5.5.2

Position Command Summary
Table 5-5 summarizes the Position command arguments, including
default values associated with the arguments.

5-32

Table 5-5:
Argument

Position Command Summary
Default Description

[X,YJ

·None

<PV>

None

(B)

None

(S)

None

(E)

None

(W(M<n>))

(Ml)

ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Cursor position argument using [X,YJ values to
define a new active position. The [X,YJ values can be
absolute, relative, or absolute/relative.
Cursor positioning argument using PV values to
define a relative repositioning of the active position.
Begin a bounded sequence option. Stores the current active position for reference at the end of the
sequence.
Start an unbounded sequence option. Stores a
dummy position for reference at the end of the sequence.
End of sequence option. Selects last stored (B) or (S)
option value for reference.
Temporary write control option defining multiplication factor for PV values. Defines number of
coordinates affected by PV values specified by a
PV move argument.

Write Control

Write Control
Write Control command (W) options let you set attributes and parameters used at the pixel level during write tasks. The translator supports
the following tasks performed by the Write Control command options:
•

•
•
•

•

PV multiplication
Foreground intensity selection
Erase writing
Replace writing
Overlay writing
Line width selection
Pattern control
Shading control

You can set write controls by using other commands (for example,
Vector, Curve, Screen Control, and Position·commands) as temporary
write control options. For more information, see the sections on these
commands.

Format

W option
Command Arguments

Description

(M<n>)
(1( ...)) or (kn>)
(E/R/V)

PV Multiplication
Foreground Intensity Select
Defines the type of writing: Erase,
Replace, Overlay
Line Width Select
Pattern
Pattern Multiplication
Negative Pattern Control
Shading

(L<n>)
(P<pattern>)
(P(M<n>))
(N<O or 1>)
(S<O or 1>) or (S"<char>")

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 5-33

Write Control
Command Arguments
(M<n>)

This option lets you define a multiplication factor for PV values used
in moving and drawing. PV values are then multiplied by the defined
factor. The format for the PV multiplication option is as follows:
W(M<n>)

<n> is the numeric value defining the multiplication factor.

You can also use the PV multiplication option as a temporary write
control option with other commands (such as position, screen, vector
and circle commands). In those cases, you can leave the overall PV
multiplication value unchanged but select a temporary multiplication
value for a specific task.
(l<n>)
(l(<RGB>))
(l(H<n>L<n>S<n>))

The foregroUii.d intensity option is identical in form to the Screen
Control background intensity option, except the options start with different command key letters (W for write control, S for screen control).
However, the options have different functions. The Screen Control option selects the shade for background, while the Write command option
selects the shade you use for writing on that background.
The foreground intensity option affects only the shade of writing done
after the option is invoked. This feature lets you select different shades
for different parts of a graphic image, without affecting other parts of
the same image.
You must select a writing shade that differs from the selected background to make sure that the foreground is visible.
The foreground intensity option can only select shades from the output
map if you use the form W(kn> ). Otherwise, the actual color specified
is sent to the printer. However, since the translator does not support
color output, it changes RGB colors to shades of gray. For the HLS
specifier, the translator looks at only the Lightness component. As
when this option is used with the Screen Control command, Dark
prints as white and Light prints as black.

5-34 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Write Control
(E)

You can use the erase writing option (1) by itself, (2) with negative
pattern control on or off, (3) with a foreground intensity value, or (4)
in any combination of these options. The function of erase writing
depends on all of these options. If you use erase writing by itself, it
sets any pixels written. In that case, erase writing changes the erased
area to the currently selected background color/shade value (assuming
negative pattern control is off, which is the default).
The format for a basic erase writing option is as follows:
W(E)

If you specify negative pattern control as on (Nl), erase writing
changes the erased area to the currently selected foreground color
value. Figure 5-7 shows the effect of negative pattern control on erase
writing. Example A shows how the square is erased to the background
color when negative pattern control is off. Example B shows how the
square is erased to the foreground color when negative pattern control
is on.

When you use erase writing with the foreground intensity option, you
can write at the newly defined foreground value - as long as negative
pattern control is on. If negative pattern control is off, the foreground
intensity option changes the foreground value for later writing activity.
However, the erase command still uses the background shade value.
Figure 5-8 shows the effect that the foreground select option can have
on erase writing when negative pattern control is on.

ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

5-35

Write Control
Figure 5-7:

Erase Writing with. Negative Pattern Control

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

100
200
300
400
479 \..
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

NOTE
THE PATTERNED SQUARE IS PARTIALLY ERASED
BY USING W(NO,E), OR W(E) IF NEGATIVE WRITING
IS OFF (DEFAULT OR PREVIOUS NO).

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

100
200
300
400

NOTE
THE PATTERNED SQUARE IS PARTIALLY ERASED
BY USING W(N1 ,E), OR W(E) IF NEGATIVE WRITING
IS ON (PREVIOUS N1).
ML0-001387

5-36

ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Write Control
Figure 5-8:

Erase Writing with Foreground Specification

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

NOTE
ERASE WRITING IS INITIATED BY W(N1 ,E,12).
ML0-001388

(R)
Replace writing replaces an image stored in the part of the bitmap
being written to with the new image. The old stored image does not
affect the new pattern stored by the replace writing.

In replace writing, ones in the bit pattern memory write the foreground
intensity. Zeros in the bit pattern memory write the background
intensity.
The format for the replace writing option is as follows:
W(R)

Figure 5-9 shows an example of a graphic image created using replace
writing.

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 5-37

Write Control
Figure 5-9:

Replace Writing Example
0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

100
200
300
400
479 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NOTE
THE BLACK SQUARE IS DRAWN FIRST. THEN THE
PATTERNED SQUARE IS DRAWN IN REPLACE MODE.
ML0·001389

(V)
During overlay writing, new images are written on top of any old
images in the bitmap. Bitmap values do not change for those parts of
the new image defined by Os in pattern memory. A change occurs only
for those parts of the new image defined by ls in pattern memory. The
foreground intensity replaces the old bitmap value for all pixels defined
as ls in the new image.

Because overlay is the default, you do not have to use the overlay
option unless erase or replace writing has occurred. If you. use one
of those forms of writing control, then the overlay writing option lets
you return to the default mode. However, it is good practice to specify
overlay writing, as you cannot always be sure of the current writing
mode.
The format for the overlay writing option is as follows:
W(V)

5-38 ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

Write Control
Figure 5-10 shows an example of overlay writing. Figure 5-10 uses
the same basic graphic image used for the erase and replace writing
examples; however, the square is shaded light gray, rather than dark,
so that the overlay is visible.
Figure 5-10:

Overlay Writing Example

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

ML0-001390

(C)

Complement writing allows writing over another image in the opposite
shade.
Complement writing is not supported by the translator. When you
specify complement writing, the translator defaults to overlay writing.
(L<n>)

You can select line width using the W(L<n>) command. The L option
takes a single numeric argument. This number is interpreted as· a
multiple of the default line width.
An argument of 0 sets the line width to the minimum line width that
can be imaged. This may not be visible on some PosTSCRIPT printers.
The default line width is 1/800 of the horizontal dimension of the image
area. If you are using the default presentation area of 8 inches x 10.5
inches, the default line width is slightly less than a 1-point line.

ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 5-39

Write Control
The following examples demonstrate this command:
W(Ll)

Selects the default line width

W(L0.5)

Selects a line width that is half of the default width

W(L2)

Selects a line width that is twice the default width
Selects the minimum line width that can be imaged

W(LO)

(P<pattern>)

The translator uses an 8-bit wide pattern memory. The contents of this
memory let you define the appearance of lines and shaded areas. This
memory is read to control the appearance of the pixels in a graphic
object. For example, a vector command draws a line. As the line
is drawn, the pattern memory is read, bit by bit, to determine if a
pixel should be on (1) or off (0). In replace writing mode, a 1 value
sets the pixel to the foreground shade value, and a 0 value sets the
pixel to the background shade value. (In the case of negative pattern
control, settings are reversed. See the description of (N<0 or 1>) in this
section.)
The writing cycles through the 8-bit pattern, unless you use a new
command keyletter. If you want successive vector or curve commands
to start at the first position of pattern memory, start them with the
command keyletter.
The default for pattern memory is all ones. Therefore, during a typical
drawing process, the line is defined by having all pixels turned on to
the foreground shade. Pattern control consists of options that let you
change the pattern in four ways.
•
•
•
•

Select standard pattern
Specify binary pattern
Pattern multiplication
Negative pattern control

Select standard pattern and specify binary pattern both use the pattern
select command option to define a pattern. However, they specify
different values in the pattern select option.
Ten standard write patterns are available: 0 through 9. The format for
the standard pattern select option is as follows:
W(P<pattern number>)

5-40 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Write Control
You can select any of the 10 standard patterns by using the standard
pattern select option. Table 5-6 identifies the bit configurations for the
standard patterns.
Table 5-6: Standard Pattern Memory Descriptions
Pattern
Description
Number
Binary Pattern
0

00000000

All-off write pattern

11111111

All-on write pattern

11110000

Dash pattern

11100100

Dash-dot pattern

10101010

Dot pattern

5
6

11101010

Dash-dot-dot pattern

10001000

Sparse dot pattern

10000100

Asymmetrical sparse· dot pattern

11001000

Sparse dash-dot pattern

10000110

Sparse dot-dash pattern

Figure 5-11 shows how the various standard patterns appear on the
screen. Figure 5-12 shows how these patterns are invoked in a vector
that is 24 pixels long.

ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 5-41

Write Control
Figure 5-11:

Standard Patterns Display

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

0
W{P1)
100

W{P2)

200

W { P3) .·-----·-·---·-·-·-·-·-----·-·-·-·-·---------·
W{P4)

W{PS)
300

W{P6)
W{P7)

400

W{P8)
W{P9)

479
ML0-001391

5-42 ReGIS-to-PosrScRIPT Translator

Write Control
Figure 5-12:

Standard Patterns

PATTERN MEMORY READS
1ST PASS

COMMAND
W(P1)
W(P2)
W(P3)
W(P4)
W(PS)
W(P6)
W(P7)
W(PS)
W(P9)

2ND PASS

3RD PASS

00000000 0000000000000000000000 00000000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01·---------------10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
00000000 0000000000000000000000 00000000
00000000 . . . . 0000 . . . . 0000 . . . . 000 00000000
00000000 0000000000000000000000 00000000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 0 • 0 0 - 0 0 • 0 0 - 0 0 • 0 00000000
00000000 0000000000000000000000 00000000
OOOOOOOOeoeoeoeoeoeoeoeoeoeoeoe 00000000
00000000 0000000000000000000000 00000000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 • 0 • 0 - - 0 • 0 • 0 - 0 • 0 • 00000000
0000000000000000000000000000000 00000000
ooooooooeoooeoooeoooeoooeoooeoo 00000000
00000000 0000000000000000000000 00000000
ooooooooeooooeooeooooeooeoooo•o 00000000
0000000000000000000000000000000 00000000
00000000 . . ooeooo . . ooeooo . . ooeoo 00000000
00000000 0000000000000000000000 00000000
ooooooooeoooo . . oeoooo . . oeoooo . . 00000000
00000000 0000000000000000000000 00000000

NOTES
•PO IS NOT SHOWN; ITS VALUE IS ALL Os.
•ALL PATTERNS ARE SHOWN WITH A MULTIPLICATION VALUE OF 1
WITH NEGATIVE PATTERN CONTROL OFF.
•ALL PATTERNS ARE SHOWN FOR 3 READS OF PATTERN MEMORY
WITH THE 1st READ STARTING AT THE 1st BIT.
ML0·001392

You can select unique patterns not available as standard patterns by
using a specified pattern select option. The format of this option is
similar to that of the standard pattern select option, except that the
value you specify is a specific binary pattern instead of a standard
pattern number. The format used for the specified pattern select option
is as follows:
W(P<binary pattern>)

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 5-43

Write Control
The specified binary pattern can be up to 8 bits long, the maximum size
of the pattern memory. If you specify a pattern that is greater than
8 bits, only the last 8 bits are used. Pattern cells of2, 4, and 8 bits
are repeated as full subunits in the 8-bit pattern memory. However,
patterns of 3, 5, 6, and 7 bits are repeated only as far as possible within
the 8-bit limitation.
Figure 5-13 shows examples of patterns you can create using the
specified pattern select option. The figure shows how these patterns
are invoked in a vector 24 pixels long and how patterns of 3, 5, 6, and
7 bits do not repeat as complete subunits.
Figure 5-13:

Examples of Binary Patterns

PATTERN MEMORY READ
SPECIFIED
PATTERN

1ST
PASS

2ND
PASS

3RD
PASS

00000000
00000000

W(P01}
W(P101)

LOADED
8-BIT
VALUE
01010101
10110110

W(P1001}
W(P10111}

10011001
10111101

W(P101100}
W(P1110010)

10110010

W(P11100111)

11100111

11100101

NOTES
• P01 RESULTS IN THE SAME TYPE OF PATTERN AS P4, EXCEPT P01
RESULTS IN EXACTLY THE OPPOSITE PATTERN IN ON/OFF VALUES.
•ALL PATTERNS ARE SHOWN WITH A MULTIPLICATION VALUE OF 1
AND WITH THE NEGATIVE PATTERN CONTROL OFF.
•ALL PATTERNS ARE SHOWN FOR 3 READS OF PATTERN MEMORY
AND WITH THE 1st READ STARTING AT THE 1st BIT.
ML0·001393

5-44

ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Write Control
(P(M<n>))

Pattern multiplication lets you change the appearance of a pattern by
specifying the number of pixels to be affected by each bit in the 8-bit
pattern memory. The minimum value is 1. The default value is 2. For
portability to other ReGIS devices, you should use a maximum value of
8. However, the translator supports higher values.
The two basic forms of the pattern multiplication suboption are as
follows:
•

Standard pattern:
W(P4(M5))

•

Specified binary pattern:
W(PllOOOOll (M3))

Figure 5-14 shows how the pattern examples from Figures 5-12 and
5-13 are affected by multiplication values.

ReGIS-to-Pos1ScR1PT Translator 5-45

Write Control
Figure 5-14:

Pattern Multiplication

COMMAND

PATTERN

W(P1(M3))

f!!.~~~~~~~~~~~~~f:'OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

W(P2(M2))

,~·. . . . . . . . 0000000960000000000000000000000000000000

W(P3(M6))

000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000-oooooooooooC/
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

W(P4(M4))

faiimi90000 . . . . oooo . . . . oooo . . . . 00096000000000000000

W(P5(M2))

~oo . . oo . . 0960000000000000000000000000000000

W(P6(M3))

}limooooooooo . . 000000009600000000000000000000000

W(P7(M6))

~000000000000000000000000-000000000009'

W(P8(M5))

,~·. . . . . . . . . . 0000000000 . . . . . . 00000000000000960000000

W(P9(M4))

faiimi9oooooooooooooooo

000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00096000000000000000

000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

W(P01 (MS))

fooooo-00000-00000-00000~0000000

W(P101 (M2))

fol900 . . . . oo . . . . 0960000000000000000000000000000000

W(P1001 (M3))

}limoooooo~oooooom;booooooooooooooooooooooo

W(P10111(M6))

~000000

000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

000000~

000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

W(P1011 OO(M4))

t-0000

00000000 . . . . 00096000000000000000

000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

W(P111001 O(M3))

000000 . . ooom;booooooooooooooooooooooo
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

W(P11100111 (M2))

~oooo

;60000000000000000000000000000000

000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

NOTE
ALL PATTERNS ARE SHOWN FOR A SINGLE PASS
THROUGH PATTERN MEMORY STARTING AT BIT 1,
AT THE SPECIFIED MULTIPLICATION VALUE AND
WITH THE NEGATIVE PATTERN CONTROL OFF.
ML0·001394

5-46 ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

Write Control
(N<O or 1>)
Negative pattern control lets you reverse the effect of pattern memory.
The default value for negative pattern control is off. The format for the
negative pattern control option is as follows:
W(N<O or 1>)

During normal writing conditions in replace mode, ones in the pattern
memory define the pixels as having the foreground shade; zeros define
the pixels as having the background shade. With negative pattern
control on, the reverse is true: ones select background; zeros select
foreground. You can use negative pattern control with all writing
modes.
NOTE

Negative pattern control functions differently with erase
mode writing. See the description of (E) in this section.
Figure 5-15 shows how the negative pattern control on and off conditions affect various patterns. The patterns shown are the same
standard patterns from Figure 5-12 and the specified binary patterns
from Figure 5-13.

ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

5-47

Write Control
Figure 5-15:

Negative Pattern Control

COMMAND

1ST PASS

2ND PASS

3RD PASS
0

W(PO,NO)
W PO,N1
W(P1,NO)
W P1 N1
W(P2,NO)
W P2 N1
W(P3,NO)
W P3 N1
W(P4,NO)
W P4 N1
W(P5,NO)
WPS N1
W(P6,NO)
WPS N1
W(P7,NO)
W P7 N1
W(PS,NO)
WPS N1
W(P9,NO)
W P9 N1
W(P01,NO)
W P01 N1
W(P101,NO)
W P101 N1
W(P1001,NO)
W P1001 N1
o
W(P10111,NO)
W P10111 N1
o
W(P101100,NO)
W P101100 N1
o
W(P1110010,NO) ooi--W P1110010 N1
o
W(P11100111,NO) ooi--W P11100111 N1 o

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0

NOTE
EACH PATTERN IS SHOWN FOR 3 PASSES
THROUGH THE PATTERN MEMORY AND
WITH A MULTIPLICATION VALUE OF 2.
ML0·001395

5-48

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

Write Control
(S<O or 1>)
(S"<char> '7
The shading control option lets you shade the inside of a graphic object
as it is drawn. During shading commands, Vector and Curve commands
operate as usual. However, as each point in a vector or curve is drawn,
shading occurs from that point to a shading reference line. The shading
includes the point being drawn, as well as the point on the reference
line.

The default value for the shading reference line is the horizontal line
defined by the Y coordinate value of the current position when shading
is turned on. You can select a different reference line with a position
argument to the shading control option.
Figure 5-16 shows how shading occurs. This figure shows phases of a
circle being drawn while shading is enabled and demonstrates the use
of the reference line in shading.
You can shade an object by using either patterns or text characters
with the shading control option. You define both types of shading by
foreground intensity, background intensity, negative writing, and any
overlay, erase, or replace writing in effect. In addition, you define
pattern shading by the pattern you use and the multiplication factor
for the pattern. Similarly, you define character shading by any text
options that affect the selected character.
There are three types of shading controls:
•
•
•

Shading on/off controls
Shading reference line select
Shading character select

The following sections cover the shading controls and the use of multiple shading reference lines.
NOTE

Polygon Fill eliminates the need for multiple reference lines.
Use multiple reference lines only if you plan to port your
application to a device that does not support Polygon Fill.

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 5-49

Write Control
Figure 5-16:

Shading Examples

SHADING REFERENCE LINE

DIRECTION OF SHADING
TO OCCUR AS CIRCLE IS
DRAWN

APPROX. 90 DEGREES
OF CIRCLE DRAWN

APPROX. 130 DEGREES
OF CIRCLE DRAWN

SHADING REFERENCE LINE

APPROX. 220 DEGREES
OF CIRCLE DRAWN

APPROX. 340 DEGREES
OF CIRCLE DRAWN

COMPLETED CIRCLE

NOTE
THE SHADING LINE WOULD NOT
BE VISIBLE ON THE SCREEN OR PAGE.
ML0·001396

Shading On/Off Controls

When shading is enabled, the Write Control command uses the pattern
and foreground intensity. If the pattern selected is a solid line (Pl),
the graphic image area is completely shaded at the currently selected
intensity (IO through 13). No outline appears for the shaded graphic
image, other than the difference in contrast between the background
and foreground intensity.

5-50 ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

Write Control
The format for the shading on/off control option is as follows:
W(S <0 or 1>)

Figure 5-17 shows three circles shaded with different foreground
intensities. This figure shows that the outline for each circle is formed
by the contrast between the background and foreground values. If
you want an outline, you can simply repeat the circle command with
shading off.
Figure 5-18 shows the circles drawn in Figure 5-17 with shading off
and with a different foreground intensity from that used in shading.
Figure 5-17:

100

Circle Shading Examples: Without Outlines

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
COMMANDS
P[150,200]
W(S1)
C[+100)
P[400]
W(S1)
C(W(L1))
[+100)
P[650)
W(S1)
C(W(L2))
[+100)
W(SO)
ML0-001397

ReGIS-to-PosTScRIPT Translator 5-51

Write Control
Figure 5-18:

100

Circle Shading Examples: With Outlines

200

300

400

0
100

200

300

400
479

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS
P[150,200]
W(S1)
C[+100]
W(SO)
C(W(L1))
[+100]
P[400]
W(S1)
C(W(L1))
[+100]
W(SO)
C[+100]
P[650]
W(S1)
C(W(L2))
[+100]
W(SO)
C[+100]
ML0-001398

Figures in this section on shading on/off controls use the default value
for the shading reference line: the Y coordinate value of the current
position when shading is turned on. When you use the default shading
line, remember to redefine shading each time the current position
is moved for a new shading task. Otherwise, shading occurs to the
previously defined reference line.
Remember that shading includes the shading reference line, regardless
of whether the line is the default line or a line selected by the shading
reference line option.
Figure 5-19 shows a graph in which the reference line is the same
as the graph baseline. By repositioning the current position up one
pixel row before enabling shading, you can keep the baseline intact,
as shown in Figure 5-20. However, another more device-independent
technique is available. Shade to and include the graph baseline, then
redraw the graph baseline.

5-52 ReGIS-to-POSTScR1PT Translator

Write Control
Figure 5-19:

100

Shading Through the Graph Baseline

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS
P[100, 100)
V[,+300)
[+400)
P[-300)
W(S1)
V(W(L50))
[,-200)
[+100)
[,+200)
W(SO)
V[,-200)
r-·1001
[,+200]
ML0-001399

Figure 5-20:

100

Shading to the Graph Baseline

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS
P[100, 100)
V[,+300)
[+400]
P(-300,-1]
W(S1)
V(W(L50))
(,-200)
[+100]
[,+200]
W(SO)
V[,-200)
(-100]
[,+200]
ML0-001400

You can change the effect of shading by selecting a writing pattern
other than a solid (Pl). Figure 5-21 shows an example. In this figure,
the circle is shaded while using a dash line pattern (P2). As shown,
this pattern defines the circle with horizontal bars.

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-53

Write Control
NOTE
If you want to change the currently selected pattern for

shading, you must specify the new pattern before you turn
on shading.
Figure 5-21: Circle Shading Example

1 00

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
COMMANDS

P[400,200]
C(W(P2),(S1))
[+60]

ML0-001401

Shading Reference Line Select

The default value for the shading reference line is a horizontal line
defined by the Y coordinate of the current position when shading is
turned on. For most shading tasks, the default shading value shades
the graphic object correctly. (See Figures 5-17 and 5-18.) For some
graphic objects, however, the default value produces incorrect shading.
An example is a circle with a center at a specified position.
Figure 5-22 shows the shading that results if the default value is used.
In this figure, the circle is first invoked for shading at a foreground
intensity of dim gray (11); then the circle is invoked again (with shading
off, and with the foreground intensity at IO), to define the shading area.
As shown, the default shading line produces shading outside the
intended area.

5-54

ReGIS-to-POSTScRIPT Translator

Write Control
Figure 5-22:

Incorrect Shading Example

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS

100

P[250,200]
W(S1)
C(W(L50))
(C)[325, 125]
W(SO)
C(C)[325, 125]

200

300

400
479 \..
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
ML0·001402

The shading reference line argument lets you define· a reference line
value other than the default value selected by the shading on/off control
option. The position coordinate used can be absolute or relative.
The format for selecting a specific horizontal (Y position) shading
reference line is as follows:
W(S[<position>])

<position> provides the position value of the horizontal (Y axis) shading
reference line. You can use either [X,Y], with the X value being ignored,
or [,Y].
Figure 5-23 shows how to avoid the incorrect shading shown in Figure
5-22 by using the shading reference line select argument.

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-55

Write Control
Figure 5-23:

100

Correct Shading Example

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS

100

P[250,200)
W(S1[,125])
C(W(L50))
(C)[325, 125)
W(SO)
C(C)[325, 125)

200

300

400
479

ML0-001403

Figure 5-24 shows examples of shaded images drawn with the horizontal CY coordinate) shading reference line.
Figure 5-24:

100

Horizontal Shading Reference Line Examples

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
COMMANDS

100

200

300

400

479

~--------------------------------""

5-56 ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator

P[125, 125)
W(S1 [,+25))
C(A90)[,-100)
P[+175,+75]
W(S1 [,300))
V[+100]
P[500)
W(S 1[,-1 00))
C(A-45C)[,+100)
P[,300)
W(S 1[,+100])
V[700,400)
W(SO)
ML0-001404

Write Control
You can also use a vertical (X coordinate) shading reference line. If you
use the vertical shading reference line, you have two options:
•
•

You can use the default shading value, which is defined by the X
coordinate of the current position when shading is turned on.
You can specify the shading reference value with the vertical
reference line select option.

Just as with the horizontal shading reference option, you may need to
specify the reference line value to ensure proper shading.
The syntax for both of these options is shown here:
W(S(X))

or
W(S(X)<position>)

(X) defines the shading control option as selecting a vertical (X axis)
shading reference line.

<position> provides the position value of the vertical (X axis) shading
reference line. You can use either [X,Y], with the Y value being ignored,
or [X]. If no value is given, ReGIS uses the X value of the current
position.
Figure 5-25 shows examples of simple shaded images drawn with the
vertical (X coordinate) shading reference line.

ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 5-57

Write Control
Figure 5-25:

0
100

200

1 00

Vertical Shading Reference Line Examples

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

300

400

COMMANDS
P[150,100)
W (S(X)[ +50))
C(A45)[50, 150]
P[+150,+100]
W{S(X)[400])
V[-100,+100]
P[SS0,100]
W(S(X)[590])
C[+60]
P[,+200)
W(S(X)[ + 100))
V[,+100]
W(SO)

479 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ML0·001405

By comparing Figures 5-24 and 5-25, you can see how selecting either
a horizontal or vertical shading reference line produces different effects.
For example, Figure 5-26 shows a circle shaded With a dashed pattern
(P2) while using a vertical reference line value. The circle that results
is identical to the circle in Figure 5-21, where the default horizontal
value for the shading line was used. Thus, regardless of the reference line orientation, you can maintain the pattern orientation while
shading complex objects.

5-58 ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator

Write Control
Figure 5-26: Vertical Shading Reference Line Example

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
COMMANDS
P[400,200]
C(W(P2,S(X)[400]))
[+60)

ML0-001406

Shading Character Select

This argument lets you shade objects by using text characters instead
of patterns.
The format for the shading character select argument is as follows. You
must use single or double quotes to enclose the character selected for
shading.
W(S"<character>")

When you use character shading, Text command options define the
character set the shading character comes from and the unit cell size
of the character. If you do not define these parameters, the standard
character set is used. The character size is the last size specified during
a Text command or the default value of Sl, if no other size is specified.
Shading with a character can provide half-tone effects. This feature is
useful when designing graphic images for a device that has only two intensity values, such as a dot-matrix printer. In such applications, gray
scale effects are achieved by shading with different density characters.
You can use load character cell controls to define a set of characters
that have different numbers of pixels dark; then you can use those
characters for shading.
When you shade with a character, only the top 8 x 8 matrix of an 8
x 10 cell's storage is used. Remember this when selecting shading
characters or when creating characters with load cell commands.
R~GIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

5-59

Write Control
The shading character is oriented in the same way for either horizontal
or vertical shading reference lines. The shading pattern remains
consistent when shading complex objects.
Figure 5-27 shows a circle shaded with Xs. In this example, only the
size of the character has been specified. Therefore, the X from the
standard character set is used. You can use the shading character
select argument to shade any graphic image.
Figure 5-27:

100

Shading Character Select Argument Example

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
~

100
200

COMMANDS

P[400,200]
....cxxxxxxx.
xxxxxxxxxx
:xxxxxxxxxx:ll
:xxxxxxxxx:io
xxxxxxxxxx·

T(S1)
W(S'X')

C[+60]
W(SO)

"XXXXXXY

300
400
479 \..
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
ML0-001407

When used alone, the shading character select argument uses the Y
component of the current position to define a horizontal reference line
for the character shading. You can also specify a horizontal or vertical
shading reference line or a point when shading with a character.
The formats for combining a shading character with specified shading
reference lines are as follows:
W(S"<character>"(X) [<position>])
W(S"<character>"[<position>])

<character> identifies the character to be used for shading.
(X) defines the shading control option as selecting a vertical (X axis)

shading reference line.

5-60 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Write Control
<position> defines either the X axis or Y axis value of the line to be
used for shading reference. The Y axis is the default; the X axis must
be explicitly selected.
Multiple Shading Reference line Use

You can use the ReGIS Polygon Fill command to shade complex areas
that are difficult to shade with reference lines. (See the description of
Polygon Fill.) Using Polygon Fill is easier and more efficient than other
methods. However, if your application was written for either a VT125,
a VT240 earlier than Version 2.1, or a version of Pro/Communications
earlier than Version 3.0, it does not use Polygon Fill. In those cases,
refer to the following information.
One shading reference line is not enough for graphic images that have
unshaded areas between the point on the graphic image being drawn
and the reference line. You can use the following method to shade such
graphic images:
•
•
•

Build the shaded graphic image in two or more sections. Use
different shading reference lines for each section, including both
horizontal and vertical shading reference lines.
Reshade areas of the graphic image with a shade equal to the
background intensity.
Define the graphic image by using both procedures above. Use two
or more sections with reshading.

Figure 5-28 shows an attempt to shade a star with only one shade
value and one reference line. First, the star is defined as shading at
dim gray (11). Then the star is drawn with shading off, to outline the
area selected for shading. Figure 5-29 takes the same example and
breaks it down into stages, adding commands that define a second
reference line and a second shade value. This figure shows a process
for building a correct star graphic image.

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 5-61

Write Control
NOTE

The commands used to build the star shown in Figure 5-28
and Figure 5-29 are not the only ones you can use. They
are used in these figures to show how you can combine more
than one reference line with more than one shading value to
produce. a correctly shaded image.
Figure 5-28:

Incorrect Shading of Complex Graphic Object

COMMANDS

P[500,200]
0

100

200

100
200
300

300

400

500

600

700

799

W(S1)

V(W(L(L33)))
[-100)
[-50,-100)
[-50,+100)
[-100]
[+100,+50]
[-50,+125]
[+100,-75]
[+100,+75]
[-50,+125]
[+100,-50)
W(SO)

400
479

V[-100)
[-50,-100)
[-50,+100)
[-100]
[+100,+50]
[-50,+:125]
[+100,-75]
[+100,+75]
[-50,-125]
[+100,-50)
ML0-001408

5-62 ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator

Write Control
Figure 5-29:

Complex Graphic Shading Example

P[500,200]

[-100]

[-100,-50]

[+100]

[+50,-100]

[+50,+100]

P[450,375]

[-100]

[-50,+125]

W(S1)

V[-100,+50]

W(S1)

V[-50,-125]

(W(LO))

[+100,+75]

[+100,-75]

W(SO)
ML0-001409

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-63

Write Control
5.5.3 Write Control Command Summary
Table 5-7 summarizes the Write Control command options, including
any default values.
Table 5-7:
Argument

Write Control Command Summary
Default Description

(M<n>)

(Ml)

PV multiplication option. Defines multiplication
factor (<n>) for PV values specified by a later PV
positioning argument. Can serve as temporary
write control for other types of commands.

(I(<RGB>))

(I(W))

One of three foreground intensity select options.

(l(HLS))

(I(LlOO))

(l<0-15>)
(E,R, or V)

None

One of three foreground intensity select options.
One of three foreground intensity select options.

(V)

Three argument letters available to define type
of writing to occur. (E) for erase writing; (R) for
replace writing; (V). for overlay writing.

(L<n>)

(Ll)

Line width option. Sets the line width as a
multiple of the default width, which is 11800 of
the horizontal dimension of the image area.

(P<0-9>)

(Pl)

(Pbinary)

None

Select standard pattern option. Selects 1 of 10
stored writing patterns.
Specify binary pattern option. Lets you specify
unique writing pattern for write tasks. The
specified pattern can be up to 16 bits long.

(P(M<l-16>))

(M2)

5-64 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Pattern multiplication option. Used to define the
number of times each bit of the pattern memory
is processed. You can use this option with the
select standard pattern option or the specify
binary pattern option, or by itself to define
a multiplication factor for the last specified
pattern.

Write Control
Table 5-7 (Cont.): Write Control Command Summary
Argument
Default Description
(N<O or 1>)

(NO)

(S<O or 1>)

(SO)

(S[,Y])

None

(S(X)[X])

None

(S'<character>')

None

Negative pattern control option. (Nl) reverses
currently selected write pattern for all writing
modes except erase writing. NO turns off negative pattern control. In the case of negative
writing, this o.ption affects only whether picture
erases to foreground or background color. Nl
erases to foreground color; NO to background
color.
Shading on/off control. (Sl) enables shading
at currently selected pattern. The shading
reference line is defined by the Y axis value of
the active position when (Sl) is selected. SO
turns off shading.
Horizontal shading reference line select option.
Selects a horizontal shading reference line
defined by [,Y], which can be either an absolute
or relative value.
Vertical shading reference line select option.
Selects a vertical shading reference line defined
by [X], which can be either an absolute or
relative value.
Shading character select option. Lets you fill
graphic objects by using the character specified.

ReGIS-to-POSTScR1PT Translator 5-65

Vector

Vector
The Vector command (V) lets you draw lines between the current
position and a specified new position. The form the lines take is
determined by write controls in effect when the Vector command is
issued.
The four basic arguments for the Vector command are as follows:
•
•
•
•

Format

Draw dot arguments
Draw line arguments
Sequence of coordinates options
Temporary writing controls

V option
Command Arguments

Description

Null position argument
Position argument to draw a dot or line
PV value that defines endpoint for a line
Begin bounded sequence option
Begin unbounded sequence option
End of sequence option
Temporary write control option

[X,Y]
<PV>
(B)

(S)
(E)

(W)

Command Arguments
[]

The draw dot argument uses a null position argument to write to a
single pixel. The format of the· draw dot option is as follows:
V[ ]

5-66 ReGIS-to-PoSTScRIPT Translator

Vector
[X,Y]
The draw line arguments for the Vector command are identical in form
to the move arguments for the position command. However, instead
of moving the current position, draw line arguments draw a line from
the current position to a new current position that you specify. You can
specify the new current position in four ways:

•
•

Absolute - Specifies the actual [X,Y] address of the line's endpoint.
Relative positioning - Specifies the line's endpoint relative to the
current location.
Absolute/relative positioning - Specifies the line's endpoint by
using a relative value for one coordinate and an absolute value for
the other.
PV positioning- Uses the PV system to specify the line's endpoint
relative to the current position. You can use PV positioning with a
temporary write control for PV multiplication.

•
•

The formats for the absolute argument form are as follows:
V[X,Y]
V[X]
V[,Y]

The formats for relative argument forms are as follows:
•

Positive X and Y displacement:
V[+X,+Y]

•

Positive X and negative Y displacement:
V[+X,-Y]

•

Negative X and positive Y displacement:
V[-X,+Y]

•

Negative X and Y displacement:
V[-X,-Y]

•

Positive X displacement only:
V[+X]

ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 5-67

Vector
•

Negative X displacement only:
V[-X]

•

Positive Y displacement only:
v [I +Y]

•

Negative Y displacement only:
V[,-Y]

The format for absolute/relative positioning combines parts of the forms
shown for absolute positioning and relative positioning.
The draw line argument draws a straight line from the old current
position to the new current position. Lines are drawn using the pattern
mask in effect, with the pattern repeated cyclically. When using
patterns other than PO (all zeros) or Pl (all ones), you may want
to repeat the V keyletter to reset writing to the first position of the
pattern. Otherwise, the pattern continues where it finished. This could
result, for example, in a blank at a point where two vectors intersect.
Figure 5-30 shows a bar graph drawn using absolute, relative, and
absolute/relative arguments to the Vector command.

5-68

ReGIS-to-POSTScR1PT Translator

Vector
Figure 5-30:

Bar Graph Using Vector Draw Line Arguments

COMMANDS
(1) P[100, 100]
(2) V[,400]
(3) [500]
(4) P[-400,200]
(5) V[200]
(6) [,400]
(7) [,-100]
(8) [+100]
(9) [,+100]
(10)[,-150]
(11)[+100]
(12)[,+150]
(13) [,-20]
(14) [+100]
(15) [,+20]
NOTE
THE STARTING POSITION [0,0] FOR THE CURSOR
IS ARBITRARY. THE CIRCLED NUMBERS AND
CURSORS ARE SHOWN ONLY TO ILLUSTRATE
THE POSITION OF THE CURSOR ATTHE END
OF EACH COMMAND GIVEN.
ML0-001410

<PV>
The PV value defines an endpoint for a line to be drawn, relative to the
current position. The line is drawn in the direction defined by the PV
value. You can use PV positioning with a temporary write control for
PV multiplication.

The format for PV offset and PV multiplication temporary write options
are as follows:
V(W(M<multiplication value>)) <pv value>

Figure 5-31 shows an image of the PV directions built using PV
positioning with a temporary write control for PV multiplication.

ReGIS-to-PostSCRIPT Translator 5-69

Vector
Figure 5-31:

100

PV Directions Graphic Image

200

300

400

500

600

700

or
100

799
~

200

COMMANDS
P[400,200]
V(W(M100))
622637731551044

300
400
479 \..

NOTE
THE CURSOR IS SHOWN AT AN ARBITRARY
STARTING POSITION (100,100] AND AT ITS
POS'ITION AT THE END OF THE COMMAND.
ML0-001411

(8)
This is the bounded sequence option.
A sequence option lets you group sets of vectors into blocks that can
be processed as units. A sequence option consists of a start (or begin)
command and an end command. You can embed Position and Curve
commands in the sequences.
The format for a Vector command bounded sequence is as follows:
V(B)<embedded options>V(E)

The bounded sequence is useful to connect the last vector of a sequence
to the starting position of the sequence, thus generating a closed figure.
A bounded sequence consists of a minimum of one begin (B) option
and one end (E) option. Each (B) option stores the coordinate value
of the active position in effect when the option is invoked. A sequence
can consist of up to 16 (B) options. Each (B) option must have a
corresponding (E) option.

5-70 ReGIS-to-PoSTScRIPT Translator

Vector
Figure 5-32 shows an image drawn using multiple (B) options, with
(C) commands embedded in the sequence. Figure 5-33 shows images
drawn using Vector command bounded sequences.
Figure 5-32:

100

Vector Command Bounded Sequence Example

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS

100

P[200,100]
V(B}
[200,200]
(B}
[400,300)
[300,400)
(E}
C[+20]
V[100,50]
(E)
C[+20)

200

300
400
479

NOTE
THE CURSOR IS SHOWN AT AN ARBITRARY STARTING
POSITION OF [300,100) AND AT THE STARTING AND
ENDING POSITIONS FOR SEQUENCE [200, 100).
ML0·001412

ReGIS-to-POSTScR1PT Translator 5-71

Vector
Figure 5-33:

Bounded Sequence Examples
100

200

300

400

500

600

700

o r17

100
200

799

300

w
+

/©\

400

. .,J

479 \..

COMMANDS
A
P[100, 100]
V(B)
[+100]
[,+100)
[-100)
(E}

P[350, 100] P[650, 150]
V(B)
V(B)
[700,200)
[+100]
[,+100)
[,-100)
(E)
[-100)
[,+100]
(E)

P[400,340]
V(B)
[450,400)
[-100)
(E)

V(B)
[350,250)
[+100)
(E)

NOTE
THE CURSOR IS SHOWN AT AN ARBITRARY STARTING POSITION
OF [0,0), AND AT STARTING AND ENDING POINTS OF EACH
SEQUENCE; CIRCLED LETTERS IN FIGURE AND COMMAND
DESCRIPTIONS ARE FOR EASE OF DESCRIPTION ONLY.
ML0·001413

5-72 ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

Vector
(S)

This is the u.Iibounded sequence option.
A sequence option lets you group sets of vectors into blocks that can
be processed as units. A sequence option consists of a start (or begin)
command and an end command. You can embed Position and Curve
commands in the sequences.
The format for a Vector command unbounded sequence is as follows:
V(S)<embedded options>V(E)

The difference between a bounded and unbounded sequence is the role
of the start option. In bounded sequences, the (B) option tells ReGIS
to store the current position and to return to that position after a
corresponding end (E) option. In unbounded sequences, the (S) option
tells ReGIS to store a dummy, or nonexistent location. In this case, a
corresponding (E) does not change the current position.
NOTE

Coordinate values are saved during Vector command unbounded sequences and during Position command sequence
options. The limit for all unended, saved values (including
all save commands) is 16.
The unbounded sequence serves little purpose for images drawn
with Vector command. This sequence provides symmetry with the
unbounded sequence of the Curve command.
Figure 5-34 shows the image produced if the same set of commands
used in the bounded sequence in Figure 5-32 were placed in an unbounded sequence.

ReGIS-to-PoSTScRIPT Translator 5-73

Vector
Figure 5-34: Vector Command Unbounded Sequence Example

1 00

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS

100

P[200,100)
V(S)
[200,200)
(8)
[400,300)
[300,400)
(E)
C[+20]
V[100,50)
(E)
C[+20)

200

300

400
479

NOTE
THE CURSOR IS SHOWN AT AN ARBITRARY STARTING
POSITION OF [300, 100), AND AT THE STARTING AND
ENDING POSITIONS FOR SEQUENCE [100,50).
ML0-001414

(E)
The end of sequence option ends a bounded or unbounded sequence.
It references the last stored (B) or (8) option value. If the value was
stored by a (B) option, a line is drawn from. the active position where
(E) is sensed, to the location stored by (B). If the value was stored by
an (8) option, no line is drawn, and the active position remains at the
current position.

5-74 ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

Vector
(W)

All Vector command options are done with the write control values
currently in effect. The temporary write control option lets you use
different values in a specific Vector command without changing the
write control values. The format for the temporary write control option
is as follows:
V(W(<suboptions>))<options>

You can use a temporary write control to affect any of the following:
•
•
•
•

PV multiplication
Pattern control
Foreground intensity
Type of writing (overlay, erase, replace)

The temporary write control values remain in effect only until one of
the following conditions occurs:
•
•
•

A new temporary write control option is used.
A nonvector command is performed, such as a. Curve command.
A new Vector command is defined with the Vector command keyletter.

When any one of these conditions occurs, writing returns to the current
write control values. Figure 5-35 shows images drawn with temporary
write control values affecting only the pattern used.

ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 5-75

Vector
Figure 5-35:

Temporary Write Control Option Example

100

200

100

+---,I

200

'----'

300

400

500

700

799

,.-----,

I
J

600

300
400
.J

479 \.

COMMANDS
A

P[100,100)
P[]
V(W(P2(M2)))
[+100)
[,+100)
[-100)
[,·100)

P[300, 100]
P[]
V(W(P4(M2)))
[+100)
V[,+100)
[300, 100]

P[S00, 150)
P[]
V(W(P2(M2)))
[,·75]
[+200)
[,+75]
V[-200)

NOTE
THE CURSOR IS SHOWN AT AN ARBITRARY
STARTING POSITION OF [0,0) AND AT THE STARTING
AND ENDING POINTS FOR EACH GRAPHIC.
ML0·001415

5-76 ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator

Vector
5.5.4 Vector Command Summary
Table 5-8 summarizes the Vector command arguments. There are no
default values for these arguments.
Table 5-8: Vector Command Summary
Argument
Description
[]

[X,Y]

Draw dot argument. Used to write to a single pixel defined
by the current active position. Does not move the cursor.
Draw line argument. [X,Y] value defines the endpoint of a
line to be drawn from the current active position. The [X,Y]
value can be absolute, relative, or absolute/relative.

Draw line argument. PV value defines an endpoint for a
line to be drawn, relative to the current active position, in
the direction defined by the PV value;
(B)
Begin a bounded sequence option. Stores the current active
position for reference at the end of the sequence.
(S)
Begin an unbounded sequence option. Stores a dummy
position for reference at the end of the sequence.
(E)
End of sequence option. References last stored (B) or (S)
option value.
(W(<suboptions>)) Temporary write control option. Lets you select temporary
write control values without changing the current write
control values. Temporary write control values remain in
effect only for the command controlling them.
<pV>

ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator 5-77

Curve

Curve
The Curve command (C) draws circles, arcs, and other curved images.
The form of the lines is determined by the write control values in effect
when the Curve command is invoked.
There are three basic types of curve commands:
•
•
•

Circles
Arcs
Curve interpolation sequence

You can use the temporary write control option with all three types.

Format

C option
Command Arguments
C<position>
C(C)<position>
C(A<angle>)[X,Y]
C(A<angle>C)[X, Y]
C(B)
C(S)
C(E)
C(W( ...))

Description
Circle with center at the current position
Circle with center at specified position
Arc with center at the current position
Arc with center at specified position
Closed curve· sequence
Open curve sequence
End of an open or closed curve sequence
Temporary write control option

Command Arguments
C<position>
This command defines a point through which the circumference of a
circle will be drawn. The current position at the end of the command
is the same as it was at the start. This command can use the same absolute, absolute/relative, relative, and PV positioning value arguments
used with the Position and Vector commands.

The format for the circle with center at the current position is as
follows:
C<position>

S-78 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Curve
The position value used with this command depends on whether the
circumference passes through a specific point or the circumference
has a specific radius. With a specific radius, you can specify either
a PV value or a single relative position value. To pass through a
specific point, you can use absolute positioning, relative positioning, or
absolute/relative positioning.
Figure 5-36 shows circles drawn using the various position arguments
available for drawing a circle with a center at the current position.
Figure 5-36:

100

Circle with Center at Current Position Example

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
COMMANDS

P[200,200]
C[110, 11 O]
P[+450, 100]
C[+95]
P[,+250]
C[-75,+50]
P[425,250]
C[480,-80]

NOTE
ONLY CIRCLES WOULD BE SHOWN; DOTS,
POSITION VALUES, AND CURSORS ARE
FOR REFERENCE.
ML0-001416

ReGIS-to-Pos1ScR1PT Translator 5-79

Curve
(C)<position>

This option defines the center of a circle, using the current position as
the point through which the circumference of the circle will be drawn.
The current position at the end of the command is the same as it was
at the start. This option can use the same absolute, absolute/relative,
relative, and PV positioning value arguments used with the Position
and Vector commands.
The format for the circle with center at a specified position is as follows:
C(C)<position>

Although this option uses the same position values used with the
circle with a center at the current position command, the results
are different. In both cases, the diameter of the circle drawn differs,
depending on the position specified. But with the current position
command,_ the circle is always drawn an equal distance around the
current position. With the specified position command, the placement
of the circle relative to the current position depends on the specified
position.
Figure 5-37 shows an example. In this figure, two circles with centers
at specified positions are drawn, each with the same current position.
As shown, the circles are drawn in a direction relative to the direction
of the specified position from the current position.

5-80 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1Pr Translator

Curve
Figure 5-37: Varying Circle Direction

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
COMMANDS

100

P[400,240]
C(C)[+150]
C(C)(-150]

200
300
400
479
NOTE
ONLY CIRCLES WOULD BE SHOWN; DOTS,
POSITION VALUES, AND CURSORS ARE
FOR REFERENCE.
ML0-001417

Figure 5-38 shows examples of circles drawn with the various position values available for drawing a circle with a center at a specified
position.

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 5-81

Curve
Figure 5-38:

100

Circle with Center at Specified Position Example

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
COMMANDS

P[60,60]
C(C)[+90,+40]
P[200,350]
C(C)[+100]
P[400,200]
C(C)[S00,-70)
P[+160,+200]
C(C)[+100,-70]

NOTE
ONLY CIRCLES WOULD BE SHOWN; DOTS,
POSITION VALUES, AND CURSORS ARE
FOR REFERENCE.
ML0·001418

(A<angle>)<position>
Arcs are sections of a circle. You can draw arcs in either of two ways:

•
•

Arc with center at the current position
Arc with center at a specified position

Both options can use the relative, absolute/relative, absolute, and PV
positioning value arguments used with Position, Vector, and Circle
commands.
Arc drawing is at 1-degree resolution. If you specify a degree value
greater than 360 in an arc option, ReGIS draws 360 degrees.
This command defines an arc drawn from a specified point. The current
position is considered as the center of a circle of which the arc is a part.
The current position at the end of this command is the same as the
current position at the start of the option.

5-82 ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

Curve
The form.at for the arc with center at the current position command is
as follows:
C(A<degrees>)<position>

<degrees> provides the number of degrees to be drawn for the arc and
the direction the arc is to be drawn. With no sign or a positive sign (+),
the arc is drawn counterclockwise from the specified position. With a
negative sign (-), the arc is drawn clockwise.
<position> provides the value of the position at which arc drawing is to
start. Value is either absolute, relative, absolute/relative, or a PV value
(as defined by the current PV multiplication factor).
Figure 5-39 shows two arcs drawn with the same basic arc with the
center at the current position. One option uses a positive (+) degree
value, and the other uses a negative (-) value. Figure 5-40 shows
arcs drawn with this same command, using different forms of position
values.

ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator 5-83

Curve
Figure 5-39:

100

Effect of Signed Degree Values on Arc

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS

100

P[200,200)
C(A180)[+150]
P[+400]
C(A-160[ + 150)

200
[200,200)
300

400
479

NOTE
ONLY ARCS WOULD BE SHOWN;
LOCATION VALUES AND CURSORS
ARE FOR REFERENCE.
ML0·001419

5-84

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

Curve
Figure 5-40:

1 00

Effect of Position Values on Arc

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

100

COMMANDS

(50,100]

...

P[150, 150]
C(A-60)[50, 100]
P[+50,+50]
C(A-270) [, + 150]
P[600,+100]
C(A 180)[700,+ 100]

200

\:00]

300

[600,300]
400

[,+150]
[700,+100]

479 """'---------------------------------NOTE
ONLY ARCS WOULD BE SHOWN;
LOCATION VALUES AND CURSORS
ARE FOR REFERENCE.
ML0-001420

(A<degrees>C)<position>
This option defines an arc drawn from the current position. The
specified position is the center of a circle of which the arc is a part.
The current position changes as the arc is drawn. At the end of the
command, the current position is the same as the end of the arc drawn.
This is particularly useful for linking the endpoint of one arc with the
starting point of another.

NOTE

Due to limitations in the accuracy of the curve algorithm
for arcs on some devices, the end position of an arc and the
current position may not be where you would expect. When
you chain arcs together, use absolute positioning between
them.
The format for the arc with center at specified position command is as
follows:
C(A<deqrees>C)<position>

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-85

Curve
<degrees> provides the amount of degrees to be drawn for the arc and
the direction the arc is to be drawn. With no sign or a positive sign (+),
the arc is drawn counterclockwise from the specified position. With a
negative sign (-), the arc is drawn clockwise.
<position> provides the value of the position at which arc drawing is to
start. Value is either absolute, relative, absolute/relative, or a PV value
(as defined by the current PV multiplication factor).
Figure 5-41 shows a positive or negative sign affects the way an arc
is drawn. Figure 5-42 shows the chaining of arcs, using the arc with
center at specified position option.
Figure 5-41:

100

Effect of Signed Degree Values on Arc

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

or
100
200

COMMANDS

(.::\
+
•
+

[50,200]

[450,200]

[350,200)

300

[750,200)

[-1~0]

P[350,200]
C(A180C)[-150]
P[+700]
C(A-180C) [-150]

400

479

~----------------------------------NOTE
ONLY ARCS WOULD BE SHOWN;
LOCATION VALUES AND CURSORS
ARE FOR REFERENCE.
ML0·001421

5-86 ReGIS-to-PosrSCRIPT Translator

Curve
Figure 5-42:

100

Effect of Specified Positions on Arc

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

0
100

COMMANDS

+/t

P[SO, 100]
C(A-60C)[150, 150]
(A135C)[+160, 150]
(A-90C)[+250,+150]

[50, 100]
200
300

•

400

[+250,+150]
479

~----------------NOTE
ONLY ARCS WOULD BE SHOWN;
LOCATION VALUES AND CURSORS
ARE FOR REFERENCE.
ML0-001422

Curve Interpolation

Curve interpolation uses bounded and unbounded sequences to define a
set of positions used for interpolation.
A curve drawn during a sequence option is not the result of the function
used to specify points for the curve. It is instead the result of a graphic
technique that produces a reasonable imitation of a function-type curve,
such as those used in graphs. The curve represents a generalized, nonlinear function intersecting all specified positions. The curve indicates
the presence of a nonlinear function, rather than the function itself.
You must use a minimum of four positions to insure that the ReGIS
curve generator is following the function being represented. The positions should include the current position at the start of the sequence
and at least three specified positions within the sequence, because the
curve generator uses four positions at a time to perform its interpolation. As each interpolation is performed, the curve generator moves
to the next position in the sequence. The curve generator then performs a new interpolation, using that position and the previous three.

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-87

Curve
This action continues until the curve generator uses all positions in a
sequence.
There are two types of interpolation sequence options:
•
•

Closed curve sequence option
Open curve sequence option

The closed curve sequence uses the same option syntax as the bounded
sequence options for the Position and Vector commands. The open
curve sequence uses the same unbounded sequence options as the
Position and Vector commands.
You can also use a null position argument with closed and open curve
sequences. This argument causes the position value immediately
preceding the null position to be used twice in the interpolation. The
effects of a null position depend on how it is used in the sequence. The
following sections provide greater detail concerning the effect of the
null position, including examples.

(8)
This option uses the bounded sequences (used with the Position and
Vector commands) to define the set of positions for interpolating a
closed curve. While the bounded sequences in Position and Vector commands can save up to 16 begin commands, a closed curve sequence uses
only one begin and end option. Also, bounded sequences in Position and
Vector commands can contain other commands. However, the Curve
command bounded sequence must follow one C command, with no intervening commands. Any keyletter, including another C, aborts the
curve.
The format for the closed curve sequence is as follows:
C(B)<positions>(E)

The positioning used in the sequence can be absolute, relative, absolute/relative, or PV values. When you use absolute values, the specified
[X], [,Y], or [X,Y] location is used for the interpolation. When you use
relative values (including PV values), the value used in the interpolation is defined as relative to the last current location before the relative
position value (whether that was the current position at the start of the
sequence, or one of the values specified j.n. the sequence). The current
position at the end of the closed curve sequence is the same as the
current position when the sequence started.

5-88 ReGIS-to-POSTScR•PT Translator

Curve
You can use the null position argument, [ ], with the closed curve
sequence to produce two results:
•

Close the curve with a straight line. A null position argument at
the start and end of the sequence causes the values of the first and
last positions to be used twice in the interpolation. Figure 5-43
shows a closed curve, using the null position argument at the start
and end of the sequence.

Figure 5-43:
0

1 00

Closed Curve Sequence with Null Position Argument
200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS

100
200
300
400
479 ,,,__________________________________

P[100, 100]
C(B)
[]
[75, 125]
[150,200]
[225,125]
[300,200]
[375, 125]
[450,200]
[525,125]
[]
(E)
ML0·001423

•

Create a sharper change in the interpolated curve form. A null
position argument during the sequence uses the value of the preceding position twice in the interpolation. Figure 5-44. shows the
same figure drawn both with and without null position arguments.
(The Y values of positions used in the bottom figure have been
increased uniformly by 200, so that you can see the two figures in
one grid. To clarify the process, numbers and circles identify in
order the positions used to interpolate the curve. The ReGIS code
listed does not generate the circles or numbers.) The sequence that
creates the top figure contains no null position arguments, which
accounts for the smoothness of the curves. The sequence that creates the bottom figure contains three null position arguments after
the fourth, eighth, and tenth position, which causes the curves to
become discontinuous.

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-89

Curve
Figure 5-44: Closed Figure with and without Null Position Argument

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

0
100
200
300
400
479

COMMANDS
TOP FIGURE

BOTTOM FIGURE

S(E)P[80,60]C(B)
(75, 125)
(150,200]
(225, 125]
(300,200)
(375, 125)
(450,200)
(525,125)
(350,60]
(180,20)
(E)

P[80,260]C(B)[]
[75,325)
(150,400]
(225,325)
[]
(300,400)
(375,325)
(450,400]
[525,325]
[]
(350,260]
(180,220]

[]
(E)
ML0-001424

5-90 ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

Curve
Figure 5-45 shows another example of a curve generated by a closed
curve sequence without the null argument.
Figure 5-45:

100

Closed Curve Sequence without Null Position
Argument

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS

100

P[230,240]

C(B)
[320,160)
[480,120)
[570, 160)
[480,240)
[320,280)

200
300

(E)

400
479

ML0-001425

(S)

This option uses the unbounded sequences (used with Position and
Vector commands) to define a set of positions for interpolation of an
open curve. However, the unbounded sequences available to Position
and Vector commands can save up to 16 start commands; an open curve
sequence uses only one start and end option.
The format for an open curve sequence is as follows:
C(S)<positions>(E)

You use the null position argument, [ ], with the open curve sequence
argument when you are drawing a curve from the current position
through to the last specified location. Without the null argument,
the curve interpolation still considers all the position values for the
actual interpolation. But the curve is drawn from the position specified
immediately following (S), through to the second to last position. The
null argument duplicates the first and last positions, extending the
drawing of the curve through those locations, if desired. The current
position at the end of an open curve .sequence is the last position
specified in the argument list.

ReGIS-to-PostScR1PT Translator 5-91

Curve
You can also use the null position argument to use any specified value
twice during interpolation. This method creates a sharper change in
the interpolated curve form. Figure 5-46 shows an example of an open
curve generated without using null position arguments.
Figure 5-47 shows the curve generated when the same command is
invoked while using null arguments.
Figure 5-46:

100

Open Curve Sequence without Null Position Arguments

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
~

100

COMMANDS
P[75,125]

C(S)
200
300

[150,200]
[225,125]
[300,200]
[375, 125]
[450,200]
[525,125]
(E)

400
479 " ' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

5-92 ReGIS-to-PosrScRtPT Translator

ML0-001426

Curve
Figure 5-47:

100

Open Curve Sequence with Null Position Arguments

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS

100

P[75, 125]

C(S)
[]
[150,200]
[225,125]
[300,200]
[375, 125]
[450,200]
[525, 125]
[]
(E)

200
300
400
479

ML0·001427

(W)

Curve commands use the write control values currently i:n effect. The
temporary write control option lets you use different values in a specific
Curve command without changing the current values.
You can use a temporary write control to affect any of the following:
•
•
•
•
•

PV multiplication
Pattern control
Foreground intensity
Type of writing (overlay, erase, replace)
Shading control

The format for this option is as follows:
C(W(<suboptions>))<options>

The temporary write control values remain in effect only until one of
the following conditions occurs:
•
•

A new temporary write control option is used (only values specified
change).
A new command keyletter is encountered (including another Curve
command).

ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator 5-93

Curve
When one of these conditions occurs, writing returns to the current
write control values. Figure 5-48 shows a graph using a temporary
write control option to change open curve sequences. In this example,
only the pattern used is affected.
Figure 5-48:

Temporary Write Control Option Example

COMMANDS
0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

100

P[100, 100]
V[,+300]
[+400]
P[100,-80]
C(W(P2))

(S)

200

[]
[+100,-30]
[+100,-50]
[+100,-30]
[+100,-20]

300

[]

400

P[100,300]
C(W(P4))

(E)

479

($)

~"""'----------------------------------

[]
[+100]
[+100,-40]
[+100,-20]
[+100,-40][]

(E)
ML0-001428

5-94 ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator

Curve
5.5.5

Curve Command Summary
Table 5-9 summarizes the Curve command arguments. There are no
default values for these arguments.
Table 5-9:
Argument

Curve Command Summary
Description

[X,Y]

(C)[X,Y]

(A<degrees>)
[X,Y]

(A<degrees>C)
[X,Y]

Circle with center at the current position. [X,Y] defines a
point on the circumference of the circle. The [X,Y] value
can be absolute, relative, or absolute/relative.
Circle with center at specified position. [X,Y] defines
the center of the circle, while the current active position
defines a point on the circumference. The [X,Y] value can
be absolute, relative, or absolute/relative.
Arc with center at the current position. [X,Y] defines the
starting point for drawing the arc, while the signed value
of the <degrees> determines which direction the arc is
drawn from that point: plus sign (+) for counterclockwise,
and minus sign(-) for clockwise. The [X,Y] value can be
absolute, relative, or absolute/relative.
Arc with center at specified position. [X,Y] defines the
center, while the current active position is the point
from which the arc is drawn. The signed value for <degrees> determines which direction the arc is drawn:
plus sign (+) for counterclockwise, and minus sign (-) for
clockwise. The [X,Y] value can be absolute, relative, or
absolute/relative.

(B)<positions>(E)

Closed curve sequence. Defines a closed curve graphic
image built from interpolation of [X,Y] positions specified
within the sequence. The [X,Y] values can be absolute,
relative, or absolute/relative.

(S)<positions>(E)

Open curve sequence. Defines an open curve graphic
image built from interpolation of [X,Y] positions specified
within the sequence. ·The [X,Y] values specified can be
absolute, relative, or absolute/relative.

ReGIS-to-PostSCRIPT Translator 5-95

Curve
Table 5-9 {Cont.): Curve Command Summary
Argument
Description
[]

{W(<suboptions>))

5-96 ReGIS-to-POSTScR1PT Translator

Null position argument. Used with either sequence
option to affect interpolation. The null argument stores
a position equal to the last specified active position as
part of the positions to interpolate.· When used at the
beginning of a sequence, the value stored is the current
active position.
Temporary write control option. Lets you select temporary
write control values without changing the current write
control values. Temporary write control values remain in
effect only for the command controlling them.

Polygon Fill

Polygon Fill
You use the Polygon Fill command (F) to draw filled, closed figures,
such as circles, ellipses, triangles, and squares. There are four basic
options to the Polygon Fill command:
•
•
•
•

Format

Vector option
Curve and arc option
Position option
Temporary write control option

F option
Command Arguments
{V)
{C)

{P)
{W<suboptions>)

Description
Vector option
Curve and arc option
Position option
Temporary write control option

Command Arguments
(VJ
The Polygon Fill command accepts all Vector command options and
arguments, which allows you to draw filled figures, such as squares,
rectangles, and diamonds.

The basic format of the Polygon Fill command using a vector option is
as follows:
F(V<positions>)

<positions> identifies the positions of the vertices.
Figure 5-49 shows a filled square and a filled diamond drawn using the
Polygon Fill command with the vector option and the bounded sequence
(B) suboption.

ReGIS-to-POSTScR1PT Translator 5-97

Polygon Fill
Figure 5-49:

Vector Option Example

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS
FILLED SQUARE

FILLED DIAMOND

P[50,200]
F(V(B)[+100)
[,+100)
[-100]
(E))

P[400,300]
F(V(B)[300,200]
[200,300]
[300,400]
(E))
ML0-001429

(C)
The Polygon Fill command accepts all Curve command options and
arguments, which allows you to draw figures, such as filled circles and
ellipses.

The basic format of the Polygon Fill command using a curve option is
as follows:
F (C<position>)

<position> provides coordinate values for the circle's center and radius.
Figure 5-50 shows a filled ellipse and a filled circle. The circle is drawn
using the Polygon Fill command and the circle option. The ellipse is
drawn using the Polygon Fill command and the circle option with the
closed curve (B) suboption.

5-98 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Polygon Fill
Figure 5-50: Curve Option

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

0
100
[100,200)
200

300

400

479 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - COMMANDS
FILLED ELLIPSE

FILLED CIRCLE

P[100,200]

P[S00,300]
F(C[+100])

F(C(B)
[+200)
[,+100]
[-200]
(E))

ML0-001430

(P)

The Polygon Fill command accepts all Position command options and
arguments. The position option does not generate graphic images as do
the curve and vector options. You can use the P option with the open
curve function of the curve option to set the slope at an open curve's
endpoints. You can also use the P option to reset the position before
and after an arc with its center at the current position.
The format of a Polygon Fill command using the position option with
the curve option is as follows:
F(C(A + <degrees>)<position>P<position>)

<degrees> provides the amount of degrees to be drawn for the arc and
the direction the arc is to be drawn.

ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 5-99

Polygon Fill
<position> first provides the value of the position at which the arc
drawing is to start. The second value for <position> is the new position.
Figure 5-51 shows filled, connected arcs and a filled, connected arc
and rectangle. The connected arcs are drawn with the Polygon Fill
command, the position option, and the open curve option. The connected arc and rectangle are drawn with the Polygon Fill command, the
position option, the vector option, and the open curve option.
Figure 5-51:

Position Option Example
0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS
FILLED
CONNECTED ARCS

FILLED CONNECTED
ARC AND RECTANGLE

P[200,200)
F(C(A+270)
[+50,-50)
P[+100]
C(A+270)
[-50,+50])

P[450,300)
F(C(C,A+270)
[-50)
V[,+50)
[+100)
[,-100)
[-50))
ML0-001431

s-;.100 ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator

Polygon Fill
(W)

The Polygon Fill command accepts all Write Control command options
and arguments. You can use temporary write control options as options
of the Polygon Fill command or suboptions of the C and V options.
The format of a Polygon Fill command using the temporary write
control command as an option is as follows:
F(W(<suboptions>)<options>)

The format of a Polygon Fill command using the temporary write
control command as a suboption is as follows:
F(C(W(<sub-suboptions>)<suboptions>)<options>)

NOTE

Only the last W option in a Polygon Fill command affects
the graphic image. Other W options have no effect, because
no drawing takes place in a Polygon Fill command until
the complete command is read. The one exception is when
you use pixel vector multiplication as a suboption of the W
option.
Figure 5-52 shows a pie segment filled with Xs and a filled box with
rounded corners. The pie segment is drawn with the Polygon Fill command, the temporary write control option with the shading character
select (S) suboption, and the vector option. The box with rounded corners is drawn with the Polygon Fill command, temporary write control
option with the foreground intensity suboption, the vector option, and
the open curve option.

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 5-101

Polygon Fill
Figure 5-52: Temporary Write Control Option Example
0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

0
100
200

300
400
479

COMMANDS
FILLED BOX WITH
ROUNDED CORNERS

PIE SEGMENT
Fl LLED WITH Xs

P[200, 100)
F(W(l(W)),
V[+100)
C(C,A-90)[,+50]
V[,+100]
C(C,A-90)(-50]
V[-100)
C(C,A-90)(,-50)
V[,-100)
C(C,A-90)[+50])

P[400,300]
F(W(S"X"),
V(B)[+200,-100]
C(C,A+30),
[-200,+100]
V(E))

ML0·001432

5-102 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Polygon Fill
Fiiiing Complex Polygons

You fill complex polygons just as you would simple polygons. However,
for more complex polygons, you must use a structured, logical method.
The following method is one example:
1. Build a ReGIS command string that draws the outline of the
polygon. This command string may use Vector, Curve, and Position
commands. The outline should be a single, closed figure and must
not have any gaps or cross over itself.
2. Enclose the command string from step 1 in a Polygon Fill command
as follows:
F(<ReGIS command string>)

If you want your polygon to have a contrasting outline, you can use a
macrograph in the following way:
@:A <ReGIS commands>@;

;"Load macrograph"

F (@A)

; "Fill polygon"

; "Draw outline"

NOTE

The ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT translator can generate a
POSTSCRIPT limitcheck error if it attempts to fill a very
complex polygon with many self-intersecting vertices.
Figure 5-53 shows a filled paper icon with a dotted outline drawn with
the Polygon Fill command, the C, V, and W options, and macrographs.

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRtPT Translator 5-103

Polygon Fill
Figure 5-53:

Filling a Complex Polygon

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

COMMANDS
FILLED PAPER ICON

PAPER ICON OUTLINE

P[200,200]
@:X
V(B)
[,+70]
P[-25,-10)
C(S)[+25,+1 O]
[-25,+10]
[-50,-20]
[-25,+10]
[+25,+10]
P[-25,-1 O]
V[,-70](E)@;

P[200,200]
W(P4)@XW(P1)

F(W(L 1),@X)
ML0-001433

5-104 ReGIS-to-Pos1ScR1PT Translator

Polygon Fill
Using the Polygon Fiii Command

Consider the following points when you use the Polygon Fill command:
•

Vertices. You must specify at least three different vertices, or no
drawing takes place. If you specify more than 1450 verticEJ), ReGIS
ignores the additional vertices. Two consecutive vertices t1iat map
to the same physical pixel are counted as one vertex.
NOTE

•

For the V option, each argument generates one vertex.
For the C option, each argument can generate more than
one vertex.
Closed Figures. If the commands for creating a polygon do not
represent a true closed figure with all vertices given in the same
direction, the Polygon Fill command acts as if consecutive vertices
are connected by straight lines. The results may be unexpected.
Perimeter. In some cases when you use the Polygon Fill command, the outline of the filled area may not line up with the vectors
that connect the same vertices. The reason is an algorithmic restriction, which implies that you should draw a border after the
filled area.
Single Closed Figures. Use the Polygon Fill command to fill single closed figures only. The Polygon Fill command is not designed
to fill polygons made of intersecting groups of single clOsed figures.
Although the Polygon Fill command can fill these polygons, the
results may be unexpected.
Current Position. The current drawing position is saved at the
beginning of a Polygon Fill command and restored at the end of
the command. The Polygon Fill command saves and restores the
position whether or not any drawing takes place. This feature
provides some compatibility with devices that do not have the
Polygon Fill command.
Sequence of Coordinates Options. Any Polygon Fill command
string that changes the arrangement of positions stored by sequence of coordinates options (B and E options) is not compatible
with ReGIS devices that do not have the Polygon Fill command.
Therefore, do not use unmatched B, S, or E options within the
Polygon Fill command.

ReGIS-to-PosTScR•PT Translator 5-105

Polygon Fill
5.5.6

Polygon Fill Command Summary
Table 5-10 summarizes the Polygon Fill command options. These
arguments do not have default values.
Table 5-10:
Argument

Polygon Fill Command Summary
Description

F(V<position>)

Vector option. Draws filled figures, such as squares,
rectangles, and diamonds.

F(C<position>)

Curve and arc option. Draws filled figures, such as circles
and ellipses.

F(P<position>)

Position option. Can be used to reset position before and
after an arc with center at the current position. Can be
used with the open curve function of the curve option to
set the slope at an open curve's endpoints.
F(W(<suboptions>) Temporary write control option. Lets you select temporary
write control values without changing the current write
<options>)
control values. Temporary wrlte control values remain in
effect for only the command controlling them.

5-106 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Text

Text
The Text command (T) lets you draw characters in many combinations
of size, position, and orientation. You can use characters from the
standard ASCII character set or from a user-loadable character set.
The following are options and arguments to the Text command:

•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Character set
Character positioning
Size options
Height multiplier
Size multiplier
String/character tilt
Italics
PV spacing
Temporary text control
Temporary write control

Specified character set, positioning, size, height, tilt, italics and PV
spacing values remain in effect until you define new values. Temporary
write control option values remain in effect only for the Text command
controlling them. The temporary text control option has specific start
and end options. Following the start option, all values are considered
part of the temporary text control until the end option.
Character Drawing

Text command options determine the form of characters drawn while
using the Text command. However, all characters are drawn in basically the same manner. A character .is taken from a stored character
set, scaled according to multiplication value, positioned at the proper
tilt and italic angles, then drawn at the current position. The size of
the loaded alphabets is 8 x 10 bits.
The current position at the start of each character is the pivot point
for drawing the character on the screen. The starting current position
is always the pixel value that is the upper left point of the stored
character form. Pivoting occurs around that point. For example, a
character drawn using normal orientation (text drawn left to right
on a straight line, with no tilt to the characters) appears to the right
and down from the current position. If the character were tilted
ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator 5-107

Text
180 degrees, it would be drawn to the left and up from the current
position. The character escapement value (the relative displacement
of the current position after each character is drawn) is then used for
positioning additional characters.
Figure 5-54 shows examples of a loaded alphabet. The top row, first
column, and the final two columns are blank to allow for spacing
between characters. The upper left pixel of each 8 x 10 format is
positioned at the current position.
Figure 5-54:

Stored Character Format Examples

00000000
00008000
00080800
00800080
08000008
08888888

00000000
00000000
00000000
00888880

08000080
08000080

08000008
08000008
00000000
00000000

00888880

UPPERCASE A

LOWERCASE g

00000080
00800080
00088800
ML0-001434

5-108 ReG IS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator

Text
Format

option

Command Arguments
"<text string>"
(A<n>)

[X,Y]
(S<n>)
(S[<width,height>])
(U[<Width,height>])
(H<n>)
(M[<width,height>])
(D<angle>)
(D<angle>,S<0-16>)
(D<angle>,S<0-16>, D<angle>)
(kangle>)
<PV>
(B)<options>(E)
(W(<Options>))

Description
Text string
Character set option
Character positioning argument
Standard character cell size option
Display cell size option
Unit cell size option
Height multiplier option
Size multiplication option
Character tilt option
String tilt option
String/character tilt option
Italics option
PV spacing argument
Temporary text control option
Temporary write control option

Command Arguments
''<text string>"

Text strings define the text characters to be drawn or printed. You
can use any character from the standard ASCII character set in the
text string.· This includes characters that ReGIS would recognize
as command instructions if the characters were not part of the text
string: the semicolon (;), the resynchronization character, and the at
sign(@) used with macrographs. In addition, you can use four control
characters as part of a text string:
•
•

•

Carriage return (CR). Returns the current position back to the
position in effect when the current text writing command started.
Linefeed (LF). Moves the current position down from the current
baseline (the reference line from which characters are drawn), to
a position equal in distance to the current vertical cell size (the
amount of screen area to be written for each character).
Backspace (BS). Moves the current position back one character
position, using the current character escapement value. Provides a
simple means of generating an overstrike.
ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 5-109

Text
•

Horizontal Tab (HT). Moves the current position forward one
character position, using the current text escapement value.

The format for a text string in its simplest form, that is with all options
at previously defined values, is as follows:
T"<text string>"

A text string is enclosed by a set of quote marks, either single or double
(refer to section 5.4.2.2).
(A<n>)
The character set option is used to select which set is to be used for
drawing or printing a text string. You can select any of four character
sets.

Set 0 is the ASCII character set. The translator uses the Courier font
to print text from Set 0.
Sets 1, 2, and 3 are sets you can load. All sets contain up to 95 printable characters.
If you select a loadable set (1, 2, or 3) that contains no characters, a
solid rectangle appears on the page for each text string character. The
same result occurs when a specified text character is not present in a
selected character set.

The format for selecting a character set is as follows:
T (A<n>)

<n> is 0, 1, 2, or 3.

[X,Y]
This argument specifies a character escapement value that defines the
new current position after each character is drawn. This is ori.e of the
two ways to select character positioning, which affects spacing between
characters.
The other way to select character positioning is to select a standard cell
size which.selects the character escapement value associated with that
standard size. (See the description of (S<n> ).)
Usually, the character positioning argument has only a positive X
value. This produces a text string drawn across the screen from left to
right, at whatever baseline orientation is in effect for the string (tilt
and italics options), with equal spacing between characters. However,
you can use a negative X value to draw a string backwards. You
5-110 ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator

Text
can also use Y values (+ and -) with different X values (+ or -) for a
staircase effect.
The format for the character positioning argument is as follows:
T<position>

<position> provides a relative positioning value to define character
spacing ([+X,+Y], [-X,+Y], [-X, -Y], [+X, -Y], [+X], [-X], [.tY], or [-Y]).
Figure 5-55 shows how different character escapement values can
affect how a text string is drawn.
Figure 5-55: Character Positioning Argument Example

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

799

100

COMMANDS
P[100,100)
T(S4)
'ABCD'
P[300]
T[35,25]
'ABCD'
P[575, 100)
T[-35,25)
'ABCD'

200
300

400
479 \..
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
ML0·001435

ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator 5-111

Text
(S<n>)
Standard character cell size is one of the three size options. It is also
one of the two ways to select character escapement, which affects
spacing between characters. (The other method of selecting character
escapement, [X,Y], is described in this section.)

Seventeen standard character cell sizes are available: size 0 through
size 16. Each standard character cell size has assigned values. These
values define a display cell size (amount of display area used for each
character ill a text string), unit cell size (height and width values for
the characters to be drawn within the display cell), and character
escapement (relative displacement of the current position after each
character is drawn).
The format for the standard character cell size option is as follows:
T (S<n>)

<n> is a number 0 through 16.

NOTE

Values are in ReGIS logical coordinates with default addressing mode S(A[0,0][799,479]).
Table 5-11 defines the values associated with each of the standard
character cell sizes.

5-112

ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator

Text
Table 5-11:
Standard
Size

Standard Character Cell Size Values
Display
Unit
Character
Cell Size
Cell Size
Escapement

[8,10]

[9,10]

[9,0]

Sl
82

[8,20]

[9,20]

[9,0]

[16,30]

[18,30]

[18,0]

[24,45]

[27,45]

[27,0]

[32,60]

[36,60]

[36,0]

[40,75]

[45,75]

[45,0]

[48,90]

[54,90]

[54,0]

[56,105]

[63,105]

[63,0]

[64,120]

[72,120]

[72,0]

[72,135]

[81,135]

[81,0]

810

[80,150]

[90,150]

[90,0]

811

[88,165]

[99,165]

[99,0]

812

[96,180]

[108,180]

[108,0]

813

[104,195]

[117,195]

[117,0]

814

[112,210]

[126,210]

[126,0]

815

[120,225]

[135,225]

[135,0]

816

[128,240]

[144,240]

[144,0]

ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator 5-113

Text
(S[<W/dth, height>])
Display cell size is one of the three size options. It lets you define
the height and width of a display cell that differs from those in the
standard character cell sizes~ This display cell represents the amount
of image area for each character of text.

The format for the display cell size option is as follows:
T(S[<width, height>])

The width and height values provide the size of the display cell in
ReGIS logical coordinates.
No specific unit cell sizes are associated with display cell size option
values. The display cell size option does not change the size of the
character printed; the unit size option changes character size.
(U[<Width, height>})
Unit cell size is one of the three size options. It lets you define the size
of characters drawn.

The format for the unit cell size option is as follows:
T(U[<width, height>])

The width and height values provide the size of the unit cell in ReGIS
logical coordinates.
Unless you want special effects, the unit cell size should be as close
as possible to the display cell size. ReGIS uses all of the display cell
for each character, filling any unused space with the appropriate
background intensity. ReGIS also uses only the amount of defined
display area, regardless of the unit cell size.
·
All characters are justified at the upper left corner in the display cell,
relative to the current character baseline orientation. When the unit
cell is smaller than the display cell, the whole character appears on the
page, with the unused part of the display cell at the background value.
When the unit cell is larger than the display cell, then only the part of
the character that can fit into the display area appears on the page.

5-114 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Text
Figure 5-56 shows what happens when the same unit cell size and
different display cell size values are used for printing the same text
string.
Display Cell and Unit Cell Size Options Example

Figure 5-56:

100

200

300

400

500

600

or
100
200
300

700

799

""'
AB])

A B

c D

AB])

COMMANDS
P[100, 100]
T[54](S[36,60),U[40,60])
(25,]'ABCD'
P[300,200]
T(S[54,90])
(50,)'ABCD'
P[300,300]
T(S[27,45])
[25,)'ABCD'

400
479 \.

ML0·001436

(H<n>)

The height multiplier option lets you change the height of characters
without affecting the width. The height multiplier option· changes the
height value of both the display and unit cells.
The format for the height multiplier option is as follows:
T(H<n>)

<n> provides a multiplication value.

Multiplication is done against the standard character sizes, with H2
being the height of standard size 1. Therefore, an option value of 8
changes the height components of the display and unit cells to 84,
while a value of 16 changes the same components to SB. The change in
display cell and unit cell height values occurs regardless of differences
that may exist in those values before the height multiplier option is
invoked.

ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator 5-115

Text
Figure 5-57 shows the effect of the height multiplier option. As shown,
only the height values change; character positioning and width values
remain the same.
Figure 5-57:

1 00

Height Multiplier Option Example

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
~

300

COMMANDS

P[50,50]
T(S3,H1)
'HEIGHT 1'
T(H6)
'HEIGHTS'
T(H16)
'HEIGHT 16'

400
479 " " - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ML0-001437

(M[<Width, height>})

The size multiplier option is an alternative way of specifying the unit
cell size, provided for VT125 compatibility. You can specify different
multiplication factors, including fractional values, for width and heigh..
The format of the size multiplier option is as follows:
T(M[<width, height>])

Width and height values provide multiplication values.
With this option, the unit width equals the width multiplier you specify,
multiplied by the standard size unit width (81). The unit height equals
the height multiplier you specify, multiplied by the standard unit
height divided by 2.

5-116

ReGIS-to-Pos1ScR1PT Translator

Text
String/Character Tilt Options

The normal orientation of text is along a horizontal baseline, with characters drawn from left to right. However, in some graphic applications,
you may want to write the text at an angle. The string/character tilt
options let you tilt text strings and the characters within text strings,
in 1-degree increments for 360 degrees. There are three types of tilt
options:
•
•
•

Character tilt option - Defines the tilt value for the characters in
the string.
String tilt option - Defines the orientation of the text string to the
horizontal baseline.
String/character tilt option - Defines two tilt values: one for the
text string as a unit, and one for the characters in the string.

These tilt options are separate from italic tilting.

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 5-117

Text
Figure 5-58 is a tilt compass that shows the direction of tilt for some
tilt values you can use with the tilt options.
Figure 5-58: Tiit Compass

+135°
-225°

+90°
-270°

+4!f
-31 !f

+225°
-135°

+270°
-90°

+315°
-45°
ML0·001438

5-118 ReGIS-to-POSTScR1PT Translator

Text
(D<angle>)
The character tilt option defines the tilt for the characters in the string.

The format for the character tilt option is as follows:
T(D<angle>)

<angle> provides the value of the character tilt, in degrees.
Figure 5-59 shows how different angles affect how characters are
drawn.
Figure 5-59:

Character Tilt Option Directions

STARTING
CURRENT

POSr

STARTING
CURRENT

POSr

STARTING
CURRENT

POSr

---xA------~-------;;--00

180°

315°

CHARACTER
TILT

CHARACTER
TILT
ML().001439

ReGIS-to-PosrSCRIPT Translator 5-119

Text
(D<angle>,S<0-16>)
The string tilt option defines a baseline. ReGIS draws· the characters
in a text string along this baseline. When you use this option, the
baseline of each character in the string is at the defined tilt.

The format for the string tilt option is as follows:
T(D<angle>, S<0-16>)

<angle> provides the value of the string tilt, in degrees.
S<0-16> identifies one of the 17 standard sizes. Escapement associated
··vith that size determines spacing between characters during the tilt
Jption.
The VT240 cannot accurately rotate text. To adjust for this, VT240
ReGIS increases the size of the rotated characters. The translator can
accurately rotate text, so it does not change the size of the characters.
However, because the translator is using the same character spacing as
the VT240, it spaces characters in a tilted string farther apart than the
characters in a horizontal string. (See Figure 5-60.) You can explicitly
adjust the character spacing using the T[X,Y] command.
Figure 5-60 shows how each string tilt value affects a text string
drawn on the screen.

5-120 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Text
Figure 5-60:

String Tilt Directions

STARTING
CURRENT
POSITION

! (;9

c::l
LJ

- - -x- - - - - - ~- ~ - - - - - - - ~ - - - - - -

ABCD

0°STRING TILT

Q-

V <!Y'

4S' STRING TILT

STARTING
CURRENT
POSITION

90° STRING TILT

STARTING
CURRENT
POSITION

GJSV/

STARTING
CURRENT
POSITION

-----*---------*---~~----135°STRING TILT

STARTING
CURRENT
POSITION

1800STRING TILT

<::>0

22S'STRING TILT

STARTING
CURRENT
POSITION

---::i:;.~----~-----------------

8td
270°STRING TILT

'°'

0<)

315°STRING TILT

ML0-001440

ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator 5-121

Text
(D<angle>, S<0-16>, D<angle>)
The string/charaeter tilt option first defines a tilt orientation for a text
string, then a separate orientation for the characters in the string.

The format for the string/character tilt option is as follows:
T(D<angle>, S<0-16>, D<angle>)

<angle> provides the value of the string tilt, in degrees.
8<0-16> identifies one of the 17 standard sizes. Escapement associated
with that size determines spacing between characters during the tilt
option.
The VT240 cannot accurately rotate text; to adjust for this, VT240
ReGIS increases the size of the rotated characters. The translator can
accurately rotate text, so it does not change the size of the characters.
However, because the translator is using the same character spacing as
the VT240, it spaces characters in a tilted string farther apart than the
characters in a horizontal string. (See Figure 5-61.) You can explicitly
adjust the character spacing using the T[X,Y] command.
Figure 5-61 shows different effects produced by the string/character tilt
option.

5-122 ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator

Text
Figure 5-61:

String/Character Tilt Option Directions

STARTING
CURRENT
POSITION

STARTING
·CURRENT
POSITION

STARTING
CURRENT
POSITION

ol)

-- - ~- - - - ~- - - - - - -a ~- - J
~
~

~
45° STRING/
315° CHARACTER
TILTS

270° STRING/
315° CHARACTER
TILTS

STARTING
CURRENT

poY:m 0 o

125° STRING/
180°CHARACTER
TILTS

STARTING
CURRENT

PToN

___ _

--x------~A~~----x_AB
CURRENT
1

45° STRING/
90° CHARACTER
TILTS

:~.s~: ::G1

45°CHARACTER
TILTS

31s0 STRJNGt

0°CHARACTER
TILTS
ML0-001441

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 5-123

Text
(/<angle>)

The italics option lets you tilt characters without changing their orientation to the baseline, giving you slanted text.
The format for the italics option is as follows:
T (!<angle>)

<angle> identifies the degree of italic slant and the direction of the
slant (to the left, if no sign; to the right, if negative sign).
When drawing italic characters, ReGIS displaces each horizontal slice
of the characters. However, italic slants do not significantly distort the
basic width and height values of a character. You can use italic slants
with the tilt option to create slant/tilt effects not available with either
tilt or italics options alone.
Figure 5-62 shows an H character with different italic slant values.
Figure 5-62:

Italic Option Slant Values

H H~
T(IO)

T(l22)

T(l45)

T(l-22)

T(l-45)

ML0-001442

5-124 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Text
<PV value>
The Text command uses PV spacing arguments to define overstrike,
superscript, and subscript functions. The direction specified by the PV
value is relative to the character rotation.

In Text commands, each PV value defines a movement equal to one
half of the defined display cell, in the direction specified. The PV
multiplication factor does not affect this movement.
The format for the PV spacing argument is as follows:
T<pv value>

<pv value> defines the offset to occur with each PV value specified
equal to an offset of 1/2 of the currently defined display cell size.
The PV spacing argument can use any of the eight pixel vector direction
values. The following are the most useful.
Value

Function

Superscripts. Displaces the character up and to the right of the
baseline.
Superscripts. Displaces the character straight up from the baseline.

2
4

Overstrikes. A 44 displaces the character back over a previously
drawn cell.

Subscripts. Displaces the character straight down from the baseline.

Subscripts. Displaces the character down and to the right of the
baseline.

You can use PV offset values of 3, 5, and 0, but they partially overwrite
the previous character.
A specified PV value offsets the following text strings from the original
baseline, until you correct the offse~. You correct the offset by specifying
the opposite PV value. For example, 6 corrects 2, and 2 corrects 6. For
an overstrike (44), use the PV value of 00.

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 5-125

Text
NOTE

Text PV spacing action is in relation to the baseline. This
action rotates with the baseline, if the baseline is tilted. PV
spacing is done in terms of display cell size. If the escapement value is set differently (by the character positioning
argument), a PV 44 does not produce the desired overstrike.
The backspace eode {0/8) moves backwards one character
space as set by the character positioning argument.

Figure 5-63 is an example of subscripting with the PV spacing argument.
Figure !H;3:

100

PV Spacing Argument Example

200

300

400

500

600

700

799
~

100
200

COMMANDS

P[300,200)
T(S2)
'H'7'2'1 '0'

300

400
479 ' " - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - "

5-126 ReGIS-to-PostSCRIPT Translator

ML0·001443

Text
(B)<optlons>(E)

This is the temporary text control option. Text command option values
you specify remain in effect until you change them. You can use
temporary text controls to draw text strings with new text command
option values, without affecting the current values.
The format for the temporary text control is as follows:
T(B)<options>(E)

The temporary text controls work as a bounded sequence. Options in
the sequence remain in effect until the sequence ends with an end (E)
option. A new command (Position, Vector, etc.) does not terminate the
temporary text control. Only an (E) ends the sequence. Temporary
text controls cannot be nested, because ReGIS does not recognize. a
second (B) option until the first (B) option has been terminated by an
(E). Values specified between the begin (B) option and end (E) option
are temporary. After the end (E) option, Text command option values
return to the values previously in effect.
Figure 5-64 shows an example of a temporary text control option.
Figure 5-64: Temporary Option Example

100

200

300

400

500

600

or
100

700

799
~

G:JS:\i

COMMANDS.

300

P[100, 100)
T(D0,55,10)
'ABCD'
P[SOO, 100]
T(B),
(0180,SS)
'ABCD'

400

P[SOO, 100]
T'ABCD'

ABCD

200

(E)

479 ""~---------------"-'

ML0·001444

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 5-127

Text
(W(<suboptions>))<options>
The temporary write control option lets you change the write control
values for one Text command, without affecting the current Write
Control command option values. The temporary write control values
affect only the Text command controlling the option. At the next
command keyletter, even if it is another Text command keyletter, the
write control values return to the current Write Control command
option values. You can use this option to change shade, as well as
writing mode (overlay, replace, or erase).

The format for the temporary write control option is as follows:
T(W(<suboptions>))<options>

Figure 5-65 shows an example of the temporary write control option.
Figure 5-65:

100

Text Command Temporary Write Control Option
Example

200

300

400

500

600

0
100

799
COMMANDS

ABCD

200

300

700

t~l•·t
ABCD

P[100, 100]
T(DO,SS)
'ABCD'
P[410,210]
T(W(R,N1))
'ABCD'
P[100,300]
T'ABCD'

400
479

5-128 ReG IS-to-Pos1ScR1P1 Translator

ML0-001445

Text
5.5.7 Text Command Summary
Table 5-12 summarizes the Text command arguments and their default
values.
Table 5-12: Text Command Summary
Default Description

Argument
'text'

None

Text string. Includes text to be displayed.
Text string characters must be delimited by
either single quotes ('text') or double quotes
("text").

(A<0-3>)

(AO)

[X,Y]

[+9,+0]

(S<0-16>)

(Sl)

(S[<Width,height>])

(S[9,20])

Character set option. Selects which of four
possible character sets (<0-3>) to use for
processing text string characters.
Character positioning argument. Lets you
vary positioning between text string characters. Default value comes from the character
escapement of standard cell size (Sl). [X,Y]
values are relative.
Standard character cell size option. Defines
a set of display cell, unit cell, and character
escapement values to be used in processing
text string characters. There are 17 different
sizes (<0-16>) available. The character tilt is
used to set the positioning.
Display cell size option. Lets you change size
of screen area written for each character.
Default value comes from standard cell size
(Sl).

(U[<Width,height>])

(U[S,20])

Unit cell size option. Lets you change scaling
of characters. Default value comes from
standard cell size (Sl).

(Hnumber)

(H2)

Height multiplier option. When selected,
this option changes the display cell and unit
cell size height values to a value equal to Sl
multiplied by the specified multiplier without
affecting width values or positioning. The
default value comes from standard cell size.

ReGIS-to-PostScR1PT Translator 5-129

Text
Table 5-12 (Cont.): Text Command Summary
Argument
Default Description
(M[<Width,height>])

(M[l,2])

Size multiplication option. Provides multiplication factors for the height and width
values of the unit cell size associated with
the standard cell size (Sl).

(D<a>)

(DO)

Character tilt option. Defines tilt value for
the characters in the text string. <a> defines
the degrees of the tilt for the characters.
String tilt option. Defines tilt of text string,
as a whole, relative to the horizontal. <a>
defines the degrees of the tilt; <0-16> provides a standard size value used to compute
positioning during the tilt.
String/Character tilt option. Defines separate
tilt values for the string and the characters
in the text string. The first <a> defines the
degrees of tilt for the string; the second <a>
defines the degrees of tilt for the characters
in the string; <0-16> provides a standard size
value used to compute positioning during the
tilt.

(DO Sl)

(D<a> S<0-16>
D<a>)

(DO Sl
DO)

(l<a>)

(10)

<PV>

None

(B)<options>(E)

None

(W(<options>))

None

5-130 ReGIS-to-POSTScR1PT Translator

Italics option; defines a degree of tilt (<a>) for
characters without changing their orientation
to the current baseline.
PV spacing argument. Uses PV values to
select superscript, subscript, and overstrike
functions.
Temporary text control option. Lets you select temporary Text command Qptions, without changing the current values. Temporary
values remain in effect until you use (E).
Temporary write control option. Lets you
select temporary Write Control command
values, without changing the current Write
Control command values. Temporary write
control values remain in effect only for the
command controlling them.

Load

Load
The translator can store up to four character sets at one time: an
ASCII set, stored as character set 0, and three loadable sets stored as
character sets 1 through 3. Each set contains up to 95 characters. You
use the Load command (L) to select, load, or reload sets 1, 2, and 3.
You cannot load character set 0, the ASCII character set.
There are two arguments to the Load command:
•
•

Format

Select character set
Load character cell

L option
Command Arguments
(A<n>)
"<character>"<hex numbers>

Description
Select character set option
Load character cell argument

Command Arguments
(A<n>)

The select character set option lets you select which of the three
optional character sets to load: set 1, 2, or 3.
The format for the select set option is as follows:
L(A<n>)

<ID> is either l, 2, or 3.

After you define a select character set value, it remains in effect until
you use a new select character set option. Other ReGIS commands can
execute without affecting the character set selected for loading.
The select character set option only defines which character set to
load. You load characters into the character s~t by using the load
character cell argument. You can load characters into the character set
as needed. You do not have to load the complete set at one time.

ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 5-131

Load
''<character>u<hex numbers>;
The load character cell argument lets you build a character you want to
store. Each character cell consists of 80 pixels in an 8 x 10-pixel array.
The load character cell argument uses hex numbers to define the on/off
pixel configuration for each row of pixels. You can draw up to 10 hex
pairs to define· the contents of a character cell.

The format for the load cell argument is as follows:
L"<character>"<hex numbers>;

<character> is the single ASCII character to serve as the call letter for
the character cell being loaded.
<hex number> provides the hexadecimal numbers, with one pair of
values supplied for each of the 10 rows of the character cell that can be
defined. Pairs are separated by commas.
A semicolon (;) is used to terminate the load cell command. If more
than one character is being defined, the command, up to the semicolon,
is repeated.
A call letter provides a way to select the stored character in Text
commands. You can use any single ASCII character for the call letter,
including numerals or a space. The call letter does not have to match
the character you are storing.
Table 5.....13 lists the bit pattern associated with each hex code. This
table identifies only the 4-bit patterns associated with each hex code.
You specify two hex code values for each row.
You build the cell from the top row down. The left-most bit in each row
equals the most significant bit of the hex pair bit value. ReGIS scans
each row in groups of four bits. The first hex code gives the bit pattern
for the left-most four bits of the cell row; the second gives the pattern
for the next four. If the width is not a multiple of four, ReGIS assumes
0 for the missing high bits. For example, if the width were seven, you
would load the hex value for the left-most four bits of the row, then the
value for the right-most three bits (assuming 0 for the high bit). If you
do not list enough hex codes for a row, ReGIS interprets the remaining
pixels in the row as 0. If you list too many hex codes, ReGIS assumes
the extraneous hex codes are for the next row.

To define a character cell, you only have to define the rows of the cell
containing "on" pixels. If you define fewer than the number of rows in
the character cell, ReGIS assumes the remaining rows are.Os (hex code
0), and sets all bits "off' in those rows. However, you must define any
blank rows at the top of the cell as 0.
5-132 ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator

Load
Table 5-13:
Hex Code

Bit Patterns Associated with Hex Codes
Bit 1

Bit2

Bit 3

Bit4

1
0

1
1

Figure 5-66 shows examples of characters you can load and the hex
codes required.

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-133

Load
Figure 5-66: Load Character Cell Argument Example
00000000

oooeoeoo
ooeeeeeo
oeoeoeoo
ooeeeeeo
ooo•o•o•
oo•••••o
oooeoeoo

oooooeoo
OOOOeeeo
OOOeoeoe
oooeoeoo
OOOeoeoe
0000•••0

oooooeoo

••••••••
eoooeooe
eeeoeoee
eoooooo•
•••ooo••
eOOOOOOe
•••o•o••
eoooeoo•

00000000
00000000

00000000
00000000
00000000

00000000

(A)

(B)

(C)

Oeeeeeee
oeooooo•
oeooooo•
oeooooo•
oeooooo•
oeooeoo•
o•o•o•o•
oeoeoeoe
oeoebeoe
oeeoooee
(D)

00000000

OOO•••oo
OOO•••oo
OOO•••oo
oeeeeeee
ooeeeeeo
OOO•••oo
ooooeooo

OOOeeeee
eooo••••
oeooo•••
ooeoeooe
oooeoooo
ooeoeooo
oeoooeoo

00000000
00000000

•00000•0
00000000

(E)

(F)

NOTES

• •

••••••••

INDICATES BIT ON; 0 BIT OFF.

•LETTERS IN PARENTHESES ARE
FOR DESCRIPTION ONLY; THEY
ARE NOT PART OF THE COMMAND.

COMMANDS
L(A3"alpha")
(A) "S"00, 14,3E,54,3E, 15,3E, 14;
(B) 'c'04,0E, 15, 14, 15,0E,04;
(C) 'C'FF,89,EB,81,E3,81,EB,89,FF;
(D) "b"7F,41,41,41,41,49,55,55,55,63;
(E) '1'0,1C, 1C,1C,7F,3E, 1C,8;
(F) "."0, 1F,8F,47,29,10,28,44,82;
ML0-001446

5-134 ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

Load
5.5.8

Load Command Summary
Table 5-14 summarizes the Load command arguments and their
default values (if any).
Table 5-14:

Argument

Load Command Summary
Default Description

(A<l-3>)

(Al)

"<ASCII>"
<hex numbers>;

None

Select character set option. Selects one of the three
loadable character sets to use for any following load
character cell activity.
Load character cell argument. Used to generate
characters to store in the selected set. <ASCII> is a
single ASCII character that identifies the character
cell. The variable <hex numbers> define the bit
pattern of the character to store on a line-by-line
basis.

ReGIS-to-PosrScR1PT Translator 5-135

Macrograph {@)

Macrograph {@)
The macrograph facility lets you define, store, and display graphic
images. For example, you can store a logo as a macrograph, then use
the logo in different displays. You do not have to rebuild the logo each
time you need it.
A macrograph may consist of complete sets of command strings or any
arbitrary string of characters.
You can use uppercase or lowercase characters to identify macrographs
(a or A identify the same macrograph). You can select a macrograph
as part of another macrograph, with up to 26 macrographs nested
together. However, you cannot use a macrograph as part of itself. For
example, if "A" is the first macrograph of a set of nested macrographs,
none of the other macrogra,phs can be "A."
You can define macrographs at any point in a ReGIS stream, without
affecting the interpretation of that stream, except as follows:
•

•

As part of a quoted string. ReGIS does not recognize commands
in a quoted text string. If you try to define a macrograph in a text

string, ReGIS interprets the commands and definition as simple
text.
In another macrograph. You can nest up to 26 macrographs.
However, you must define macrographs separately. You include only
the desired invoke macrograph operation in another macrograph
definition, not the contents of the nested macrograph.

There are three types of macrograph operations:
•
•
•

Format

Define macrograph
Invoke macrograph
Clear macrograph

@:<character><definition>@;
@<character>

@.
@:<character>@;
5-136 ReGIS-to-PoSTScR1PT Translator

Macrograph (@)
Macrograph Commands
@:<character><definlt/on>@;

This operation defines and stores the contents of a selected macrograph.
The definition cannot contain the following character sequences:
•

•

No characters are allowed between the at sign(@) and the colon(:);
between the colon(:) and <character>; or between the at sign(@) and
the semicolon (;), including CR, LF, BS, HT, and SPACE.
@<character>

This operation executes the contents of a selected macrograph. The contents of the selected macrograph are inserted in the ReGIS command
stream.
No character is permitted between the at sign(@) and the macrograph
<character>, including CR, LF, BS, HT, and SPACE.
ReGIS uses the current values for command information in a macrograph (such as write, screen, or text command values) unless you
change the values. You can specify new values in the definition, by
using temporary options or through text, screen, or write control
commands.
@.

This operation clears the macrograph definitions stored in all 26
macrograph locations.
You cannot put any characters, including CR, LF, BS, and HT, between
the at sign (@ ) and the period ( . ).
@:<character>@;

This operation clears only the contents of the defined macrograph.
You cannot put any characters, including CR, LF, BS, and HT in any of
the following locations:
between the at sign(@) and the colon(:)
between the colon(:) and <character>
between the at sign{@) and the semicolon(;)

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 5-137

Macrograph {@)
Figu:re 5-67 shows how the macrograph for a shaded star is defined,
stored, and then invoked.
Figure 5-67:

Macrograph Example

COMMANDS
@:$
W(S1)

1 oo·

200

300

400

500

aoo

100

799

P(+50,+50]
V(-100)
(-100,-50)
[+100]
[+50,-100)
[+50,+100)
[+100)
(-100,+50)
P[+50,+125]
W(S1)

V[-50,-125]
(-100)
(-50,+125]
W(IO)

V[+100,-75]
[+100,+75]
@;

P[200,200)
W(l3)
@S
W(l2)

P(400, 150]
@S
W(l1)

P[600,200)
@S
ML0-001447

5-138 ReGIS-to-POSTScR1PT Translator

Macrograph {@)
5.5.9 Macrograph Command Summary
Table 5-15 summarizes macrograph operations, which have no default
values.
Table 5-15: Macrograph Operation Summary
Operator
Description
@:<character><de:finition>@;

@<character>

@:<character>@;

Define macrograph. Defines the single letter used to identify a macrograph and the
macrograph definition to store. The letter
<character> is not case sensitive.
Invoke macrograph. Displays contents of
the macrograph specified by (<character>)
executed. <character> is a single letter and is
not case sensitive.
Clear all macrographs. When selected, deletes
stored macrograph descriptions from all 26
macrograph storage locations.
Clear defined macrograph. Clears the contents
of a single macrograph storage location. This
operator is a define macrograph operator with
no definition.

ReGIS-to-PosTScR1PT Translator 5-139

5.6 ReGIS Commands Not Supported by the Translator
The ReGIS commands and options listed in this section are not supported by the ReGIS-to-POSTSCRIPT translator. The translator ignores
unsupported commands.

5.6.1

Screen Control Command Options
The following options to the Screen Control command (S) are not
supported:
Command· Options
S[X,Y]
S<pV>
S(D<O or 1>)
S(C<O or 1>)
S(C"char")
S(H)
S(H[X,Y])
S(H[X, Y][X,Y]).
S(T<n>)
S(W(M<n>))

Description
Scrolling options

Scrolling-type option
Cursor-control options
Hardcopy-control options

Time-delay option
Temporary write control option

5.6.2 Write Control Command Options
The following options to the Write Control command (W) are not
supported:
Command Options
W(C)
W(F<n>)
W(W)

5-140 ReGIS-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

Description
Complement writing (defaults to Overlay)
Plane select option
Custom writing controls

5.6.3 Text Command Options
The following options to the Text command (T) are not supported:
Command Options
T(AO(L"designator"))
T(AO(R"designator"))

5.6.4

Description
Select GL character set
Select GR character set

Load Command Options
The following options to the Load command (L) are not supported:
Command Options
L[X,Y]
L(E<n>)

5.6.5

Description
Specify storage cell size argument
Select alphabet extent option

Report Command
The Report command (R) is not supported by the translator.

5. 7 Translator Environment
A file that has been translated from ReGIS to POSTSCRIPT and printed
does not look exactly the same on the page as it did on the screen. This
section describes the POSTSCRIPT environment for translated files.
The translator ignores all unsupported ReGIS commands.

5. 7 .1

Page Output
The translator sends a showpage command at the end of a translation,
which causes the image to be printed.
You can also use the S(F) command in ReGIS to print a page. This
command does not cause a blank page to be output.

ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator 5-141

5.7.2 Fonts
Text that is translated from ReGIS to POSTSCRIPT is printed in the
Courier font. The ReGIS translator does not use other POSTSCRIPT
fonts.

5. 7.3 Line Width
The line width is 1/800 of the horizontal dimension of the presentation
area. If you are using the default presentation area of 8 inches x 10.5
inches, the default line width is slightly less than a 1-point line.
You can select line width, using the W(L<n>) command. The L option
takes a single numeric argument. This number is interpreted as a
multiple of the default line width.
An argument of 0 sets the line width to the minimum width that can
be imaged. This may not be visible on some POSTSCRIPT printers.

The following example demonstrates the W(L) command:
W(Ll)

selects the default line width.

W(L0.5)

selects a line width that is half of the default width.

W(L2)

selects a line width that is twice the default width.
selects the minimum line width that can be imaged.

W(LO)

5.7.4 Lines
Lines are rounded on both ends, and line joins are rounded.

5.7.5 Color
Although the printer is a monochrome device, the translator does
include color information to POSTSCRIPT. The translator also provides
an output map for programs that select colors using only an output
map.
The translator inverts the "lightness" value for colors. A lightness
value of 0 pro4uces a white image. A lightness value of 100 produces a
black iriiage.
5-142 ReGIS-to-PoSTSCAIPT Translator

5. 7.6

Device Resolution
Because your printer is a high-resolution device, the printer output
may be more accurate than the screen output in positioning, scaling,
and rotating. For example, the VT240 can only rotate a figure in
22 112-degree increments, but the translator can rotate a figure in
1-degree increments.
In addition, because some graphics commands are implemented differently in the translator than on the VT240, other differences in the
way pictures are drawn may occur. For example, shading patterns may
align differently.

ReGIS-to-PostScR1PT Translator 5-143

Tektronix 4010/4014

Insert tabbed
divider here.
Then discard
this sheet.

Chapter 6

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosTSCRIPT
Translator
The Tektronix 4010/4014 translator converts functions of the Tektronix
4010/4014 protocol into POSTSCRIPT. VT240 Tektronix 4010/4014 mode
provides the basis for the Tektronix 4010/4014 translator features.
This chapter describes translator modes of operation, ASCII control
characters, and escape sequences defining functions to implement
Tektronix 4010/4014-to-POSTSCRIPT translation.
Remaining parts of the chapter contain a comparison of the Tektronix
4010/4014 translator features to those of the VT240 terminal, the LN03
PLUS printer, and the LNOlS printer, and restrictions associated with
the translation.

6.1

Using the Tektronix 4010/4014 Translator
To print your Tektronix 4010/4014 file on a POSTSCRIPT printer, send
the file to a print queue that uses this translator by default, or use the
PRINT command supported by the destination printer. Refer to the
appendix describing your printer.

6.2 Tektronix 4010/4014 Implementation
The remaining sections of this chapter provide a detailed description
of the Tektronix 4010/4014-to-POSTSCRIPT translation of modes and
functions.

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosTScRIPT Translator 6-1

6.2.1

Operating Modes
The Tektronix-to-POSTSCRIPT translator recognizes several modes,
controlled by escape sequences (ESC followed by one character), control
characters from t~e ASCII CO control set, and certain ASCII printable
characters. Certain control characters and sequences perform different
functions, depending on the mode of operation. The operating modes
are as follows:

•
•
•
•
•

6.2.2

Alpha mode - Processes text characters.
Graph mode - Processes vectors from endpoints defined by
absolute coordinate values.
Point Plot Mode - Similar to graph mode, except only the points
specified by the absolute coordinate values are plotted; no vector is
drawn between the points.
Incremental Plot Mode - Vectors are plotted relative to current
position.
Bypass Condition - The emulator functions normally but does
not display or process alpha (text) characters.

Active Position Interaction
Upon entering the Tektronix 4010/4014 translator, the active position
goes to the home position. ESC ETB and ESC FF also locate the
current position at the home position. CR locates active position at
the active margin. Home position is the upper left-hand corner of the
Tekpage.
Graph mode inherits its active position from the Alpha mode active
position. Usually the translator does not draw the first vector from
the inherited active position to the first designated vector endpoint.
(The translator draws the first vector following GS BEL, however.) In
Graph mode, the active position aligns on a Tekpoint. In Alpha mode,
the active position is on the reference point of the character box.
This reference point is the junction of the baseline and left edge of the
character cell.
The control character US, received in Graph mode, resets the translator
to Alpha mode, with the active position inherited from the Graph mode
position. CR received in Graph mode, however, resets the translator to
Alpha mode and moves the active position to the left margin.

6-2 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PostScR•PT Translator

Executing Plot Point mode is the same as Graph mode, except the
translator draws only the endpoint of vectors.
Incremental Plot mode inherits its active position from Alpha mode like
Graph mode and passes active position to Alpha mode.
While in Bypass condition, the active position does not change.

6.2.3

Physical Page Mapping
The translator maps the Tektronix screen onto the available image
area, leaving space at the right or bottom, if necessary, to preserve
the aspect ratio. The available image area varies with the page size
and orientation selected in the PRINT command. Translator default is
portrait orientation on 8.5" x 11" paper.

6.2.4 Addressing Limits
Addressing limits, in Tekpoints, of the Tektronix 4010/4014 translator
are as follows:
Addressable units:

0 to 4095 horizontal
0 to 3071 vertical

Actual drawing area:

0 to 4155 horizontal
0 to 3204 vertical

The drawing area accommodates character cells that exceed the top and
right edges of the addressing range. The translator scales the actual
drawing area to the presentation area, preserving the image aspect
ratio. Refer to Figure 6-1.
POSTSCRIPT commands sent to the printer prior to calling the translator
establish the presentation area. The default output page size is 8" x
10.5". The translator draws the Tektronix 4010/4014 image to the edge
of the presentation area with no margins. The lower left corner (0,0)
serves as the origin for the presentation area.

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosTScRiPT Translator 6-3

Figure 6-1:

73 {

64 {

Mapping of the Tektronix Drawing Area

I+- PHYSICAL
PAGE

-.=-

DECpage

I
""""'

TEKPAGE

32 {

ro1
I

78
CHARACTER
REFERENCE
POINT

BASELINE
ML0-001448

6-4 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PoSTScRIPT Translator

6.2.5 Strap Options
"Strap options" on the Tektronix 4010/4014, implemented as part of the
graphics set-up mode in the VT240, have the following fixed settings:
•
•
•

CR Effect = CR
LF Effect = LF
DEL implies Lo Y

The GIN terminator option has no meaning to the translator, since the
translator does not support reports and GIN mode.

6.2.6 Communications
The Tektronix 4010/4014 mode communicates with the Tektronix
4010/4014 translator by using 7-bit ASCII codes. See Figure 6-2 for
the 7-bit ASCII codes. Not all ASCII characters have a valid function
in the Tektronix 4010/4014 mode. In addition, the function of an ASCII
character depends on:
•
•

The operating mode
If the character is part of an escape sequence

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosTScRIPT Translator 6-5

Figure 6-2: 7-Bit ASCII Codes

BITS

NUL

SOH

STX

0
0
1
1
1
2
2
3

ETX

EQT

3
3

20
16

OLE

IXONI

21
17
11

22
18
12

DC2
DC3

23
19

DC4

20
14

DC1

IXOFFI

ENO s

6
6
6

ACK

BEL

7
7

8
8

NAK
SYN

0
1

122
82

103

123

104

106

37
46
38
26
47
3g

27
23
17

CAN

30
24
18

(

50
40
28

31
2S
19

SUB

32
26
1A
33
27
18

S2
34

55
37

70
56
38

)

51
41
29

52
42
2A

53
43
28

;

54
44
2C

SS
4S

57
39

72
58
3A

2D
56

46
2E

ASCII CONTROL
SET

S7
47
2F

141
97
61

161
113
71

142

162

163
1 lS
73

164
116
74

98
62

114

124
84
S4

144

12S

14S
101
6S

16S
117

126

146
102
66

166
118
76

107
71
47

127

147

167
119

110
72
48

130
88
S8

150
104
68

170

111
73
49

131
89
59

151
lOS
69

171

112
74
4A

132

172

[

133

153
107
68

{

173
123
78

134
92
SC

1S4

174

135
93
50

}

17S
125

68
44
69
4S
70
46

114
76
4C

1 lS
77
40

]
A

7S
48

76
62
3E

116
78
4E

77
63
3F

117
79
4F

160
112
70

67
43

113

7S
61

96
60

73
59
38
60
3C

7
140

143
99

ETB

37
31
1F

102
66
42

66
S4
36

14
12

121
81
Sl

17
lS
F

63
Sl

36
30
1E

6
120
80

101
6S
41

lOS

42
34
22

16
14
E

61
49
31

6S
S3
3S

64
40

3S
29
10

41
33
21

15
13
0

34
28
1C

0
0

5
100

2S
21
1S

4
60
48
30

ESC

3
40
32
20

44
36
'.>4

12
10
A

11
9
9

13
11
8

1
1

43
3S

4
0

1
0

84 83 82 81 ROW

0
0

COLUMN

r--

8S
SS
86
S6
87
57

90
SA
91
S8

136
94
SE
137
9S
SF

100
64

103
67

152
106
6A

108
6C
lSS
109

1S6
110
6E

1S7
111

DEL

120
78
121
79
122
7A

124
7C

70
176
126
7E
177
127
7F

ASCII GRAPHIC CHARACTER SET

KEY
ASCII CHARACTER

ESC

1 /11

COLUMN/ROW

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

6-6 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PoSTScR•PT Translator

Mlo--001373

Table 6-1 lists the ASCII codes supported by the Tektronix translator.
If a character does not have an entry for a mode, the translator ignores

that character. Bracketed actions indicate differences in translation
and Tektronix 4010/4014 interpretation.
The letters LCE stand for Last Character Escape. In Table 6-1, LCE
explains how the translator interprets a character preceded by an
escape character; that is, when the character forms part of an escape
sequence.
Table 6-1 : Translator Supported Tektronix 4010/4014 Emulator
Controls
ASCII Alpha
Graph
Bypass/GIN
LCE
NUL

Set LCE

SOH
STX

EOT
ENQ

[Status
report not
supported]

ACK

BEL

Start vector
from current
drawing position

[Bell does not
ring, but bypass
mode cleared]

Move left one
space (next
character will
overstrike)

Move left one
space

Move right one
space

Move right
one space

Move down one
line

Move up one
line

Move down one
line

Same as ESC
CR
Move up one
line
Erase and
home [page
eject]

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

6-7

Table 6-1 {Cont.): Translator Supported Tektronix 4010/4014
Emulator Controls
Bypass/GIN
LCE
ASCII Alpha
Graph
CR

Move to left
margin

Set Alpha and
left

so
SI
DLE
DCl
DC2

(This and
subsequent
CR-LFs
should be
ignored. Fill
CR-LFs will
not interfer.)
Use GR
UseGL

DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB

[Page eject]

CAN
EM
SUB

Set bypass
[GIN Mode
ignored]

ESC
FS
GS

Set LCE
Point Plot
Graph and
unwritten vector

Set LCE
Point Plot
Do an unwritten
vector

Set LCE
Point Plot
Graph and
unwritten vector

Increment Plot

Set Alpha Mode

us
SP

Move right one
space

High X or high

6-8 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

Set LCE
Point Plot
Graph and
unwritten
vector
Increment
Plot
Set Alpha
Mode

Table 6-1 (Cont.): Translator Supported Tektronix 4010/4014
Emulator Controls
ASCil Alpha
Graph
Bypass/GIN
LCE
Print character
Print character
#

Print character

Print character
Print character
Print character
Print character

Print character

Print character
Print character
Print character
Print character

High X or high

Print character

High X or high
y

Print character

High X or high
y

High X or high

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PoSTScRiPT Translator 6-9

Table 6-1 (Cont.): Translator Supported Tektronix 4010/4014
Emulator Controls
Graph
Bypass/GIN
LCE
ASCil Alpha
2

Print character

High X or high
y

Print character

High X or high
y

Print character

High X or high
y

Print character

High X or high
y

Print character

High X or high
y

Print character

High X or high
y

Print character

High X or high
y

Largest
characters

Print character

High X or high
y

Large characters

Print character

High X or high
y

Small characters

Print character

High X or high
y

Smallest
characters

Print character

High X or high
y

Print character

High X or high
y

Print character

High X or high
y

Print character

High X or high
y

Print character

LowX

Print character

LowX
LowX

6-10 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-POSTScRIPT Translator

LowY for
graph. (In
case DEL
can't be
used.)

Table 6-1 (Cont.):

ASCil Alpha

Translator Supported Tektronix 4010/4014
Emulator Controls
Graph
Bypass/GIN
LCE

Print character

D
E

Print character
Print character

Print character

G
H

Print character
Print character

Print character

Print character
Print character

Print character

0
p

Print character

u
v
w

Print character
Print character
Print character

Print character

z
[

Print character
Print character

Pririt character

]

Print character

LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX
LowX

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 6-11

Table 6-1 (Cont.): Translator Supported Tektronix 4010/4014
Emulator Controls
ASCil Alpha
Graph
Bypass/GIN
LCE
Print character
Print character

LowY

Normal,
Solid vector

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Normal,
Dotted vector
Normal,
Dot-dashed
vector
Normal,
Short-dashed
vector
Norm.al,
Long-dashed
vector
Normal,
Solid vector
Normal,
Solid vector
Normal,
Solid vector
Bold, Solid
vector
Bold, Dotted
vector

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

LowX

6-12 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosTScRIPT Translator

Bold, Dotdashed
vector
Bold, Shortdashed
vector
Bold, Longdashed
vector
Bold, Solid
vector

Table 6-1 (Cont.): Translator Supported Tektronix 4010/4014
Emulator Controls
ASCII Alpha
Graph
Bypass/GIN
LCE
n

Print character

LowY

Bold, Solid
vector

Print character

LowY

Bold, Solid
vector

Print character

LowY

Transparent
vector

Print character

LowY

Transparent
vector

Print character

LowY

Transparent
vector

Print character

LowY

Transparent
vector

Print character

LowY

Transparent
vector

Print character

LowY

Transparent
vector

Print character

LowY

Transparent
vector

Print character

LowY

Transparent
vector

x
y
z

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

Print character

LowY

}

Print character

LowY

Print character
DEL

LowY
LowY

Set LCE

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator 6-13

6.2.7 Control Characters
Certain ASCII control characters send functions to the translator. If
the ASCII control characters are not valid Tektronix 4010/4014 control
characters, the translator ignores them.
The code value for each control character identifies the location (column and row) of the control character in Figure 6-2. This value in
parentheses follows the abbreviation in the following descriptions:
BEL (On)

Bell (BEL) clears bypass condition.
BS (018)

Backspace (BS) moves the current position one space to the left. If
the current position is at the left margin, no action occurs. If an alpha
character occupies the new position, a new character overstrikes the
old character.
HT(0/9)

Horizontal Tab (HT) moves the current position one space to the
right. If the current position is at the end of the line, HT causes an
automatic line feed and carriage return.·
LF (0110)

Line Feed (LF) moves the current position down one line. If the
current position is at the bottom, LF moves the current position to
the top of the Tekpage and switches margins. LF also clears bypass
condition. When wraparound occurs, the new X position is relative to
the current margin, the same distance from the old margin.
VT (0111)
Vertical Tab (VT) moves the current position up one line. If the
current position is at the top of the Tekpage, no action occurs.
CR (0113)

Carriage Return (CR) moves the current position to the left margin,
resets the translator from Graph mode to Alpha mode, and clears
Bypass mode.

6-14 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

ESC (1111)

Escape (ESC) initiates an escape sequence. If a sequence is in
progress, ESC aborts the sequence in progress and initiates a new
one.
FS (1112)

File Separator (FS) sets the translator to point Plot mode. Point Plot
mode is identical to Graph mode, except that point plot does not draw
the vector between the points. FS also sets the current vector pattern
to solid.
GS (1113)

Group Separator (GS) sets the translator to Graph mode.
RS (1114)

Record Separator (RS) sets the translator to Incremental Plot mode
in which points plot relative to the current position.

us (1115)
Unit Separator (US) resets translator from Graph mode to Alpha
mode and clears bypass condition. US also sets pattern type vector to
solid.
While creating your Tektronix 4010/4014 files for the printer, ASCII
control characters can come from the host or the terminal keyboard. To
generate the characters on the keyboard, you hold down the CTRL key
and press the indicated keys. Table 6-2 shows which keys pressed with
the CTRL key provide control characters.

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

6-15

Table 6-2: Keys to Generate ASCII Control Characters
Abbreviation Code
Keys Pressed
BEL

0/7

CTRUG

0/8

CTRUH

0/9

CTRL/I

0/10

CTRUJ

0/11

CTRUK

0/12

CTRUL

0/13

CTRUM

ETB

117

CTRUW
CTRI.JX

CAN

118

SUB

1110

CTRUZ

ESC

1111

CTRU3

1112

CTRU4

1113

CTRU5

1114

CTRU6

1115

CTRU7

NOTE

Terminals prior to the VT220 do not recognize the numeric
control combinations for ESC, FS, GS, RS, and US. If using
a pre-VT220 terminal, refer to the terminal or terminal
emulator user documentation for combinations.

6.2.8 Escape Sequences
In addition to control characters, Tektronix 4010/4014 uses escape
sequences to define actions and parameters. The translator ignores
escape sequences that are not valid or not implemented.

6-16 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PoSTScRIPT Translator

6.2.8.1

Set Bypass and Mode Sequences
You select the Bypass condition, Alpha mode, Point Plot mode, and
Raster Write mode features with the following sequences:

ESCCAN
ESC CAN sets Bypass condition, which prevents the translator from
responding to data echoed back from the host.
ESCFF
ESC FF sets Alpha mode, which erases the screen, moves the current
position to the upper-left corner, activates margin 1, and clears the
Bypass condition.
ESCSUB
ESC SUB does not set GIN mode but proceeds directly to Alpha mode.
Bypass mode is not set.
ESCFS
ESC FS sets the translator to Point Plot mode. ESC FS also sets the
line pattern to solid.
ESC!Od
Overlay Mode, a Raster Write mode feature, sets dots on. Raster
Write mode features can be used in Alpha and Graph modes.
ESCl1d
Erase Mode, another Raster Write mode feature, sets dots off.
ESC/2d
Complement Mode, a third Raster Write mode feature, complements
dots. The translator does not implement this feature.
6.2.8.2

Select Character Size

You select Alpha text size with the following sequences:

ESC 8 selects the largest character size
ESC 9 selects the medium-large character size
ESC: (colon) selects the medium-small character size
ESC ; (semicolon) selects the smallest character size

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator 6-17

6.2.8.3

Select Vector Patterns

Select the type of pattern for vector drawing with the sequences from
Table 6-3:
Table 6-3:
Sequence

Vector Pattern Selection Sequences
Intensity
Code
Pattern

ESC'
ESCa
ESCb

11116/0

ESCc
ESCd

1/11 6/3

ESCe
ESCf
ESCg
ESCh
ESCi
ESCj
ESCk
ESCI
ESCm

1111 6/5

ESCn
ESCo

6.2.8.4

1111 6/1
1111 6/2
11116/4
1111 6/6
1111 6/7
1/11 6/8
1/11 6/9
1/11 6/10
1111 6/11
1111 6/12
1/11 6/13
1111 6/14
1/11 6/15

Solid
Dotted
Dot-Dashed
Short Dashed
Long Dashed
Solid
Solid
Solid
Solid
Dotted
Dot-Dashed
Short Dashed
Long Dashed
Solid
Solid
Solid

Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Norm.al
Normal
Normal
Normal
Bold
Bold
Bold
Bold
Bold
Bold
Bold
Bold

Prevent Responses to CR and LF

You prevent the translator from responding to CRs and LFs by using
the following sequences:

•
•

ESC CR
ESC LF

To clear this condition, send BEL or some other nonoperative control
code. ESC CR and ESC LF also reset the LCE flag.

6-18 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PoSTScRIPT Translator

6.2.8.5

Set LCE Flag
You set the LCE flag, an escape sequence introducer condition, by using
any of the following escape sequences. ESC, by itself, sets the LCE
flag. The following five sequences, unlike other sequences, do not clear
the LCE flag. In effect ESC DEL is the same as ESC, and so forth.

•
•
•
•
•

ESC DEL
ESCNUL
ESC CR
ESCLF
ESC ESC

ESC DEL, ESC NUL, and ESC ESC only set the LCE flag. ESC CR
and ESC LF also prevent the translator from responding to the CRs
and LFs.
6.2.8.6

Delete Character
In the Tektronix 4010/4014 translator, DEL implies Lo Y, which is a
strap option implemented in set-up on the VT240. You cannot change
the DEL default state.

You can substitute the following escape sequence for the Lo Y coordinate value of DEL (11111):

ESC?
6.2.8.7

Miscellaneous Escape Sequences
Table 6-4 lists escape sequences and the corresponding control characters that perform the same function:

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosTScRiPT Translator

6-19

Table 6-4:
Sequence
ESCBEL
ESCBS
ESCHT
ESCVT
ESCFS
ESCGS
ESCRS
ESCUS

6.2.8.8

Miscellaneous Escape Sequences
Control character
BEL
BS
HT
VT

FS
GS
RS

Ignored Escape Sequences

Table 6-5 lists the escape sequences that are not implemented in the
Tektronix 4010/4014 translator:
Table 6-5:
Sequence
ESCSO
ESCSI
ESCp
ESCq
ESCr
ESCs
ESCt
ESCu
ESCv
ESCw

Ignored Escape Sequences
Function
Selects alternate character set
Selects ASCII character set
Sets solid vector pattern with write-through
Sets dotted vector pattern with write-through
Sets dot-dashed vector pattern with write-through
Sets short-dashed vector pattern with write-through
Sets long-dashed vector pattern with write-through
Sets solid vector pattern with write-through
Sets solid vector pattern with write-through
Sets solid vector pattern with write-through

6-20 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosrScRIPT Translator

6.2.9 Changing Operating Modes
After selecting the Tektronix 4010/4014 translator, you use control
characters to change operating modes. In some cases, you use escape
sequences. Figure 6-3 shows the operating modes supported by the
translator. Arrows represent possible changes between modes. Shown
with each arrow is the ASCII control character or escape sequence to
use to make the mode change.

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-POSTScRIPT Translator 6-21

Figure 6-3:

Mode Transition Diagram

ESC FS OR FS

ESC
SUB

ESC SUB

ML0·001449

Notes

1. US, CR, ESC US, OR ESC FF.
2. The Tektronix 4010/4014 translator does not support GIN mode.
Any attemptto enter GIN mode activates Alpha mode and does not
set the Bypass condition.

6-22 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosTSCRIPT Translator

3. Bypass condition is an overall mode, which can be entered or reset
while in any other mode.

6.2.10

Bypass Condition
When Bypass mode is in effect, the terminal ignores Alpha mode data
received from the host. This condition allows the terminal to avoid data
incorrectly echoed back to the terminal from the host. This condition
allows compatibility with other devices.
Enable Bypass mode by using the escape sequence, ESC CAN.
Clear Bypass mode by using any of the following: ESC CR, ESC LF,
ESC FF, ESC US, ESC BEL, ESC ETB, CR, LF, US, BEL, executing
a dark or light vector in Graph mode, or plotting a point in Point Plot
mode.
Execute valid Tektronix 4010/1014 escape sequences and control codes
with Bypass enabled, except the display of Alpha mode text.

6.2.11

Alpha Mode
In Alpha mode, noncontrol characters translate to print in the selected
character size. Four character sizes, chosen with escape sequences, are
available for printing text. Margins also affect the printing of text.
Table 6-6 lists four character sizes with their selector sequences.
Table 6-6:
Sequence
ESCS
ESC9
ESC:
ESC;

Character Sizes
Lines/page
Char/line
74

81
121
133

35
38
58
64

POSTSCRIPT Courier fixed-pitched font, appropriately scaled, is the font
for the Tektronix 4010/4014 translator.

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PostScRIPT Translator 6-23

6.2.11.1

Margin Processing
"Margin processing'' refers to 2-column character writing in Alpha
mode. Two-column writing allows two different left margins but the
same right margin. Margin 1 is at the left edge of the Tekpage. Margin
2 is at the center of each row of the Tekpage. You select margin 1 to
print rows of characters from the left edge to the right edge. Select
margin 2 to print characters from the middle of the display area to the
right edge (see Figure 6-4).

Switching margins activates the disabled margin; that is, characters
print in the other margin. Margin switching occurs:
•
•

Automatically after writing the last line in the active margin.
After a line feed when the active position is on the last line of the
page.

The characters print as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The first row of characters print from the top row of margin 1 to
the top-right comer of the Tekpage.
Reaching the right edge, character wrap occurs to the next character row down on margin 1.
Rows of characters continue to print until reaching the bottom row.
The first character that does not fit in the bottom row wraps to the
top middle of the Tekpage, activating margin 2.
A row of characters prints from the top row of margin 2 to the
top-right comer, overstriking any characters already printed.
Reaching the right margin, character wrap occurs to the next
character row down on margin 2.
Rows of characters print left-justified at margin 2 until reaching
the bottom row.
The first character that does not fit in the bottom row wraps to the
top-left comer of the Tekpage, activating margin 1, and the process
begins again.

6-24 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosrScRiPT Translator

Figure 6-4:

Alpha Mode Margin Processing

MARGIN 1

MARGIN 2

1
2
3
4

67
68
69

5
6
7
8

......

-- - - -- - - ..-

---------

-- - - - ..._

...._

66
ML0·001450

Margin processing allows printing in either one column at full width
or two columns at half width. If you do not want to print two columns,
execute a form feed before margin 2 {after the last row).
6.2.11.2

Alpha Mode Control Characters

The Tektronix 4010/4014 translator supports valid escape sequences
and control characters received in Alpha mode. Following are control
characters that function in Alpha mode:
Character

Function

HT
VT

Moves active position one space to the right
Moves active position up one line

Causes line feed or wraps to top row and switches margin when
invoked on bottom line

CR
BS

Moves active position to left margin
Moves active position one space to left with no action taken if
the active position is the left margin
Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosrScR•PT Translator 6-25

6.2.12 Graph Mode
In Graph mode, the translator interprets characters as addresses for
the endpoint of vectors. Draw vectors in any of five line textures and
two intensities. Send addresses in terms of Tekpoints.
Addressable units in the translator are:
•
•

0 to 4095 horizontal
0 to 3204 vertical

Actual drawing area of the translator:
•
•

0 to 4155 horizontal
0 to 3204 vertical

The drawing area accommodates character cells that may hang over
the top and right edges of the addressing range.
6.2.12.1

Line Patterns
You select line patterns by using the following escape sequences. Each
prints with either bold or normal intensity.
Pattern

Sequence

Solid (normal)

ESC ', ESC e, ESC f, or ESC g

Solid (bold)

ESC h, ESC m, ESC n, or ESC o

Dotted (normal)

ESCa

Dotted (bold)

ESCi

Dot-dashed (normal)

ESCb

Dot-dashed (bold)

ESCj

Short dash (normal)

ESCc

Short dash (bold)

ESCk

Long dash (normal)

ESCd

Long dash (bold)

ESC 1 (lowercase L)

6-26 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-Pos1ScR1PT Translator

6.2.12.2

Line Width

Nominal line width in Tektronix 4014 mode is 1/800 of the horizontal
dimension of the presentation area. Defocused vectors are 1.5 times the
nominal width.
6.2.12.3

Drawing Commands

You use the GS control character to enter Graph mode from Alpha
mode. In Graph mode, GS defines the start of a vector drawing. The
translator does not draw the vector from the active position but from
the first coordinate value specified in the draw command. If you
name more than two coordinates following a GS control character, the
translator draws each new vector from the last coordinate (endpoint
of preceding vector) to the next specified coordinate. For example, the
following command draws three vectors: one from point A to point B,
one from point B to point C, and one from point C to point D.
GS A B C D

If you give the following command, the translator draws two vectors:

one from point A to point B, and one from point C to point D.
GS A B GS C D

The translator draws the first vector after GS BEL; that is, the translator draws a vector from the active position to the first specified
coordinate.

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosTScR•PT Translator 6-27

6.2.12.4

Encoding Coordinates
The Tektronix 4010/4014 translator supports a 10-bit or 12-bit addressing mode, encoding coordinates into 4 or 5 bytes, respectively.
Table 6-7 shows the transmission of these bytes and identifies their
format. Ten-bit addressing does not include the extra byte shown in the
table, but the order of the remaining bytes is the same.
Table 6-7: Coordinate Encoding Byte Values
7-Bit ASCII Character
Tag Bits

Address Bits

Byte
Name

HighY

5 most significant bits of Y address

Extra byte

LowY

5 intermediate bits of Y address

HighX

5 most significant bits of X address

LowX

5 intermediate bits of X address

tSetting this bit makes margin 1 active.

When only part of an address changes, the translator supports shortened address transmission. Table 6-8 shows the transmission rules for
sending shortened addresses.

6-28 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosrScRiPT Translator

Table 6-8: Rules for Sending Shortened Address
Bytes Sent
Bytes
Changed
HighY
LowY
HighX
LowX
Extra

6.2.12.5

HighY

LowY

HighX

LowX

Extra

Yes

No
No
No
No

Yes
Yes

No
No

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

No
No
No
No

No
Yes

Yes

No
No

Yes

The Extra Byte and High Resolution
The extra byte contains the low-order two bits of the X and Y address.
Receiving this byte, the translator changes the addressable grid to
one-fourth of the default grid. However, the extra byte containing the
low-order bits shifts the other address bits to the left by two. This
multiplies the original address request by four.

If you send an extra byte of zero, the shrinkage of the grid size and
the multiplication of the address cancel each other. The vector drawn
is the same as it is without the extra byte. ESC ETB, ESC FF, and
CR reset the last extra byte to zero, which returns the translator to
low-resolution mode.
If the extra byte is non-zero, 1 to 3 high-resolution Tekpoints add to
the desired address. A more significant value accumulates if you chain

together many small vectors.

6.2.13

Point Plot Mode
Point Plot mode is similar to Graph mode except the translator draws
only the endpoints of the vector. You send Point Plot values the same
way you send Graph mode coordinate values.
Enter Point Plot mode from either Alpha or Graph mode by using the
FS control character. ESC FS does the same thing. In 4014--Series
terminals, ESC FS enters a "special Point Plot mode" not implemented
by the translator.

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PosrScRiPT Translator

6-29

In Point Plot mode, you can transmit coordinate values without specifying FS (or ESC FS) again.

6.2.14 Incremental Plot Mode
In Incremental Plot mode, the translator plots points relative to the
active position. The points increment one Tekpoint, which is less than
one pixel. On occasion, to show movement requires more than one
Incremental Plot mode character.
Enter this mode from any mode but GIN by using RS or ESC RS. The
active position for relative movement is the active position when you
select RS.
Use the following characters to plot Incremental Plot mode points:
Character

Function

Turn off beam (pen up)

Turn on beam (pen down)

Up (north)

Up, right (northeast)
Right (east)

Down, right (southeast)
Down (south)

Down, left (southwest)

Left (west)

Up, left (northwest)

NOTE

With the exception of SPACE, the characters are uppercase
only.

You use the SPACE and P characters when changing the active position. SPACE turns off the beam. Use directional letters to move to the
new active position. P turns on the beam.

6-30

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PostScRiPT Translator

6.3 Compatibility with Other Tektronix 4010/4014 Devices
This section compares the Tektronix 4010/4014 implementation of the
translator, the VT240 terminal, the LNOlS printer, and the LN03
PLUS printer.

Nominal vector width
•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Normal vectors are 1/800 of the
Tektronix screen width. On an 8.5" x 11" page, width is 4 pixels in
landscape orientation and 3 pixels in portrait orientation.
VT240: Normal vectors are one pixel or 1/614 of the Tektronix
screen width.
LN03 PLUS: Normal vectors are 3 pixels or 1/1024 of the Tektronix
screen width.

Normal/Defocused beam
•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Normal vectors are nominal width.
Defocused vectors are 1.5 times the nominal width.
VT240: Draws normal vectors at an intensity of 2 and defocused
vectors at intensity 3 (of 0 to 3 intensity range).
LN03 PLUS: Normal vectors are nominal width. Defocused vectors
are 2 or 3 times the nominal width.

Screen Clear (ESC FF) action
•
•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Prints current image, ejects page,
and clears page.
VT240: Clears screen.
LNOlS: Same as translator.
LN03 PLUS: Same as translator.

Hard-copy (ESC ETB) action
•
•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Ignores ESC ETB.
VT240: Sends current image to the printer on Printer Port and
clears Bypass.
LNOlS: Prints current image, and clears Bypass.
LN03 PLUS: Same as translator.

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

6-31

Bypass condition
•
•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Implements Bypass condition.
VT240: Implements Bypass condition.
LNOlS: Does not implement Bypass.
LN03 PLUS: Implements Bypass, except for GIN mode commands.

Character sizes
•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Has four distinct character sizes.
VT240: Has four marginally legible sizes or two legible sizes.
LN03 PLUS: Has two sizes in four character cell sizes.

Special Plot Point mode
•
•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Does not implement Z-axis.
VT240: Same as translator.
LNOlS: Same as translator.
LN03 PLUS: Same as translator.

Write-through mode (host writes screen; not refreshed by terminal)
•
•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Draws nothing; tracks position.
VT240: Implements "erase" or "complement" mode if selected by
another control sequence.
LNOlS: Same as translator.
LN03 PLUS: Same as translator.

Video backspace (BS SP BS)
•
•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Takes no special action on SPACE.
VT240: If preceded immediately by BACKSPACE, SPACE erases
the current character cell.
LNOlS: Same as translator.
LN03 PLUS: Same as translator.

Page mapping
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Maps the Tektronix screen into
the available image area, leaving space at the right and bottom if
necessary to preserve the aspect ratio. Available image area varies

6-32 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-Pos1ScR1PT Translator

•
•
•

with the page size and orientation sent in the PRINT command.
Default is portrait orientation on 8.5" x 11" paper.
VT240: Maps the Tektronix screen into a rectangle on the VT240
screen, leaving space to the left and right.
LNOlS: Maps the Tektronix screen onto an 8.5" x 11" paper, only in
landscape orientation. If you use A4 paper, some marks appear at
the edge of the paper.
LN03 PLUS: Maps the Tektronix screen onto an 8.5" x 11" paper,
only in landscape orientation. If you use A4 paper, the printer clips
some of the marks near the edge of the paper.

First vector after GS BEL
•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Draws the vector after GS BEL.
VT240: Does not draw the vector after GS BEL. This is a bug 4014 draws the vector.
LN03 PLUS: Same as translator.

Activation environment
•
•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: Invoke 4014 mode by selecting
parameter DATA_TYPE=TEK4014 in the PRINT.command. ANSI
commands do not invoke 4014 mode.
VT240: Activate 4014 mode, using Set-up or the ANSI Set Mode
sequence.
LNOlS: Activate 4014 mode, using the ANSI Set Mode sequence.
LN03 PLUS: Activate 4014 mode, using the ANSI Set Mode sequence.

Strap options
•

•
•
•

Tektronix 4010/4014 translator: The strap options have the following fixed values:
CR Effect = CR
LF Effect = LF
DEL implies Lo Y
GIN Terminator - does not app~y
VT240: Select the four 4014 strap options in Set-up.
LNOlS: Same as translator.
LN03 PLUS: Same as translator.

Tektronix 4010/4014-to-POSTSCRIPT Translator 6-33

6.4 Restrictions
This section contains restrictions of Tektronix 4010/4014-to-POSTSCRIPT
translation.
VT240 Tektronix 4010/4014 provides the basis for the Tektronix translator features. The translator does not support the following VT240
commands:
•
•
•
•
•

ESC SUB (GIN mode)
ESC ETB (hard copy)
ESC ENQ (report)
DECTEK (exit 4014 mode)
ESC " Ps d (set write-through writing mode)
NOTE

ESC SUB and ESC ETB affect BYPASS condition as they do
normally even though they do not perform their otherwise
normal functions.
POSTSCRIPT translation supports the remaining VT240 Tektronix
4010/4014 commands; with the following restrictions:
•
•
•

ESC FF - Clears the image and ejects the page. Two successive
ESC FF commands do not eject a blank page, nor does ESC FF at
the end of the file.
SPACE - Does not erase the character if a BS (backspace) immediately precedes the character as the VT240 does.
BEL- Does not ring the bell (there is none) but clears BYPASS,
and the translator draws the next vector.

The translator does not support the VT240 "Enlarged" character mode.
Characters align correctly and are readable when the Tektronix 4014
image occupies an entire 8.5" x 11" page.

6-34 Tektronix 4010/4014-to-PoSTSCRIPT Translator

ScriptPrinters

Insert tabbed
divider here.
Then discard
this sheet.

Chapter 7

LN03R ScriptPrinter
7.1 ScriptPrinter Enhancements
The LN03R ScriptPrinter, Version 2.0, has the following new features:
•
•
•
•

Ability to down-load 32 fonts
ANSI setup files for ANSI jobs
Improved performance of spacing functions
Improved small job performance

The ScriptPrinter, Version 2.0, uses Version 3.0 of the ANSI Text
translator.

7.2 Down-Line Loaded Font Capacity
The LN03R ScriptPrinter supports fonts permanently resident in the
translator and down-line loaded fonts in DIGITAL Common Font File
Format. Written in ANSI text, down-line loaded font files require
translation into POSTSCRIPT. Up to 32 fonts are available for down-line
loading to the ScriptPrinter when you use the ANSI translator, Version
3.0 or 3.1.
If memory allotted to down-line loaded fonts in the ScriptPrinter is full,
the translator deletes all fonts from memory before down-loading the
new font. Printing of your file is slower if the translator needs to clear
printer memory before it can down-load the font you requested.

LN03R ScriptPrinter 7-1

7.3 Selecting a Translator
To select the proper translator - ANSI Text and Sixels, ReGIS, or
Tektronix 4010/4014- use the /PARAMETERS qualifier for the VMS
PRINT command:
$ PRINT/QUEUE=SYS$PRINT file-spec[, ..• ]/PARAMETERS=(DATA TYPE={ANSilREGISITEK4014})
-

The print symbiont determines if the file requires translation to
POSTSCRIPT, by looking at the DATA_TYPE option. With a data type
other than POSTSCRIPT, the print symbiont calls the appropriate translator before printing. DATA_TYPE options for the ScriptPrinter include
the following:
Data Type

Data Translation

ANSI
ANSI2

ANSI data converted by the ANSI translator (see Chapter 3).
ANSI Level 2---ANSI subset for LA100/LA210 (currently
treated as ANSI).
Printing characters plus CR, LF, BS, HT, VT, and FF control
cl1aracters (currently treated as ANSI).
Printing characters plus CR, LF, HT, and FF control characters
(currently treated as ANSI).
POSTSCRIPT· program data processed by the POSTSCRIPT
interpreter without conversion.
Same as POSTSCRIPT.
ReGIS commands data converted by the ReGIS translator (see
Chapter 5).
Tektronix 4010/4014 graphics commands data converted by the
Tektronix 4010/4014 translator (see Chapter 6).
Printing characters plus CR and LF control characters (currently treated as ANSI).

ASCII
LINE
POSTSCRIPT
PS
REGIS
TEK4014
TEXT

If your system manager defined default queues for a specific translator,
you do not have to use IPARAMETERS=(DATA_TYPE::option) on the
command line.

7-2 LN03R ScriptPrinter

7 .4 ANSI Text/Sixel Translator
To print your ANSI Text or sixel file on the LN03R ScriptPrinter, send
your file to a VMS print queue that uses this translator by default or
use the VMS PRINT command with a DATA_TYPE parameter of ANSI:
$ PRINT/QUEUE=printername file-spec[, ••• ]/PARAMETERS=(DATA_TYPE=ANSI)

With DATA_TYPE=ANSI, the translator ignores the following PRINT
command qualifiers:
•
•
•
•

/FEED
/HEADER
/SPACE
/SHEET_SIZE

Default Settings

The ANSI Text translator supports paper sizes A (8.5" x 11", 216 x 279
mm) and A4 (8.3" x 11.7", 210 x 297 mm) for·the ScriptPrinter.
Several initial state values in the ANSI Text translator change, depending on the default setting:
•
•
•
•

A-size paper, portrait orientation
A-size paper, landscape orientation
A4-size paper, portrait orientation
A4-size paper, landscape orientation

If the system manager or us~r did not change the default setting,
it is A-size paper, portrait orientation. You can change the default setting by using the /PAGE_SIZE=logical-size and /PAGE_
ORIENTATION=logical-orientation parameters to the PRINT command.
If the /PAGE_SIZE parameter does not match A4, then the translator
selects A as the logical page size to be printed.

Tables 2-1and2-2 list initial state values that do not change with the
default settings. Tables 2-3 and 2-4 list initial state values for each of
the default settings.

LN03R ScriptPrinter 7-3

7.4.1

Resolution for Sixel Graphics·
For the fastest results with sixel graphics on the LN03R ScriptPrinter,
use a resolution of 75 dots/inch by selecting the following settings:
•
•
•
•

PUM =SET (CSI 11 h)
SSU =pixel, 11300" (CSI 7 SP I)
Horizontal grid = 4 (Pn3 parameter of the protocol selector)
Aspect ratio= 111; 2/2; TJ/n (Set Raster Attributes command DE CGRA)

When you select a resolution, keep the following in mind:
•
•

•

7.4.2

If you select an aspect ratio other than 300 dots/inch, the printer
uses a resolution conversion algorithm to provide a quality picture
from your selected grid.
If you select a resolution greater than 75, the printer may be
communication line bound; the printer .does not receive information
as fast as it can process information.
If you select an integer ratio (300/resolution = integer), the printer
takes less time to print than if you select a noninteger ratio.

Hints, Problems and Solutions
•

Page Format

•

Use the page format select sequence (CSI Ps SP J) or the
PRINTIPARAMETERS=PAGE_ORIENTATION=logical-orientation
qualifier in the PRINT command to select the printing orientation,
either portrait or landscape. When you call the translator, it
defaults to portrait orientation, unless the system manager or user
modifies the switch.
Printable Area
The LN03R ScriptPrinter does not start printing until 1/4" in from
the edge of the paper. Select the upper-left comer of the printable
area rather than the upper-left comer of the physical page as the
starting point for printing a page.

7-4 LN03R ScriptPrinter

•

Landscape Pages
Use the landscape switch with the PRINT command:
$ PRINT/PARAMETERS=(PAGE_ORIENTATION=landscape)

Send a PFS sequence to select the landscape format (ESC [? 21
SP J) before you send the text. Do not send an RIS or DECSTR
sequence after PFS, as the format returns to the page orientation
selected by the VMS print command or the system manager.

7.4.3 Unsupported ANSI Translator Features
The ScriptPrinter, Version 2.0, does not support the following ANSI
Text translator features:
•
•

Legal-, Executive-, B-, A3-, B4-, A5-, and B5-size media
Automatic Sheet Feeder Control/Tray Select (DECASFC) control
sequence

In addition, a ScriptPrinter using the ANSI translator, Version 3.0,
does not support the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Assign Type Family or Font (DECATFF) device control string
selective parameter 3
Control Representation Mode (CRM) control sequence
Draw Relative Vector (DECRVEC). control sequence
Select Graphic Rendition (SGR) control sequence selective parameters double underline, overline, superscript, and subscript
Select Size Unit (SSU) control sequence centipoint option
Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) control sequence selective
parameters 10-15
Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP) control sequence selective parameters 10, 12-16
Variable Page Format Select (DECVPFS) control sequence

LN03R ScriptPrinter 7-5

7.5 ReGIS Translator
To use the ReGIS translator, you can send your file to a print queue
that uses this translator by default, or you can specify the translator as
a parameter to the VMS PRINT command, as follows:
$ PRINT/QUEUE=printername file-spec[, .•. ]/PARAMETERS=(DATA_TYPE=REGIS)

When you use the ReGIS translator, the following PRINT command
qualifiers have no effect:
•
•
•

/FEED
/HEADER
/SPACE

The default page orientation·for files printed using the ReGIS translator is portrait.

7.6 Tektronix 4010/4014 Translator
To print your Tektronix 4010/4014 file on the LN03R ScriptPrinter,
send the file to a VMS print queue that uses this translator by default,
or use the VMS PRINT command with the DATA_TYPE parameter
equal to TEK4014:
$ PRINT/QUEUE=printername file-spec[, ... ]/PARAMETERS=(DATA_TYPE=TEK4014)

With DATA_TYPE=TEK4014, the translator ignores the following
PRINT command qualifiers:
•
•
•

/FEED.
/HEADER
/SPACE

This translator uses the default setting of the PAGE_ORIENTATION=
logical-orientation parameter. If not changed by the system manager or
user, the default setting is PAGE_ORIENTATION=portrait.
NOTE

For complete information on submitting print requests, refer
to the VAX/VMS Management/User's Guide: ScriptPrinters.

7-6 LN03R ScriptPrinter

PrintServers

Insert tabbed
divider here.
Then discard
this sheet.

Chapter 8

Pri ntServers
PrintServer Software, Version 3.0, supports printing on the PrintServer
40 and the PrintServer 20. This chapter explains how to use the
ANSI Text, ReGIS, and the Tektronix 4010/4014 translators with the
PrintServer network laser printer family.

8.1

PrintServer 40 Enhancements
The PrintServer 40 has the following new features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Control Representation Mode (CRM) control sequence
Draw Relative Vector (DECRVEC) control sequence
Assign Type Family or Font (DECATFF) device control string
selective parameters for 12 and 16 character font ID assignments
Select Graphic Rendition (SGR) control sequence selective parameters double underline, overline, superscript, and subscript
Select Size Unit (SSU) control sequence centipoint option
Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) control sequence selective
parameters 10--15
Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP) control sequence selective parameters 10; 12--16

PrintServers 8-1

•
•
•
•
•

Variable Page Format Select (DECVPFS) control sequence
Ability to down-load 32 fonts regardless of size
ANSI setup files for ANSI jobs
Improved performance of spacing functions
Improved small job performance

Printing on a PrintServer from an ULTRIX operating system is also
supported by this version of the PrintServer software.

8.2 Down-Line Loaded Font Capacity
A PrintServer system supports fonts permanently resident in the
translator and down-line loaded fonts in DIGITAL Common Font File
Format. Written in ANSI text, down-line loaded font files require
translation into POSTSCRIPT. Up to 32 fonts are available for down-line
loading to a PrintServer when you use the ANSI translator, Version
3.1.

8.3 Selecting a Translator on VMS
On VMS, to select the proper translator - ANSI Text and Sixels,
ReGIS, or Tektronix 4010/4014 - use the /PARAMETERS qualifier for
the PRINT command:
$ PRINT/QUEUE=LPSXX$pserver/PARAMETERS=(DATA TYPE={ANSIIREGISlTEK4014})
file-spec[, ... ]
-

The print symbiont determines if the file requires translation to
POSTSCRIPT, by looking at the DATA_TYPE option. With a DATA_
TYPE other than POSTSCRIPT, the print symbiont calls the appropriate
translator before printing. Data types for the PrintServers include the
following:

8-2 PrintServers

Data Type

Data Translation

ANSI
ANSI2

ANSI data converted by the ANSI translator (see Chapter 3).
ANSI Level 2-ANSI subset for LA100/LA210 (currently
treated as ANSI).
Printing characters plus CR, LF, BS, HT, VT, and FF control
characters (currently treated as ANSI).
Printing characters plus CR, LF, HT, and FF control characters
(currently treated as ANSI).
POSTSCRIPT program data processed by the POSTSCRIPT
interpreter without conversion.
Same as POSTSCRIPT.
ReGIS commands data converted by the ReGIS translator (see
Chapter 5).
Tektronix 4010/4014 graphics commands data converted by the
Tektronix 4010/4014 translator (see Chapter 6).
Printing characters plus CR and LF control characters (currently treated as ANSI).

ASCII
LINE
POSTSCRIPT
PS
REGIS
TEK4014
TEXT

If your system manager defined default queues for a specific translator,
you do not have to use IPARAMETERS=(DATA_TYPE=option) on the
command line.

8.4 Selecting a Filter for Translation on ULTRIX
On ULTRIX, to select the proper filter for translation to POSTSCRIPT,
use the data_type option with the (lpr) command:
% lpr -Pprinter_queuename -Ddata_type file-spec

The ULTRIX print dremon determines if the file requires translation
to POSTSCRIPT, by looking at the data_type option. With a data_type
other than POSTSCRIPT, the print dremon calls the appropnate data
type filter before printing. Data types for the PrintServers include the
following:

PrintServers 8-3

Data_type

Filter for Translation

lll1Si
postscript

ANSI text

POSTSCRIPT
no translation

regis

ReGIS

tek.4014

Tektronix 4010/4014

If the data_type option is not included in the lpr command, the print
ruemon uses the data type described in the /etc/printcap file. The
default data_type in this file is ansi. If no data type entry is found
in the printcap file, the d~mon sends the file to the printer without
translation.
You must specify the name of the destination POSTSCRIPT printer. This
printer should be the one that your system administrator defined in the
/etc/printcap file.
NOTE

ULTRIX is case-sensitive as you enter lpr commands.

8.5 ANSI Text/Sixel Translator
To print your ANSI Text or sixel file on a PrintServer, send your file
to a VMS print queue that uses this translator by default, or use the
appropriate command for your operating system.

•

For VMS use the PRINT command with a DATA_TYPE parameter
of ANSI:
$ PRINT/QUEUE=LPSXX$pserver/PARAMETERS=tDATA_TYPE=ANSI) file-spec

With DATA_TYPE=ANSI, the translator ignores the following
PRINT command qualifiers:

•

/FEED
/HEADER
/SPACE
For ULTRIX use the lpr command with a data_type option of ansi:
% lpr -Pqueuename -Dansi file-spec

8-4 PrintServers

The ANSI Text translator supports the following PrintServer media:
Media

Size

8.50" x 11.00" (216 x 279 mm)

11.00" x 17.00" (279 x 432 mm)

11.69" x 16.54" (297 x 420 mm)

8.27" x 11.69" (210 x 297 mm)

10.12" x 14.33" (250 x 353 mm)

5.83" x 8.27" (148 x 210 mm)

7.17" x 10.12" (182 x 257 mm)

Legal

8.50" x 14.00" (216 x 356 mm)

Executive

7.50" x 10.50" (191x267)

Default Settings

Several initial state values in the ANSI Text translator change, depending on the default setting:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

A-size paper, portrait orientation; landscape orientation
A3-size paper, portrait orientation; landscape orientation
A4-size paper, portrait orientation; landscape orientation
B-size paper, portrait orientation; landscape orientation
Legal-size paper, portrait orientation; landscape orientation
B4-size paper, portrait orientation; landscape orientation
A5-size paper, portrait orientation; landscape orientation
B5-size paper, landscape orientation; landscape orientation
Executive-size paper; portrait orientation; landscape orientation

PrintServers 8-5

If the system manager did not change the default setting, it is A-size
paper, portrait orientation. You can change the default settings to print
your file in the following ways:
•
•

On VMS, use the IPAGE_SIZE=logical-size, /SHEET_SIZE=physicalsize, and IPAGE_ORIENTATION=logical-orientation parameters on
the PRINT command.
On ULTRIX, use the lpr -Fpage_size, lpr -Ssheet_size, or
lpr -Opage_orientation options to the line printer dremon (lpd).

Tables 2-1and2-2 list initial state values that do not change with the
default setting. Tables 2-3 through 2-6 list initial state values for each
of the default settings.
NOTE

For more information on VMS print command qualifiers,
see the Management I User's Guide: VAX PrintServer Client.
ULTRIX users refer to the User's Guide: PrintServer DECnet
Client for ULTRIX or User's Guide: PrintServer TCP I IP
Client for ULTRIX.

8.5.1

Resolution for Sixel Graphics
For the fastest results with sixel graphics on a PrintServer, use a
resolution of 300 dots/inch. Select by using the following settings:
•
•
•
•

PUM =SET (CSI 11 h)
SSU = pixel, 11300" (CSI 7 SP I)
Horizontal grid = 1 (Pn3 parameter of the protocol selector)
Aspect ratio= 111; 2/2; n/n (Set Raster Attributes command DECGRA)

If you select a different integer ratio (300/resolution = integer) or a noninteger ratio, then the printer uses a resolution conversion algorithm
to provide a quality picture from your selected grid. Noninteger ratios
take longer to print than integer ratios.

8-6 PrintServers

8.5.2

Hints, Problems and Solutions
•

Page Format
On VMS, use the Page Format Select sequence (CSI Ps SP J) or the
PRINTIPARAMETERS=PAGE_ORIENTATION=logical-orientation
qualifier in the PRINT command to select the printing orientation,
either portrait or landscape~
On ULTRIX, use the Page Format Select sequence (CSI Ps SP J) or
the lpr -Opage_orientation option to the printer dremon to select the
printing orientation, either portrait or landscape.

•

When you call the translator on VMS or call a filter for translation
on ULTRIX, page orientation defaults to portrait orientation, unless
the system manager or user modifies the switch.
Printable Area

•

The PrintServers do not start printing until 1/4" in from the edge of
the paper. Select the upper-left corner of the printable area rather
than the upper-left corner of the physical page as the starting point
for printing a page.
Landscape Pages
For VMS, use the landscape parameter with the PRINT command:
$ PRINT/PARAMETERS=(PAGE_ORIENTATION=landscape)

For ULTRIX, use the -Olandscape option to the lpr command:
% lpr -Olandscape

Send a PFS sequence to select the landscape format (ESC [ ? 21
SP J) before you send the text. Do not send an RIS or DECSTR sequence after PFS, as the format returns to the page orientation selected by the print command or the system manager/administrator.

PrintServers 8-7

8.5.3

ANSI Text Implementation
The ANSI Text translator will drive your PrintServer at its rated speed,
under the following conditions:
•
•
•
•

Pages consist only of text, with less than 3000 nonoverlapping
characters a page.
Page size is A (8.5" x 11") or A4 (8.3" x 11.7").
The required fonts are cached.
The host computer is suitably loaded.

8.6 ReGIS Translator
To use the ReGIS translator, you can send your file to a VMS print
queue that uses this translator by default, or use the print command
appropriate for your operating system.

•

For VMS specify the ReGIS translator as a parameter to the PRINT
command, as follows:
$ PRINT/QUEUE=LPSXX$pserver/PARAMETERS=(DATA_TYPE=REGIS) file-spec

When you use the ReGIS translator, the following VMS PRINT
command qualifiers have no effect:
/FEED
/HEADER

•

/SPACE
For ULTRIX use the lpr command with a data_type option of reg:
% lpr -Pqueuename -Dreg file-spec

The default page orientation for files printed using the ReGIS translator is portrait.

8-8 PrintServers

8.7 Tektronix 4010/4014 Translator
To print your Tektronix 4010/4014 file on a PrintServer, send the file to
a VMS print queue that uses this translator by default, or use the print
command appropriate for your operating system.

•

For VMS specify the Tektronix 4010/4014 translator on the PRINT
command with the DATA_TYPE parameter equal to TEK4014:
$ PRINT/QUEUE=LPSXX$PSERVER/PARAMETERS=(DATA_TYPE=TEK4014) file-spec

With DATA_TYPE=TEK4014, the translator ignores the following
VMS PRINT command qualifiers:

•

/FEED
/HEADER
/SPACE
For ULTRIX use the lpr command with a data_type option oftek:
% lpr -Pqueuename -Dtek file-spec

This translator uses the default setting of the PAGE_ORIENTATION=
logical-orientation parameter. If not changed by the system manager or
user, the default setting is PAGE_ORIENTATION=portrait.
NOTE

For more complete information on submitting VMS print
requests, refer to the Management I User's Guide: VAX
PrintServer Client. For information on the ULTRIX print
dremon, refer to the User's Guide: PrintServer DECnet Client
for ULTRIX or User's Guide: PrintServer TCP I IP Client for
ULTRIX.

PrintServers 8-9

Appendix A

Character Sets
This appendix shows the 19 character sets supported by the ANSI
Text translator. ISO 646 is the basis for ISO Italian and ISO Spanish
character sets. The ISO Latin-1 Supplemental character set is from
ISO 8859-1. Character sets with a DEC prefix indicate a DIGITAL
private character set. These 'include DEC Dutch, DEC Finnish, DEC
French-Canadian, DEC Norwegian/Danish, DEC Swedish, DEC Swiss,
DEC Supplemental, DEC Technical, DEC Special Graphics, and DEC
Portuguese character sets. Character sets with no prefix are country
standards, JIS Roman being an exception. Table A-1 lists the source
standard for country standard character sets.
Table A-1: Character Set Source Standards
Name of Set
Source Standard
British

BS 4730

ASCII
French

ANSI X3.4-1986
AFNOR NF Z 62-010 (1973)

German
JIS Roman

JIS X 0201

Norwegian/Danish

NS 4551(Version1), DS 2089

DIN 66 003

Character Sets A-1

Figure A-1:

7-Blt ASCII

BB
B7

BITS
84 B3B2 Bl
0 0 0 0

COLUMN

.
1

GL GR

GL GR
3 11

2 10

II
0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0

0 1 1 0

2
3

4
5
6

%
&
I

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

(
)

33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
3B
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
Sl
41
29
s~

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

41
0 0 0

42
2A
S3
43
28
S4
44
2C
55
45

20
S6
46
2E
S7
47
2F

241
161
Al
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
AS
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
AB
251
169
A9
2S2
170
AA
2S3
171
AB
254
172
AC
25S
173
AD
256
174
AE
2S7
17S
AF

1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
9
:

;

<
=

>
?

38
40
61
39
41
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
S4
36
67
55
37
70
56
3B
71
S7
39
72
58
3A
73
S9
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
30
76
62
3E
77
63
3F

260
176
BO
261
177
Bl
262
17B
82
263
179
B3
264
lBO
84
265
1B1
BS
266
1B2
B6
267
183
B7
270
1B4
BB
271
1B5
B9
272
1B6
BA
273
1B7
BB
274
lBB
BC
275
1B9
BO
27f
lr.Q
BE
277
191
BF

1
0

GL GR
@
A
B

c
D
E

G
H

100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
6B
44
105
69
4S
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72

300

K
L

111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115

77
40
116
7B
4E
117
79
4F

192

C3
304
196
C4
305
197

cs
306
19B
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
CB
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

cc
315
20S
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF

.
0

5 13
p
Q

s
T

w
x
y

z
[
\

J
A

120

320

208
DO
321
209
01
322
210
02
323
211
03
324
212
04
325
213
OS
326
214
DB
327
21S
07
330
216
DB
331
217
09
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220

50
121
Bl
51
122
B2
52
123
B3
53
124
B4
54
125
BS
SS
126
86
S6
127
B7
57
130

88
SB
131
89
S9
132

90
5A
133
91
SB
134
92
5C
135
93
50
136
94
5E
137
95
5F

oc
33S
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
OF

a
b

c
d

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
9B
62
143

99
83
144
100

e
f

145
101
BS
146
102

147
103
67
150
104

i
j

I
m
n
0

1S1
105
69
1S2
106
BA
1S3
107
6B
154
108
SC
lSS
109
60
156
110
6E
157
111
6F

340
224
EO
341
225
El
342
226
E2
343
227
E3

p
q
r

344
22B
E4

345
229
ES
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
EB
351
233
E9
3S2
234
EA
353
235
EB
3S4
236
EC
3S5
237
ED
356
238
EE
3S7
239
EF

GL GR
7 15

GL GR
6 14

GL GR

co
301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
195

u
v
w
x
y

{
I

}

160
112
70
161
113
71
182
114
72
163
115
73
184
118
74
185
117
75
166
11B
76
167
119
77
170
120
7B
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
17S
12S
70
176
126
7E

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2
363
243
F3

384
244
F4
385
24S
F5

366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
FB
371
249
F9
·372
250
FA.
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX
*NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR.
BIT BB IS 1.

ASCII CHARACTER SET

A-2 Character Sets

ML0-001451

Figure A-2:

British Character Set

BITS
COLUMN

B4 B3 B2 Bl
0 0 0 0

.
1

GL GR
2 10

!
II

0 0

1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

1 0 1

1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

5
6

8
9
10

'
(

)

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

3J
21
42
J4
22
43
35
23
44
J6
24
45
J7
25
46
38
26
47
J9
27
50
40
2B
Sl
41
29
52
42
2A
SJ
4J
2B
S4
44
2C
55
4S

20
56
46
2E
57
47
2F

241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
AJ
244
164
A4
24S
16S
AS
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
168
AS
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
25J
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AO
256
174
AE
2S7
175
AF

1
2
3

JS
40
61

39
41
62
50
J2
63
51
33

65
S3
JS
66
S4
J6
67
SS
37

262
178
B2
263
179
BJ
264
180
84
265
181
BS
266
182
B6
267
18J
B7

70
S6

270
184

4
5
6

52
J4

71
S7

:
;

=
>
?

260
176
BO
261
177
B1

72
SS
JA
7J
S9
JB
74
60
JC
75
61
30
76
62
3E
77
63
JF

271
18S
B9
272
186
BA
27J
187
88
274
188
BC
275
189
BO
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

1
0

GL GR
3 11

.
1

~
41

0 0 0 1

A
B

c
D
E
F

G
H

I
J

K
L
M
N

100
64

300
192

40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
4J
104
68
44
105
69
4S
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111

7J
49
112
74
4A
llJ
7S
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
40
116
78
4E
117
79
4F

301
19J
C1
J02
194
C2
303
195
CJ
304
196
C4
305
197

cs
J06
198
C6
307
199

C1
310
200
CB
J11
201
C9
J12
202
CA
JlJ
20J
CB
J14
204

cc
315
205

co
316
206
CE
317
207
CF

.
1

GL GR
5 13

GL GR
4 12
@

a
R

s
T

w
x
y

z
[
\

]
A

120

320

208
00
J21
209
01
J22
210
02
323
211
03
J24
212
04
J25
213
05
J26
214
06
J27
215
07

50
121
81
51
122
B2
52
123
83
SJ
124
84
54
125
85
SS
126
86

56
127
87
57
130

BB
SS
131

89
S9
1J2
90
SA
133
91
SB
1J4
92
SC
135
93
50
136
94
SE
1J7
95
SF

223
OF

.
0

GL GR
6 14

'
a
b

c
d

e
f

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102

h
i
j
k

I
m
n
0

340
224
ED
J41
225
El
J42
226
E2
34J
227
EJ
J44
228
E4

68
1S1
105
69
1S2
106
6A

34S
229
ES
J46
230
E6
347
2Jl
E7
J50
2J2
ES
J51
2J3
E9
JS2
2J4
EA

1S3
107
68
1S4
108
SC
155
109
60
156
110
6E
157
111
SF

JSJ
2JS
EB
354
23S
EC
J55
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

330
216
08
3Jl
217
09
JJ2
218
DA
JJJ
219
DB
JJ4
220
DC
335
221
DO
336
222
DE
337

147
103
67
150
104

GL GR
7 15
160
112
70
161
llJ
71
162
114

p
q
r

72
163
115
7J
164
116
74
16S
117
7S
166
118
76

s
t

x
y

{
I

}

167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
17J
12J
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
70
176
126
7E

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2
363
243
FJ
J64
244
F4
J6S
24S
FS

366
246
F6
J67
247
F7
J70
248
FS
371
249
F9
J72
250
FA
J7J
2Sl
FB
J74
2S2
FC
37S
253
FD
J76
254
FE

~---co.,.o,..E~
CHARACTER ~A

1~~

-----

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT 88IS1,

BRITISH CHARACTER SET

MLQ-001452

Character Sets A-3

Figure A-3:

DEC Dutch Character Set

B6
B5

BITS
B4BJ B2 Bl
0 0 0 0

COLUMN

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

5
6

$
%
&
I

JJ
21
42
J4
22
4J
J5
2J
44
36
24
4S
37
2S
46
3B
26
47
39
27

so
1 0 0 0

(

1 0 0 1

)

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

10
11

*
+

12
13

14
15

3
60
JB
40
61

40
2B
51
41
29
52
42
2A
SJ
4J
2B
54
44
2C
SS
4S
20
56
46
2E
57
47
2F

241
161
Al
242
162
A2
24J
163
AJ
244
164
A4
24S
16S
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
2SO
168
AB
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
2SJ
171
AB
2S4
172
AC
2SS
17J
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF

J9
41
62
50
J2
6J
51
J3
64
52
34

2
3
4

6S
S3
JS
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
SB
36
71
57
39

5
6
7

8
9

;

JA
7J
S9
JB
74

60
JC
7S
61
JD
76
62
JE

=
>

77
63
JF

GL GR

260
176
BO
261
177
Bl
262
17B
B2
26J
179
B3
264
1BO
B4
26S
1B1
B5
266
1B2
B6
267
1B3
B7
270
1B4
BB
271
1B5
B9
272
1B6
BA
27J
1B7
BB
274
188
BC
27S
1B9
BO
27B
190
BE
277
191
BF

GL GR

2 10

SP
41

0 0 0 1

GL GR

~
0

•.
.

100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
10J
67
4J
104

D
E

68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110

192

72
48

111
7J

311
201

J
K
L

M
N

112
74
4A
11J
7S
4B
114
76
4C
11S

312
202
CA
J1J
20J
CB
J14
204

77
40
116
78
4E
117
79
4F

s
T

w
x

120

J20

208
00
J21

50
121
Bl
51
122
B2
52
12J
B3
53
124
B4
54
12S
B5
55
126
B6
56
127
B7
57
130
88

cc
J1S
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF

1J1
B9
59
132
90
SA
1JJ
91
SB
1J4
92
SC
1J5
9J
50
136
94
5E
137
95
5F

209
01
J22
210
D2
J23
211
D3
324
212
D4
32S
213
D5
326
214
D6
327
21S
D7
J30
21B
DB
3J1
217
D9
332
218
DA
JJJ
219
DB
J34
220
DC
JJ5
221
DD
J36
222
DE
337
223
OF

'
a
b

c
d

140
96

60
141
97
61
142

98
62
14J
99
6J
144
100

e
f

14S
101
65
146
102

g
h

147
103
67
150
104

i
j

1
m
n
0

151
105
B9
1S2
106
BA
1SJ
107
BB
154
108
BC
1SS
109
BO
156
110
BE
157
111
Bf

340
224
EO
J41
225
El
342
226
E2
J43
227
E3

p
q

344
22B
E4
34S
229
ES

346
230
EB
347
231
E7
350
232
EB
351
2J3
E9
3S2
234
EA
JSJ
2JS
EB

354
236
EC
JSS
2J7
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

GL GR
7 15

Gl GR
6 14

5 13
p

co
301
19J
Cl
J02
194
C2
JOJ
195
CJ
304
196
C4
30S
197
C5
306
19B
C6
307
199
C7
310
200

.
0

GL GR

12
300

v
w

160
112
70
161
11J
71
162
114
72
163
11S
73
164
116
74
16S
117
75
166
118
'/B
167
119

x
y

170
120
7B
171
121
79
172
122
7A
17J
12J
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
70
178
126

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl

362
242

F2
363
243
F3

364
244
F4
36S
24S
F5

366
246
FB
367
247
F7
370
248
FB
J71
249
F9
372
250
FA

rm2S1

'*
252

'+Te"*
253

254

7E~

HIGHLIGHTS

NOTE:
THE FOLLOWING TABLE INDICATES THE APPROXIMATIONS THAT ARE USED
TO REPRESENT THE DUTCH CHARACTERS THAT ARE NOT AVAILABLE IN THE
DECMCS SET. (THESE APPROXIMATIONS ARE TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH THE
VT220 AND VT240.) THE CHARACTER POSITION IN THE CHART IS LISTED
BY COLUMN/ROW.

~:!'6~'l~~~IES

CROOWLUMN/

CHARACTER SET
NAME (SYMBOL)

APPROXIMATION
NAME (SYMBOL)

4/0
S/11
7/11
7112
7114

THREE QUARTERS (314)
LOWERCASE IJ LIGATURE (IJ)
DIAERESIS (")
FLORIN SIGN (I)
ACUTE ACCENT (')

SUPERSCRIPT (')
LOWERCASE y WITH DIAERESIS (y)
QUOTATION MARKS(")
LOWERCASE I (I)
APOSTROPHE, SINGLE QUOTATION MARK,
ASCII ACUTE ACCENT (')

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BB IS 1.

DEC DUTCH CHARACTER SET

MLQ-001453

A-4 Character Sets

Figure A-4:

DEC Finnish Character Set

.
BS

BITS

0 0 0 I

1 0

0 I 0 0

I 0 I

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

&
I

(

1 0 0 1

)

I 0

1 0

I 0 0

1 1 0

1 I ,

14
15

41
33
21
42
34
22
43
JS
23
44
36
24
4S
37
25
46
JB
26
47
39
27
50
40
2B
51
41
29
S2
42
2A
S3
43
28
S4
44
2C
S5
45
20
58
46
2E
57
47
2F

241
161
Al
242
162
A2
243
163
AJ
244
164
A4
245
165
AS
246
166
AS
247
167
A7
2SO
16B
AB
2S1
169
A9
2S2
170
AA
2S3
171
AB
2S4
172
AC
2S5
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF

60
38
40
61
39
41
62
50
32
63
Sl
33
64
S2
34
6S
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
JC
75
61
30
76
62
3E

77
63

1
2
3

5
6
7

8
9
:

;

260
176
BO
261
177
Bl
262
178
82
263
179
83
264
180
84
26S
181
85
266
162
86
267
1B3
87
270
IB4
88
271
185
89
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
27S
189
BO
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

1
0

GL GR
3 11
0

2 10

COLUMN

0 0

.
0

0 0

GL GR

B4 BJ B2 Bl
0 0 0 0

GL GR
@
A
B

c
D
E

F
G

H
I
J

K
L

100
64
40
101
6S
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
7S
48
114
76
4C
115

300
192

77
40
116
78
4E
117
79
4F

cs
306
19B
C6
307
199
C7
310
200

CB
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

cc
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF

.
I

s
T

u
v

x
y

z
A

0
A

120
80
50
121
Bl
SI
122
B2
S2
123
BJ
SJ
124
B4
S4
12S
85
S5
126
B6
56
127
B7
57
130
88
58
131
89
S9
132
90
SA
133
91
SB
1'134
92
5C
13S
93
50
136
94
5E
137
95
5F

320
208
DO
321
209
DI
322
210
02
323
211
03
324
212
04
325
213
05
326
214
06
327
21S
07
330
216
08
331
217
09
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
OF

GL GR

5 13
p

303
19S
CJ
304
196
C4
30S
197

GL GR

co
301
193
Cl
302
194

e
a
b

c
d

140

340
224
EO
341
22S
El
342
226
E2
343
227
EJ
344
22B
E4
34S
229
ES
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
EB
3SI
233
E9
3S2
234
EA
3S3
235
EB
354
236
EC
35S
237
ED
358
238
EE
357
239
EF

60
141
97
61
142
9B
62
143
99
63
144
100
64

e
f

145
IOI
65
146
102

g
h
i
j

1
m
n
0

147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
SA
153
107
68
154
108
SC
155
109
60
156
110
6E
157
111
6F

GL GR
7 15
p

s
t

u
v
w
x
y

a
0

a
u

160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
llS
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
11B
76
167
119
77
170
120
7B
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
12S
70
176
126
7E

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2
363
243
FJ
364
244
F4
36S
245
F5
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
FB
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
2SI
FB
374
2S2
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE

LEGEND ---.""c-io,..
oE~
CHARACTER

101
65
41

301
193
Cl

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BB IS 1.

DEC FINNISH CHARACTER.SET

ML0--001464

Character Sets A-5

Figure A-5:

French Character Set

BITS
COLUMN

B4B3 B2 Bl
0 0 0 0

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

9
10

&
I

(
)

1 0 1 1

I 1 0 0

I I 0 1

11 1 0

I 1 1.J

41
3J
21
42
J4
22
4J
JS
23
44
J6
24
4S
J7
2S
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
2B
Sl
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
SS
45
20
56
46
2E
57
47
2F

______.

241
161
Al
242
162
A2
243
163
AJ
244
164
A4
24S
16S
AS
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
2SO
16B
AB
251
169
A9
2S2
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
25S
173
AD
2S6
174
AE
257
17S
AF

1
2
3
4
5

6
7

8
9
:

;

=
>

1~~

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BB IS I.

FRENCH CHARACTER SET

A-6 Character Sets

60
38
40
61
39
41
62

so
J2
6J
Sl
JJ
64
S2
34
6S
S3
3S
66
S4
36
67
SS
37
70
S6
38
71
S7
39
72
58
3A
7J
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
30
76
62
3E

~ ---c-toD-E~
CHARACTER ~A

GL GR
3 11
0

1 0 1 0

GL GR
2 10

1 0 0 1

0 0 0 1

0 I 1 0

.
1

63
JF

260
176
BO
261
177
Bl
262
17B
82
26J
179
BJ
264
lBO
84
26S
181
B5
266
182
86
267
lBJ
B7
270
184
BB
271
185
B9
272
186
BA
27J
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BO
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

.
0

GL GR
4 12
100
64
40
101
6S
41
102
66
42
10J
67
4J
104
6B
44
lOS
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73

a
A
B

c
D
E
F
G

H
I
J

K
L

cs
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
CB
311
201

C9
312
202
CA
313
20J
CB
314
204

40
116
78
4E
117
79
4F

301
19J
Cl
302
194
C2
30J
19S
CJ
304
196
C4
30S
197

cc
31S
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF

.
1

GL GR
5 13
p

112
74
4A
11J
75
4B
114
76
4C
115

300
192

s
T

v
w
x
y

z
0

c;
§
A

120
80
50
121
Bl
Sl
122
B2
S2
12J
B3
S3
124
B4
S4
12S
BS
SS
126
86
S6
127
87
S7
130
88
5B
131
B9
59
132
90
SA
133
91
SB
IJ4
92
SC
135
93
SD
136
94
SE
137
9S
SF

320
20B
DO
J21
209
01
J22
210
02
323
211
03
J24
212
04
32S
213
OS
326
214
06
327
215
07
JJO •
216
DB
331
217
09
332
218
DA
3J3
219
DB
3J4
220
DC
3JS
221
DD
336
222
DE
3J7
223
OF

.
0

GL GR
6 14
~

a
b

c
d

e
f

g
h

i
j
k

n
0

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
9B
62
14J
99
6J
144
100
64
14S
101
6S
146
102
66
147
lOJ
B7
150
104
6B
1S1
105
69
1S2
106
6A
lSJ
107
6B
154
IOB
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
Ill
6F

340
224
EO
341
22S
El
342
226
E2
J4J
227
EJ
344
228
E4
345
229
E5
346
230
E6
J47
2Jl
E7
J50
2J2
EB
351
23J
E9
352
2J4
EA
35J
2J5
EB
354
2J6
EC
355
2J7
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

GL GR
7 15
p
q
r

s
t

w
x
y

e
u
e

160
112
70
161
llJ
71
"162
114
72
163
11S
73
164
116
74
16S
117
7S
166
llB
76
167
119
77
170
120
7B
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
17S
12S
7D
176
126
7E

J60
240
FO
J61
241
Fl
J62
242
F2
J63
24J
FJ
364
244
F4
36S
24S
FS
J66
246
F6
367
247
F7
J70
248
FB
371
249
F9
J72
250
FA
J73
251
FB
374
252
FC
J75
253
FD
376
254
FE

Nan:
l1tl l'OUOWlllG APl'IDllllA110ll • i.a> TO..,.,....,.
A PMNCM CllWIACT9' '!MAT• NOi' AVMMU II l1tl
DIOMOlllT. !TI*l~110Nl9'1TO•OO.ATal
WITH l1tl VTllO MD Vfta) l1tl OHAMO'IM l'Oll110ll
•THEOHMr• USflDIY~.
~
OHAMO'IMllT
~TION
-

NMm~

NMll~

7114

QUOTATION-(')

MLC-001455

Figure A-6:

DEC French-Canadian Character Set

BITS

0 0 0 0

GL GR
2 10

COLUMN

B4 B3 B2 Bl

.
1

33
21
42
34
22
43
3S
23
44
J6
24

II
0 0

0 0

1 0

1 1

2
3

0 1 0 0

1 0 1

1 1 0

4S
37
2S
46
JB
26
47
J9
27

&
I

1 1 1

so
1 0 0 0

(

1 0 0 1

)

1 0

1 1

1 1 0 0

1 0

1 1 0 1

51
41
29
52
42
2A
S3
4J
2B
S4
44
2C
SS
4S

2D
S6

,. 15

2E
S7
47
2F

1 1 1 0

1 1 1

LEGEND ---.-c-1°-..~
CHARACTER ..,_A
1~~ ~~

241
161
Al
242
162
A2
243
16J
A3
244
164
A4
24S
165
AS
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
2SO
16B
AB
2S1
169
A9
2S2
170
AA
2SJ
171
AB
2S4
172
AC
25S
17J
AD
256
174
AE
2S7
17S
AF

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

8
9
:

38
40
61
39
41
62

so
32
63
Sl
33
64
S2
J4
6S
S3
3S
66
S4
JS
67
S5
J7
70
S6
38
71
S7
39
72

58
JA

;

=
>
?

73
S9
JB
74
60
JC
7S
61
3D
76
62
JE
77
63
3F

260
176
BO
261
177
Bl
262
17B
B2
263
179
B3
264
lBO
B4
26S
1B1
BS
266
1B2
BS
267
1BJ
B7
270
1B4
BB
271
lBS
B9
272
1B6
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
27S
1B9
BO
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

1
0

GL GR
3 11

.
1

~
41

0 0 0

GL GR
4 12

a
A
B

c
D
E

G
H
I

K
L
M

100
64

300
192

101
6S
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104

301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
19S
CJ

6B
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
7S
4B
114
76
4C
11S
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F

304
196
C4
305
197

cs
306
19B
C6
307
199
C7
J10
200
CB
311
201

202
CA
313
20J
CB
314
204

cc
JlS
20s
CD
J16
206
CE
317
207
CF

.
0

120
BO

a
R

s
T

v
w

x
y

z
~
~

'i
'-"
I

121
Bl
Sl
122
B2
S2
123
BJ
SJ
124

B4
S4
125
BS
S5
126
BS
SS
127
B7
S7
130
88
SB
1J1
89
S9
1J2
90
SA
1JJ
91
SB
1J4
92
SC
1J5
9J
SD
1J6
94
SE
137
9S
SF

320
20B
DO
321
209
Dl
322
210
D2
323
211
DJ
324
212
D4
J2S
213
D5
326
214
DS
327
21S
D7
J30
216
DB
3J1
217
D9
3J2
21B
DA
3J3
219
08
JJ4
220
DC
JJS
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
OF

a
a
b

c
d

e
f

140
96

60
141
97
61
142
9B
62
143
99
6J
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102

147
lOJ
67
150
104

i
j

k
I
m

n
0

GL GR
6 14

GL GR
5 13

C9
312

151
105
69
152
106
SA
15J
107
6B
1S4
108
6C
lSS
109
6D
156
110
BE
157
111
BF

340
224
EO
341
225
El
342
226
E2
343
227
EJ
344
22B
E4

p
q
r

s
t

345

229
E5
346
230
E6
347
2J1
E7
350
2J2
EB
3S1
2J3
E9
3S2
2J4
EA
3S3
2JS
EB

354
236
EC
JS5
237
ED
356
238
EE
3S7
239
EF

GL GR
7 15

160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
7S
166
11B
76
167
119

x
y

u
e

170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
12J
7B
174
124
7C
17S
12S
70
176
126
7E

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2
J63
243
FJ
364
244
F4
J65
245
FS

366
246
F6
367
247
F7
J70
248
FB
J71
249
F9
372
250
FA
37J
2S1
FB
J74
2S2
FC
J7S
2S3
FD
37B
254

g~g~AL
HEX

*NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BB IS 1.

DEC FRENCH-CANADIAN CHARACTER SET

ML0-001458

Character Sets A-7

Figure A-7:

German Character Set

.
BS

BITS
COLUMN

B4B3 B2 B1

.
1

GL GR
2 10

41
I

!
II

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1

1 0

5
6

%
&

1 1 1

1 0 0 0

(

33
21
42
34
22
43
3S
23
44
36
24
4S
37
2S
46
3S
26
47
39
27

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

)

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

.
1

GL GR
3 11

2S
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
S4
44
2C
SS
45

20
56
46
2E
57
47
2F

______.

241
ISi
Al
242
1S2
A2
243
1S3
A3
244
164
A4
245
16S
AS
246
lSS
AS
247
167
A7
2SO
16S
AS
2S1
169
A9
2S2
170
AA
253
171
AB
2S4
172
AC
2SS
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF

38
40
SI

39
41
S2
50
32
S3
51
33
64
S2
34

2
3
4
5

6
7

8
9
:

6S
53
35
SS
54
36
S7
5S
37
70
5S
38
71
S7
39
72

58
3A

;

=
>
?

73
59
3B
74
60
JC
75
Sl
30
76
62
3E
77
SJ
3F

260
17S
BO
2S1
177
B1
2S2
17S
B2
2S3
179
B3
264
lSO
B4
26S
IS1
B5
2SS
182
BS
2S7
1S3
B7
270
1S4
BS
271
18S
B9
272
18S
BA
273
1S7
BB
274
188
BC
275
1S9
BO
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

1
0

~
0 0 0 0
0
0 0 0

GL GR
4 12
§

A
B

c
D

E
F

G
H

I
J

K
L
M

100
S4
40
101
S5
41
102
SS
42
103
67
43
104
6S
44
10S
69
4S
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111

300
192

302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
30S
197

cs
306
198

cs
307
199
C7
310
200

p
Q

s
T

u
v

w
x

311
201

112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
11S
77
40
11S
7S
4E
117
79
4F

312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

cc
31S
205
CD
31S
206
CE
317
207
CF

.
0

z
A

u
A

120
BO
50
121
SI
SI
122
S2
S2
123
S3
S3
124
S4
54
12S
SS
SS
12S
8S
SS
127
S7
S7
130
88
SS
131
89
59
132

90
SA
133
91
SB
134
92
5C
13S
93
50
136
94
5E
137
95
5F

320
20S
DO
321
209
D1
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
D4
32S
213
DS
32S
214
DS
327
21S
D7
330
216
DS
331
217
D9
332
21S
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
OF

.
0

GL GR
6 14

GL GR
5 13

co
301
193
Cl

'
a
b

c
d

e
f

140
9S
60
141
97
S1
142
9S
S2
143
99
63
144
100
64
14S
101
S5
146
102
SS
147
103
S7
150
104

i
j

I
m

n
0

151
10S
69
152
106
SA
153
107
SB
154
108
SC
1S5
109
SD
156
110
SE
157
111
6F

340
224
EO
341
225
E1
342
22S
E2
343
227
E3
344
22S
E4
34S
229
E5
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
ES
351
233
E9
352
234
EA
353
23S
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

GL GR
7 15
p

q
r

s
t

u
y

x
y

a
0
ii
8

160
112
70
1S1
113
71
IS2
114
72
1S3
115
73
164
116
74
16S
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
78
174
124
7C
175
125
70
176
126
7E

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2
3S3
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
24S
F5
366
246
FS
367
247
F7
370
248
F8
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE

.LEGEND _ _,_c-io"D"'E~
CHARACTER

..,_A

1~~

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BITBB IS 1.

GERMAN CHARACTER SET

A-8 Character Sets

MLC>--001457

Figure A-8:

ISO Italian Character Set

BITS

0 0 0 0

!
II

0 0

1 0

1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

10
11
12
13

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

(
)

*
+

33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
3B
26
47
39
27
50
40
2B
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45

2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F

241
161
A1
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
16B
AB
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF

38
40
61

1
2
3
4
5
6

39
41
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56

9
:

71
57
39
72

58
3A

;

<
=

>
?

73
59
3B
74

60
3C
75
61
30
76
62
3E
77
63
3F

Bl
262
17B

270
1B4
BB
271
1B5
B9
272
1B6
BA
273
1B7
BB
274
188
BC
275
1B9
BO
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

GL GR
4 12

260
176
BO
261
177

B2
263
179
B3
264
lBO
B4
265
1B1
B5
266
1B2
B6
267
1B3
B7

1
0

GL GR
3 11

.
1

0 0 0 1

GL GR
2 10

COLUMN

B4B3B2B1

.
1

c
D
E
F

G
H

100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
6B
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110

72
48
111

1
J

K
L

M
N

73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
40
116
7B
4E
117
79
4F

300
192

a
R

s
T

w
x
y

C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

cc
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF

.
1

z
0

,;
A

120

320

20B
DO
321
209
Dl
322
210
D2
323
211
D3
324
212
04
325
213
D5
326
214
06
327
215
07
330
216
DB
331
217
09
332
21B
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337

50
121
B1
51
122
B2
52
123
B3
53
124
B4
54
125
B5
55
126
B6
56
127
B7
57
130
BB
5B
131
B9
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
50
136
94
5E
137
95
5F

223
OF

GL GR
6 14

GL GR
5 13

co
301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
19B
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
CB
311
201

'
u
a
b

c
d

e
f

h
i

i
k
1
m

n
0

GL GR
7 15

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
9B
62
143
99
63
144
100
64

340
224
EO
341
225
El
342
226
E2
343
227
E3

145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
6B
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
10B
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
BF

345
229
E5
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
EB
351
233
E9
352
234
EA
353
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114

72
163
115

p
q

73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
11B
76

344

22B
E4

u
v
w

x
y

a
'

•
1

167
119
77
170
120
7B
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
70
176
126
7E

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
245
F5
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
FB
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE

LEGEND ---c-io....
oE~
CHARACTER

..,_A

1~~

~~~~~AL

HEX

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BB IS 1.

ISO ITALIAN CHARACTER SET

MLC>-001458

Character Sets A-9

Figure A-9:

Japanese {JIS Roman) Character Set

.
B5

BITS
COLUMN

B4B3 B2 81
0 0 0 0

GL GR

2 10

!
II

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

#
$

0 1 1 0

0 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

(

1 0 0 1

)

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

14
15

41
0 0 0 1

33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
3B
26
47
39
27
50
40
2B
51
41
2B
5<
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F

-.................._.-

241
161
Al
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
245
165
AS
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
16B
AB
251
16B
AB
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF

1
2
3

4
5
6
7

8
9
:

;

<
=

>
?

260
176
BO
261
177
Bl
262
17B
82
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
B6
267
1B3
B7

38
40
61
39
41
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
S7
39
72
5B
3A
73
5B
3B
74
60
JC
75
61
30
76
62
3E

77
63
3F

270
1B4
BB
271
1BS
BB
272
1B6
BA
273
1B7
BB
274
1BB
BC
275
lBB
BO
27f
1r.o
BE
277
191
BF

1
0

A
B

c
D
E

G
H

12
300
192

40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110

301
193
Cl

121
81
51
122
B2
52
123
83
53
124
B4
54
125
B5
55
126
B6
56
127
B7
57
130

K
L

M
N

73
4B
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115

77
4D
116
7B
4E
117
79
4F

302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
306
19B
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
CB
311
201
CB
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

cc
315
205

co
316
206
CE
317
207
CF

p
Q

s
T

u
v
w
x

z
[

¥
J
/\

120

320

208
00
321

88
SB
131
BB
SB
132

90
5A
133
91
SB
134
B2
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
SE
137
95
5F

209
01
322
210
02
323
211
03
324
212
04
325
213
05
326
214
06
327
215
07
330
216
OB
331
217
OB
332
218
OA
333
21B
OB
334
220

oc
335
221
OD
336
222
DE
337
223
OF

'
a
b

c
d

140
96

60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143

99
63
144
100

e
f

14S
101
6S
146
102

m
n
0

224
EO
341
225
El
342
226
E2
343
227
E3

22B
E4

153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
60
156
110
6E
157
111
BF

353
23S
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

160
112
70
161
113

344

151
10S
69
152
106
6A

147
103
67
150
104

GL GR
7 15

340

34S
229
ES
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
EB
3S1
233
E9
352
234
EA

GL GR
6 14

5 13

111

.
1

100
64

GL GR

GL GR
@

162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
11B
76
167
119

x
y

{

I
}

170
120
7B
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
70
176
126
7E

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl

362
242
F2

363
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
245
FS

366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
FB
371
248
F9
372
250
FA
373
2S1
FB
374
2S2
FC
375
253
FD
376

254
FE

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX

*NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BB IS 1.

JIS ROMAN CHARACTER SET

A-10 Character Sets

ML0-001459

Figure A-10:

DEC Norwegian/Danish Character Set

.
BS

BITS
COLUMN

B4 B3 B2 Bl
0 0 0 0

.
0

GL GR
2 10

1 0

1 1

0 1 0 0

0 0

0 1 0 1

1 1 0

%
&

,
0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

33
21
42
34
22
43
3S
23
44
36
24
45
37
2S
46
38
26
47
39
27

1 0 0 1

1 0

1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

9
10
11
12
13

(
)

*
+

14
15

40
2B
Sl
41
29
S2
42
2A
53
43
2B
S4
44
2C
SS
45

20
58
48
2E
57
47
2F

241
161
Al
242
162

40
61

1
2

A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
24S
16S
AS
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
2SO
168
AB
2S1
169
A9
252
170
AA
2S3
171
AB
2S4
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF

3
4
5

6
7

39
41
62
50
32
63
61
33
64
52
34
6S
S3
3S
66
54
36
67
5S
37
70
S6

9
:

71
S7
39
72

58
3A

;

=
>
?

73
S9
3B
74

60
3C
7S
61
30
76
62
3E
77
63
3F

260
176
BO
261
177
Bl
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
180
B4
26S
1B1
BS
266
182
B6
267
1B3
B7
270
184
BB
271
lBS
B9
272
1B6
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BO
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

II
0 0

GL GR
3 11
0

41
0 0 0

GL GR
4 12

A
A
B

c
D
E

G
H
I
J

K
L

M
N

100
64
40
101
6S
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
6B
44
10S
69
4S
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72

300
192

cs
306
19B
C6
307
199
C7
310
200

.
1

GL GR
5 13
p

co
301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
19S
C3
304
196
C4
30S
197

s
T

u
v

w
x

120

320

208
DO
321

50
121
81
Sl
122
82
S2
123
83
53
124
84
54
12S
8S
5S
126
86
S6
127
87
S7
130
88

111

311
201

131

112
74
4A
113
7S
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
40
116
78
4E
117

312

79
4F

202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

z
..E

31S
205
CD
316

206
CE
317
207
CF

89
S9
132

90
SA
133
91
SB
134
92
SC
135
93
50
136
94
SE
137
95
5F

209
01
322
210
02
323
211
03
324
212
04
32S
213
OS
326
214
06
327
21S
07
330
216
DB
331
217

;123
OF

.
0

GL GR
6 14

a
a
b

c
d

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100

e
f

14S
101
65
146
102

g
h

147
103
67
150
104

09
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337

m
n
0

151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
60
156
110
6E
157
111
6F

340
224

eo
341
22S
El
342
226
E2
343
227
E3
344
22B
E4
34S
229

es
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
EB
3S1
233
E9
352
234
EA
3S3
236
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

GL GR
7 15
p
q

s
t
u

w
~

•

•
a
ii

160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
11S
73
164
116
74
16S
117
75
166
116
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl

362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
36S
24S
FS

366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
246
F8
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE

LEGEND ___c_,o...
oE~
CHARACTER ~A

1~~

g~g;AL

HEX

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT B8IS1.

DEC NORWEGIAN/DANISH CHARACTER SET

MLQ-001460

Character Sets A-11

Figure A-11:

ISO Spanish Character Set

BB
B7

BITS
COLUMN

B483B281
0 0 0 0

.
1

GL GR
3 11
so

0
41

!
II

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

(

3J
21
42
J4
22
4J
JS
2J
44
3S
24
4S
37
2S
4S
38
2S
47
39
27

so
40

1 0 0 1

)

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

11
12
13

1 1 1 0

1 1 1

28
51
41
29
S2
42
2A
53
4J
2B
54
44
2C
55
45

20
56
46
2E
57
47
2F

241
161
Al
242
1S2
A2
24J
1SJ
AJ
244
1S4
A4
245
1SS
AS
246
16S
AS
247
167
A7
250
1SB
AS
251
169
A9
2S2
170
AA
253
171
AB
2S4
172
AC
255
173
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF

38
40
Sl

1
2
3
4
5

6
7

8
9
:

;

<
=

>
?

J9
41
S2
50
J2
6J
Sl
3J
S4
S2
34
S5
S3
35
SS
S4
JS
S7
S5
37
70
SS
38
71
S7
39
72
58
3A
73
S9
JB
74
60
3C
75
Sl
JD
7S
S2
JE
77
63
JF

260
17S
80
261
177
Bl
262
178
B2
2SJ
179
BJ
2S4
180
B4
265
181
BS
2SS
182
BS
2S7
183
B7
270
184
BB
271
18S
B9
272
18S
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
SD
27S
190
BE
277
191
BF

1
0

GL GR
2 10

0 0 0 1

A
B

c
D
E

G
H

1
J

K
L

M
N

100
S4

JOO
192

101
S5
41
102

301
193
Cl
J02
194
C2
JOJ
195
CJ
304
19S
C4
JOS
197

SS
42
10J
S7
4J
104
SB
44
10S
S9
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
7S
4C
115
77
4D
11S
78
4E
117
79
4F

cs
30S
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200

ca
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
J13
203

cs
314
204

cc
315
205
CD
J16
20S
CE
317
207
CF

.
1

GL GR
5 13

GL GR
4 12
§

a
R

s
T

u
v

w
x
y

z
i

'N
(,

120

J20

208
DO
321

50
121
81
51
122
82
52
12J
SJ
5J
124
84
54
12S

as
5S
12S
SS
5S
127
87
S7
130
88
SB
131
89
59
132

90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
9J
5D
13S
94
5E
1J7
9S
SF

209
01
J22
210
02
J2J
211
OJ
J24
212
04
32S
213
05
32S
214
OS
327
215
07
330
21S
08
331
217
09
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
DD
336
222
DE
337

223
OF

c
d

e
f

g
h

140
9S

60
141
97
Sl
142
98
62
14J
99
SJ
144
100
S4
145
101
S5
146
102

66
147
103
67
150
104

i
j

m
n

151
105
S9
152
106
SA
153
107
6B
154
108
SC
155
109
6D
156
110
SE
157
111
SF

J40
224
EO
J41
225
El
J42
22S
E2
J4J
227
EJ
J44
228
E4
J45
229
ES
34S
230
ES
347
231
E7
350
232
EB
351
233
E9
352
234
EA
J5J
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

GL GR
7 15

GL GR
6 14

q
r

s
t
u

v
w

x
y

z
0

"
c;

160
112
70
1S1
11J
71
1S2
114
72
lSJ
11S
7J
1S4
11S
74
1SS
117
7S
1SS
118
76
1S7
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
17J
12J
78
174
124
7C
17S
12S
70
17S
12S
7E

360
240
FO
3S1
241
Fl
3S2
242
F2
3SJ
24J
F3
3S4
244
F4
3SS
245
F5
3SS
246
FS
3S7
247
F7
370
248
FB
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
37J
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
25J
FD
376
254
FE

LEGEND _ _,..c-io,....
oE~
CHARACTER

-:-._A

1~~

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BS IS 1.

ISO SPANISH CHARACTER SET

A-12

Character Sets

MLC>-001461

Figure A-12:

DEC Supplemental Character Set

BB
B7

BS
BS

BITS
B4 B3 B2 Bl

0 0 0 0

0 0 0

0 0

1 0

l
COLUMN

*
1

GL GR
3 11

241

161
Al

21
42
34

22
43
0 0

1 1

0 1 0 0

1 0

1 1 0

1 1 1

23
44

A3
244

36
24

1S4
A4

245
1S5

3B
26
47

162
A2

37
25
46

39
27

AS
246
166
AS
247
167
A7

1 0

29
S2
42
2A

2SO
16B
AB
2S1
169
AS
2S2
170
AA

1 0

1 1

((

S3
43

2S3
171

2B
S4
44
2C
S5
45

AB
2S4

AD
2S6
174
AE

1 0 0 0

1 0 0

8
9

1 1 0 0

1 1 0

):::(

2B
Sl
41

SS
1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

14
15

46
2E
S7
47
2F

3B
40
61

242

243
1S3

172
AC
2SS
173

2S7
175
AF

39
41
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34

µ
~

.
))

y..
Yz

179
B3
264
lBO
B4
265
1B1

35
66
54

BS
266
1B2

3S
S7

BS
2S7
1B3
B7

S5
37
SS
3B
71
57
39
72

262
17B
B2
263

65
53

260
176
BO
261
177
Bl

58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
JC
7S
61
30
76
62
3E
77
63
3F

270
1B4
BB
271
1B5
BS
272
1B6
BA
273
1B7
BB
274
188
BC
27S
1B9
BO
276
190
BE
277
1S1
BF

1
0

GL GR
2 10
0

*
1
1

~
0

A
A
A.

e
E
•E•

i
i
1
y

.
0

GL GR
4 12

GL GR
5 13

100

300
192

120

320

20B
DO
321

64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
S7
43
104
SB
44
105

SS
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
4S
112
74
4A
113
7S
4B
114
76
4C
11S
77
40
11S
78
4E
117

jg
4F

301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
305
197

cs
306
19B

cs
307
199

0
6
0
0

0
CE

C7
310
200
CB
311
201

C9
312
202
CA

u
u

313
203
CB
314
204

cc
31S
205
CD
316

51
122
B2
52
123
B3
53
124
B4
S4
125
B5
55
126
BS
S6
127
B7
S7
130
88
SB
131
B9
SS
132
90
SA
133
91
SB
134

i.i

206
CE
317
207
CF

121
Bl

S2
SC
13S
93
SD
136
S4
SE
137
9S
SF

209
01
322
210
02
323
211
03
324
212
04
325
213
OS
326
214

a
a
a
a

a·
a
CB

e
8'

DA
333
219

9•

223
OF

140
96

340
224

EO
341

160
112
70
161

360
240
FO
361

113

241
Fl
362

141
97
61
142

225
El
342

9B
62

226
E2

143

343
227
E3

99
63
144
100

"
0

344

71
162
114

242
F2

1S3
115

363
243

73
164

364

11B
74
1B5

22B
E4

145

345

101

229
ES
346
230

()

7S
166
11B

ES
347
231

167
119

65
146
102

103
67
150
104

68
1S1
105
69
152
106

SA
153
107

108

109
60
156
110
SE
1S7

SC
1S5

·,·

GL GR
7 15

GL GR
6 14

SB
154

DB
334

DD
336
222
DE
337

.
0

147

09
332
218

220
DC
335
221

06
327
21S
07
330
216
DB
331
217

111
SF

E7
350
232
EB
351
233
ES
3S2
234
EA
3S3
235
EB
3S4
236
EC
3SS
237
ED
3S6
238
EE
3S7

117

Ill

u
u

u·
y

F3
244
F4
366
245
F5

366
246
F6

367
247
F7

170

370

120
78
171
121

248
FB
371
249

79
172
122
7A
173
123
78
174
124
7C
175
125
70
176
126
7E

F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
37S
253
FD
376
254
FE

239
EF

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX
*NOTE·
WHEN SET JS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT B8 IS 1.

DEC SUPPLEMENTAL CHARACTER SET

MLQ-001462

Character Sets A-13

Figure A-13:

ISO Latln-1 Character Set -

.
B6

BITS
COLUMN

B483B281
0 0 0 0

.
1

GL GR
2 10

GL GR
3 11
60

~
0

33
21
42
34
22
43
3S
23
44
36
24
4S
37
2S
46
38
26
47
39
27
so
40

II
0 0

1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

2
3

4
5

,
0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

1 0

7
(

1 1 0 0

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

28
Sl
41
29
S2
42
2A

)

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 1

41
0 0 0

S3
43
2B
S4
44
2C
S5
4S

20
S6
46
2E
S7
47
2F

14
15

___

.._

241
161
Al
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
24S
16S
AS
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
2SO
168
AB
2S1
169
A9
2S2
170
AA
2S3
171
AB
2S4
172
AC
255
173
AD
2S6
174
AE
257
17S
AF

38
40
61

1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8

39
41
62
so
32
63
S1
33
64
S2
34
65
S3
35
66
S4
36
67
SS
37
70
S6

38
71

9
:
;

<
=

>
?

S7
39
72
SB
3A
73
S9
3B
74
60
JC
75
61
30
76
62
3E
77
63
3F

260
176
BO
261
177
81
262
178
82
263
179
83
264
180
B4
26S
181
BS
266
182
86
267
183
B7
270
184
88
271
18S
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BO
27f
lf,()
BE
277
191
BF

Left Half

1
0

GL GR
4 12

@
A
B

c
D

100
64
40
101
6S
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104

68
44

G
H

105
69
4S
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72

48
111

K
L
M
N

112
74
4A
113
7S
4B
114
76
4C
115

77
40
116
78
4E
117
79
4F

300
192

cc
31S
20S
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF

.
1

120

320

208
DO
321
209
01
322
210
02
323
211
03
324
212
04
325
213
OS
326
214
06

s
T

w
x
y

z
[
\

]
A

121
81
Sl
122
82
S2
123
83
S3
124
B4
S4
125
BS
SS
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131

89
S9
132

90
SA
133
91
SB
134
92
SC
135
93
SD
136
94
SE
137
9S
SF

327
21S
07
330
216
08
331
217
09
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
33S
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
OF

.
0

GL GR
6 14

GL GR
5 13

co
301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
19S
C3
304
196
C4
30S
197
cs
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
CB
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

'
a
b

c
d

e
f

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143

99
63
144
100
64
14S
101
6S
146
102

g
h

147
103
67
150
104

i
j

m
n
0

1S1
lOS
69
1S2
106
6A
1S3
107
68
1S4
108
BC
155
109
60
156
110
6E
1S7
111
6F

340
224
EO
341
22S
El
342
226
E2
343
227
E3

160
112
70
161
113

162
114

s
t

345
229
Es

230
E6
347
231
E7
350
232
EB
3S1
233
E9
3S2
234
EA
353
23S
EB
354
236
EC
356
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

GL GR
7 15

344
22B
E4

346

v
w

72
163
11S
73
164
116
74
165
117
7S
166
118
76
167
119

x
y

{
I

}

170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
12S
70
176
126
7E

360
240
FD
361
241
Fl

362
242
F2
363
243
F3

364
244
F4
365
245
FS

366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
246
FB
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
2S1
FB
374
2S2
FC
375
253
FD
376
254
FE

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BB IS 1.

ASCII CHARACTER SET

A-14 Character Sets

MLD-001451

Figure A-14:

ISO Latin-1 Character Set -

BITS
B4B3B2B1

COLUMN

0 0 0 0

~ NBSP

o o 1 o

i
¢

o o 1 1

0 1 0 0

):;:(

o 1 o 1
0

1 1 0

I
I

1 1 1

1 0 0 0

o o 1

1 0

1 1

1 1 0 0

..
©
~

((

...,

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

33
21
42
34
22
43
3S
23
44
36
24
4S
37
2S
46
38
26
47
39
27

so
40
2B
Sl
41
29
S2
42
2A
S3
43
28
S4
44
2C
SS
4S
20

1 1 1 1

46
2E
S7
47
2F

241
161
Al
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
24S
16S
AS
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
2SO
16B
AB
2S1
169
A9
2S2
170
AA
2S3
171
AB
2S4
172
AC
2SS
173
AD
256
174
AE
2S7
17S
AF

60
38
40
61

±
2

'
µ.

•.
I

39
41
62

so
32
63
Sl
33
64
S2
34
6S
S3
3S
66
S4
36
67
SS
37
70
S6
38
71
S7
39

72
58
3A

»
114
Yz

%
l

73
S9
3B
74
60
3C
7S
61
30
76
62
3E
77
63
3F

260
176
BO
261
177
Bl
262
178
B2
263
179
B3
264
1BO
B4
26S
1B1
BS
266
182
B6
267
1B3
B7
270
1B4
BS
271
18S
B9
272
1B6
BA
273
1B7
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BO
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

1
0

GL GR
3 11

GL GR
2 10

o o o 1

Right Half

GL GR
4 12

iS.

A
~

A
A
~

e
e
E
•E•

1
1
1

100
64

300
192

101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104

301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
196
C4
30S
197

6B
44
lOS
69
4S
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
7S
4B
114
76
4C
11S
77
40
116
78
4E
117
79
4F

cs
306
19B
C6
307
199
C7
310
200

C8
311
201

C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

cc
31S
20S
CD
316

206
CE
317
207
CF

.
1

GL GR
5 13

-0

0
6
6
0

x
0

u
u
0

ii
y

r
B

120
BO

so
121
81
Sl
122
82
S2
123
83
S3
124
84
S4
12S
BS
SS
126
86
S6
127
B7
S7
130

88
SB
131
B9
S9
132

90
SA
133
91
SB
134
92
SC
13S
93
SD
136

94
SE
137
9S
SF

320
208
00
321
209
01
322
210
02
323
211
03
324
212
04
32S
213
OS
326
214
06
327
21S
07
330
216
DB
331
217
09
332
21B
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
33S
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
OF

GL GR
6 14

140

96
60

a
a
a

a·

a
ae

141
97
61
142
9B
62
143

99
63
144
100

64
14S
101
SS
146
102

e
e
~

-e
'I
I
I

·,·

147
103
67
150
104
SB
1S1
105
69
1S2
106
SA
1S3
107
6B
1S4
108
6C
lSS
109
60
1S6
110
6E
1S7
111
6F

340
224
EO
341

22S
El
342

226
E2
343
227
E3

0
6

344
228
E4
34S
229
ES
346
230
E6
347
231
E7
3SO
232
EB
3S1
233
E9
3S2
234
EA
3S3
23S
EB

354
236
EC
35S
237
ED
3S6
238
EE
3S7
239
EF

GL GR
7 15

()

.
fl/

u
u

u·
y

p
y

160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
11S
73
164
116
74
16S
117
7S
166
11B
76
167
119
77
170
120
7B
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
17S
12S
70
176
126
7E
177
127
7F

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
36S
24S
FS
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
FS
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
2S1
FB
374
2S2
FC
37S
2S3
FD
376
254
FE
377
255
FF

LEGEND ---.l""c-io,..,oE~
CHARACTER ~A

1~~

g~g,!-AL

HEX

*NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BB IS 1.

ISO LATIN-1 SUPPLEMENTAL CHARACTER SET

MLQ--001463

Character Sets A-15

Figure A-15:

DEC Swedish Character Set

BS
B7

B6
B5

BITS

0 0

0 0 0

~
0

0 0 1 0

0 0 I 1

I 0 0

1 0

I 1 0

I 1 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

I 0 0

I 0 1

8
9
10
11

12
13

241

33
21
42

161
Al

242
162

22
43

A2
243

JS
23
44

163
A3
244
164

36
24
4S
37
2S
46
3S
26
47
39
27
so
40

(

2B
Sl
41
29
S2

)

*
+

I 1 0

I 1 1

14
15

11
260
176
BO
261
177

3B
40
61

41
62
so
32
63

Sl
33

262
17S
B2
263
179

S2
34

lBO
B4

26S

SJ
3S
66
S4
36
67

181

BS
266
182

6
7

S5
37
70

S6
38
71

9
:

S7
39
72

B6
267
183
270
1B4
BB
271
18S

2B
S4
44

AB
2S4

3B
74

BB
274

2C
SS

AC
2SS
173

AE
2S7
17S

=
>
?

60
3C
7S
61
30
76
62
3E
77
63
3F

G
H

B9
272
1B6

;

273
1B7

AD
2S6
174

73
S9

BJ
264

SB
3A

172

2S3
171

46
2E
S7
47

250
16B
AS
2S1
169
A9
2S2
170

3
60

SJ
43

42
2A

S6
1

A6
247
167
A7

AS
246
166

245
16S

GL GR
0

1 0 0

2 10

COLUMN

I 0 0 0

.
1

GL GR

8483 B2 Bl

0 0

188
BC
27S
1B9
BO
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

1
0

100

300

192

40
101

65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43

301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
19S
CJ

104

304

68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111

196

73
49
112
74
4A

C4
305
197
cs
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
CB
311
201

202
CA

113
7S
4B
114

203
CB
314

76
4C
11S
77

31S
20s

40
116
7B

K
L

4E
117

79
4F

cc
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF

13
320

BO
50
121

20S
DO
321

Bl
Sl
122

209
01
322

B2
S2
123

210
02

s
T

w
x

BJ
S3
124
B4
S4
12S
8S
SS
126
86
S6
127
B7
S7
130
88

z
A

131
B9
S9
132
90
SA
133
91
SB
134

0
A

92
SC
13S
93
SD
136

323
211
03

32S
213
OS
326
214
06
327
21S
07
330
216
OB
331
217
09
332
21B
DA
333
219

220
DC
33S
221

SE
137
9S
SF

223
OF

140

340
224

96
60
141

EO
341

97
61
142

22S
El
342

226
E2
343

62
143

227
EJ

100
64

22B
E4

145
101

34S

65
146
102

66
147

103

67
150
104

lSl
lOS
69
1S2

j
k

106
6A
1S3
107
6B
1S4

I
m
n
0

99
63
144

DB
334

DD
336
222
DE
337

324
212
04

GL GR
6 14

120

313

204

GL GR

C9
312

lOB
6C
lSS
109
60
1S6
110
6E
1S7
111
6F

231
E7
350
232
EB
3Sl
233
E9
352
234
EA
3S3
23S
EB
3S4
236
EC
3SS
237
ED
356
238
EE
3S7
239
EF

160

360
240
FO
361
241

112
70
161
113

71
162
114

72
163
llS
73
164

344

229
ES
346
230
E6
347

GL GR

116

74
16S
117

7S
166
118
76

167
119

77
170
120
7S
171

a
0

a
u

121
79
172
122
7A
173
123

Fl
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
365
245
FS
366
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
248
FS
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
2S1

7B
174

FB
374

124

2S2
FC
37S

7C
17S
12S
70
176
126
7E

2S3
FD
376
254
FE

~ _....,l""c-io,..,.oE~
CHARACTER ~A

1~~

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX

*NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BB IS 1.

DEC SWEDISH CHARACTER SET

A-16 Character Sets

ML0-001464

Figure A-16:

DEC Swiss Character Set

GL GR

2 10

0
41
JJ

0 0 0 1

40
28
Sl
41
29
S2
42
2A
5J
4J
2B

241
161
Al
242
1S2
A2
24J
16J
AJ
244
1S4
A4
24S
16S
AS
246
186
AS
247
167
A7
250
188
AB
2S1
189
A9
2S2
170
AA
2SJ
171
AB

254

44
2C
5S
4S
20

172
AC
2SS
17J
AD

256

46
2E
S7
47
2F

174
AE
2S7
175
AF

21
II

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 ,

1 1 1 1

42
J4
22
4J
JS
23
44
36
24
45
J7
25
46
38
26
47
J9
27

___ __
......

3
4

5
6

7
8
9

<
=

>
?

GL GR

60
38
40
61
39
41
62
50
J2
6J
Sl
3J
64
S2
34
6S
SJ
JS
66
S4
JS
67
SS
J7
70
56
38
71
S7
39
72
58
JA
7J
59
JB
74
60
JC
7S
81
JO
7S
82
JE
77
83
JF

260
17S
BO
2S1
177
Bl
262
17B
B2
2SJ
17B
BJ
2S4
180
B4
2SS
1B1
BS
266
182
BS
2S7
183
B7
270
184
BB
271
18S
B9
272
186
BA
27J
187
BB
274
188
BC
27S
189
BO
278
190
BE
277
191
BF

100
S4
40
101
6S
41
102
66
42
10J
67
4J
104
88
44
10S
S9
4S
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
7J
49
112
74
4A
11J
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
40
116
78
4E
117
79
4F

300
192

120

320

208

50
121
81
Sl
122
82
S2
12J
83
SJ
124
84
S4
12S
85
S5
126
86
SS
127
87
S7
130
88
58
1J1
89
S9
1J2
90
SA
133
91
SB
1J4
92
SC
IJS
9J
SD
136
94
SE
1J7
9S
SF

DO
J21
209
01
J22
210
02
32J
211
OJ
324
212
04
J25
21J
OS
326
214
06
327
21S
07
J30
216
08
JJ1
217
09
JJ2
218
DA
JJJ
219
DB
334
220
DC
JJS
221
OD
336
'222
DE
JJ7
22J
OF

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
14J
99
6J
144
100
64
14S
101
6S
146
102
66
147
10J
67
150
104
88
1S1
105
69
1S2
106
6A
1SJ
107
6B
154
6C
ISS
109
80

340
224
EO
J41
22S
El
342
226
E2
34J
227
EJ
344
228
E4
34S
229
ES
J46
230
ES
347
2J1
E7
J50
2J2
EB
J51
233
E9
352
234
EA
35J
2JS
EB
354
238
EC
JSS
2J7
ED

156

J56

110
BE
1S7
111
6F

238
EE
357
239
EF

c
D

F
G
H
I

J
K
L

M
N

DECS\VISS CHARACTERSET

co
301
19J
Cl
302
194
C2
30J
19S
CJ
304
196
C4
30S
197

cs
306
198
C6
307
199
C7
J10
200
C8
J11
201
C9
J12
202
CA
JlJ
20J
CB
J14
204
CC
J1S
20S

co
J16
206
CE
J17
207
CF

s
T

v
w
x
y

a
b

c
d

•
g
h

1
m

n
0

108

p
q

u
y

x
y

160
112
70
181
11J
71
1S2
114
72
18J
11S
7J
164
118
74
18S
117
7S
186
11B
78
167
119
77
170
120
7B
171
121
79
172
122
7A

380
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2
36J
24J
FJ
364
244
F4
36S
24S
FS
368
246
F6
387
247
F7
J70
248
F8
J71
249
F9
J72
250
FA

NOTE:
AT COLUMN/ROW 5115 LOWERCASE e WITH GRAVE ACCENT
REPLACES UNDERLINE U WHICH IS USED IN ASCII AND
ALL OTHER NRC SETS.

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
llTlllSI.

GL GR

HIGHLIGHTS
DIFFERENCES
FROM ASCII
MLQ-001465

Character Sets A-17

Figure A-17:

DEC Technical Character Set

BITS
84 B3B2 Bl
0 0 0 0

COLUMN

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1

1 0

1 0 1 1

(

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

GL GR
2 10

GL GR
3 11

)

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

.
1

0 0 0 1

0 1 0 0

.
1

41
33
21
42
34
22
43
3S
23
44
3S
24
4S
37
2S
4S
38
2S
47
39
27
50
40
28
Sl
41
29
S2
42
2A
S3
43
2B
S4
44
2C
55
45

2D
56
4S
2E
S7
47
2F

241
161
Al
242
1S2
A2
243
1S3
A3
244
1S4
A4
245
lSS
AS
24S
16S
AS
247
1S7
A7
250
1S8
AS
2Sl
1S9
A9
2S2
170
AA
2S3
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
173
AD
25S
174
AE
2S7
17S
AF

\
I
-,
_J

)

~
~

60
38
40
61
39
41
62
50
32
63
Sl
33
64
52
34
S5
53
35
66
S4
36
S7
55
37
70
S6
38
71
S7
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74

so
3C
75
Sl
30
76
62
3E
77
63
3F

260
176
BO
261
177
Bl
262
17B
B2
263
179
B3
2S4
180
B4
2S5
181
85
2S6
182
BS
2S7
183
B7
270
184
BS
271
185
B9
272
18S
BA
273
187
BB
274
188
BC
27S
189
BO
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

...
oc
00

.
fl

cp
r
"'
~

e
x
A
¢:)

1
0

GL GR
4 12
100
S4
40
101
SS
41
102
S6
42
103
S7
43
104

sa
44
105
S9
4S
106
70
4S
107
71
47
110

72
46
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
7S
4B
114
7S
4C
115

71
40
116
7B
4E
117
79
4F

300
192

co
301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
19S
CJ
304
19S
C4
305
197
C5
306
198

cs
307
199
C7
310
200

ca
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

cc
315
20S
CD
31S
20S
CE
317
207
CF

.
1

GL GR
5 13

rr
'I'

v
.n
.....
.....

T
c:
:::>

n
u
/\

120
80

so
121
Bl
Sl
122
82
S2
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
SS
126
86
SS
127
87
57
130
88

sa
131
89
S9
132
90
SA
133
91
5B
134
92
SC
13S
93
SD
136
94
5E
137
9S
SF

320
208
DO
321
209
Dl
322
210
02
323
211
03
324
212
04
325
213
DS
32S
214
DS
327
21S
07
330
21S
08
331
217
09
332
218
DA
333
219
08
334
220
DC
33S
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
OF

..,
()(,

x
~

4>
y

11
1

e
K

.
0

GL GR
6 14
140
9S
60
141
97
Sl
142
9B
62
143
99
S3
144
100
64
145
101
SS
146
102
66
147
103
S7
150
104

340
224

eo
341
22S
El
342
226
E2
343
227
E3
344
228
E4
345
229
ES
346
230
ES
347
231
E7
350
232

1S1
10S
S9
152
106
SA
1S3
107
SB
1S4
108
SC
lSS
109
60
1S8
110
SE
1S7
111
SF

3Sl
233
E9
3S2
234
EA
3S3
23S
EB
3S4
236
EC
3SS
237
ED
356
238
EE
3S7
239
EF

GL GR
7 15

"'
p

a
't

I
w
~
lJ

l;,
~

...
~

160
112
70
lSl
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
78
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
17S
12S
70
176
126
7E

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2

363
243
F3

364
244
F4
365
245
F5
366
246
FS
367
247
F7
370
246
F8
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
2S1
FB
374
2S2
FC
37S
253
FD
376
254
FE

OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX
•NOTE'
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT B81S 1.

DEC TECHNICAL CHARACTER SET

A-18

Character Sets

MLD-001466

Figure A-18:

DEC Special Graphics Character Set

B7
B6

BITS
COLUMN

B4B3B2B1
0 0 0 0

.
1

GL GR
2 10

o o 1 o

!
II

o o

1 0

1 1 0

&
I

0 1 1 1

o o o

(

o o 1

)

33
21
42
34
22
43
3S
23
44
36
24
4S
37
2S
46
3B
2S
47
39
27

1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1

o 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

40
2B
Sl
41
29
S2
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
SS
4S

2D
SS
46
2E
S7
47
2F

241
161
Al
242
162
A2
243
163
A3
244
164
A4
24S
16S
AS
246
166
AS
247
1S7
A7
2SO
lSB
AB
2S1
1S9
A9
2S2
170
AA
2S3
171
AB
254
172
AC
2SS
173
AD
256
174
AE
2S7
17S
AF

38
40
61

1
2

3
4
5
6
7

39
41
62

so
32
63
Sl
33
64
S2
34
6S
S3
3S
66
S4
36
67
SS
37
70
SS

9
:

;

=
>
?

71
S7
39
72
SB
3A
73
S9
3B
74

so
JC
75
S1
30
7S
S2
3E
77

63
3F

260
176
BO
261
177
B1
262
17B
B2
263
179
B3
264
lBO
B4
26S
lBl
BS
266
1B2
B6
2S7
1B3
B7
270
1B4
BB
271
lBS
B9
272
1BS
BA
273
1B7
BB
274
188
BC
27S
1B9
BO
27S
190
BE
277
191
BF

1
0

GL GR
3 11

0 0 1 1

0 1

.
1

~
0
41

o o o 1

GL GR
@

A
B

c
D
E
.F

G
H
1

100
64
40
101
6S
41
102
66
42
103
S7
43
104
6B
44

300
192

lOS
S9
4S
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73

K
L
M

112
74
4A
113
7S
4B
114
7S
4C
115
77
40
116
7B
4E
117
79
4F

C2
303
19S
C3
304
19S
C4
30S
197

cs
306
19B
C6
307
199
C7
310
200
CB
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

cc
315
20S
CD
31S
206
CE
317
207
CF

p
Q

s
T

v
w

x
y

z
[

']
A

(BLANK)

120
BO
50
121
Bl
S1
122
B2
S2
123
B3
S3
124
B4
S4
12S
BS
SS
126
B6
S6
127
B7
S7
130
88
SB
131

89
S9
132

90
SA
133
91
SB
134
92
SC
135
93
SD
136
94
SE
137
9S
SF

320
20B
DO
321
209
01
322
210
02
323
211
03
324
212
04
32S
213
OS
326
214
OS
327
21S
07
330
216
DB
331
217
09
332
21B
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
33S
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
OF

GL GR

GL GR
5 13

co
301
193
C1
302
194

•
B

~
~
~
~
0

±
~

\
J

r
L

t
SCAN 1

140
96

340
224
EO
341
22S
El
342
226
E2
343
227
E3
344
22B
E4
34S

60
141
97
61
142
9B
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
14S
101
6S
146
102
S6
147
103
67
150
104

68
lSl
lOS
S9
1S2
106
6A
153
107
SB
154
108
6C
15S
109
60
1S6
110
SE
1S7
111
BF

229
ES
346
230
ES
347
231
E7
350
232
EB
3S1
233
E9
352
234
EA
3S3
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
35S
238
EE
3S7
239
EF

GL GR
7 15

SCAN 3

SCAN 5

SCAN 7

160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
1S3
11S

SCAN9

164
116
74
16S
117
7S
166
llB
76

i
l.

I
~
~
11

1S7
119

77
170
120
7B
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
12S
70
176
126
7E

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
364
244
F4
36S
24S
FS
366
246
FS
3S7
247
F7
370
248
FB
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
374
252
FC
375
2S3
FD
376
254
FE

LEGENo _ ......r-c-iD,..,oE~
CHARACTER

-:-..A

1~~

g~g~AL

HEX

•NOTE·
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BB IS 1.

DEC SPECIAL GRAPHICS CHARACTER SET

MLC-001467

Character Sets A-19

Figure A-19:

Norwegian/Danish Character Set

BITS
B4B3B2Bl
0 0 0 0

COLUMN

.
1

GL GR
2 10

GL GR
3 11
60

~
0

33
21
42
34

0 0

1 0

22
43
J5
2J
44

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

J6
24

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

(

1 0 0 1

)

1 0 1 0

1 0

1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

41
0 0 0 1

45
J7
25
46
38
26
47
J9
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
S4

44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
S7
47
2F

LEGEND ---C""OD....E~
CHARACTER ~A
1~~ ~;
41

241
161
Al
242
162
A2
243
16J
AJ
244
164
A4
245
165
A5
246
166
A6
247
167
A7
250
16B
AB
251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
AB
254
172
AC
255
17J
AD
256
174
AE
257
175
AF

1
2

4
5

6
7

9
:
;

<
=

>
?

38
40
61
39
41
62
50
32
63
51
3J
64
52
34
65
5J
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
JC
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F

260
176
BO
261
177
Bl
262
178
B2
263
179
BJ
264
180
B4
265
181
B5
266
182
86
267
18J
87
270
184
BB
271
1B5
89
272
186
BA
27J
187
BB
274
188
BC
275
189
BD
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

g~g,,:-AL
HEX

.
0

A
B

c
D
E

G
H

I
J

K
L
M

100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
4J
104

68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F

300
192

co
301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
195
CJ
304
196
C4
305
197
C5
J06
198
C6
307
199
C7
JlO
200

cs
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

a
R

s
T

u
v

w
x
y

cc
315
205
CD
316
206
CE
317
207
CF

.
0

120

320

20B
DO
321

50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
SJ
5J
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
B7
57
130

88
58
lJl
B9
59
132
90
5A
133
91
SB
134
92
SC
135
9J
50
1J6
94
SE
137
95
SF

209
Dl
322
210
D2
323
211
DJ
324
212
D4
325
21J
DS
326
214
D6
327
215
D7
330
216
DB
331
217
D9
332
218
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
335
221
00
336
222
OE
3J7
223
OF

'
a
b

c
d

e
f

g
h

i
j
k

1
m

n
0

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
6J
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
6B
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
60
156
110
6E
157
111
6F

340
224
EO
341
225
El
342
226
E2
343
227
EJ
J44
228
E4
J45
229
E5
J46
230
E6
J47
231
E7
J50
232

ea
351
23J
E9
352
234
EA
35J
235
EB
354
236
EC
355
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

GL GR
7 15

GL GR
6 14

GL GR
5 13

GL GR
4 12

•

160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114

72
163
115

p
q

x
y

164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
12S
70
176
128
7E

J60
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2
J6J
24J
F3
J64
244
F4
J65
245
FS
J66
246
F6
J67
247
F7
370
248
F8
371
249
F9
372
250

~
251

~
252

t-M25J

~
254
FE

HIGHLIGHTS
DIFFERENCES
FROM ASCII

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR.
BIT 88 IS 1.

NORWEGIAN/DANISH CHARACTER SET

A-20

Character Sets

ML0-001468

Figure A-20:

DEC Portuguese Character Set

BITS

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

&
I

41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
3S
24
45
37
25
46
3S
2S
47
39
27

so
1 0 0 0

(

1 0 0 1

)

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

40
2S
51
41
29
S2
42
2A
S3
43
2B
54
44
2C
S5
4S
20
S6
46
2E
S7
47
2F

241
lSl
Al
242
1S2
A2
243
1S3
A3
244
1S4
A4
245
1S5
A5
246
lSS
AS
247
167
A7
250
16S
AS
251
1S9
A9
2S2
170
AA
2S3
171
AB
2S4
172
AC
2S5
173
AO
2S6
174
AE
257
17S
AF

.
1

1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8
9
:
j

=
>
?

so
3S
40
Sl
39
41
S2
50
32
S3
51
33
S4
52
34
S5
53
35
6S
54
3S
S7
SS
37
70
SS
36
71
57
39
72
SS
3A
73
S9
3B
74
60
3C
7S
61
30
7S
62
3E
77
S3
3F

260
17S
BO
2Sl
177
Bl
2S2
17S
B2
2S3
179
B3
2S4
180
B4
2S5
1Sl
B5
2SS
1S2
BS
2S7
1S3
B7
270
1S4
BS
271
1S5
B9
272
lSS
BA
273
187
BB
274
18B
BC
27S
189
BO
276
190
BE
277
191
BF

..
0

GL GR
4 12

GL GR
3 11

0 1 1 1

GL GR
2 10

COLUMN

B4B3B2Bl

A
B

c
D
E

G
H
l

K
L
M

100
64
40
101
S5
41
102
SS
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
59
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
1.12
74
4A
113
7S
48
114
7S
4C
11S
77
40
11S
78
4E
117
79
4F

300
192

cs
307
199
C7
310
200

cs
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204

cc
315
20S
CD
31S
206
CE
317
207
CF

.
1

p
Q

s
T

u
v

w
x
y

A
<;

0
A

120
80
50
121
Bl
51
122
S2
S2
123
B3
53
124
B4
54
125
S5
5S
12S
SS
SS
127
S7
S7
130
88
SS
131
S9
S9
132
90
SA
133
91
SB
134
92
SC
13S
93
SD
136
94
SE
137
9S
SF

320
208
DO
321
209
01
322
210
02
323
211
03
324
212
04
325
213
05
32S
214
OS
327
21S
07
330
21S
OS
331
217
09
332
21S
DA
333
219
DB
334
220
DC
33S
221
DD
336
222
DE
337
223
OF

GL GR
6 14

GL GR
5 13

co
301
193
Cl
302
194
C2
303
195
C3
304
19S
C4
305
197
C5
306
19S

'
a
b

c
d

e
f
g
h

140
9S
60
141
97
Sl
142
98
62
143
99
S3
144
100
64
14S
101
S5
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104

i
j

I
m
n
0

1Sl
105
69
1S2
106
6A
1S3
1D7
SB
1S4
108
6C
15S
109
60
15S
110
BE
157
111
BF

340
224
EO
341
22S
El
342
22S
E2
343
227
E3
344
22S
E4
345
229
E5
346
230
ES
347
231
E7
350
232
EB
3S1
233
E9
3S2
234
EA
353
23S
EB
3S4
236
EC
3SS
237
ED
356
238
EE
357
239
EF

GL GR
7 15
p
q
r

s
t

v
w
x
y

z
i
~

160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
11S
74
lSS
117
75
168
llS
76
167
119
77
170
120
7S
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
17S
125
70
17S
128
7E

360
240
FO
361
241
Fl
362
242
F2
363
243
F3
384
244
F4
365
245
F5
368
246
F6
367
247
F7
370
246
FB
371
249
F9
372
250
FA
373
251
FB
;174
252
FC
375
253
FD
378
254
FE

LEGEND _ _.,....c_,,..,E~
00

CHARACTER

-,._A

1~~

~~~

g~g~AL

HEX

•NOTE:
WHEN SET IS MAPPED INTO GR,
BIT BS IS 1.

DEC PORTUGUESE CHARACTER SET

MLQ--001469

Character Sets A-21

Appendix B

ANSI Text Translator Built-In Font
ldentif ication
B.1

Built-In Font File IDs
This appendix explains the values used in the font file IDs for the
font files built into the ANSI Text translator. In Table B-1, the Field
column lists the location of a value in an ANSI Text font file ID. Values
are base 36 values (0-9, A-Z).
The type family ID is field 1 (first 7 characters) of the 31-character font
file ID. The font ID is fields 1 through 7 (first 16 characters) of the
31-character font file ID.

B.2 Type Family Names
Type families built into the ANSI Text translator use the following
names:
Type Family

Name

Type Family ID (7 characters)

DEC Builtinl

DBULTNl
RCOURIR
RELITEO
DOOOOOO

Courier
Elite 12
Pi font

ANSI Text Translator Built-In Font Identification

B-1

The "D" in the type family ID for DEC BUILTINl indicates the name
is registered with DIGITAL, but is not registered internationally.
The "R" in the type family IDs for COURIER and ELITE 12 indicates
these names are registered internationally or are in the public domain.
Table B-1: Font File ID Fields
Bytes
Field
Field Name

Values

Meanings

1-7

Type family ID

Registered internationally
or in the public domain

Spacing

10 pitch
10.3 pitch
12 pitch
13.6 pitch
10 point
6.7 point
No scaling (1:1)

2
L
1
3

9-11

Type size

02S
OlV

Scale factor

5
6

13-14
15

Style
Weight

00
G

Normal
Regular

Proportion

Regular

17-18

Rotation

No rotation

19-21

Character set

OlU

ASCII

010

DEC Supplementalt

OlQ

DEC Technical

OlC

DEC Special Graphics

10
11

22-25

Character
File encoding

zzzz

26-27

Full character set subset
Binary

Resolution

300 bits/inch

Reserved

tDo not use a character set-ID field of 010 - formerly identified DEC Supplemental
and is now for user preference. To support old DEC Supplemental files, the translator
allows 010 and treats it as DEC Supplemental.

B-2 ANSI Text Translator Built-In Font Identification

B.3 Built-In Type Family Names and IDs, Font IDs, and Font
File IDs
Table B-2 lists type family names, type family IDs, font IDs, and font
file IDs built into the ANSI Text translator.
Each of the 16 font files contains a character set in a style, an orientation, at a point size, and a horizontal spacing. Table B-2 contains
32 entries. The translator knows each font under two names: an internationally registered or public domain name (Courier, Elite) and a
DIGITAL registered name (BUILTIN, PI). For example the following
are the same:
•
•

Courier ASCII, 10 point, 10 pitch, Portrait font - (RCOURIR J 028
K 00 G G 00 OlU ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0)
DEC BUILTINl ASCII, 10 point, 10 pitch, Portrait font (DBUILTNl J 028 K 00 G G 00 OlU ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0)

The type family ID is field 1 (first 7 characters) of the 31-character font
file ID. The font ID is fields 1 through 7 (first 16 characters) of the
31-character font file ID.
Table B-2:

Built-In Font File IDs

Type

Pitch Size

Character Set

Font File ID----------------------~.>
Font ID---~~~~:>

1. Type Family Name: DEC BUILTINl Type Family ID: DBULTNl

10
10
10.3

10
10
9.7

ASCII
DEC Supp.

10.3
12

9.7
8

12
13.6

ASCII
DEC Supp.

6.7

ASCII

DBULTNl L 02S K 00 G G 00 010 ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
DBULTNl 1 OlV K 00 G G 00 OlU ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

13.6

6.7

DEC Supp.

DBULTNl 1 OlV K 00 G G 00 010 ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

ASCII
DEC Supp.

DBULTNl J 02S K 00 G G 00 OlU ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
DBULTNl J 028 K 00 G G 00 010 ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
DBULTNl 2 02S K 00 G G 00 OlU ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
DBULTNl 2 02S K 00 G G 00 010 ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
DBULTNl L 028 K 00 G G 00 OlU ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

ANSI Text Translator Built-In Font Identification

8-3

Table B-2 (Cont.):

Built-In Font File IDs

Type
Pitch Size Character Set

Font File ID--------------~~------>
Font JDi------->

2. Type Family Name: COURIER Type Family ID: RCOURIR

10
10

ASCII
DEC Supp.

10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3

9.7
9.7
9.7

DEC Tech.
DEC Sp. Graphics
ASCII
DEC Supp.
DEC Tech.
DEC Sp. Graphics

13.6
13.6
13.6
13.6

6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7

ASCII
DEC Supp.
DEC Tech.
DEC Sp. Graphics

10
9.7

RCOURIR J 02S K 00 G G 00 OlU ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RCOURIR J 02S KOO G G 00 010 ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RCOURIR J 02S K 00 G G 00 OlQ ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RCOURIR J 02S K 00 'G G 00 OlC ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RCOURIR 2 02S K 00 G G 00 OlU ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RCOURIR 2 02S K 00 G G 00 010 ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RCOURIR 2 02S K 00 G G 00 OlQ ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RCOURIR 2 02S K 00 G G 00 OlC ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RCOURIR 1OlVK00 G G 00 OlU ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RCOURIR 1 OlV K 00 G G 00 010 ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RCOURIR 1OlVK00 G G 00 OlQ ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RCOURIR 1OlVK00 G G 00 OlC ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

S. Type Family Name: ELITE 12 Type Family ID: RELITEO

12
12

8
8

ASCII
DEC Supp.

RELITEO L 02S K 00 G G 00 OlU ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RELITEO L 02S K 00 G G 00 010 ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

12
12

DEC Tech.
DEC Sp. Graphics

RELITEO L 02S K 00 G G 00 OlQ ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0
RELITEO L 02S K 00 G G 00 OlC ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

B-4 ANSI Text Translator Built-In Font Identification

Table B-2 (Cont.): Built-In Font File IDs
Type
Pitch Size Character Set

Font File ID---~~~~~~~~~~~•>
Font ID-------:>

4. Type Family Name: Pl FONT Type Family ID: DOOOOOO
10

DEC Tech.

DOOOOOO J 02S K 00 G G 00 OlQ·zzzz 02 F 0 0 0

DEC Sp. Graphics

DOOOOOO J 02S K 00 G G 00 OlC zzzZ"o2 F 0 0 0

10.3

9.7

DEC Tech.

DOOOOOO 2 02S K 00 G G 00 OlQ ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

10.3

9.7

DEC Sp. Graphics

DOOOOOO 2 02S K 00 G G 00 OlC ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

DEC Tech.

DOOOOOO L 02S K 00 G G 00 OlQ ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

DEC Sp. Graphics

DOOOOOO L 02S K 00 G G 00 OlC ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

13.6

6.7

DEC Tech.

DOOOOOO 1OlVK00 G G 00 OlQ ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

13.6

6.7

DEC Sp. Graphics

DOOOOOO 1 OlV K 00 G G 00 OlC ZZZZ 02 F 0 0 0

NOTE

Spaces appear in the IDs for clarity and are not part of the
IDs.

ANSI Text Translator Built-In Font Identification

B-5

Appendix C

Printable Dot Patterns for Sixel Mode
Figure C-1 shows the printable dot patterns used for each character
code in the 3/15 (hexadecimal 3F) through 7/14 (hexadecimal 7E) range.
The translator subtracts 3F from the hexadecimal value of the received
code to create the dot pattern.
The "x" indicates that the pixel spot prints and "o" indicates that the
pixel spot does not print.

Printable Dot Patterns for Sixel Mode C-1

Figure C-1:

CHARACTER

Printable Dot Patterns for Sixels Mode

VALUE
OCTAL
077 100 101 102 103 104 10S 106 107 110 111 112 113 114 11 S 116
DECIMAL
63 64 6S 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 7S 76 77 78
HEXADECIMAL 3F 40 41 42 43 44 4S 46 47 48 49 4A 48 4C 4D 4E
DOT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PATTERNS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

CHARACTER

• • ••

0
0
0
0

• • • • • •
• • •• •• • • •• •• •• •• ••• •••

0
0
0
0

0
0
0

0
0

VALUE
OCTAL
137 140 141 142 143 144 14S 146 147 1SO 1S1 1S2 1S3 154 155 156
DECIMAL
95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
HEXADECIMAL SF 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 68 6C 60 6E
DOT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PATTERNS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

• • • • • •
•0 •0 •0• •0• 0• 0• 0•• 0•• •• •• ••• •••
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

CHARACTER

• • ••

0
0
0

0
0

0
0
0

w x

[

VALUE
OCTAL
177 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 130 131 132 133 134 135 136
DECIMAL
79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94
HEXADECIMAL 4F 50 S1 S2 S3 S4 SS S6 S7 sa S9 SA 58 SC SD SE
DOT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PATTERNS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

• • ••

• • • • • •
• •0 •• 0•• • • ••0 ••0 •• •• ••• •••
• 0• • 0• • 0• • 0• • 0• • •0 • • • •0

0
0

CHARACTER

0
0

{

}

VALUE
OCTAL
157 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 170 171 172 173 174 175 176
DECIMAL
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126
HEXADECIMAL 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 78 7C 7D 7E
DOT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PATTERNS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

• • ••
• • ••
• • ••
•
•
•
•• ••
•
•
•
0
0
0
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••
0

• • ••

0
0

ML0-001470

C-2 Printable Dot Patterns for Sixel Mode

Glossary

absolute motion A command that requires no knowledge of the active position

to correctly specify a new position.
Horizontal absolute motion commands are CR, HT, and HPA. Vertical
absolute motion commands are FF, VPA, and VT.
active position A point where the next character prints or the starting point

of a control function. The active position locates at the intersection of the
character baseline and the left side of the character bounding box.
Two elements compose the active position: the active horizontal position and the active vertical position.
autowrap mode All operating feature of the translator that lets you control

what happens to characters that exceed the right margin of the page.
A4 paper size The European paper size of 210mm x 297mm (or 8.26" x 11.69").
baselining The condition that occurs when characters align with the baseline

of its character cell on some reference point, such as the bottom margin.
bitmap An image in digitized form that can be stored, transmitted, and

reproduced precisely.
cache To store fonts in printer memory for future use. The· translator caches

fonts to minimize the physical transfer of fonts between the translator and
printer memory.

Glossary-1

centipoint A unit of measure equal to 117200 inch. One pixel equals 24

centipoints.
character attribute A feature of a highlighted character. You can select under-

lining, bold printing, italic printing, and strike-through attributes.
character cell An imaginary rect~gle used as a unit of spacing. The height

of a cell is equal to the current line spacing, and the width is equal to the
current character spacing.
character set A set of characters with a one-to-one relationship to a set of

codes. For example, a character set might contain the code for an uppercase
A or the number 1. Character sets do not describe the style of a printed
character. See Font.
cleared margins The condition that occurs when margins reset to the max-

imum printable area. Cleared margins occurring as a result of a control
sequence have have the following values:
Top Margin

1 (Origin)

Bottom Margin
Left Margin
Right Margin

Bottom printable limit
1 (Origin)
Right printable limit

client An agent (usually an operating system) that makes services and associ-

ated resources available to users of that system.
clotheslining The condition that occurs when characters align with the

top of their character cells on a reference point, such as page home line.
Characters of different sizes aligned this way resemble clothes hanging on a
line - hence the term "clotheslining."
command string A data record included in a device control string. Examples

are a type family identification or font identification.
control characters Characters that do not print, but cause the translator

to perform some action. For example, the HTS control character sets a
horizontal tab. There are two groups of control characters, CO and Cl.
control function A method of controlling how the translator processes char-

acters. Control functions include control characters, control strings, and
escape and control sequences.

2-Glossary

control sequence A control function consisting of two or more bytes beginning

with the Control Sequence Introducer (CSI) control character. Control
sequences usually include variable parameters.
CO (control 0) and C1 (control 1) codes CO codes represent 7-bit ASCII control

characters. Cl codes represent 8-bit control characters. To access Cl control
functions in a 7-:-bit environment, use the 7-bit equivalents from Table 2-12.
decipoint A unit of measure equal to 11720 inch.
DEC Multinational Character Set This 8-bit character set is the default set

when you call the translator. The left half of this set is the ASCII graphic
character set. The right half includes the DEC Supplemental graphic
character set.
device control string (DCS) A control function, consisting of three or more

bytes, beginning with the Device .Control String Introducer (DCS) control
character and ending with the String Terminator (ST) control character. The
format of the contents of a device control string includes a protocol selector
and a command string.
down-line load The process that sends fonts over a line to a target.
escape sequence A control function, consisting of two or more bytes, begin-

ning with the Escape (ESC) control character. Escape sequences do not
include variable parameters but may include intermediate characters.
Ethernet A local area network that employs coaxial cable as a passive commu-

nications medium in a carrier-sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) system to interconnect different types of computers, server products, and office equipment at a local business site. No switching logic or
central computer is needed.
first character flag Symbol that adjusts the active position by the height of

the printable character. When this flag is set, the next graphic character
(including SP) "clotheslines" from the current active position.
For example, a FF sets the active position to page home line on the
next page and sets the first character flag. When the next printable
character arrives, the active position adjusts the height of the character
above its baseline so that the top of the character cell is at the page
home line.

Glossary-3

The following control functions set the first character flag:
VPA

with PUM reset to character mode

VT
FF

regardless of the PUM setting
regardless of the PUM setting

Printable characters and relative positioning commands "clear" the first
character flag. Characters then "baseline" at the new active vertical
position.
flow control The protocol function that coordinates the flow of data between

two protocols to ensure that data is not lost. Flow control prevents a transmitting process from sending data to a receiving process that is not prepared
to receive and hold data, thus preventing deadlock, and minimizing communications overhead.
font The artistic representation of a typeface that describes some set of

characters rendered in a particular point size, weight, and style.
font attributes The seven characteristics of a font t~at define how printed

characters look when you use that font: type family, spacing, type size, scale
factor, typeset, character weight, and character proportion. These attributes
are not affected by the character set you use.
font file A data file that contains information used to reproduce a particular

font.
font file attributes A set of 12 characteristics for the font and character set in

a given font file. These include the seven font attributes plus the character
set images, rotation, character subset, file encodfug, and resolution.
font file ID A 31-character code that describes the character set and font

attributes for a given font file. Appendix B lists all standard type family,
font, and font file IDs for the ROM font files.
font ID A 16-character code (no lowercase letters) that describes the seven

basic font attributes (including type family) of the ROM fonts.
format bounds Page home line, page end line, line home position, and line end

position collectively. The format bounds lie inside or are equal to the limit
bounds. In most instances, the format bounds are equal to the limit bounds.
See PFS description for exceptions.
Characters attempting to exceed the format bounds wrap or truncate,
as in the case of a horizontal format boundary.
4-Glossary

Use the following vertical positioning commands to place characters
below page end line without causing a form feed: PLD, VPA, VPB,
VPR, and VT. PLU, RI, and VPB position above page home line. BS,
HPA, and HPB place characters to the left of line home position.
form length The vertical size of the printed area on a page. The maximum

form length depends on the origin point for page coordinates and the page
orientation.
GL (graphic left) and GR (graphic right) codes Two code tables in memory,

reserved for printable characters. You store the character sets you want to
use in GL and GR.
The translator uses the graphic left (GL) table in memory when the
character code format is 7-bit, or when the character code format is
8-bit and the graphic characters are in the 2/1 through 7/14 range.
The translator uses the graphic right (GR) table in memory when the
character code format is 8-bit and the graphic characters are in the
10/0 through 15/15 range.
hard margin A setting that defines the printing area on a page. The printer

cannot print outside a hard margin, except when drawing vectors or doing
justification.
horizontal margin The first printable position on a line. The right horizontal

margin specifies the last printable position on a line.
host A network node that performs services, for example, down-line loads, for

other nodes in the network.
image a~ea The printable part of a page. On most printers you cannot print to

the physical edge of the page.
initial values (for control functions) Values that the translator has perma-

nently stored for some escape sequences that control basic printing functions. The translator uses these initial values after you call the translator or
send a reset sequence in the data stream.
landscape printing A method of printing characters parallel to the long edge

of the paper.

Glossary-5

limit bounds Top, bottom, left, and right margins collectively. The area within
these bounds is the only area where characters print. See descriptions of
DECVEC, DECRVEC, PLD, and PLU for exceptions.

DECOPM (Origin Placement) affects the limit bounds.
The following functions can position characters outside the format
bounds: BS, HPA, HP.B, HPR, PLD, PLU, RI, VPA, VPB, VPR, and VT.
line end position The right edge of the printed page for justified text.
line home position Horizontal position to which CR moves the active position.
Usually line home· position is the same as the left margin. PFS can set it
slightly to the right of the left margin. Other control sequences, such as
HPA and HPB, move the active position to the left of line home position,
causing a CR to move to the right to reach line home position.
local node The node at which you are physically located.
network A group of computers that are connected to each other by communications lines to share information and resources.
node A network addressable component having a unique data link identification.
North American letter size Standard 8.5" x 11" paper size.
origin The starting point for printing on the page. You can select either. the
corner of the printable area or the corner of the physical page.
page end line Last line on which a character prints without causing a form
feed. This imaginary horizontal line runs across the baseline on the last
printable line on a page. Usually, page end line is the same as the bottom
margin. See the description of PFS for variations.
page home line Line to which FF moves the active position. This imaginary
horizontal line runs across the top of the first printable line on apage. Page
home line usually equals the top margin. See the description of PFS for
variations.

6-Glossary

parameter A character that modifies the action or interpretation of a control
sequence. All parameters are unsigned, positive decimal integers, with the
most significant digit sent first.

•
•

A numeric parameter indicates a numeric value, such as a tab or
margin location. In this manual, numeric parameters appear as
actual values or Pn, Pnl, Pn2, and so on.
A selective parameter selects an action associated with the specific
parameter value. In this manual, selective parameters appear as
Ps, Psl, Ps2, and so on.

pixel The smallest displayable picture on a screen. The printer prints pixels
as dots.
portrait printing A method of printing characters parallel to the short edge of
the paper. This is the normal page orientation for printing. For example,
this· page is printed in a portrait orientation.
printable area Area on the page where a printer can print characters with
acceptable print quality, independent of the current margin settings; the
entire page except for a 1/4" boundary on all four edges. For an 8.5" x 11"
paper, the printable area is 8" x 10.5". For A4 paper, it is 7.6" x 11.2". See
descriptions of PLD and PLU for exceptions.
printable characters Characters from position 2/0 through 7/14 in 7-bit character sets and from position 10/10 through 15/15 in 8-bit character sets.
printable limits Four imaginary lines, 1/4" from each side of the paper, whose
intersection forms the printable area.
protocol A basic procedure or set of rules that controls the communication
between computers. Also, a set of conventions between communicating
processes regarding the format and contents of messages to be exchanged.
received characters Printable characters and control functions that the
translator receives.from the host computer. The translator can process 7-bit
and 8-bit data.
relative motion Relative motion requires knowledge of the current active
position to execute correctly.

BS, HPB, and HPR are horizontal relative motion commands. LF, IND,
NEL, RI, VPB, and VPR are the vertical relative motion commands.

Glossary-7

reset sequence A control function that resets several translator operating
features to an initial state. There are two sequences you can use to reset the
translator (DECSTR, RIS).
resolution The number of dots in a defined area. The resolution of the translator is 300 dots/inch.
right margin flag Set by functions attempting to move the active position
outside the right margin.

Recovery from this error condition depends on the setting of autowrap
mode. If autowrap is set, the next printable character causes an automatic carriage return/line feed, which clears the flag. If autowrap is
reset, the translator waits for the execution of an HPA or CR command
to return the active position within the format bounds and to clear the
right margin flag.
Receipt of a NEL character also clears the right margin flag.
select graphic rendition (SGR) number A number you must assign to a font
file to make it available for translating and printing.
tab stop A preselected point to which the active position moves when you send
the printer a tab control character. The active position is where the next
character prints.
translator A stored program that changes the user's data syntax into a form
that can be used by the print server.
type family A group of fonts with a similar design, but differing in the six
other font attributes. For example, Courier is a type family used in the
translator.
type family ID· A 7-character code that identifies a type family. For example,
the following type family IDs are for the four standard type families used
with ROM-resident font files.
Type Family

Identification

Courier
Elite 12

RCOURIR

DEC Builtinl
Pi font

8--Glossary

RELITEO
DBULTNl
DOOOOOO

user The person who initiates request for services. These requests are handled
by a client who forwards them to the appropriate server.
vectors Lines drawn with length, width, and direction. Margins do not affect
line drawing. If you try to draw a line beyond the physical limits of the
page, the translator will translate the part of the line that occurs within the
page. The translator draws lines without modifying the active position.
vertical margin The top vertical margin specifies the first printable line on a
page.

The bottom vertical margin specifies the last printable line. These
margins are called hard margins, because you cannot print outside the
area defined by the margins.

Glossary-9

Index
A
Active column
functions supported by ANSI Text translator •
2-42
Active line
functions supported by ANSI Text translator•
2-42
Active position
ANSI Text translator• 2-19
sixels • 4-3, 4-6, 4-27
Tektronix 4010/4014 • 6-2
Advanced Character Cell Printer • 3-11
Alpha mode • 6-23
character size selection • 6-23
control characters • 6-25
margin processing • 6-24 to 6-25
Announce subset of code extension facilities
(ASCEF) command• 3-14
ANSI control strings
APC• 2-25
DCS• 2-24
OSC• 2-25
PM• 2-25
ANSI Text translator
built-in type family IDs• B-1
font file IDs• B-1
font IDs• B-1
page format • 2-48
performance hints• 2-47 to 2-50
Arcs
ReGIS Curve command• 5-78
Arguments
to ReGIS commands• 5-9

ASCEF (Announce subset of code extension
facilities) command• 3-14
ASCII code$
supported by the Tektronix 4010/4014 translator •
6-5 to 6-13
Assign type family or font (DECATFF) command •
3-21
Assign user-preference supplemental set
(DECAUPSS) command • 3-24
Automatic sheet feeder control/tray select
(DECASFC) command• 3-19
Autowrap mode (DECAWN) command • 3-26

B
Backspace (BS) character
ANSI Text• 3-1
Tektronix 4010/4014 • 6-14
Baselining • 2-43
Basic Character Cell Printer• 3-11
Bell (BEL) character• 6-14
Bypass condition • 6-23

c
Cancel (CAN) character• 3-2
Carriage return (CR) character
ANSI Text• 3-2
Tektronix 4010/4014 • 6-14
Carriage return/new line mode (DECCRNLM)
command • 3-30
Character alignment
ANSI Text translator• 2-43

lndex-1

Character attributes • 2-45
See also Highlighting characters
selecting • 2-45
Character coding
ANSI Text translator• 2-14
sixel graphics • 4-26
Character sets
ANSI Text • 2-27
selecting • 2-30 to 2-35
supported by ANSI Text translator• A-1 to A-21
Circles
ReGIS Curve command • 5-78
Clear all horizontal tabs (DECCAHT) command •
3-28
Clear all vertical tabs (DECCAVT) command• 3-29
Clotheslining• 2-19, 2-43
Code tables
ASCII• 2-16
Standard 8-bit • 2-15 to 2-16
Coding sixels
8-bit bytes • 4-3
Control characters
ANSI Text• 2-20 to 2-22, 3-1 to 3-10
equivalent 7-bit and 8-bit • 2-20
Control characters, control sequences, and future
devices • 2-55
Control functions
ANSI Text• 3-10 to 3-124
Control representation mode (CRM) command •
3-16
Control sequence introducer (CSI) character • 3-6
Control sequences
ANSI Text• 2-22
format • 2-23
Control strings
ANSI Text• 2-22
CRM (control representation mode) command• 3-16
Cursor up (CUU) command• 3-18
CUU (cursor up) command• 3-18

D
DECASFC (automatic sheet feeder controVtray
select) command • 3-19
DECATFF (assign type family or font) command •
3-21

2-lndex

DECAUPSS (Assign user-preference supplemental
set) command • 3-24
DECAUPSS (Assign user-preference supplemental
set) DCS • 2-34
DECAWN (autowrap mode) command • 3-26
DECCAHT (clear all horizontal tabs) command•
3-28
DECCAVT (clear all vertical tabs) command•. 3-29
DECCRNLM (carriage return/new line mode)
command • 3-30
DECDTFF (delete type family or font file) command•
3-31
DECHTS (horizontal tab set) command • 3-33
DECOPM (origin placement mode) command• 3-37
DECPSM (pitch mode select) command • 3-39
DECPSP (proportional spacing) command • 3-40
DECRVEC (draw relative vector) command• 3-41
DECSHORP (set horizontal pitch) command • 3-44
DECSHTS (set horizontal tab stops) command•
3-46
error handling • 2-51
DECSLPP (set lines per page) command• 3-48
error handling • 2-52
DECSLRM (set left and right margins) command•
3-50
error handling • 2-52
DECSTBM (set top and bottom margins) command
error handling • 2-52
DECSTR (soft terminal reset) command • 3-56
DECSVTS (set vertical tab stops) command• 3-57
error handling • 2-52
DECVEC (draw vector) command• 3-59
error handling • 2-53
DECVERP (set vertical pitch) command • 3-61
DECVPFS (variable page format select) command •
3-63
DECVTS (vertical tab set) command• ·3-71
Default settings
ANSI text translator
for PrintServers • 8-5
ScriptPrinters • 7-3
Delete (DEL) character
ANSI Text• 3-2
Delete type family or font file (DECDTFF) command •
3-31
Device control string (DCS) character • 3-6

Device control strings
format • 2-24
Device levels, 1, 2, and 3 • 3-11
Down-loaded font capacity
PrintServers • 8-2
ScriptPrinters • 7-1
Drawing Lines
Draw Relative Vector (DECRVEC) • 3-41
Draw relative vector (DECRVEC) command• 3-41
Draw vector (DECVEC) command • 3-59

E
Error handling - ANSI • 2-51 to 2-53
Escape (ESC) character
ANSI Text• 3-3
Tektronix 4010/4014 • 6-15
Escape sequences
ANSI Text• 2-22
format • 2-22
Tektronix 4010/4014
set bypass and mode sequences • 6-17
Tektronix 4010/4014 translator• 6-16 to 6-20
delete character • 6-19
ignored sequences • 6-20
miscellaneous sequences • 6-19
prevent response to CR and LF • 6-18
select alpha character size • 6-17
select vector patterns • 6-18
set LCE flag• 6-19

F
Family IDs• B-1
File separator (FS)
Tektronix 4010/4014 translator• 6-15
First character flag • 2-43
Font file • 2-27
format • 2-49
IDs• B-1
Fonts• 2-27
attributes • 2-29 to 2-30
character scaling • 2-49
DLL in LN03R ScriptPrinter • 7-1
DLL in PrintServers • 8-2
functions supported by ANSI Text translator •
2-36

Fonts (cont'd.)
IDs• 8-1
loading, assigning, and selecting • 2-35
Format bounds • 2-39
Formats
A3 dimensions • 3-70
AS dimensions • 3-68
84 dimensions • 3-69
85 dimerisions • 3-67
executive-size dimensions • 3-66
Form feed (FF) character
ANSI Text • 3-3
Form length • 2-40
Forms• 2-14

G
Graphic character sets
See also Character sets
selecting • 2-30 to 2-35
Graphic left (GL) and graphic right (GR) tables •
2-30
Graphic size modification (GSM) command • 3-72
error handling • 2-53
Graphic size selection (GSS) command
error handling • 2-53
Graph mode• 6-26
drawing commands • 6-27
encoding coordinates • 6-28
extra byte and high resolution • 6-29
line patterns • 6-26
line width • 6-27
Group separator (GS)
Tektronix 4010/4014 translator• 6-15
GSM (graphic size modification) command• 3-72
GSS (Graphic size selection) command • 3-74

H
Highlighting characters • 2-45
balding • 3-109
italic printing • 3-110
strike-through printing• 3-110
underlining, overlining • 3-108
HLS (hue/lightness/saturation) color specifier system

• 5-22

lndex-3

Horizontal pitch
See Pitch
Horizontal position absolute (HPA) command• 3-76
error handling • 2-52
Horizontal position backward (HPB) command• 3-78
Horizontal position relative (HPR) command • 3-80
Horizontal tab (HT)
Tektronix 4010/4014 • 6-14
Horizontal tab (HT) character
ANSI Text• 3-3
Horizontal tab (HT) control
error handling • 2-51
Horizontal tab set (DECHTS) command • 3-33
Horizontal tab set (HTS) character• 3-7
HPA (horizontal position absolute) command • 3-76
HPB (horizontal position backward) command • 3-78
HPR (horizontal position relative) command• 3-80

IDs
built-in type family • B-1
font file • B-1
fonts• B-1
Incremental plot mode • 6-30
Index (IND) character• 3-7
Initial state values
ANSI Text translator• 2-2 to 2-13, 7-3
. SGR numbers • 2-4, 3-23

Load font file (DECLFF) command • 3-34
Locking-shift (LS) control functions • 2-34, 3-87 to
3-91
Logical page size • 2-37, 3-65
LS1 R (locking shift 1 right) command • 3-89
LS2 (locking shift 2) command • 3-87
LS2R (locking shift 2 right) command • 3-90
LS3 (locking shift 3) command • 3-88
LS3R (locking shift 3 right) command • 3-91

M
Margin functions
supported by ANSI Text translator • 2-40
Margins
reset by DECSHORP • 3-52
Margins, setting
right and left • 3-50
top and bottom • 3-53
Miscellaneous escape and control functions
supported by the ANSI translator• 2-47

N
Next line (NEL) character• 3-7
Null (NUL) character• 3-4

Origin placement mode (DECOPM) command • 3-37
Overline attribute • 3-108

JFY Oustify) command • 3-82
Justify (JFY) command • 3-82

Page format
ANSI Text translator• 2-48
LN03R ScriptPrinter orientation • 7-4
PrintServer orientation• 8-7
standard format measurements • 3-94 to 3-99
Page format select (PFS) command • 3-92
Partial line down (PLO) character • 3-8
Partial line up (PLU) character • 3-8
Pattern
in ReGIS • 5-40
PFS (page format select) command • 3-92
Physical page size• 2-37, 3-65

Limit bounds • 2-39
Line feed (LF) character
ANSI Text• 3-4
Tektronix 4010/4014 • 6-14
Line feed new line mode (LNM) command • 3-86
LN03
compared to ANSI Text translator• 2-53 to
2-55
LN03R ScriptPrinter (V2.0) • 7-1 to 7-6
LNM (line feed new line mode) command• 3-86

4-lndex

Pitch
horizontal
with DECPSM and DECSHORP sequences•
3-4,3-39, 3-44
with SHS sequence• 3-111
with SPI sequence• 3-113
vertical
with DECVERP sequence • 3-61
with SPI sequence• 3-113
with SVS sequence• 3-116
Pitch mode select (DECPSM) command • 3-39
Pixel aspect ratio • 4-2, 4-12, 4-19
Pixel vector
definition • 5-4
multiplier • 5-5
Point plot mode • 6-29
Positioning unit mode (PUM) command• 3-100
Printable characters
ANSI Text• 2-19
Print command
LN03R ScriptPrinter • 7-2
PrintServers • 8-2
Printing ANSI files
on LN03R ScriptPrinter • 7-3
on PrintServers • 8-4
Printing area
ANSI Text translator• 2-37
Printing graphics characters
ANSI Text • 2-27
Printing orientation • 2-37
Printing ReG IS files
on LN03R ScriptPrinter • 7-6
on PrintServers • 8-8
Printing Sixel files • 4-1
on LN03R ScriptPrinter • 7-3
on PrintServers • 8-4
Printing Tektronix 401 0/4014 files • 6-1
on PrintServers • 8-9
on the LN03R ScriptPrinter • 7-6
PrintServer 40 (V3.0)
new features • 8-1
PrintServers • 8-1 to 8-9
down-loaded font capacity • 8-2
printing ANSl/Sixel files • 8-4
Proportional Spaced and Character Cell Printer •
3-11
Proportional spacing (DECPSP) command • 3-40

PUM (positioning unit mode) command• 3-100
PV
See Pixel vector

Q
Quoted strings
ReGIS • 5-10

R
Raster aspect ratio • 4-2
Record separator (RS)
Tektronix 4010/4014 translator• 6-15
ReGIS
arcs• 5-82
arguments • 5-9
punctuation with • 5-9
binary patterns • 5-43
bracketed extents • 5-1 O
circles • 5-78, 5-80
command keyletters • 5-9
control characters • 5-14
conventions
used in ReGIS examples• 5-17
coordinate system • 5-2
Curve command• 5-78
summary • 5-95
data
characters used • 5-7
description • 5-7
uppercase and lowercase • 5-7
default values • 5-15
definition • 5-1
digit strings in ReG IS • 5-11
display structure • 5-2
high-level languages • 5-2
Load command • 5-131
summary• 5-135
logical coordinate system • 5-2
macrograph facility • 5-136
monochrome values • 5-23
multiple shading reference line • 5-61
options
order of processing • 5-11
pattern • 5-40
binary • 5-44

lndex-5

ReGIS
pattern (cont'd.)
multiplication • 5-45
negative• 5-47
standard • 5-41
pixel vector • 5-4
digit strings • 5-11
multiplier • 5-5
positioning • 5-27
Polygon fill command • 5-97
summary• 5-106
Position command • 5-25
summary• 5-32
punctuation • 5-13
quoted strings • 5-1 O
Screen command
background intensity option • 5-21
display addressing argument • 5-19
output mapping option • 5-22
screen erase option • 5-23
summary• 5-24
shading character select • 5-59
shading reference line select • 5-54
specify standard patterns • 5-40
synchronization character • 5-13
Text command • 5-107
summary• 5-129
translator
environment • 5-141
using• 5-1
with LN03R ScriptPrinter • 7-6
with PrintServers • 8-8
unsupported commands • 5-140
Vector command • 5-66
arguments • 5-66
specifying position • 5-67
summary • 5-77
Write control command
erase writing • 5-35
line width select • 5-39
shading control option • 5-49
specify binary pattern • 5-43
standard patterns • 5-40
summary • 5-64
Write Control command • 5-33
ReG IS-to-PosrSCRIPT translator
font• 5-142
HLS color specifier system • 5-22

6-lndex

ReGIS-to-PosrScRIPT translator (cont'd.)
line width • 5-142
output map • 5-22, 5-142
page output • 5-141
RGB color specifier system • 5-21
using• 5-1
with LN03R ScriptPrinter • 7-6
ReGIS-to-PosTSCRIPT translator>with PrintServers •

8-8
Resetting the translator
See reset to initial state (RIS) and DECSTR (soft
terminal reset)
Reset to initial state (RIS) command• 3-102
Restrictions
Sixel graphics • 4-29
Tektronix 4010/4014 translator• 6-34
RGB color specifier system • 5-21
Right margin flag • 2-43
RIS (reset to initial state) command• 3-102

s
SCS (select character set) command• 3-103
Select character set (SCS) command • 3-103
Select graphic rendition (SGR)
highlighting characters with • 2-45, 3-108 to
3-110
selecting a font with • 3-1 07
Select graphic rendition (SGR) command• 3-106
Select horizontal spacing (SHS) command• 3-111
Selecting a filter
PrintServers • 8-3
Selecting a translator
LN03R ScriptPrinter • 7-2
PrintServers • 8-2
Select size unit (SSU) command • 3-114
error handling • 2-53
Select vertical spacing
See also Pitch
Select vertical spacing (SVS) command • 3-116
Set/reset modes • 2-46
supported by ANSI Text translator • 2-46
Set horizontal pitch (DECSHORP) command • 3-44
Set horizontal tab stops (DECSHTS) command •
3-46
Set left and right margins (DECSLRM) command •
3-50

Set lines per page (DECSLPP) command • 3-48
Set top and bottom margins (DECSTBM) command •
3-53
/SETUP
with queue initialization • 2-14
with the print command • 2-14
Setup modules and forms• 2-14
Set vertical pitch (DECVERP) command • 3-61
Set vertical tab stops (DECSVTS) command • 3-57
SGR (select graphic rendition) command• 3-106
Shift in (SI) character• 3-4
Shift out (SO) character • 3-4
SHS (select horizontal spacing) command• 3-111
Single-shift (SS) control function • 2-35
Single-shift controls • 3-9
Sixel control codes • 4-3, 4-17 to 4-26
color introducer • 4-23
graphics carriage return (DECGCR) • 4-21
graphics next line (DECGNL) • 4-22
repeat introducer (DECGRI) • 4-20
set raster attributes (DECGRA) • 4-18
Sixel data
coding of• 4-13 to 4-14
decoding• 4-16
hexadecimal representation • 4-4
Sixel DCS (device control string)• 4-7 to 4-10
macro parameters (Ps1) • 4-12
picture definition • 4-2, 4-13
protocol selector • 4-11
Sixel graphics
character coding • 4-26
compatibility with LN03, LN03 PLUS • 4-27 to
4-29
interaction with ANSI Text • 4-27
protocol structure • 4-11
terminology • 4-1 to 4-3
translation and printing • 4-6
Sixel mode
dot patterns • 4-15
selecting• 4-7 to 4-10
Soft terminal reset (DECSTR) command • 3-56
Space (SP) character • 3-5
Spacing
functions supported by ANSI Text translator•
2-36
Spacing pitch increment (SPI)
See Pitch

Spacing pitch increment (SPI) command • 3-112
SPI (spacing pitch increment) command• 3-112
SSU (select size unit) command • 3-.-114
String terminator (ST) • 3-9
Substitute (SUB) character • 3-5
SVS (select vertical spacing) command• 3-116

T
Tab functions
supported by ANSI Text translator• 2-44
Tabs
clearing (TBC) • 3-118
horizontal (DECSHTS) • 3-46
vertical (DECSVTS) • 3-57
Tabulation clear (TBC) command • 3-118
TBC (tabulation clear) command • 3-118
Tektronix 4010/4014 translator
addressing limits • 6-3
communications • 6-5
compatibility with VT240, LN01 S, LN03 PLUS •
6-31
control characters • 6-14 to 6-16
operating modes • 6-2
alpha mode • 6-23
bypass condition • 6-23
changing • a-21
graph mode • 6-26
incremental plot mode • 6-30
point plot mode • 6-29
physical page mapping • 6-3
strap options • 6-5
Terminal-management sequences
supported by the ANSI Text translator • 2-13
Troubleshooting
ANSI Text translator• 2-47

u
ULTRIX
print da:Jmon with data_type option • 8-3
selecting a filter with PrintServers • 8-3
Underline attributes • 3-108
Unit separator (US)
Tektronix 4010/4014 translator • 6-15

lndex-7

v
Variable page format select (DECVPFS) command •
3-63
Vertical position absolute {VPA) command • 3-119
Vertical position backward {VPB) command • 3-121
Vertical position relative (VPR) command• 3-123
Vertical tab (VT)
Tektronix 4010/4014 • 6-14

8-lndex

Vertical tab {VT) character
ANSI Text • 3-5
Vertical tab {VT) control·
error handling• 2-51
Vertical tab set {DECVTS) command • 3-71
Vertical tab set (VTS) character • 3-1 o
VPA (Vertical position absolute) command• 3-119
VPB {vertical position backward) command • 3-121
VPR {vertical position relative) command• 3-123

HOW TO ORDER ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION
From

Call

Write

Alaska, Hawaii,
or New Hampshire

603--884-6660

Digital Equipment Corporation
P.O. Box CS2008
Nashua, NH 03061

Rest of U.S.A.
and Puerto Rico*

1-800-DIGITAL

*Prepaid orders from Puerto Rico, call DIGITAL's local subsidiary (809-754-7575)

Canada

800-267-6219
(for software
documentation)

Digital Equipment of Canada Ltd.
100 Herzberg Road
Kanata, Ontario, Canada K2K 2A6
Attn: Direct Order desk

613-592-5111
(for hardware
documentation)

Internal orders
(for software
documentation)
Internal orders
(for hardware
documentation)

Software Distribution Center (SDC)
Digital Equipment Corporation
Westminster, MA 01473
DTN: 234-4323
508-351-4323

Publishing & Circulation Serv. (P&CS)
NR03-1/W3
Digital Equipment Corporation
Northboro, MA 01532

Reader's Comments

PoSTScR1PT Translators Reference Manual

AA-NF47A-TE

Your comments and suggestions will help us improve the quality of our future documentation. Please note that this form is for comments on documentation only.

I rate this manual's:
Accuracy (product works as described)
Completeness (enough information)
Clarity (easy to understand)
Organization (structure of subject matter)
Figures (useful)
Examples (useful)
Index; (ability to find topic)
Page layout (easy to find information)

Excellent

Good

Fair

Poor

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

What I like best about this manual:
What I like least about this manual:
lMy additional comments or suggestions for improving this manual:

I found the following errors in this manual:
Page
Description

Please indicate the type of user/reader that you most nearly represent:
D Administrative Support
D Computer Operator
D Educatorf.rrainer
D Programmer/Analyst
D Sales
Nametritle
Company

D Scientist/Engineer
D Software Support
D System Manager
D Other (please specify)
Dept.
Date

Mailing Address
Phone
10/87

Do Not Tear -

Fold Here and Tape

- - - - - -

- - -

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
INTHE
UNITED STATES

I
I

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT N0.33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
CORPORATE USER PUBLICATIONS
MLOS-5/E45
146 MAIN STREET
MAYNARD, MA 01754-2571

111111111 II I111 I1I1I11I11 II 1I11I1I11I1 I11 II 1111II11 I
Do Not Tear -

Fold Here

I
-I